Professional Documents
Culture Documents
User's Guide
October 2014
DICAS-PE-200104E
Copyright
Copyright 1985-2014 Intergraph CAS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Intergraph is part of Hexagon.
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains
confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and
international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from Intergraph Corporation.
Contains RealDWG by Autodesk, Inc. Copyright 1998-2013 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved.
Documentation
Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form, User's Guides, Installation Guides, Reference Guides,
Administrator's Guides, Customization Guides, Programmer's Guides, Configuration Guides and Help Guides delivered with a
particular software product.
Other Documentation
Other Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form and delivered with software or on Intergraph Smart Support,
SharePoint, or box.net, any documentation related to work processes, workflows, and best practices that is provided by Intergraph
as guidance for using a software product.
Terms of Use
a. Use of a software product and Documentation is subject to the End User License Agreement ("EULA") delivered with the
software product unless the Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the
Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take
precedence and govern the use of this software product and Documentation. Subject to the terms contained within the
applicable license agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the
Documentation as defined in the applicable license agreement and delivered with the software product for Licensee's internal,
non-commercial use. The Documentation may not be printed for resale or redistribution.
b. For use of Documentation or Other Documentation where end user does not receive a EULA or does not have a valid license
agreement with Intergraph, Intergraph grants the Licensee a non-exclusive license to use the Documentation or Other
Documentation for Licensees internal non-commercial use. Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a
reasonable number of copies of Other Documentation for Licensees internal, non-commercial. The Other Documentation may
not be printed for resale or redistribution. This license contained in this subsection b) may be terminated at any time and for any
reason by Intergraph Corporation by giving written notice to Licensee.
Disclaimer of Warranties
Except for any express warranties as may be stated in the EULA or separate license or separate terms and conditions, Intergraph
Corporation disclaims any and all express or implied warranties including, but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness for a particular purpose and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed
a modification or amendment of such disclaimer. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its
publication date.
The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable
technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.
The software, Documentation and Other Documentation discussed in this document are furnished under a license and may be used
or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL
EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.
Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data.
Users should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.
Export Controls
Intergraph Corporations software products and any third-party Software Products obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its
subsidiaries, or distributors (including any Documentation, Other Documentation or technical data related to these products) are
subject to the export control laws and regulations of the United States. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited. These Software
Products, and the direct product thereof, must not be exported or re-exported, directly or indirectly (including via remote access)
under the following circumstances:
a. To Cuba, Iran, North Korea, Sudan, or Syria, or any national of these countries.
b. To any person or entity listed on any U.S. government denial list, including but not limited to, the U.S. Department of Commerce
Denied Persons, Entities, and Unverified Lists, http://www.bis.doc.gov/complianceandenforcement/liststocheck.htm, the U.S.
Department of Treasury Specially Designated Nationals List, http://www.treas.gov/offices/enforcement/ofac/, and the U.S.
Department of State Debarred List, http://www.pmddtc.state.gov/compliance/debar.html.
c. To any entity when Licensee knows, or has reason to know, the end use of the Software Product is related to the design,
development, production, or use of missiles, chemical, biological, or nuclear weapons, or other un-safeguarded or sensitive
nuclear uses.
d. To any entity when Licensee knows, or has reason to know, that an illegal reshipment will take place.
Any questions regarding export or re-export of these Software Products should be addressed to Intergraph Corporations Export
Compliance Department, Huntsville, Alabama 35894, USA.
Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, Intergraph Smart, PDS, SmartPlant, SmartMarine, FrameWorks, I-Sketch, IntelliShip, ISOGEN,
SmartSketch, SPOOLGEN, SupportManager, and SupportModeler are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intergraph
Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation. MicroStation is a registered trademark of Bentley Systems, Inc. Other brands and product names are
trademarks of their respective owners.
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 23
About the CAESAR II Documentation .................................................................................................. 24
Software Support/User Assistance ....................................................................................................... 24
Software Revision Procedures.............................................................................................................. 25
Updates and License Types ................................................................................................................. 27
Enhanced the Distance command to measure between two points in the 3D model without
requiring the input of node numbers.
Added a new Global menu in piping input, which includes the Block commands. These
commands are also accessible through the Block Operations toolbar and the right-click
context menu from the List>Elements dialog box.
Enhanced the Structural Steel Wizard to display units for various input fields, added more
tool bar icons and enhanced input grid usability.
Addressed graphics issues.
Interoperability
Added the ability to import multiple supports at the same location from the Import PCF or
Intergraph Smart 3D PCF interfaces.
Enhanced the hanger table for support design with LISEGAs LICAD software in the Data
Export Wizard (Export to MS Access)
Post-Processing
Added output filters for flanges so that you can identify the most overstressed flanges.
Updated the software to show the actual Stress Indices (I) that are used for sustained and
occasional static load cases for ASME B31.3 code.
Updated the Generate Stress Isometrics (CAESAR II Isogen module) with I-Configure
2014 (5.0).
Documentation/Help
Updated the Quick Reference Guide with dates and information for all piping code updates
made in CAESAR II 2014.
Updated the F1 help in the Static Output Processor.
Technical Changes
The following technical changes were made for this release, which may affect the numeric
results:
Added a new equation for calculating expansion stress cases with new SIF and index values
to support the 2012 Edition of the ASME B31.3 code.
Addressed bend pressure stiffening and changed the longitudinal pressure stress equation,
among other revisions to support the 2012 Edition of the EN 13480 code.
Updated the minimum wall thickness equation for ASME B31.8 Chapter VIII to consider the
longitudinal joint efficiency (using Eff input box).
Updated the ASME B31.8 code interpretation to use either of the two combined biaxial
stress equations for restrained pipe, as referred to in Paragraph 833.4, instead of using the
maximum of the two. You can specify this using the Yield Stress Criterion configuration
setting in the SIFs and Stresses section of the Configuration Editor.
Revised the calculations for SIFs in non-corroded conditions when the CODETI piping code
is selected, based on clarification from French Code Committee.
Revised the Static Analysis (Load Case Editor) to automatically recommend Expansion
(EXP) stress range load cases for better coverage of multiple operating conditions.
Provided an option for users to select the allowable corresponding to temperature for that
particular Occasional (OCC) load case for B31.3 jobs.
Added support for in-line flange check evaluations for MAX and ABS load case
combinations.
Resolved an issue in Structural Input where the software did not process UNIF values as
gravitational multipliers (G loads) after you added the GLOAD command into the input
stream. The software uses the gravitational multiplier (G load) value for all UNIF values
when you add the GLOAD command into the input stream.
Introduction
CAESAR II is a PC-based pipe stress analysis software package that is developed, marketed
and sold by Intergraph CAS. This software is an engineering tool used in the mechanical design
and analysis of piping systems. Use CAESAR II to create a model of the piping system
represented by simple 3D beam elements and to define the loading conditions imposed on the
system.
With this input, CAESAR II produces results in the form of displacements, loads, and stresses
throughout the system. Additionally, CAESAR II compares these results to limits specified by
recognized codes and standards.
In This Section
About the CAESAR II Documentation ........................................... 24
Software Support/User Assistance ................................................ 24
Software Revision Procedures ...................................................... 25
Updates and License Types .......................................................... 27
information is typically what is needed to resolve technical support issues. To use this option,
click Help > Email CAESAR II Support.
This command starts the default e-mail client and populates an e-mail with the default
information.
The e-mail is addressed to Technical Support and contains all the information relevant to your
CAESAR II installation. Type the problem description at the Type Message Here prompt and
attach any necessary files.
You can contact Intergraph CAS Technical Support or Sales:
ICAS Dealer Support (http://www.coade.com/Support/Dealers.shtml ) or ICAS General
Support (http://support.intergraph.com/Default.asp)
Technical Support E-mail: ppmcrm@Intergraph.com
Phone: 1-800-766-7701 (CAESAR II Direct), 280-890-4566 (General)
Fax: 281-890-3301
Sales E-mail: sales.icas@intergraph.com
Knowledge-based Articles/Tutorials (US and Canada only):
https://smartsupport.intergraph.com (https://smartsupport.intergraph.com)
Identifying Builds
When posted on the web site, builds are identified with the program identifier and the date the
build was generated, as in C2YYY-YYMMDD.exe.
Obtaining Builds
Builds are available for download at our website (http://www.coade.com) and are arranged in
sub-folders by program. Each file contained in the folder includes a description , its size, and the
creation date.
Installing Builds
Builds distributed for Windows-based applications use a Windows installation procedure with a
standard SETUP.EXE program to actually install the build. This procedure ensures that the
necessary files are registered with the system and that the uninstall utility can perform its task.
Detecting/Checking Builds
When a build is ready to be released, Help > About CAESAR II is revised to reflect the build
level. To see which program modules have been modified, you can run an Intergraph CAS utility
program from within the program folder.
Diagnostics > Build Version scans each of the .EXE modules in the program folder and lists
the size, memory requirements, and build level for each file. A sample display from this utility is
shown below.
To reinstall an older version of the software, first install the software from the Intergraph CAS
CDs. Then, install the latest build. Each build includes the modifications made in all prior builds.
Getting Started
This section explains the CAESAR II basic operation, and steps you through a quick static
piping analysis.
The main steps required to perform a static analysis are:
1. Starting CAESAR II (on page 29)
2. Create a new job (on page 30)
3. Piping Input generation (on page 31)
4. Model Error Checking (on page 34)
5. Building Load Cases (on page 35)
6. Run a static analysis (on page 36)
7. Static Output Review (on page 36)
A complete tutorial is provided in the CAESAR II Applications Guide.
In This Section
Starting CAESAR II ........................................................................ 29
Understanding Jobs ....................................................................... 30
Basic Operation ............................................................................. 30
Main Menu ..................................................................................... 37
Starting CAESAR II
1. Click Start > All Programs > Intergraph CAS > CAESAR II > CAESAR II. You may
also have a CAESAR II icon on your desktop that you can use to start CAESAR II.
The main CAESAR II window displays.
This window contains the main menu and toolbar from which you select jobs and analysis
types, start analysis, and review output.
Understanding Jobs
All CAESAR II analyses require a job name for identification purposes. All subsequent input,
analysis, or output reviews reference the job specified. You create a new job by selecting File >
New or by clicking New on the main toolbar. You open an existing job by selecting File >
Open or by clicking Open on the main toolbar.
After you have created or opened a job, the job name displays in the title bar of the main
CAESAR II window. Use the commands on the Input, Analysis, and Output menus to define,
analyze, and review your data.
Basic Operation
To help you get familiar with CAESAR II, we will step through a basic piping analysis.
Topics
Create a new job ............................................................................ 30
Piping Input generation .................................................................. 31
Model Error Checking .................................................................... 34
Building Load Cases ...................................................................... 35
Run a static analysis ...................................................................... 36
Static Output Review ..................................................................... 36
You can put your job file in another folder if you want, just remember where and
substitute that folder for C:\temp\CAESAR II when needed.
6. Click OK.
The job is created and the job name displays in the main window title bar.
8. In the first Node box, type 10, and then select ANC from the first Type drop list.
The piping input preprocessor has an interactive graphics and a list view function to make model
editing and verification easier. You can verify your model using the Graphics or List utilities,
although a combination of both modes is recommended. By default, the graphics screen
displays to the right of the input spreadsheet. You can click the small pin in the upper-left corner
to collapse the input spreadsheet to provide maximum graphic space.
When you double-click an error or warning message, CAESAR II displays the spreadsheet of
the associated element and highlights the element in the graphic display. You can sort error
messages by clicking the column titles. Use File > Print to print the entire error report or
selected sections. Use the options arrow on the Error Check icon to display only fatal errors or
all errors.
If there is a fatal error, you must return to the input module to make corrections. Click the
Classic Piping Input tab or double-click the row number for the error message.
If the error check process completes without fatal errors, a center of gravity report displays, the
analysis data files are generated, and the solution phase can commence. If fatal errors do exist,
the analysis data files are not generated and the solution phase cannot begin. You must make
corrections and rerun the Error Checker until successful before analysis is permitted.
1. From the Piping Input window, select Edit > Edit Static Load Cases .
The Static Analysis dialog box displays.
2. You can build loads two ways:
Combine the load components defined in the input (weight, displacements, thermal
cases, and so forth) into load cases (basic cases), or
Combine pre-existing load cases into new load cases (combination cases).
3. Build the basic cases by selecting one or more load components in the Loads Defined in
Input list and then dragging and dropping them to the Load Cases list to the right. You can
also type on any of the individual load case lines. Stress types (indicating which code
equations should be used to calculate and check the stresses) are selected from the Stress
Type list.
Combination cases, if needed, must follow the basic cases. You can build combination
cases by selecting one or more load components and the dragging and dropping the basic
load cases from earlier in the load case list to combine cases (or blank load cases) later in
the list.
You can have a maximum of 999 static load cases. For more information, see Static
Analysis Dialog Box (on page 534).
Main Menu
After starting CAESAR II, the main menu and toolbar appear. Keep this window as small as
possible to conserve screen space.
Topics
File Menu ....................................................................................... 37
Input Menu ..................................................................................... 40
Analysis Menu ............................................................................... 40
Output Menu .................................................................................. 41
Language Menu ............................................................................. 41
Tools Menu .................................................................................... 42
Diagnostics Menu .......................................................................... 42
ESL Menu ...................................................................................... 43
View Menu ..................................................................................... 43
Help Menu...................................................................................... 43
File Menu
The File menu is used to create and save piping and structural jobs.
Topics
Set Default Data Directory ............................................................. 38
New ................................................................................................ 38
Open .............................................................................................. 39
The data directory specification is very important because any configuration, units, or
other data files found in that directory are considered to be local to that job.
New
Starts a new piping or structural job. Click File > New on the main menu to activate the New
Job Name Specification dialog box.
Open
Opens an existing piping or structural job. Click File > Open on the main menu to activate
the Open dialog box. Use the Open dialog box to browse to and select the job file to open. Click
System to jump to the CAESAR II system folder. Click Example to jump to the CAESAR II
delivered example jobs folder.
You can also roll-back to a previous revision of a piping input job using the Open dialog box.
CAESAR II saves the last 25 revisions, deleting the oldest revision when necessary.
1. Click File > Open.
2. Browse to and then select the piping input job to roll-back.
3. In the Previous Revisions list in the bottom-right corner of the Open dialog box, select the
revision to rollback to.
4. Click Open.
The software asks you to confirm restoring the selected backup.
5. Click Yes to restore the previous revision.
Input Menu
The Input menu is used to select the modules to define the job input parameters. Piping and
Underground are available for piping jobs. Structural Steel is available for structural jobs.
Piping - Defines piping job parameters. For more information, see Piping Input Reference
(on page 99).
Underground - Converts an existing piping model to buried pipe. For more information, see
Buried Pipe Modeler (on page 485).
Structural Steel - Defines structural steel for the job. For more information, see Structural
Steel Modeler (on page 387).
Analysis Menu
The Analysis menu displays the available calculations in CAESAR II.
Statics - Performs Static analysis of pipe or structure. The command is available after error
checking the input files. For more information, see Static Analysis Dialog Box (on page 534).
Dynamics - Performs Dynamic analysis of pipe or structure. The command is avail\-able
after error checking the input files. For more information, see Dynamic Analysis (on page 615).
Intersection SIF Scratchpad - Displays scratch pads used to calculate stress intensification
factors at tee intersections. For more information, see Intersection Stress Intensification Factors
(on page 782)
Bend SIF Scratchpad - Displays scratch pads used to calculate stress intensification factors
at bends. For more information, see Bend Stress Intensification Factors (on page 788).
WRC 107(537)/297 - Calculates stresses in vessels due to attached piping. For more
information, see WRC 107 Vessel Stresses (see "WRC Bulletin 107(537)" on page 798).
Flanges - Performs flange stress and leakage calculations. For more information, see Flange
Leakage/Stress Calculations (on page 802).
B31.G - Estimates pipeline remaining life. For more information, see Pipeline Remaining
Strength Calculations (B31G) (on page 822).
Expansion Joint Rating - Evaluates expansion joints using EJMA equations. For more
information, see Expansion Joint Rating (on page 827).
AISC - Performs AISC code check on structural steel elements.
NEMA SM23 - Evaluates piping loads on steam turbine nozzles.
API 610 - Evaluates piping loads on centrifugal pumps.
API 617 - Evaluates piping loads on compressors.
API 661 - Evaluates piping loads on air-cooled heat exchangers.
HEI Standard - Evaluates piping loads on feedwater heaters.
API 560 - Evaluates piping loads on fired heaters.
Output Menu
The Output menu lists all available output of piping or structural calculations that can be
selected for review.
Static - Displays the results of a static analysis. For more information, see Static Output
Processor Window (see "Static Output Processor" on page 567).
Harmonic - Displays Harmonic Loading results.
Spectrum Modal - Displays Natural Frequency/Mode Shape calculations or Uniform/Force
Spectrum Loading results.
Time History - Displays Time History Load Simulation results.
Animation - Displays Animated Graphic simulations of any of the above results. Click to view
any of the following simulations:
Mode Shapes
Harmonic
Time History
Static
Language Menu
CAESAR II supports multiple languages. To select the language, click Language on the
CAESAR II main menu, and then select the language you prefer. Many of the CAESAR II
modules are available in English and Japanese, such as the Main Menu, the Classic Piping
Input dialog box, the Static Load Case Editor, and the Static Output Processor. Additionally,
significant portions of the documentation, including the various guides and F1 Help information,
are translated.
English (United States) - Identifies that the current language is English, which is the default
language.
Japanese - Changes portions of the CAESAR II program text to Japanese.
Future releases of CAESAR II will include support for new languages in the product and
documentation.
Tools Menu
The Tools menu activates various CAESAR II supporting utilities.
Configure/Setup - The CAESAR.cfg configuration file contains directives that dictate how
CAESAR II will operate on a particular computer and how it will perform a particular analysis.
Each time that you open the software, it searches for this configuration file in the current data
folder. If the configuration file is not found in the current data folder, the software then searches
the CAESAR II system folder. If the configuration file is not found in either location, a fatal error
is generated and CAESAR II exits. For more information, see Configuration and Environment
(on page 45).
Calculator - Launches an on-screen calculator.
Create/Review Units - Creates custom sets of units or lets you review the units configuration.
For more information, see Create/Review Units (on page 1030).
Change Model Units - Converts an existing input file to a new set of units. For more
information, see Change Model Units (on page 1032).
Material Database - Edits or adds to the CAESAR II Material Database. For more information,
see Material Database (on page 1033).
Accounting - Activates or customizes job accounting or generates accounting reports. For more
information, see Accounting (on page 1023).
Multi-Job Analysis - Enables the user to run a stream of jobs without operator intervention. For
more information, see Batch Stream Processing (on page 1028).
External Interfaces - Displays the interfaces to and from third party software (both CAD and
analytical). For more information, see External Interfaces (on page 1043).
ISOGEN Isometrics - Starts CAESAR II Isometrics. For more information, see Generate Stress
Isometrics (see "Generate Stress Isometrics Overview" on page 749).
I-Configure - Starts I-Configure.
Explore System Folder - Opens the CAESAR II System folder.
Reset Layouts to Default - Restores all CAESAR II window layouts to the default positions. In
addition, all toolbar customizations are reset to the default state and your video driver is to
OpenGL.
Diagnostics Menu
The Diagnostics menu activates utilities to help troubleshoot problem installations.
CRC Check - Verifies program files are not corrupted.
Build Version - Determines the build version of CAESAR II files.
Error Review - Reviews description of CAESAR II errors.
ESL Menu
The ESL menu accesses utilities that interact with the External Software Lock (ESL). These
commands are disabled if you are using SmartPlant License Manager.
Show Data - Displays data stored on the ESL.
Access Codes - Allows runs to be added or other ESL changes, to be made either through Fax
or E-mail (in conjunction with option below).
Authorization Codes - See the Access Codes option.
Check ESL Driver - Verifies the location and version of the ESL.
Install ESL Driver - Installs the ESL Drivers.
View Menu
The View menu is used to enable and customize the status bar and all toolbars.
Toolbar - Displays or hides toolbars and allows you to customize toolbars.
Status Bar - Displays or hides the status bar at the bottom of the window.
Help Menu
The Help menu displays the available CAESAR II documentation.
Online Documentation - Displays CAESAR II documentation in HTML or PDF format.
Desktop (Online) Help - Launches Intergraph CAS online technical support.
Online Registration - Enables you to register electronically with Intergraph CAS. An active
internet connection is required.
Information - Provides information on the best ways to contact Intergraph CAS personnel for
technical support and provides internet links for Intergraph CAS downloads and information.
Check for Upgrades - Enables you to verify the most current version of CAESAR II is installed.
About CAESAR II - Displays CAESAR II version and copyright information.
Throughout CAESAR II context-sensitive, on-screen help is available by clicking ? or pressing
[F1] while the cursor is in any input field. A help screen displays showing a discussion and the
required units, if applicable.
In This Section
CAESAR II Configuration File Generation ..................................... 45
Computational Control ................................................................... 47
Database Definitions ...................................................................... 53
FRP Pipe Properties ...................................................................... 59
Geometry Directives ...................................................................... 63
Graphic Settings ............................................................................ 66
Miscellaneous Options ................................................................... 79
SIFs and Stresses ......................................................................... 84
Set/Change Password ................................................................... 96
Click Alt D to reset an individual field value in the current configuration file to its default
value.
Click Reset All -> Set Current Defaults to reset all the values for the current configuration
file to the default values.
1. Click Tools > Configure/Setup to display the CAESAR.cfg file.
Alternatively, you can click Configure on the toolbar.
The CAESAR II Configuration Editor window displays. The attributes for Computational
Control display.
2. Click the Reset All drop-down menu.
The various default file options display.
3. Select a default file.
The values in left-hand pane change to the default values. Values change to normal text
from bold text.
4. Save the changes.
The following section explains each of the CAESAR II configuration file Category options.
Computational Control
The Computational Control category provides access to the following groups of configuration
settings:
Convergence Tolerances (on page 47)
Input Spreadsheet Defaults (on page 49)
Miscellaneous (on page 51)
Convergence Tolerances
Topics
Decomposition Singularity Tolerance ............................................ 48
Friction Angle Variation .................................................................. 48
Friction Normal Force Variation ..................................................... 48
Friction Slide Multiplier ................................................................... 48
Friction Stiffness ............................................................................ 49
Rod Increment (Degrees) .............................................................. 49
Rod Tolerance (Degrees) .............................................................. 49
Friction Stiffness
Specifies the friction restraint stiffness.
The default value for the friction restraint stiffness is 1.0E+06 lb/in.
If the structural load normal to a friction restraint is less than the restraint load multiplied by the
coefficient of friction, the pipe will not move at this support this restraint node is "non-sliding."
To model the non-sliding state, stiffnesses are inserted in the two directions perpendicular to the
restraint's line of action to oppose any sliding motion.
Nonlinear convergence problems may be alleviated by reducing the friction restraint stiffness.
Lower friction stiffness will more readily distribute friction loads throughout the system and allow
nonlinear convergence. However, this lower stiffness affects the accuracy of the results. Lower
stiffness values permit more "non-sliding" movement, but given the indeterminate nature of the
friction problem in general, this error may not be crucial.
Alpha Tolerance
Indicates the breakpoint at which CAESAR II decides that the entry in the Temp fields on the
input spreadsheet is a thermal expansion coefficient or a temperature. The default value is 0.05.
Any entry in the Temp fields whose absolute magnitude is less than 0.05 is taken to be a
thermal expansion coefficient in terms of inches per inch (dimensionless).
For straight pipe, Bourdon Pressure Option #1 is the same as Bourdon Pressure Option #2.
For elbows, Bourdon Pressure Option #1 should apply for forged and welded fittings where
the bend cross-section can be considered essentially circular.
The Bourdon effect (Trans only) is always considered when FRP pipe is used, regardless
of the actual setting of the Bourdon flag.
Miscellaneous
Topics
Bend Axial Shape .......................................................................... 52
Ignore Spring Hanger Stiffness...................................................... 52
Include Insulation in Hydrotest....................................................... 52
Include Spring Stiffness in Hanger OPE Travel Cases ................. 52
Incore Numerical Check ................................................................ 52
Missing Mass ZPA ......................................................................... 52
Use Pressure Stiffening on Bends ................................................. 53
WRC-107 Interpolation Method ..................................................... 53
WRC-107(537) Version ................................................................. 53
WRC-107(537) Version
Sets the version of the WRC-107(537) bulletin used in the computations. Valid options are:
Aug'65 - August 1965
Mar'79 - March 1979
March '79 1B1/2B1 - March 1979 with the 1B1-1 and 2B-1 off axis curves. This is the
default setting.
In 2010, WRC Bulletin 537 was released. According to the foreword of WRC Bulletin
537, "WRC 537 provides exactly the same content in a more useful and clear format. It is not an
update or a revision of 107." CAESAR II uses the graphs from Bulletin 107. Bulletin 537 simply
provides equations in place of the curves found in Bulletin 107.
Database Definitions
The Database Definitions category provides access to the following groups of configuration
settings:
Databases (on page 54)
Databases
Topics
Alternate CAESAR II Distributed Data Path .................................. 544
Default Spring Hanger Table ......................................................... 56
Expansion Joints ............................................................................ 56
Load Case Template ..................................................................... 56
Piping Size Specification ............................................................... 56
Structural Database ....................................................................... 56
Units File Name ............................................................................. 56
User Material Database File Name ............................................... 57
Valve/Flange Data File Location .................................................... 58
Valves and Flanges ....................................................................... 58
of these formatting files are language or code-specific. Therefore, you may want to switch
between system folders depending on the current job.
There must be a primary system folder, named System, in which the software can place
accounting, version, and diagnostic files that it creates during execution. The location of the
primary system folder is dependent on the specific edition of the Windows operating system, as
follows:
Windows 7 and later
"C:\ProgramData\INTERGRAPH CAS\CAESAR II\x.xx\System"
The x.xx in each of the above sample path represents the CAESAR II version number.
Expansion Joints
Specifies which expansion joint database the software should reference during subsequent input
sessions. Available databases provided include Pathway, Senior Flexonics, IWK, Piping
Technology, and China.
Because the software writes the CAESAR.cfg file to the local data folder, you can configure
different data directories to reference different template files.
Structural Database
Specifies which database file is used to acquire the structural steel shape labels and cross
section properties. Select one of the following: AISC 1977, AISC 1989, German 1991, South
African 1991, Korean 1990, Australian 1990, United Kingdom, or China.
Because the CAESAR.cfg file is written to the local data directory, you can configure
different data directories to reference different units files.
The software first searches for units files in the local data directory, followed by the active
System directory.
ODBC Settings
Topics
Append Reruns to Existing Data.................................................... 58
Enable Data Export to ODBC-Compliant Databases .................... 59
ODBC Compliant Database Name ................................................ 59
Material Properties
Topics
Axial Modulus of Elasticity ............................................................. 60
Axial Strain: Hoop Stress (Ea/Eh*Vh/a) ......................................... 60
FRP Alpha (xe-06) ......................................................................... 60
FRP Density ................................................................................... 60
FRP Laminate Type ....................................................................... 61
FRP Property Data File .................................................................. 61
Ratio Shear Modulus: Elastic Modulus .......................................... 62
FRP Density
Displays the weight of the pipe material on a per unit volume basis. This field is used to set the
default weight density of FRP materials in the piping input module.
The data lines must exactly follow the order shown in the above sample FRP data file.
The four data lines defining the UKOOA envelope are intended for future use and may be
omitted.
Settings
Topics
BS 7159 Pressure Stiffening.......................................................... 62
Exclude F2 from UKOOA Bending Stress ..................................... 62
Use FRP Flexibilities ...................................................................... 62
Use FRP SIF .................................................................................. 63
Geometry Directives
The Geometry Directives category provides access to the following groups of configuration
settings:
Bends (on page 63)
Input Items (on page 65)
Bends
Topics
Bend Length Attachment Percent .................................................. 64
Maximum Allowable Bend Angle ................................................... 64
Minimum Allowable Bend Angle .................................................... 64
Minimum Angle to Adjacent Bend.................................................. 64
Input Items
Topics
Auto Node Number Increment ....................................................... 65
Connect Geometry Through CNodes ............................................ 65
Horizontal Thermal Bowing Tolerance .......................................... 65
Loop Closure Tolerance ................................................................ 66
New Job Z-Axis Vertical ................................................................. 66
Graphic Settings
The Graphics Settings category provides access to configuration settings that used to set the
different plot option colors, font characteristics, and the view options.
Advanced Options - Contains options that should only be used by graphics experts. For
more information, see Advanced Options (on page 67).
Background Colors - Contains options that define the color of the plot window. For more
information, see Background Colors (on page 68).
Component Colors - Contains options that define the color for various components in the
plot. For more information, see Component Colors (on page 69).
Marker Options - Contains options that set the node marker color and size. For more
information, see Marker Options (on page 70).
Miscellaneous Options - Contains options that determine how graphics are displayed
either by default or when using the Reset Plot option. For more information, see
Miscellaneous Options (on page 71).
Output Colors - Contains options that set the colors used when plotting code stress in
output. For more information, see Output Colors (on page 75).
Text Options - Contains options for defining font, font style, font size, and color. Scripts are
supported. For more information, see Text Options (on page 76).
Visual Options - Contains options that control general plotting visibility. For more
information, see Visual Options (on page 77).
To change a color, click it once and then click the ellipses button that appears to the right.
Select a color in the dialog box that appears, and then click OK. To save the color settings, click
Save and Exit before closing the Configuration Editor.
Advanced Options
Topics
Backplane Culling .......................................................................... 68
Culling Maximum Extent ................................................................ 68
Use Culling Frustrum ..................................................................... 68
Backplane Culling
This setting should only be used by graphics experts. If you are experiencing difficulties with
your graphics, contact Intergraph CAS Support for assistance.
Background Colors
Topics
Bottom ............................................................................................ 68
Top ................................................................................................. 68
Use Uniform Background Color ..................................................... 68
Bottom
Sets the color for the bottom of the plot window.
Top
Sets the color for the top of the plot window.
Component Colors
Topics
Anchor CNode ............................................................................... 69
Anchors .......................................................................................... 69
Expansion Joints ............................................................................ 69
Flange ............................................................................................ 69
Hanger CNode ............................................................................... 69
Hangers ......................................................................................... 70
Nozzles .......................................................................................... 70
Pipes .............................................................................................. 70
Restraint CNode ............................................................................ 70
Restraints ....................................................................................... 70
Rigids ............................................................................................. 70
SIFs/Tees....................................................................................... 70
Steel ............................................................................................... 70
Anchor CNode
Sets the color of Cnode anchors when displayed in the graphics.
Anchors
Sets the color of anchors when displayed in the graphics.
Expansion Joints
Sets the color of expansion joints when displayed in the graphics.
Flange
Sets the color of all flanges when displayed in the graphics.
Hanger CNode
Sets the color of Cnode hangers when displayed in the graphics.
Hangers
Sets the color of the spring hangers (and spring cans) when displayed in the graphics.
Nozzles
Sets the color of all nozzles when displayed in the graphics.
Pipes
Sets the color of all pipe elements when displayed in the graphics.
Restraint CNode
Sets the color of the restraint Cnode when displayed in the graphics.
Restraints
Sets the color of all restraints (except for anchors and hangers) when displayed in the graphics.
Rigids
Sets the color of all rigid elements when displayed in the graphics.
SIFs/Tees
Sets the color of all tees when displayed in the graphics.
Steel
Sets the color of all structural steel elements in both the structural steel plot and the piping plot
when structural steel is included.
Marker Options
Topics
Marker Color .................................................................................. 71
Marker Size .................................................................................... 71
Marker Color
Sets the color of the node markers shown in the graphics.
Marker Size
Sets the size of the node markers shown in the graphics.
Miscellaneous Options
These options determine how graphics display by default or how they display when you use the
Reset Plot option while in the graphics.
Topics
Default Operator ............................................................................ 71
Default Projection Mode ................................................................ 71
Default Render Mode ..................................................................... 72
Default View ................................................................................... 72
Disable Graphic Tooltip Bubble ..................................................... 72
Force Black and White Printing ..................................................... 73
Idle Processing Count .................................................................... 73
Optimal Frame Rate ...................................................................... 73
Restore Previous Anchor Size ....................................................... 73
Restore Previous Hanger Size ...................................................... 73
Restore Previous Operator ............................................................ 73
Restore Previous Projection Mode ................................................ 74
Restore Previous Render Mode .................................................... 74
Restore Previous Restraint Size .................................................... 74
Restore Previous View .................................................................. 74
Video Driver ................................................................................... 74
Default Operator
Controls the initial display of graphics. Available options are Zoom to Window, Annotate,
Orbit, Pan, Restore Previous, Select, and Zoom with Mouse. The default setting is Zoom to
Window.
Default View
Specifies the graphical view. Available options are SE Isometric, SW Isometric, NW Isometric,
NE Isometric, Top, Bottom, Front, Back, Left, Right, and Restore Previous. The default
view setting is SE Isometric.
Video Driver
Determines the video driver used in plotting. Select OpenGL, Direct 3D, or Windows Basic
Video.
Output Colors
Topics
Actual Stress Settings .................................................................... 75
Displaced Shape ............................................................................ 75
Percent Stress Settings ................................................................. 75
When plotting code stress in output, the software can also color elements in terms of
percent of code allowable. For more information, see Percent Stress Settings (on page 75).
Displaced Shape
Sets the color of the Displaced Shape option when displayed in output graphics.
Level 2 20 to 40%
Level 3 40 to 60%
Level 4 60 to 80%
Level 5 80 to 100%
Level 6 >100%
When plotting code stress in output, the software can also color elements in terms of
actual stress. For more information, see Actual Stress Settings (on page 75).
Text Options
You can use these options to select font, font style, and font size and color. Scripts are
supported. The different plot texts are node numbers and names, annotation, and legends.
Topics
Annotation Text .............................................................................. 76
Legend Text ................................................................................... 76
Node Text ...................................................................................... 76
Output Text .................................................................................... 77
Rendered Mode Text Always Visible ............................................. 77
Silhouette Mode Text Always Visible ............................................. 77
Annotation Text
Defines the font, font size, and color of annotation text.
Legend Text
Sets the text color and font style settings of all legends, such as displacements, temperatures,
and so forth, when displayed in the graphics.
Node Text
Determines the color and font style settings of node numbers and node names when displayed
in the graphics.
Output Text
Defines the font, font size, and color of output text.
Visual Options
These options control general plotting visibility.
Topics
Always Use System Colors ............................................................ 77
Always Use System Fonts ............................................................. 77
Axis Mode ...................................................................................... 78
Fixed Size Restraint Size ............................................................... 78
Hide Overlapping Text ................................................................... 78
Restraint Helix is a Line ................................................................. 78
Shadow Mode ................................................................................ 78
Show Bounding Box ...................................................................... 78
Smooth Transitions ........................................................................ 79
Use Fixed Size Restraints ............................................................. 79
Visibility % ...................................................................................... 79
Axis Mode
Turns on and off the display of the axes in the plot. By default, the axes displays in the lower left
corner of the plot.
Shadow Mode
Defines the shadow mode. Select Hard, Soft, or None. The default setting is None.
Smooth Transitions
Specifies whether graphics have a smooth transition when the view is changed.
True - Enable smooth transition.
False - Change the view instantly. This option reduces the video card memory
requirements.
Visibility %
Determines the percentage of incident light that passes through an element volume when using
the Translucent Objects or Hidden Lines option in the graphics. Setting this to zero makes all
elements completely opaque while a setting of 100% renders all elements transparent. The
default setting is 50%.
Miscellaneous Options
The Miscellaneous Options category provides access to the following groups of configuration
settings:
Input Items (on page 80)
Output Items (on page 82)
Input Items
Topics
Autosave Time Interval .................................................................. 81
Disable "File Open" Graphic Thumbnail ........................................ 81
Disable Undo/Redo Ability ............................................................. 81
Dynamic Example Input Text ......................................................... 81
Enable Autosave ............................................................................ 81
Prompted Autosave ....................................................................... 82
Enable Autosave
Controls whether CAESAR II will automatically save the piping input at specified intervals.
True - Turn on autosave.
False - Turn off autosave.
Prompted Autosave
Controls whether the software prompts you at the specified time interval to save the input. You
must also set Enable Autosave to True.
True - Prompt before performing the autosave
False - Perform the autosave without prompting.
Output Items
Topics
Displacement Reports Sorted by Nodes ....................................... 82
Output Reports by Load Case ....................................................... 82
Output Table of Contents ............................................................... 82
Time History Animation .................................................................. 83
User ID
Creates a control file for a specific computer. Enter a three-character user ID for each user, or
more exactly, each workstation.
When multiple workstations attempt to access CAESAR II data in the same directory
simultaneously, the control file in the data directory becomes corrupted, which may cause
abnormal software execution. In situations where there may be more than one concurrent user
running CAESAR II in a given data directory, you can use this option to create a separate
control file for each computer, thus allowing simultaneous access of the CAESAR II data within
the same directory.
This user ID is not a password and is specific to the computer requiring access and not to
the user.
Advanced Settings
Topics
Class 1 Branch Flexibility ............................................................... 85
Use Schneider ............................................................................... 86
Use WRC 329 ................................................................................ 86
you are urged to run the analysis both with and without the Class 1 Branch Flexibility active to
determine the effect of this modeling on the analysis.
Use Schneider
Activates the Schneider reduced intersection assumptions. By default, this setting is False.
It was because of observations by Schneider that much of the work on WRC 329 was started.
Schneider pointed out that the code SIFs could be in error when the d/D ratio at the intersection
was less than 1.0 and greater than 0.5. In this d/D range, the SIFs could be in error by a factor
as high as 2.0. Using the Schneider option in CAESAR II results in a multiplication of the out of
plane branch stress intensification by a number between 1 and 2 when the d/D ratio for the
inter\-section is between 0.5 and 1.0. For B31.1 and other codes that do not differentiate
between in and out-of-plane SIFs, the multiplication will be used for the single stress
intensification given.
Code-Specific Settings
Topics
B31.1 Reduced Z Fix ..................................................................... 87
B31.1/B31.3 Verified Welding and Contour Tees .......................... 87
B31.3 Implement Appendix P ........................................................ 87
EN-13480/CODETI Use In-Plane/Out-Plane SIF .......................... 87
Ignore B31.1/B31.3 Wc Factor ...................................................... 87
No RTF/WLT in Reduced Fitting SIFs ........................................... 88
Occasional Load Factor ................................................................. 88
Pressure Variation in EXP Case .................................................... 88
Reduced Intersection ..................................................................... 88
Reduced Intersection
Defines the code rules for reduced intersection. Select one of the following options:
B31.1 (Pre 1980) - Use the pre-1980 B31.1 code rules used for reduced intersection. These
rules did not define a separate branch SIF for the reduced branch end. The branch stress
intensification factor will be the same as the header stress intensification factor regardless of
the branch-to-header diameter ratio.
B31.1 (Post 1980) - Use the post-1980 B31.1 code rules for reduced intersections. The
reduced intersection SIF equations in B31.1 from 1980 through 1989 generated
unnecessarily high SIFs because of a mistake made in the implementation. (This is
according to WRC329.) For this reason, many analysts opted for the pre-1980 B31.1 SIF
calculation. CAESAR II corrects this mistake by automatically setting B31.1 Reduced Z Fix
to True (the default setting). You can vary the status of this flag in the CAESAR II
configuration file to generate any interpretation of B31.1 that you want. The default for a new
job is for B31.1(Post 1980) and for B31.1 Reduced Z Fix to be set to True.
The No RFT/WLT in Reduced Fitting SIFs (see "No RTF/WLT in Reduced Fitting
SIFs" on page 88) option also affects the SIF calculations at reduced intersections.
WRC 329 - Use the recommendations of WRC329 for reduced intersections. A reduced
intersection is any intersection where the d/D ratio is less than 0.975. The WRC329
recommendations result in more conservative stress calculations in some instances and less
conservative stress calculations in others. In all cases, the WRC329 values should be more
accurate and more in-line with the respective codes intent.
ASME Sect. III - Use the 1985 ASME Section III NC and ND rules for reduced intersections.
Schneider - Activate the Schneider reduced intersection stress intensification factor
multiplication. Has the same effect as Use Schneider (on page 86).
General Settings
Topics
Add F/A in Stresses ....................................................................... 89
Add Torsion in SL Stress ............................................................... 90
All Cases Corroded ........................................................................ 90
Allow User's SIF at Bend ............................................................... 90
Base Hoop Stress On (ID/OD/Mean/Lam) .................................. 90
Default Piping Code ....................................................................... 91
New Job Liberal Expansion Stress Allowable ............................... 92
Use PD/4t....................................................................................... 92
Yield Stress Criterion ..................................................................... 92
PD 8010-2
ISO-14692
HPGSL
JPI
Use PD/4t
Instructs the software to use the simplified form of the longitudinal stress term when computing
sustained stresses. Some codes permit this simplified form when the pipe wall thickness is thin.
This option is used most often when you are comparing CAESAR II results to older pipe stress
program results. The more comprehensive calculation--the default--is recommended.
Configuration
Failure Theory Calculated Stress
Setting
Maximum Energy of
von Mises Octahedral Shearing Stress
Distortion
CAESAR II computes the selected stress at four points along the axis normal to the plane of
bending (outside top, inside top, inside bottom, outside bottom), and includes the maximum
value in the stresses report. The equations used for each of these yield criteria are listed below.
If von Mises Theory is used, the software computes the octahedral shearing stress, which differs
from the von Mises stress by a constant factor.
For codes B31.4 Chapter IX, B31.8, B31.8 Chapter VIII, and DnV, this setting controls
which equation the software uses to compute the equivalent stress. For these codes, the
software uses the equations shown in the piping code to determine the yield stress criterion in
the Stresses Extended output report.
Stress Formulation
CAESAR II reports the largest stress using four calculation points through the pipe cross
section, as show in the following figure.
The four points are established by a line perpendicular to the bending moment acting on the
pipe (shown in red). Points 1 and 4 are on the outside surface of the pipe, where radial stress is
zero. Point 1 is in bending tension and Point 4 is in bending compression. Points 2 and 3 are on
the inside surface of the pipe where radial stress is compressive (negative) pressure.
Longitudinal stress (Sl), hoop stress (Sh), radial stress (Sr) and shear stress (St) are calculated
at each position using the appropriate formulas.
Radial
Shear
Stress
Position Longitudinal Stress (Sl) Hoop Stress (Sh) Stress (St)
(Sr)
The table formulas assume that this is a B31.3-style stress equation with Lam hoop
stress.
These stresses are translated into the principal stresses S1, S2, and S3. The following shows a
graphical representation of a typical calculation of the four position points.
Determine the principal stress using the longitudinal stress (Sl), the hoop stress (Sh), and the
sheer stress (St)which sets the red line. The principal stress refers to the points where the red
circle crosses the normal stress axis (shear stress equals zero). Place the radial stress (Sr)
(which has a shear stress of zero) on the same axis. The largest intersection point is S1 and the
smallest is S3.
Use the S1, S2, and S3 values in the equation above to determine the octahedral shearing
stress at each position. CAESAR II reports the largest of these four values.
Legacy Settings
Topics
B31.3 Use SL Formulation Para 320 (2010) ................................. 95
Include Axial Force in Expansion Stress ....................................... 95
SIF Multiplier for Sustained Stress Index ...................................... 955
With the release of CAESAR II 2014 and the implementation of B31.3 2012, the internal
interpretation of this existing configuration setting was changed. B31.3 2012 defines the SIF
multiplier value as 0.75. Other codes similar to B31.3 do not address this value. The default
value of this configuration setting was changed to 0.0000. This change enables CAESAR II to
internally set the multiplier to 0.7500 for B31.3 and to 1.0000 for other similar codes. The
following table summarizes these settings.
Set/Change Password
The Security command provides you with the option of using a password protection scheme for
the configuration file. By setting a password on the primary configuration file (done by setting the
default data folder to the CAESAR II software folder), a corporate standard can be enforced
throughout the network. Subsequent use of the configuration module in other data folders will
allow only modification of display or other environment directives that do not affect calculated
results.
When you click the Security command, a menu displays with the following four options:
New Password (on page 97)
Access Protected Data (on page 97)
Change Password (on page 97)
Remove Password (on page 97)
New Password
Enter a password. After entering a password, you have the ability to change configuration
settings from the program folder, or alter or remove the password.
Change Password
Allows you to change your current password. You must first enter the correct existing password.
The current password may be changed at any time by anyone who has authorization to do so.
After a password has been set, all computation controls, stress options, and any other
configuration options, which could affect the CAESAR II computations are disabled and cannot
be changed.
All protected option labels, edit boxes, and default buttons are grayed out when disabled.
Remove Password
Deletes the current password. Anyone with authorization can remove the current password by
entering the correct existing password for this option. After a password is removed, all options
that appear in the Configuration Editor can be modified from any folder where you have
read/write access rights.
This dialog box describes the piping on an element-by-element basis. It consists of menus and
toolbars which perform a number of supporting operations, and data fields that contain
information about each piping element. A graphic representation of the model displays
automatically. This model updates as you add new elements.
In This Section
Classic Piping Input Dialog Box ..................................................... 100
Available Commands ..................................................................... 222
3D Modeler .................................................................................... 360
S3D/SPR Model View .................................................................... 379
F2 From Node
F3 DX
F4 Diameter
F5 Temp 1
F6 Material
F8 Refractory Thickness
F9 Line number
Node Numbers
Each element is identified by its end node number. Because each input screen represents a
piping element, you must specify the element end points - the From node and To node. These
points are used as locations at which information can be entered or extracted. The From node
and To node are both required.
CAESAR II generates both values if the AUTO_NODE_INCREMENT option is set to a
value other than zero using the Tools > Configure/Setup command on the main menu.
From
Specifies the node number for the starting end of the element. Node numbers must be numeric,
ranging from 1 to 32000. Normally, the From node number is automatically generated by
CAESAR II from the preceding element. You can change the node numbers, but be careful not
to use the same node number more than once in a model.
To
Specifies the node number for the end of the element. Node numbers must be numeric, ranging
from 1 to 32000. You can change the node numbers, but be careful not to use the same node
number more than once in a model.
Name
Assigns nonnumeric names to node points. Double-click the Name check box to display an
auxiliary dialog box where you can assign names of up to 10 characters to the From and To
nodes. These names display instead of the node numbers in graphic plots and reports.
Nonnumeric names can be truncated in 80 column reports.
Deltas
Type element lengths as delta dimensions according to the X, Y, and Z rectangular coordinate
system established for the piping system. The Y-axis represents the vertical axis in CAESAR II.
CAESAR II treats each element as a vector. The vector length is equal to the element length.
The vector direction points from the From node to the To node.
The delta dimensions DX, DY, and DZ, are the measurements along the X, Y, and Z-axes
between the From node and the To node. In most cases you only need to use one of the three
options, because the piping usually runs along the global axes. Where the piping element is
skewed, you must make two or three entries. You must define at least one option for all
elements except zero-length expansion joints.
When you are using feet and inches for compound length and length units, valid entries
include formats such as: 3-6, 3 ft. -6 in, and 3-6-3/16.
You can use offsets to modify the stiffness of the current element by adjusting its length and the
orientation of its neutral axis in 3-D space.
Double-click >> to display the Edit Deltas dialog box.
DX
Specifies the X component of the element.
CAESAR II accepts [compound length]-[length]-[fraction] formats (such as feet - inch - fraction or
meter - decimal - centimeters) as valid input values in most cells. You can use simple forms of
addition, multiplication, and division as well as exponential format.
Optionally, use a tic mark ( ' ) instead of the first dash ( - ), to indicate feet in this field.
DY
Specifies the Y component of the element.
CAESAR II accepts [compound length]-[length]-[fraction] formats (such as feet - inch - fraction or
meter - decimal - centimeters) as valid input values in most cells. You can use simple forms of
addition, multiplication, and division as well as exponential format.
Optionally, use a tic mark ( ' ) instead of the first dash ( - ), to indicate feet in this field.
DZ
Specifies the Z component of the element.
CAESAR II accepts [compound length]-[length]-[fraction] formats (such as feet - inch - fraction or
meter - decimal - centimeters) as valid input values in most cells. You can use simple forms of
addition, multiplication, and division as well as exponential format.
Optionally, use a tic mark ( ' ) instead of the first dash ( - ), to indicate feet in this field.
Offsets
Indicates whether the software corrects modeled dimensions of an element back to its actual
dimensions. Double-click the Offsets check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box to
select or clear this option.
Specify the distances from the position of the From node in 3-D space to the actual From end of
the element.
Specify the distances from the position of the To node in 3-D space to the actual To end of the
element.
If you leave any offset direction distances blank, the software defaults them to zero.
Thermal expansion is 0 for the offset portion of an offset element. No element flexibility is
generated for the offset portion of the element. The following figure shows a common usage for
the offset element.
Length
Specifies the distance between the To node and the From node.
Optionally, use a tic mark ( ' ) instead of the first dash ( - ), to indicate feet in this field.
Direction Cosines
Specifies the X, Y, and Z components or element direction cosines.
For an element aligned with the X-axis,
Cos X ..... 1.0
Cos Y ..... <Blank>
Pipe Sizes
Type the dimensions for the element. Plus mill tolerance is used only for the IGE/TD/12 piping
code. Seam weld is used only for the IGE/TD/12 piping code. These options carry forward from
one element to the next during the design session so you only need to type values for those
elements at which a change occurs. You can specify nominal pipe sizes and schedules.
CAESAR II converts these values to actual outside diameter and wall thickness. Outside
diameter and wall thickness are required data inputs.
Nominal diameters, thicknesses, and schedule numbers are a function of the pipe size
specification. Click Tools > Configure/Setup on the main menu or click CAESAR II
Configuration on the CAESAR II Tools toolbar to select ANSI, JIS, or DIN as the piping
size specification.
Double-click >> to display the Edit Pipe Sizes dialog box.
Diameter
Specifies the pipe diameter. Normally, you should type the nominal diameter and CAESAR II
converts it to the actual outer diameter necessary for the analysis. There are two ways to
prevent this conversion:
Use a modified UNITS file with the Nominal Pipe Schedules turned off,
Specify diameters whose values are off slightly from a nominal size (in English units the
tolerance on diameter is 0.063 in.).
Use F1 to obtain additional information and the current units for this input box. Available nominal
diameters are determined by the active pipe size specification, set by the configuration software.
The following are the available nominal diameters.
ANSI Nominal Pipe ODs, in inches (file ap.bin)
1 1 2 2 3 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 42
JIS Nominal Pipe ODs, in millimeters (file jp.bin)
15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 90 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650
DIN Nominal Pipe ODs, in millimeters (file dp.bin)
15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200
Wt/Sch
Specifies the thickness of the pipe. Normal input consists of a schedule indicator (such as S,
XS, or 40), which is converted to the proper wall thickness by CAESAR II. If actual thickness is
entered, CAESAR II accepts it as entered. Available schedule indicators are determined by the
active piping specification, set by the configuration software.
Seam Welded
Indicates whether the piping element is seam welded
B31.1 / B31.3
If the B31.1 or B31.3 piping codes are active, select the Seam-welded check box to activate the
Wl box. Wl (the weld strength reduction factor) is used by the software to determine the
minimum wall thickness of the element.
IGE/TD/12
If the IGE/TD/12 piping code is active, select the Seam welded check box when straight pipes
are seam welded. This option affects the stress intensification factor calculations for that pipe
section due to seam welded fabrication.
WI Factor
Specifies the WI factor.
+Mill Tol %; Wl
Specifies the positive mill tolerance. This option is only enabled when IGE/TD/12 is active. It is
used when the Base Stress/Flexibility On option of the Special Execution Options is set to
Plus Mill Tolerance. In that case, piping stiffness and section modulus is based on the nominal
wall thickness increased by this percentage. You can change this value on an
element-by-element basis.
If the B31.3 piping code is activated, this box specifies the weld strength reduction factor (W l), to
be used in the minimum wall calculation for straight pipe.
-Mill Tol %
Displays the negative mill tolerance. This value is read from the configuration file and used in
minimum wall thickness calculations. Also, for IGE/TD/12, this value is used when the Base
Stress/Flexibility On option of the Special Execution Options is set to Plus Mill Tolerance.
In that case, piping stiffness and section modulus is based on the nominal wall thickness,
decreased by this percentage. You can change this value on an element-by-element basis.
Corrosion
Specifies the corrosion allowance used to calculate a reduced section modulus. There is a
configuration option available to consider all stress cases as corroded. For more information,
see All Cases Corroded (on page 90).
Pipe Density
Displays the pipe density value. The appropriate pipe density is filled in automatically when you
provide a proper material number. You can override this value at any time. The software then
duplicates the value through the rest of the input.
Fluid Density
Displays the fluid density. Specify the fluid density when the internal fluid the piping system
transports significantly affects the weight loads. When the specific gravity of the fluid is known,
you can type that instead of the density. For example, you could type 0.85SG. Specific gravities
are converted to the appropriate densities immediately on input. To type specific gravity, follow
the numeric value with the letters SG (no spaces). The software automatically converts this
value to density.
In the default ENGLISH units system, densities are typed in pounds per cubic inch.
Propagate Properties
Indicates whether to propagate the property changes. Clear this check box to indicate that
properties apply to the current element only.
Operating Conditions
You can specify up to nine temperatures and ten pressures (one extra for the hydrostatic test
pressure) for each piping element. The temperatures are actual temperatures, not changes from
the ambient temperature. CAESAR II uses these temperatures to obtain the thermal strain and
allowable stresses for the element from the Material Database. As an alternative, you can
directly specify the thermal strains. For more information, see Alpha Tolerance (on page 50).
Thermal strains have absolute values on the order of 0.002, and are unitless. Pressures are
typed as gauge values and cannot be negative. Each temperature and each pressure that you
typed creates a loading for you to use when building load cases. Both thermal and pressure
data carries forward from one element to the next until changed. Typing a value in the Hydro
pressure box causes CAESAR II to build a hydro case in the set of recommended load cases.
CAESAR II uses an ambient temperature of 70F, unless changed using the Special
Execution Parameters option. For more information, see New Job Ambient Temperature (on
page 51).
Temperatures
Specifies operating temperatures. There are nine temperature boxes to allow up to nine different
operating cases. The error checker validates temperature values to insure that they are within
the code allowed ranges. You can exceed the ranges by typing the expansion coefficient in the
temperature box in units of length/length. When you are using material 21 (user-defined
material), type a thermal expansion coefficient instead of a temperature.
Values, whose absolute values are less than the Alpha Tolerance, in the temperature box are
taken to be thermal expansion coefficients. The Alpha Tolerance is a configuration file
parameter and is taken to be 0.05 by default. For example, if you wanted to type the thermal
expansion coefficient equivalent to 11.37in./100ft., the calculation would be:
11.37in./100ft. * 1 ft./ 12in. = .009475 in./in.
Type this into the appropriate Temperature box.
A cut short does no more than reduce the length of a pipe element to zero. For example;
if you wanted 8.5 cm of cold spring you could put in an 8.5 cm long element and then thermally
shrink its length to zero. This allows the cold spring to be manipulated as an individual thermal
case rather than as a concentrated force.
CAESAR II automatically suggests load cases according to IGE/TD/12 Appendix 7. Use the
following conventions for the specification of the operating conditions.
T1 Maximum Temperature
T2 Minimum Temperature
T3 Minimum Summer Temperature
T4 Maximum Winter Temperature
T5 Maximum Temperature (flow induced) (optional)
T6 Minimum Temperature (flow induced) (optional)
P1 Maximum Incidental Pressure
P2 Maximum Operating Pressure
P3 Compressor Operation
P4 Demand Pressure
HP Hydrotest Pressure
Thermal Expansion
Displays thermal expansion coefficients. CAESAR II displays the corresponding thermal
expansion coefficients in the fields when you enter operating temperatures in the temperature
fields. When the thermal expansion coefficients are not in the material database, you can enter
thermal expansion coefficients in the temperature field if the absolute values are less than the
Alpha Tolerance in the configuration. The Alpha Tolerance is 0.05 by default. For more
information, see Alpha Tolerance (on page 50). You can enter up to nine thermal expansion
coefficients in units of length/length in the temperature field on the Extended Operating
Conditions dialogue box. CAESAR II displays these values in the Thermal Expansion boxes.
Pressures
Specifies operating pressures. There are ten pressure boxes to allow up to nine operating, and
one hydrotest, pressure cases. When you type multiple pressures, be careful with the setup of
the analysis load cases. Inspect the software's recommendations carefully before proceeding.
Access to operating pressures 3 through 9 is granted through the Extended Operating
Conditions dialog box, accessible by using the >> button in the upper right corner of the frame
surrounding the standard Temperature and Pressure input boxes. You can leave this dialog
box open or closed for your convenience.
Type a value in the HydroPress box to signal CAESAR II to recommend a Hydrotest load case.
Type the design gage pressure (that is, the difference between the internal and external
pressures).
The Bourdon effect (pressure elongation) is disabled by default because it is assumed to
be non-conservative. If you want to enable the Bourdon effect, you can do so by using the
Special Execution options. For more information, see New Job Bourdon Pressure (on page
51).
The Bourdon effect is always considered in the analysis of fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe,
which is Material id=20.
CAESAR II automatically suggests load cases according to IGE/TD/12 Appendix 7. You must
use the following conventions for the specification of the operating conditions.
T1 Maximum Temperature
T2 Minimum Temperature
T3 Minimum Summer Temperature
T4 Maximum Winter Temperature
T5 Maximum Temperature (flow induced) (optional)
T6 Minimum Temperature (flow induced) (optional)
P1 Maximum Incidental Pressure
P2 Maximum Operating Pressure
P3 Compressor Operation
P4 Demand Pressure
HP Hydrotest Pressure
Component Information
Special components (such as bends, rigid elements, expansion joints, and tees) require
additional information. You can define this information by selecting the component check box,
and then typing data in the auxiliary dialog box.
Bend
Double-click Bend if the active element ends in a bend, elbow or mitered joint. This displays the
auxiliary dialog box on the right side of the screen. CAESAR II usually assigns three nodes to a
bend to define the near, mid, and far nodes on the bend. For more information, see Bends (on
page 115).
Rigid
Double-click Rigid if the active element is much stiffer than the connecting pipe, such as a
flange or valve. This displays the auxiliary dialog box to collect the component weight. For more
information, see Rigid (on page 120).
For rigid elements, CAESAR II follows these rules:
When the rigid element weight is defined as a value other than zero, CAESAR II computes
any extra weight due to insulation and contained fluid. The software then adds that value to
the defined weight value.
The weight of fluid added to a non-zero weight rigid element is equal to the same weight that
would be computed for an equivalent straight pipe. The weight of insulation added is equal
to the same weight that would be computed for an equivalent straight pipe multiplied by
1.75.
If the weight of a rigid element is zero or blank, CAESAR II assumes that the element is an
artificial construction element rather than an actual piping element. In this case, the software
does not calculate an insulation or fluid weight for that element.
The stiffness of the rigid element is relative to the diameter wall thickness. Make sure that
the diameter on a rigid element indicates the rigid stiffness to generate.
Expansion Joint
Double-click Expansion Joint if the active element is an expansion joint. This displays the
auxiliary dialog box used to collect stiffness parameters and effective diameter. For more
information, see Expansion Joints (on page 120).
Expansion joints can be modeled as zero-length (with all stiffnesses acting at a single point) or
as finite-length (with the stiffnesses acting over a continuous element). In the single-point case,
you must type all stiffness. In the continuous element case, you must omit either the lateral or
angular stiffness.
Bends
Indicates that the element is entering a bend. Select or clear this option by double-clicking the
Bend check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
You can place Intermediate node points at specified angles along the bend, or at the bend
mid-point (M).
Radius
Displays the bend radius. CAESAR II assumes a long radius by default. You can override this
value. Alternatively, select a value from the list.
Long - Indicates a long radius bend. The radius is equal to 1.5 times the nominal diameter.
Short - Indicates a short radius bend. The radius is equal to the nominal pipe diameter.
3D - Indicates a 3D bend. The radius is equal to 3 times the nominal diameter.
5D - Indicates a 5D bend. The radius is equal to 5 times the nominal diameter.
Type
Specifies the bend type. For most codes, this refers to the number of attached flanges and can
be selected from the list. If there are no flanges on the bend, leave Type blank. A bend should
be considered flanged if there is any heavy or rigid body within two diameters of the bend that
significantly restricts the bends ability to ovalize.
When using the BS 7159 or UKOOA Codes with Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe, this
entry refers to the material laminate type and may be 1, 2, or 3. These laminate types are
All chopped strand mat (CSM) constructing with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction with internal and external
surface tissue reinforced layer.
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and multi-filament roving construction with internal and external
surface tissue reinforced layer.
The laminate type affects the calculation of flexibility factors and stress intensification factors for
the BS 7159 and UKOOA Codes only.
For ISO 14692, only type 3 filament-wound laminate is considered.
Angle
Displays the angle to a point on the bend curvature. You can place additional nodes at any point
on the bend curvature provided the added nodes are not within five degrees of each other. You
can change the 5 node-spacing limit by using the configuration. For more information, see
Minimum Angle to Adjacent Bend (on page 64).
The element To node is always physically located at the far end of the bend. By default,
CAESAR II places a node at the midpoint of the bend (designated by the letter M in this box) as
well as at the zero degree position (start) of the bend, if possible.
Node
Displays the node number associated with the extra point on the bend. CAESAR II places
unique node numbers in these boxes whenever you initiate a bend. New, unique node numbers
must be assigned to the points whenever you add points on the bend curvature. If numbering by
fives and the To node number for the bend element is 35, a logical choice for the node number
for an added node at 30 degrees on the bend would be 34. You can treat the added nodes on
the bend like any other nodes in the piping system. Nodes on the bend curvature may be
restrained, displaced, or placed at the intersection of more than two pipes. Nodes on a bend
curvature are most commonly used as an intersection for a dummy leg or for the location of a
restraint. All nodes defined in this manner are plotted at the tangent intersection point for the
bend.
Miter Points
Displays the number of cuts in the bend if it is mitered. When you type a number, CAESAR II
checks if the mitered bend input is closely or widely spaced. If the bend is determined to be
widely spaced, and the number of miter cuts is greater than one, the bend should be broken
down into n single cut widely spaced miters, where n is the total number of cuts in the bend.
The number of cuts and the radius of the bend are all that is required to calculate the SIFs and
flexibilities for the bend as defined in the B31 codes. The bend radius and the bend miter
spacing are related by the following equations:
Closely Spaced Miters
R = S / (2 tan )
q = Bend Angle / (2 n) where n = number of miter cuts
Widely Spaced Miters
R = r2 (1.0 + cot q) / 2.0
r2 = (ri + ro) / 2.0
= Bend Angle / 2.0
Fitting Thickness
Specifies the thickness of the bend if that thickness is different than the thickness of the
matching pipe. If the thickness is greater than the matching pipe wall thickness, then the inside
diameter of the bend is smaller than the inside diameter of the matching pipe. CAESAR II
calculates section modulus for stress computations based on the properties of the matching pipe
as defined by the codes.
The pipe thickness is used twice when calculating SIFs and flexibility factors; once as Tn, and
once when determining the mean cross-sectional radius of the pipe in the equation for the
flexibility characteristic (h):
h = (Tn)(R) / (r2)
Tn = Thickness of bend or fitting
R = Bend radius
The bend fitting thickness (FTG) is always used as the pipe thickness in the stiffness matrix
calculations. However, the thickness of the matching pipe (WT) is always used in the bend
stress calculations.
K-Factor
Specifies the bend flexibility factor. CAESAR II calculates the factor according to the current
piping code. You can type a value to override this calculation.
Seam-Welded
Indicates that the bend is seam welded.
B31.3
If the B31.3 piping code is active, the Seam Welded check box is used to activate the Wl
box for bends. The Wl box is the weld strength reduction factor used to determine the
minimum wall thickness of the bend element.
IGE/TD/12
Used by IGE/TD/12 to calculate the stress intensification factors due to seam welded elbow
fabrication as opposed to extruded elbow fabrication. This option is only available when
IGE/TD/12 is active.
Wl for Bends
B31.1 / B31.3 - Defines the weld strength reduction factor (W l) for bend elements. This value is
used in the minimum wall thickness calculations.
ISO 14692 - Replaces this box with EPTp/(EbTb) where Ep and Eb are the axial modulus of the
attached pipe and the bend respectively, T p and Tb are the average wall thickness of the
attached pipe and the bend respectively. If these values are omitted, the software uses a default
value of 1.0. This value affects the calculation of the flexibility factor for bends.
Rigid
Indicates that you are supplying rigid element data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
the Rigid check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Type a value for Rigid Weight. This value should always be zero or positive and should not
include the weight of any insulation or fluid. If you type no weight, then CAESAR II models the
element as a weightless construction element.
Rigid weights are defined automatically if you use the Valve and Flange database.
CAESAR II automatically includes 1.0 times the fluid weight of equivalent straight pipe and 1.75
times the insulation weight of equivalent straight pipe.
Rigid elements with zero weight are considered to be modeling constructs and do not have fluid
or insulation weight added.
The rigid element stiffness is proportional to the matching pipe. For example, a 13 in. long 12 in.
diameter rigid element is stiffer than a 13 in. long 2 in. diameter rigid element. This fact should
be observed when modeling rigid elements that are part of a small pipe/large vessel, or small
pipe/heavy equipment model. The stiffness properties are computed using 10 times the
thickness of the rigid element. For additional details, see Technical Discussions (on page 883).
Enter the rigid element in the DX, DY, and DZ boxes.
See Valve (on page 238) for automatic input for these types of components.
Expansion Joints
Indicates that you are supplying expansion joint data. Select or clear this option by
double-clicking Expansion Joint on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box tab controls options for expansion joint stiffness parameters and
effective diameter. For a non-zero length expansion joint, you must omit either the transverse or
the bending stiffness.
Setting the effective diameter to zero deactivates the pressure thrust load. Use this
method in conjunction with setting a large axial stiffness to simulate the effect of axial tie-rods.
Effective ID
Specifies the effective inside diameter for pressure thrust from the manufacturer's catalog. For
all load cases, including pressure, CAESAR II calculates the pressure thrust force tending to
blow the bellows apart. If left blank, or zero, then no axial thrust force due to pressure is
calculated. Many manufacturers give the effective area of the expansion joint: A eff. The Effective
ID is calculated from the effective area by:
Effective ID = (4Aeff / )1/2
Reducer
Indicates that you are supplying reducer data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
Reducer on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Specifies the Diameter 2, Thickness 2, and Alpha values at the To node of the reducer. The
diameter and wall thickness at the From node of the reducer element are taken from the current
piping element data.
CAESAR II constructs a concentric reducer element made of ten pipe cylinders, each of a
successively larger or smaller diameter and wall thickness over the element length. CAESAR II
calculates SIFs according to the current piping code (for more information, see Code
Compliance Considerations (on page 961)) and applies these internally to the Code Stress
Calculations. These SIFs are dependent on the slope of the reducer transition (among other
code-specific considerations), Alpha. If Alpha is left blank, then the software calculates this
value based on the change in pipe diameter over 60% of the element length. If specified,
Diameter 2 and Thickness 2 are carried forward when the next pipe element is created as
Diameter and Wt/Sch. If not specified, Diameter 2 and Thickness 2 are assumed to be equal
to Diameter and Wt/Sch on the following element dialog box.
If there is no value for Alpha is specified on the dialog box, CAESAR II reports the alpha value
in the Errors and Warnings dialog box.
Diameter 2
Specifies the diameter at the To of the reducer element. The value carries forward as the
diameter of the following element. Nominal values are converted to actual values if that feature
is active. If left blank, CAESAR II uses the diameter from the following element as Diameter 2.
Thickness 2
Specifies the wall thickness at the To node of the reducer element. The value carries forward as
the wall thickness of the following element. Nominal values are converted to actual values if that
feature is active. If this option is left blank, CAESAR II uses the thickness from the following
element as Thickness 2.
Alpha
Specifies the slope, in degrees, of the reducer transition. If left blank, CAESAR II assumes the
slope equal to the arc tangent 1/2(the change in diameters) / (length of sloped portion of
reducer).
TD/12. This entry is a required input for IGE/TD/12.
Because all reducers are different, the actual length of sloped portion of reducer is unknown
unless you define it. Because of this, if Alpha is not specified, CAESAR II makes an assumption
that the length of sloped portion of reducer is equal to 60% of the total reducer length. If you
leave the Alpha value blank, then CAESAR II defaults to arc tangent 1/2(the change in
diameters) / (0.60 x element length).
R1
Specifies the transition radius for the large end of the reducer as shown in Appendix 4, Table 8
of IGE/TD/12 Code. This option is enabled only when IGE/TD/12 is active.
R2
Specifies the transition radius for the small end of the reducer as shown in Appendix 4, Table 8
of IGE/TD/12. This option is enabled only when IGE/TD/12 is active.
This auxiliary dialog box tab controls options for stress intensification factors (SIFs), or fitting
types, for up to two nodes per element. If you select components from the list, CAESAR II
automatically calculates the SIF values according to the applicable code unless you override this
behavior. Certain fittings and certain codes require additional data. Boxes display as appropriate
for the selected fitting.
You only need to type the intersection or joint type and properties on one of the elements going
to the junction. CAESAR II duplicates the intersection characteristics for all other pipes framing
into the intersection.
Fully review the warning messages coming from CAESAR II during error checking. These
messages detail any assumptions made during the assembly and calculation of the intersection
SIFs.
The available intersections and joint types, along with the other parameters that can affect the
stress intensification factors for the respective component, are shown in the table that follows.
Input Items Optionally Affecting SIF Calculations (Except for ISO 14692)*
4 SWEEPOLET CROTC
H
5 WELDOLET CROTC
H
11 THREADED JOINT
*This list does not include input items effecting SIF calculations for ISO 14692. For more
information on ISO 14692, see Input Items Optionally Affecting SIF Calculations For ISO 14692
(on page 136).
Node
Specifies the node number where the stress intensification exists. CAESAR II displays the To
node of the current element by default. You can type any node in the system, but it is most often
at a pipe intersection or joint.
If the node is at an intersection, CAESAR II calculates SIFs for all pipes going to the intersection
if the intersection Type is specified. You only need to type the intersection type once. CAESAR
II finds all other pipes framing into the intersection and applies the appropriate SIFs.
If the node is at a two-pipe joint, such as a butt weld, CAESAR II calculates SIFs for the two
pipes going to the joint node if the joint Type is specified. You only need to specify the joint type
once. CAESAR II finds the other pipe completing the joint and applies the appropriate SIFs.
If the node is not at an intersection or a joint then, leave the Type box blank and type user
defined SIFs in the SIF(i) and SIF(o) boxes. Entries in the SIF(i) and SIF(o) boxes only apply to
the element on which they are defined.
User defined stress intensification factors must be greater than or equal to one.
CAESAR II calculates and displays code-defined SIFs in the Intersection SIF scratchpad.
Access this scratchpad from the Classic Piping Input dialog box by clicking Environment >
Review SIFs at Intersection Nodes or Intersection SIF scratchpad on the Input Tools
toolbar. You can modify parameters used in the scratchpad so that you can observe the effects
of different geometries and thicknesses. Most changes made in the scratchpad can be
automatically transferred back into the model.
If the node is on any part of the bend curvature then the following applies:
1. You cannot override code calculated SIFs for bends by default. A configuration option exists
to override this default. For more information, see Allow User's SIF at Bend (on page 90). If
you set Allow User's SIF at Bend to True, then you can specify SIFs for bend To nodes.
The SIFs specified in this way apply for the entire bend curvature.
2. CAESAR II applies user-defined SIFs to straight pipe going to points on a bend curvature
regardless of any parameter in the setup file. This option is commonly used to intensify
injector tie-ins at bends, or dummy legs, or other bend attachment-type of supports.
Type
Specifies the type of tee or joint.
For non-FRP piping codes, there are six types of tees and ten types of joints. These
elements correspond to 1 to 6 and 7 to 16 in the previous table. For more information, see
Input Items Optionally Effecting SIF Calculations (see "Input Items Optionally Affecting SIF
Calculations (Except for ISO 14692)*" on page 127).
For BS 7159 and UKOOA, there are two types of tees: Moulded and Fabricated. Moulded
tee corresponds to either the Welding (3) or Extruded (6) welding tee Type. Fabricated tee
corresponds to a tee Type of Reinforced (1).
For ISO 14692, there are three types of tee and joints: Tee (1), Qualified Tee (3), and Joint
(2).
ASME NC and ND piping codes do not include equations for SIFs with a tee Type of
Sweepolet (4), Weldolet (5), or Extruded (6). When you specify one of these tee types,
CAESAR II uses B31.1 equations.
Pad Thk
Specifies the thickness of the reinforcing pad for reinforced fabricated or full encirclement tees
(intersection type #1 and #17, respectively). The pad thickness is only valid for these
intersection types. If the thickness of a type #1 or type #17 intersection is left blank or the value
entered is zero, the software uses the SIFs for an unreinforced fabricated tee.
In most piping codes, the beneficial effect of the pad thickness is limited to 1.5 times the nominal
thickness of the header. This factor does not apply in BS 806 or Z184, and is 2.5 in the Swedish
piping code.
Ftg Ro
Specifies the fitting outside radius for branch connections. This option is used for reduced
branch connections in the ASME and B31.1 piping codes, Bonney Forge Insert Weldolets, and
for WRC 329 intersection SIF calculations. Configuration options exist to invoke the WRC 329
calculations and to limit the application of the reduced branch connection rules to unreinforced
fabricated tees, sweepolets, weldolets, and extruded welding tees. If omitted, Ftg Ro defaults to
the outside radius of the branch pipe.
CROTCH R
Specifies the crotch radius of the formed lip on an extruded welding tee, intersection type 6. This
is also the intersection weld crotch radius for WRC329 calculations. Specifying this value can
result in a 50% reduction in the stress intensification at the WRC 329 intersection. If you attempt
to reduce the stress riser at a fabricated intersection by guaranteeing that there is a smooth
transition radius from the header to the branch pipe, then you may reduce the resulting stress
intensification by a factor of 2.0.
WELD (D)
Specifies the average circumferential weld mismatch measured at the inside diameter of the
pipe. This value is used for Butt Welds and Tapered transitions. This is the average; not the
maximum mismatch. You must verify that any maximum mismatch requirements are satisfied for
your particular code.
FILLET
Specifies the fillet leg length. This option is used only in conjunction with a socket weld
component. This value is the length of the shorter leg for an unequal leg fillet weld. If a fillet leg
is given, both socket weld types result in the same SIF. See appendix D of the B31 piping codes
for further clarification.
Weld ID
Specifies the weld ID value. The following values are valid.
0 or BLANK - As Welded
1 - Finished/Ground Flush
Used for:
BONNEY FORGE SWEEPOLETS
BONNEY FORGE INSERT WELDOLETS
BUTT WELDS IN THE SWEDISH PIPING CODE
If this value is 1 then the weld is considered to be ground flush on the inside and out and the SIF
is taken as 1.0.
For more information on how input parameters are used to compute SIFs for girth butt welds,
see WELD (D) (on page 133).
B1; Wc
Specifies values that depend upon the code that you are using.
Intersections: B1 = 0.5
B31.1 / B31.3
Defines the weld strength reduction factor (W c) used to reduce the allowable stress for the
sustained load case.
IGE/TD/12
Override the cyclic pressure stress intensification factor Ip(Cyc) if it is different than the code
calculations (calculated according to Table 9, Figure 5, and Figure 7 of the code).
B2
Specifies the primary stress index for the given node on the current element. This entry is only
applicable for ASME Class 2 and 3 piping.
If omitted, B1 and B2 are defaulted as follows:
Intersections: B1=0.5
You can use the SIF(IN) and SIF(OUT) boxes to override the CAESAR II calculated values for
any intersection. Override values only apply for the single element on which they are defined.
SIFs can be calculated for partial intersections and dummy legs.
When IGE/TD/12 is active, the SIF/TEE dialog box changes its appearance to
accommodate specialized SIF parameters. Refer to the supplementary IGE/TD/12
documentation for further information.
B31.1:
Indicates that the tee meets the dimensional criteria of Figure D1 as well as Notes 6a, 6c, 6d,
6e, and 6f. This allows the software to use the branch equation when determining the SIF value
for the tee. Note that this option relies on the setting of the Configuration Options Reduced
Intersection and No RFT / WLT in Reduced Fitting SIFs.
B31.8:
Indicates that the software should use B31.8 Notes 6, 9, or 10, as applicable, when determining
the SIF value for the tee.
1 Tee
2 Joint
3 Qualified Tee
Specifying a tee, a qualified tee, or a joint in the Type box allows CAESAR II to perform the
correct allowable stress calculations.
Select 1 - Tee for the software to use the method specified in the ISO 14692 code for
non-qualified tees.
Select 2 - Joint for CAESAR II to use the calculations specified in the code for joints and
fittings.
Select 3 - Qualified Tee for the software to use the code-specified calculation for qualified
service stress for tees (including the pressure stress multiplier, mpst).
Stresses are only intensified at the element end going to the specified node. For example, if two
pipes frame into node 10, one going from 5 to 10, and the other from 10 to 15 and a stress
intensification factor of 2.0 for node 10 is defined on the element from 5 to 10, then the 10 end of
the element from 5 to 10 has a stress intensification of 2.0 and the 10 end of the element from
10 to 15 has a stress intensification of 1.0.
You can use user-defined stress intensification factors to override code calculated values for
nodes at intersections. For example, let node 40 be an intersection defined by an unreinforced
fabricated tee. The header pipes framing into the intersection go from 35 to 40 and from 40 to
45. The branch pipe framing into the intersection goes from 175 to 40. The code-calculated
values for the stress intensification factors in the header pipes are:
SIF (ii) = 4.50
SIF (io) = 3.75
and in the branch pipe are
SIF (ii) = 6.70
SIF (io) = 5.58
Also assume that finite element analysis of the intersection showed the header stress
intensification factors to be 2.3 and 1.87 respectively and the branch stress intensification
factors to be equal to the code recommended value, that is 6.70 and 5.58. To properly override
the code-calculated stress intensification factors for the header pipes, two pipe elements must
be modified:
35 to 40 Node 40
Type:
SIF (ii): 2.3
SIF (io): 1.87
40 to 15 Node 40
Type:
SIF (ii): 2.3
SIF (io): 1.87
The stress intensification for the branch pipes can be calculated according to the code, so part
of the branch pipe data might appear:
175 to 40 NODE 40
Type: 2 - Unreinforced
SIF (ii):
SIF (io):
If either of the SIF boxes for the header elements going to 40 were left blank, the
code-calculated value would be used in its place. This is only true where code-calculated values
exist along with user-specified values.
If the element from 110 to 115 needs the stress intensification factors for each of its ends is 2.0,
then a part of that element data might appear:
Leaving the out-of-plane stress intensification factor blank implies that it is equal to the in-plane
stress intensification factor. There are no code-calculated values to override these user-input
values.
If you do not specify Torsion SIF (it), Axial SIF (ia), and Pressure SIF (ip), CAESAR II
calculates the values as 1.
The ASME B31.3 code update also introduced using the stress indices in sustained stress
equations.
If you do not specify the In-Plane Index (Ii), then CAESAR II uses the greater value of either
0.75 multiplied by the In-Plane SIF value (ii) or 1.0.
If you do not specify the Out-Plane Index (Io), then CAESAR II uses the greater value of either
of 0.75 multiplied by the Out-Plane SIF (io) or 1.
If you do not specify the Torsion Index (It), Axial Index (Ia), and Pressure Index (Ip),
CAESAR II sets these values to 1.
Currently, the software does not use the Pressure SIF (ip) or Pressure Index (Ip) in the
calculation.
You are not permitted to override code-calculated stress intensification factors for bend
elements unless the Allow User's SIF at Bend option is set to True in the configuration file.
Additionally, bend stress intensification factors supersedes any code-calculated intersection
stress intensification factors for the same node. This characteristic allows you to apply
code-calculated intersection stress intensification factors to dummy legs without disturbing the
normal bend stress intensification factors. The node on the dummy leg, which is also on the
bend curvature, is defined as an intersection on the Intersection SIF Scratchpad. The
intersection stress intensification factors are calculated and can be applied to the dummy leg
end that connects to the bend. Bend stress intensification factors are unchanged.
Stress intensification factors can be calculated for intersections having one, two, or three pipes
framing into it. Where two pipes form a partial intersection, CAESAR II assumes that the larger
pipe is the header and the smaller the branch.
Where one pipe forms a partial intersection, CAESAR II assumes that the intersection is full
sized.
CAESAR II does not calculate stress intensification factors for intersections having more than
three pipes framing into it (for example, a cross, and for non 90-degree branches, such as
lateral intersections).
SIF Scratchpad
View the stress intensification factors calculated by CAESAR II interactively from the Classic
Piping Input dialog box by clicking Environment > Review SIFs at Intersection Nodes or
Intersection SIF scratchpad on the Input Tools toolbar.
View the stress intensification factors at bends from the Classic Piping Input dialog box by
clicking Environment > Review SIFs at Bends or Bend SIF scratchpad on the Input
Tools toolbar.
The SIF scratchpads display after you type in the node number to review when prompted. The
node must be a valid bend node when reviewing SIFs at bends.
You can interactively change any of the data and recalculate the SIFs. This allows you to see
the effect of changing geometries and properties on code stress intensification factors.
CAESAR II allows you to transfer data from the scratchpad back to the actual model.
IGE\TD\12 Requirements
IGE\TD\12 requires different information than the other codes used in CAESAR II. When
IGE\TD\12 is active, the SIFs/Tees Auxiliary field changes to accommodate specialized SIF
parameters. For more information regarding the specialized parameters refer to the text and
figures at the end of this section.
Node
Specifies the node number where the stress intensification exists. CAESAR II displays the To
node of the current element by default. You can type any node in the system, but it is most often
at a pipe intersection or joint.
If the node is at an intersection, CAESAR II calculates SIFs for all pipes going to the intersection
if the intersection Type is specified. You only need to type the intersection type once. CAESAR
II finds all other pipes framing into the intersection and applies the appropriate SIFs.
If the node is at a two-pipe joint, such as a butt weld, CAESAR II calculates SIFs for the two
pipes going to the joint node if the joint Type is specified. You only need to specify the joint type
once. CAESAR II finds the other pipe completing the joint and applies the appropriate SIFs.
If the node is not at an intersection or a joint then, leave the Type box blank and type user
defined SIFs in the SIF(i) and SIF(o) boxes. Entries in the SIF(i) and SIF(o) boxes only apply to
the element on which they are defined.
User defined stress intensification factors must be greater than or equal to one.
CAESAR II calculates and displays code-defined SIFs in the Intersection SIF scratchpad.
Access this scratchpad from the Classic Piping Input dialog box by clicking Environment >
Review SIFs at Intersection Nodes or Intersection SIF scratchpad on the Input Tools
toolbar. You can modify parameters used in the scratchpad so that you can observe the effects
of different geometries and thicknesses. Most changes made in the scratchpad can be
automatically transferred back into the model.
If the node is on any part of the bend curvature then the following applies:
1. You cannot override code calculated SIFs for bends by default. A configuration option exists
to override this default. For more information, see Allow User's SIF at Bend (on page 90). If
you set Allow User's SIF at Bend to True, then you can specify SIFs for bend To nodes.
The SIFs specified in this way apply for the entire bend curvature.
2. CAESAR II applies user-defined SIFs to straight pipe going to points on a bend curvature
regardless of any parameter in the setup file. This option is commonly used to intensify
injector tie-ins at bends, or dummy legs, or other bend attachment-type of supports.
Type
Specifies the type of tees or joints.
Do/r3
Specifies the following terms for each component type:
Forged Tee to BS 1640 - Specifies the Do value. For more information on Do, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 144).
Weldolet - Specifies the r3 value. For more information on r3, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on
page 144).
Drawn/Extruded Tee - Specifies the Do value. For more information on Do, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 144).
Weldoflange - Specifies the r3 value. For more information on r3, see IGE\TD\12 Reference
(on page 144).
T/Th/T'b
Specifies the following terms for each component type:
Forged Tee to BS 1640 - Specifies the T value. For more information on T, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 144).
Weldolet - Specifies the theta value. For more information on theta, see IGE\TD\12 Reference
(on page 144).
Drawn/Extruded Tee - Specifies the T value. For more information on T, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 144).
Weldoflange - Specifies the theta value. For more information on theta, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 144).
Te/Tb
Specifies the following terms for each component type:
Fabricated Tee with Pad - Specifies the Te value. For more information on Te, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 144).
Forged Tee to BS 1640 - Specifies the Tb value. For more information on Tb, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 144).
Weldolet - Specifies the Tb value. For more information on Tb, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on
page 144).
Drawn/Extruded Tee - Specifies the Tb value. For more information on Tb, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 144).
Full Encirclement Tee - Specifies the Te value. For more information on Te, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 144).
Long Weldneck Flange - Specifies the Tb value. For more information on Tb, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 144).
Weldoflange - Specifies the Tb value. For more information on Tb, see IGE\TD\12 Reference
(on page 144).
rp/do
Specifies the following terms for each component type:
Fabricated Tee - Specifies the rp value. For more information on rp, see IGE\TD\12 Reference
(on page 144).
Forged Tee to BS 1640 - Specifies the do value. For more information on do, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 144).
Weldolet - Specifies the rp value. For more information on rp, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on
page 144).
Drawn/Extruded Tee - Specifies the do value. For more information on do, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 144).
Long Weldneck Flange - Specifies the rp value. For more information on rp, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 144).
Weldoflange - Specifies the rp value. For more information on rp, see IGE\TD\12 Reference
(on page 144).
r2/rc
Specifies the following terms for each component type:
Fabricated Tee - Specifies the r2 value. For more information on r2, see IGE\TD\12 Reference
(on page 144).
Forged Tee to BS 1640 - Specifies the rc value. For more information on rc, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 144).
Sweepolet - Specifies the rc value. For more information on rc, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on
page 144).
Weldolet - Specifies the r2 value. For more information on r2, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on
page 144).
Drawn/Extruded Tee - Specifies the rc value. For more information on rc, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 144).
Long Weldneck Flange - Specifies the r2 value. For more information on r2, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 144).
Weldoflange - Specifies the r2 value. For more information on r2, see IGE\TD\12 Reference
(on page 144).
r1/Tc/Lh
Specifies the following terms for each component type:
Fabricated Tee - Specifies the r1 value. For more information on r1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference
(on page 144).
Forged Tee to BS 1640 - Specifies the Tc value. For more information on Tc, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 144).
Sweepolet - Specifies the r1 value. For more information on r1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on
page 144).
Weldolet - Specifies the r1 value. For more information on r1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on
page 144).
Drawn/Extruded Tee - Specifies the Lh value. For more information on Lh, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 144).
Long Weldneck Flange - Specifies the r1 value. For more information on r1, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 144).
Weldoflange - Specifies the r1 value. For more information on r1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference
(on page 144).
L1/Lb
Specifies the following terms for each component type:
Fabricated Tee - Specifies the L1 value. For more information on L1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference
(on page 144).
Weldolet - Specifies the L1 value. For more information on L1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on
page 144).
Drawn/Extruded Tee - Specifies the Lb value. For more information on Lb, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 144).
Long Weldneck Flange - Specifies the L1 value. For more information on L1, see IGE\TD\12
Reference (on page 144).
Weldoflange - Specifies the L1 value. For more information on L1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference
(on page 144).
IGE\TD\12 Reference
Use the figures below to identify the specialized parameters.
Forged Tee
Weldolet
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Weldoflange
Sweepolet
Fabricated Tee
Weld ID
Specifies the weld ID value. The following values are valid.
0 or BLANK - As Welded
1 - Finished/Ground Flush
Used for:
BONNEY FORGE SWEEPOLETS
BONNEY FORGE INSERT WELDOLETS
BUTT WELDS IN THE SWEDISH PIPING CODE
If this value is 1 then the weld is considered to be ground flush on the inside and out and the SIF
is taken as 1.0.
For more information on how input parameters are used to compute SIFs for girth butt welds,
see WELD (D) (on page 133).
Fatigue Class
Overrides the fatigue class calculated according to the IGE/TD/12 Code equations. Any values
selected here apply only to the element on which they have been specified except when entered
on a bend node. In that case, they apply throughout the bend.
Boundary Conditions
The checkboxes in this block open the auxiliary dialog box tabs to collect information on items
which restrain (or impose movement on) the pipe. These items include restraints, hangers,
flexible nozzles or displacements. Though not required, it is recommended that you define such
information on the dialog box which has that point as the From node or To node. This is of
benefit if the data must be located for modification. The auxiliary dialog box tabs allow you to
specify up to four restraints (devices which in some way modify the free motion of the system),
one hanger, one nozzle, or two sets of nodal displacements per element. If needed, you can
define additional conditions for any node on other elements.
Restraints
Indicates that you are supplying restraint data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking the
Restraints check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box tab controls data for up to four restraints for each element. Node
number and restraint types are required. All other information is optional. If you omit the
stiffness, entry defaults to rigid.
You can specify skewed restraints by typing direction cosines with the type, such as X
(1,0,1) for a restraint running at 45 in the X-Z plane.
You can specify as many as four restraints for an element. If you need to specify more than four
restraints on one element, you can place the additional restraints on any other element.
Do not use restraints in the following three situations:
1. Imposed Displacements - Specify displacements for the point using the Displacement
Auxiliary box.
2. Flexible Nozzles - Use the Nozzles Flex check box to open the Nozzles Auxiliary Data
box to input the vessel or tank characteristics required by WRC 297, PD 5500, or API 650 to
calculate local nozzle flexibilities. After these flexibilities have been calculated, CAESAR II
automatically inserts the necessary restraints and flexibilities into the piping model.
3. Hangers program designed or pre-defined spring hangers - Use the Hangers check
box to open the Hanger Auxiliary Data box.
Node
Specifies the node number where the restraint is to act. The node number does not have to be
on the current element.
CNode
Specifies the connecting node. Restraints with connecting nodes can be used to tie one node in
the piping system to any other node in the system. If left blank then the restraint node is tied by
the restraint stiffness to a fixed point in space. If the connecting node is specified then the
restraint node is tied by the restraint stiffness to the connecting node.
In all cases, CNodes associate nodal degrees of freedom. Additionally, CNodes can be used to
geometrically connect different parts of a model graphically. This option is controlled by the
configuration option Connect Geometry through CNodes (on page 65).
Type
Specifies the restraint type. You can select a restraint from the list in the Restraint Auxiliary
box. For more information, see Section 3 of the CAESAR II Applications Guide.
Anchor ANC
Anchor
Specifies an anchor restraint. This type of restraint is defined for all degrees of freedom at the
node.
X, Y, or Z
Specifies translational restraints which can be preceded by a (+) or (-). If you type a sign, it
defines the direction of allowed free displacement along the specified degree-of-freedom. For
example, a +Y restraint is a restraint against movement in the minus -Y direction. It is free to
move in the plus Y direction.
RX, RY, or RZ
Specifies rotational restraints which can be preceded by a (+) or (-). If you type a sign, it defines
the direction of allowed free displacement along the specified degree-of-freedom.
Guide
Specifies a transverse restraint that can be skewed.
LIM
Specifies limit stops. These are axial restraints that can be preceded by a (+) or (-). If you type a
sign, it defines the direction of allowed free displacement along the element longitudinal axis.
X2, Y2, Z2
Specifies bilinear restraints. These are restraints that have two different stiffnesses associated
with them. The stiffness is dependent upon the loading on the restraint. Bilinear restraints can
be preceded by a (+) or a (-).
K2
Specifies the yield stiffness of a bilinear restraint. When the load on the restraint exceeds Fy, the
stiffness on the restraint changes from K1 to K2. CAESAR II treats K2 values of zero as rigid.
Type a value of 1.0 for very small stiffnesses.
Gap
Specifies the following values:
Examples:
TYPE GUI GAP 1/4 ... One quarter in. gap on either side of the guided restraint.
TYPE +Y GAP 3.0 ... Three in. gap below the support that must be closed before the +Y
support begins acting.
TYPE RX GAP 5.0 ... Five degree gap about the X axis about which the pipe may rotate
freely before rotational restraint occurs.
TYPE = XROD YROD ZROD
Len - Specifies the swinging length of the rod or hanger. This is the distance along the restraint
line of action from the restrained node to the pivot point. The restraint swings about the pivot
point. If a CNODE is defined then the restraint swings about the CNODE. Len is a required
entry.
TYPE = X2 Y2 Z2 RX2 RY2 RZ2
K2 - Specifies the yield stiffness of a bilinear restraint. When the load on the restraint exceeds
Fy, the stiffness on the restraint changes from K1 to K2. Type a negative value to model shallow
trench or groove-type pipeline supports. CAESAR II treats K2 values of zero as rigid. Type 1.0
for very small stiffnesses.
TYPE = XSPR YSPR ZSPR
"x" - Specifies the distance traveled along the spring axis before bottom-out occurs. In the case
of a typical YSPR, this is the movement in the negative Y direction before the spring bottoms
out.
TYPE = XSNB YSNB ZSNB
Stif
Specifies stiffness associated with any support, guide, limit stop, rod, or spring that can be
defined as a restraint. If you leave this option blank then the defined restraint is considered rigid.
The default rigid restraint stiffness is 1.0E12.
K1 is the initial stiffness of a bilinear restraint (for example, X2). If the restraint is not rigid, then
you can type any positive stiffness.
Avoid stiffnesses greatly in excess of 1.0E15. If a stiffness value is specified for an anchor, the
stiffness applies for all six degrees of freedom at the anchored node.
Mu
Specifies the following values:
Hangers
Indicates that you are supplying hanger data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
Hangers on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box controls options for hanger installations. You can fully define the hanger
data, or the hanger can be designed by CAESAR II. In this case, two special load cases are run
and the results are used as design parameters to select the springs from the user-specified
catalog.
Node
Specifies the node number to which the hanger is connected.
CNode
Specifies the connecting node number. This value is used only when the other end of the
hanger is to be connected to another point in the system, such as another pipe node.
Design Data
There are two sections on the Hanger auxiliary dialog box.
Design Data - Specifies the hanger data if you need CAESAR II to design the hanger for you.
Predefined Hanger Data - Specifies the hanger data if you know the hanger information.
Hanger Table
Specifies the active hanger table.
The following spring tables are currently included in CAESAR II:
5. Lisega 6. Fronek
Additional design options are invoked if you use the following check boxes.
Extended Range
Cold Load
Hot load centered (if possible)
The Hanger Design Control Data dialog box defaults to the hanger table-specified in the
configuration file.
Extended Load Range Springs - CAESAR II includes the maximum load range to permit the
selection of less expensive variable support hangers in place of constant effort supports when
the spring loads are just outside the manufacturers recommended range. Extended load ranges
are the most extreme ranges on the spring load table. Some manufacturers build double-spring
supports to accommodate this range. Others adjust the top or bottom travel limits to
accommodate either end of the extended table. Make sure that the manufacturer can supply the
spring before you use the maximum ranges. Use of the extended range often eliminates the
need to go to a constant effort support.
Lisega springs do not support an extended range. If you select Extended Range for
a hanger with Lisega springs, CAESAR II returns the standard Lisega spring table and
ranges.
Cold Load Spring Hanger Design - Cold load spring hanger design is a method of designing
the springs in which the hot (or operating) load is supported in the cold (or installed) position of
the piping. This method of spring design offers several advantages over the more usual hot load
design:
Hanger stops are easier to remove.
There is no excessive movement from the neutral position when the system is cold or when
the stops are removed.
Spring loads can be adjusted before the system is brought up to temperature.
Some feel that the cold load approach yields a much more dependable design.
Operating loads on connected equipment are lower in some system configurations. A hot
vertical riser anchored at the bottom turning horizontally into a nozzle connection is a typical
configuration resulting in this load-reduction. The spring to be designed is at the elbow
adjacent to the nozzle. Operating loads are lower because the difference between the hot
and cold loads counters the moment produced by the vertical thermal expansion from the
anchor.
The disadvantages to cold load design are:
In some systems, the loads on rotating equipment may be increased by a value proportional
to the spring rate times the travel in the hot condition.
Most installations are done on a hot load design basis.
Middle of the Table Hanger Design (Hot Load Centered) - Many designers prefer that the hot
load be centered as closely as possible to the middle of the spring table. This provides as much
variability as possible in both directions before the spring bottoms out when the system is hot.
This design was necessary prior to effective computer modeling of piping systems, when the
weights at hangers were approximated by chart methods or calculated by hand. Activating this
option does not guarantee that spring hot loads are at the middle of the spring table, but
CAESAR II makes every effort to move the hot load to this position. The CAESAR II design
algorithm goes to a higher size spring if the design load is closer to the middle of the larger
spring's range, but never switches spring types. This option, when it is effective, can only result
in a one-size larger spring. CAESAR II attempts to move the hot load to the next higher spring
when it is within 10% of the maximum travel range for the spring. If the new spring is not
satisfactory, then CAESAR II uses the old one.
Leave the box blank or set to zero if the Available Space is not an important design criteria.
When the available space is the governing factor in a hanger design, several smaller springs are
typically chosen in place of one large spring.
The Allowable Load Variation value is typed as a percentage. For example, type twenty five
percent as 25.0.
Hanger A
1 0.752 in 730.0 lb
2 0.029 in 560.0 lb
10 0.752 in 730.0 lb
11 0.752 in 730.0 lb
12 0.3905 in 645.0 lb
13 0.752 in 730.0 lb
Hanger B
1 0.032 in 592.0 lb
2 0.733 in 587.0 lb
10 0.032 in 592.0 lb
11 0.733 in 587.0 lb
12 0.3825 in 589.5 lb
13 0.733 in 592.0 lb
The restrained Weight hanger design pass is the first analysis step in the hanger design. It is run
automatically by CAESAR II. The following steps comprise the restrained weight run:
1. Putting rigid Y restraints at each hanger location.
2. Removing anchors and restraints that are to be freed.
3. Running the weight analysis to find the hot hanger loads.
Nonlinear restraints are not freed during hanger design.
Free Code
Specifies the directions in which the anchor or restraint is released. When an anchor or restraint
should be released for the restrained weight run, type the node number for that anchor in the
Free Restraint at Node box and specify the free code describing the directions to be released
in the Free Code box on the same hanger dialog box. The available free codes are as follows:
Free the anchor or restraint in the Y direction only.
Free the anchor or restraint in the Y and X directions only.
Free the anchor or restraint in the Y and Z directions only.
Free all translational degrees of freedom for the anchor or restraint. (X,Y, and Z)
Free all translational and rotational degrees of freedom for the anchor or restraint. (X, Y, Z,
RX, RY, and RZ)
The last option usually results in the highest adjacent hanger loads, but you should only use that
option when the horizontal distance between the hanger and the anchor is within about 4 pipe
diameters.
Spring Rate
Specifies the spring rate.
Nozzles
Indicates that you are supplying nozzle data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
Nozzle Flex on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box tab controls options for flexible nozzle connections. When you type
values in this dialog box tab, CAESAR II automatically calculates the flexibilities and adds them
to the active element. CAESAR II calculates nozzle loads according to WRC 297, API 650 or BS
5500 criteria.
WRC 297
Performs nozzle flexibility calculations according to WRC 297.
When you type a nozzle node number, CAESAR II scans the current input data for the node and
fills the corresponding diameter and wall thickness in the Nozzle Outer Diameter and Nozzle
Wall Thickness boxes.
Current nozzle flexibility calculations are in accordance with the Welding Research Council
Bulletin No. 297, issued August 1984 for cylinder-to-cylinder intersections.
A valid nozzle node has the following properties:
Only a single element connects to the nozzle node.
The nozzle node is not restrained and does not have displacements specified for any of its
degrees of freedom.
Computed nozzle flexibilities are automatically included in the piping system analysis through
software-generated restraints. This generation is completely automatic. Six restraints are
established for each flexible nozzle input.
If you define a vessel node number, then the vessel node acts like a connecting node for each
of the six restraints. Vessel nodes are subject to the same restrictions shown above for nozzle
nodes.
You should not put a restrainer on an element between the nozzle node and any
specified vessel node. CAESAR II creates the required connectivity from the nozzle flexibility
data and any user-generated stiffnesses between these two points erroneously add to the
nozzle stiffnesses.
After the error checking, CAESAR II displays all useful WRC curve data on the Errors and
Warnings dialog box. You can use these values to define the illustrated nozzles in the WRC
297 bulletin. It is sometimes helpful to know just how close a particular nozzle is to one of the
several asymptotic limits, or to a curve boundary.
You can see the WRC 297 computed data only during the error checking process.
Nozzle Node
Specifies the node number located at the nozzle intersection with the vessel shell. There should
only be a single piping element connected to this node. There should be no restraints acting on
the node. The nozzle element must be perpendicular to the vessel shell.
You can model hillside nozzles and latrolets. To do this, the first (and possibly very short) nozzle
element that comes from the vessel must be perpendicular to the vessel to keep the local
stiffness properly oriented. The second, longer nozzle element can then go off on the true
centerline of the nozzle.
API 650
Performs nozzle flexibility calculations according to API 650.
CAESAR II can also calculate nozzle flexibilities according to Appendix P of API 650, "Design of
Carbon Steel Atmospheric Oil Storage Tanks."
Nozzle Node
Specifies the node number located at the nozzle intersection with the vessel shell. There should
only be a single piping element connected to this node. There should be no restraints acting on
the node. The nozzle element must be perpendicular to the vessel shell.
You can model hillside nozzles and latrolets. To do this, the first (and possibly very short) nozzle
element that comes from the vessel must be perpendicular to the vessel to keep the local
stiffness properly oriented. The second, longer nozzle element can then go off on the true
centerline of the nozzle.
Nozzle Height
Specifies the height from the centerline of the nozzle to the base of the tank.
Fluid Height
Specifies the liquid level of the fluid in the storage tank. This value must be greater than the
nozzle height.
Fluid SG
Specifies the specific gravity of the stored liquid. This value is unitless.
Temperature Change
Specifies the change in temperature from ambient to the maximum that the tank normally
experiences. For example, if the maximum summertime temperature is 107F, then the
temperature change would be 107 70 = 37, where 70 is the default ambient temperature
defined in configuration and environment. You would type 37 in this box. If this value is left
blank, the software assumes a value of zero.
PD 5500
Performs nozzle flexibility calculations according to PD 5500.
CAESAR II can also calculate nozzle flexibilities according to Appendix G of the PD 5500
Specification for Unfired Fusion Welded Pressure Vessels.
Nozzle Node
Specifies the node number located at the nozzle intersection with the vessel shell. There should
only be a single piping element connected to this node. There should be no restraints acting on
the node. The nozzle element must be perpendicular to the vessel shell.
You can model hillside nozzles and latrolets. To do this, the first (and possibly very short) nozzle
element that comes from the vessel must be perpendicular to the vessel to keep the local
stiffness properly oriented. The second, longer nozzle element can then go off on the true
centerline of the nozzle.
Displacements
Indicates that you are supplying displacement data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
Displacements on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box tab controls imposed displacements for up to two nodes for each
element. If a displacement value is entered for any vector, this direction is considered to be fixed
for any other nonspecified vectors.
Leaving a direction blank for all nine vectors models the system as free to move in that
direction. Specify 0.0 to indicate that the system is fully restrained in that direction.
Node
Specifies the node number where the displacement is defined. Do not place a restraint at this
node.
Flange Checks
Indicates that you are supplying flange data to evaluate an in-line flange. Select or clear this
option by double-clicking the Flange check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
You can read the values for the Flange Class/Grade and Gasket Diameter, G boxes from a file
if you select ASME - 2003 from the Flange Pressure Ratings dialog box. The G values are
located in the ASME-2003.G text file in the system folder under the application data folder.
Flange evaluation is based on a specific load case temperature. To evaluate the flanges in a
model, use the Load Case Options tab of the Static Load Case Editor to specify to which
operating temperature the flanges should be evaluated.
Flange evaluation can be performed for individual load cases and for ABS and MAX load
combination cases. For more information, see Combination Method (on page 540).
Specifies whether to evaluate the flanges using the Kellogg Equivalent Pressure Method or
the ASME B&PVC Section III Subsection NC-3658.3 method.
Peq
Evaluate the flanges using the Kellogg Equivalent Pressure Method.
Peq = 16M/()G3 + 4F/()G2 + PD Pressure Rating
Where:
Peq = equivalent pressure (for checking against flange rating)
M = bending moment on flange
G = diameter of effective gasket reaction
F = axial force on flange
PD = design pressure
NC-3658.3
Evaluate the flanges using the ASME B&PVC Section III Subsection NC-3658.3 method.
S = 36,000 * Mfs / (CAb * 3125) Min(Sy, 36000) non-occasional load case
S = 36,000 * Mfd / (CAb * 3125) 2.0 * Min(Sy, 36000) occasional load case
Where (note that the constants 36,000 and 3125 should be 248.22 and 21.6 in standard SI
units):
S = flange stress
Mfs = bending or torsional moment (whichever is greater) acting on the flange, developed
during a non-occasional load case
Mfd = bending or torsional moment (whichever is greater) acting on the flange, developed
during an occasional load case
Sy = yield strength of flange material at design temperature; (where Sy, given in psi, shall
not be taken as greater than 36,000 psi)
C = bolt circle diameter
Ab = total cross sectional area of bolts
PD = design pressure
Flange Class/Grade
Displays the flange class and material grade. Typically, flanges are identified by pressure class
and material grade, but you can type anything in this box. If the flange Temperature-Pressure
Rating data is read in from a file, then CAESAR II automatically builds a flange name made up
of the File Name, the Pressure Class, and the Material Class.
Peq Method:
Specify the diameter at the location of the gasket load reaction. From ASME Section VIII,
Division 1, Appendix 2, (except as noted in sketch (1) of Fig 2-4), G is defined as (see Table
2-5.2):
when b0 is less than or equal to 1/4, G equals the mean diameter of the gasket contact face
when b0 is greater than 1/4, G equals the outside diameter of the gasket contact face less
2b.
When using the Peq method with the Stoomwezen Piping Code, use the bolt circle
diameter instead of the gasket load reaction diameter (see chapter D0701 of the Code RToD).
The results of this Peq Method are considered by Stoomwezen to be conservative.
NC-3658 Method:
Specify the bolt circle diameter. This value is the diameter of the circle that passes through the
bolt centers.
Flange evaluation is based on a specific load case temperature. To evaluate the flanges
in a model, use the Load Case Options tab of the Static Load Case Editor to specify the
operating temperature to which the flanges should be evaluated.
Temperature-Pressure Table
Specifies temperature and pressure values. Use this table to define the flange
Temperature-Pressure rating as a function of temperature for a particular material grade. You
can type up to 24 temperature-pressure pairs. These values must be typed in ascending
temperature order.
Flange evaluation is based on a specific load case temperature. To evaluate the flanges
in a model, use the Load Case Options tab of the Static Load Case Editor to specify to which
operating temperature the flanges should be evaluated.
To illustrate this procedure, consider the limits defined for a nozzle displayed below:
The data above specifies the nozzle limits and how the resulting loads (from the analysis) are
compared to the limits. After the analysis has been performed and the results are available, you
can select the specific load case the nozzle must be evaluated against as well as the Nozzle
Check report. For more information on the Nozzle Check report see the Equipment Report.
Nozzle Limit Check is a first pass at qualifying the equipment nozzles. This is a simple
check based on the limits defined on this dialog box. This screening is not a substitute for the
more rigorous checks of the actual equipment standards.
Node
Specifies the node number representing the equipment nozzle to be checked. The node should
have a restraint or a displacement in the CAESAR II model, because this node represents an
equipment nozzle.
Comparison Method
Specifies the method used to compare the actual nozzle loads to the defined limits. Available
choices are:
Absolute - Each load is compared directly to the corresponding limit. That is, FX to
FX_allowable, FY to FY_allowable, and so on.
|Fa| |Fal|
|Fb| Fbl|
|Fc| |Fcl|
|Ma| |Mal|
|Mb| |Mbl|
|Mc| |Mcl|
SRSS - The square root sum of the squares (SRSS) of each load divided by the
corresponding allowable is compared to 1.0.
Forces
and
Moments
Unity Check - The sum of the three forces and three moments, each divided by their
respective allowables is compared to 1.0.
and
Ref Vector X, Y, Z
Specifies the three components or direction cosines of the reference vector. The reference
vector is used with the current element orientation to define the local coordinate system ABC for
this equipment check. See Axis B, in the Forces - Moments (on page 186) fields. The vector
must be perpendicular to the current pipe element. This vector need not be unity.
Examples:
( 0, 1, 0 ) - the reference vector is in the global "Y" direction
( 1, 0, 0 ) - the reference vector is in the global "X" direction
( 0.7071, 0, 0.7071 ) - the reference vector is skewed 45 degrees in the global X-Z plane.
Forces - Moments
Specifies the three components of the force and the three components of the moment for the
load limits. The load limits are based on the local coordinate system ABC, where: axis A is
defined by the current element (From to To is positive), axis B is defined by the reference
vector, and axis C is the cross product of A and B (the right hand rule). For more information on
the use of these limits (Fal, Fbl, Fcl, Mal, Mbl, Mcl), see Comparison Method (on page 185).
A - Pipe/nozzle axis
B - Major equipment axis (the longitudinal direction of a vessel, or the pump shaft direction.)
C - Other perpendicular direction.
Loading Conditions
The check boxes in this block allow you to define loadings acting on the pipe. These loads may
be individual forces or moments acting at discrete points, distributed uniform loads (which can
be specified on force per unit length, or gravitational body forces), or wind loadings (wind
loadings are entered by specifying a wind shape factorthe loads themselves are specified
when building the load cases. The uniform load and the wind shape factor check boxes are
unchecked on subsequent input screens. This does not mean that the loads were removed from
these elements; instead, this implies that the loads do not change on subsequent screens.
You can specify uniform loads in g-values by setting a parameter in the Special
Execution Options. For more information, see Configuration and Environment (on page 45).
Forces/Moments
Indicates that you are supplying force and moment data. Select or clear this option by
double-clicking the Forces/Moments check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary database tab controls imposed forces or moments for up to two nodes per
element. You can use up to nine force vectors.
Node
Specifies the node number where the forces and moments act.
Uniform Loads
Indicates that you are supplying uniform load data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
the Uniform Loads check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary database tab controls up to three uniform load vectors. These uniform loads are
applied to the entire current element, as well as all subsequent elements in the model, until
explicitly changed or zeroed out.
The uniform load data is distributive and applies to current and all following elements until you
change it.
Assuming uniform loading in F/L, a snow load of 8.0 pounds per foot (assuming units of pounds
per inch in a Y-up coordinate system) could be specified as follows:
Y -8/12
or may be specified:
Y -.6667
Assuming uniform load in Gs, your entries of X = 1.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0 represent a 1.0g load on
the piping system in the horizontal X direction. Your entries of X = 0.0, Y = -1.0, Z = 0.0
represent a 1.0g load in the minus Y direction, and is exactly equal to the pipe weight load in
Y-up coordinate system.
Uniform load in Gs is used most often for static earthquake loadings.
You can activate uniform loads in Gs by selecting the Uniform load in Gs check box
using the Environment > Special Execution Parameters command on the Classic Piping
Input dialog box.
in G's, in F/L
Indicates the unit of the uniform load.
Wind Loads
Indicates that you are supplying wind load data.
Wind load data is distributive and applies to the current and all following elements until you
change it.
Wave Loads
Indicates that you are supplying wave load data.
Wave load data is distributive and applies to current and all following elements until you change
it.
Drag Coefficient, Cd
Specifies the drag coefficient as recommended by API RP2A. Typical values range from 0.6 to
1.20. Type 0.0 to calculate the drag coefficient based on particle velocities.
Lift Coefficient, Cl
Specifies the lift coefficient. This coefficient accounts for wave lift which is the force
perpendicular to both the element axis and the particle velocity vector. Type a value of 0.0 to
calculate the added lift coefficient based on particle velocities.
Marine Growth
Specifies the thickness of any marine growth adhering to the external pipe wall. The software
increases the pipe diameter experiencing wave loading by twice this value.
Off
Indicates that you do not want either wind or wave loads on the current and all following
elements until you change it.
Materials
CAESAR II requires the specification of the pipe materials elastic modulus, Poissons ratio,
density, and (in most cases) expansion coefficient. The software provides a database containing
the parameters for many common piping materials. This information is retrieved by picking a
material from the list, by typing the material number, or by typing the entire material name and
then picking it from the match list.
The coefficient of expansion does not appear on the dialog box, but you can review it during
error checking.
These material properties carry forward from one element to the next during the design session
so you only need to type values for those elements in which a change occurs.
Double-click >> to display the Edit Materials dialog box.
Material
Displays the material name. Materials are specified either by name or number. All available
material names and their CAESAR II material numbers are displayed in the list. Because this list
is quite long, typing a partial material name (such as A106) allows you to select from matching
materials.
Numbers 1-17 corresponds to the generic materials without code allowable stresses.
Material 18 represents the cold spring element for cut short.
Material 19 represents the cold spring element for cut long.
Material 20 is used to define Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe.
Material 21 is for user-defined material.
When you select a material from the database, the physical properties as well as the allowable
stresses are obtained and placed in the dialog box.
If you change the temperature or piping code later, these allowable stress values are
automatically updated.
For user-defined material, enter the corresponding properties.
Allowable Stress
Indicates that you are supplying allowable stress data. Select or clear this option by
double-clicking the Allowable Stress check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box tab is used to select the piping code and to enter any data required for
the code check. Allowable stresses are automatically updated for material, temperature and
code if available in the Material Database.
The Allowable Stress Auxiliary changes according to the piping code. It incorporates piping
codes with their associated inputs. Press F1 to display the help screen to be sure that you
correctly interpret each new input data cell.
Allowable stress data is distributive and applies to current and all following elements until
you change it.
Click Fatigue Curves to specify material fatigue curve data. The Material Fatigue Curve dialog
box displays. Type stress versus cycle data with up to 8 points per curve.
Code
Specifies the piping code. CAESAR II uses B31.3 by default. You can change this default setting
in the configuration. The following table lists the piping codes. You can find their current
publication dates in the CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide.
B31.5 RCC-M C
B31.8 RCC-M D
B31.9 B31.11
EN-13480 PD 8010-1
HPGSL PD 8010-2
JPI
The following topics discuss each of the input data cells. For more information about code
compliance considerations, see Technical Discussions (on page 883).
SC
Specifies the cold stress value. Typically, this is the cold allowable stress for the specific
material taken directly from the governing piping code. CAESAR II fills this box automatically
after you select the material and piping code. The value of SC is usually divided by the
longitudinal weld efficiency (Eff) before being used. See the notes that follow for the specific
piping code.
B31.1 - Allowable stress tables in Appendix A include the longitudinal weld joint efficiencies
where applicable. Do not use these efficiencies for flexibility stress calculations. If the joint
efficiency (Eff) is given on this dialog box, then CAESAR II divides the SC by the joint efficiency
before using it in the allowable stress equations.
B31.3 - Values from tables in Appendix A do not include the joint efficiency. The Eff value
should be zero, blank, or one. The 1980 version of B31.3 included the longitudinal weld joint
efficiencies as part of the tables in Appendix A. If you are using this version of the code, then
you should type a value for Eff in the appropriate box on this dialog box.
B31.4, B31.4 Chapter IX - Not used. The only stress value in B31.4 is the yield stress taken
from Table 1 in the appendix. For more information, see Sy (on page 202).
B31.5 - Values from tables in Appendix A do not include the joint efficiency. The value of Eff
should be zero, blank, or one.
B31.8 - Su, the specified minimum ultimate tensile strength.
B31.8 Chapter VIII - Not used. The only stress value in B31.8 is the yield stress taken from
Appendix D. For more information, see Sy (on page 202).
B31.9 - SC is taken directly from I-1. If you define a value for Eff, the software only uses it in the
minimum wall thickness check.
B31.11 - Not used. The only stress value used in B31.11 is the yield stress.
ASME NC and ND - SC is taken directly from Appendix I. If you define a value for Eff, the
software ignores it.
Navy 505 - There is no mention of joint efficiency in the 505 specification; however, it is implied
in Footnote 1 of Table TIIA. If a joint efficiency is given, then CAESAR II divides SC by the joint
efficiency before using it in the allowable stress equations. Eff should be zero, blank, or one.
CAN Z662 - Not used. The only stress value in Z184 is the yield stress specified in the
standards or specification under which the pipe was purchased. For more information, see Sy
(on page 202).
BS 806 - 0.2% of the proof stress at room temperature from Appendix E. Eff is not used in BS
806. If you define a value for Eff, the software ignores it.
Swedish Method 1 - Not used. Method 1 only uses the yield or creep rupture stress at
temperature (SHn and Fn respectively on this dialog box). Eff is used, but is the circumferential
weld joint efficiency and has a different meaning.
Swedish Method 2 - SC is the allowable stress at room temperature from Appendix 2. Eff is not
used. If you define a value for Eff, the software ignores it.
B31.1 (1967) - SC is the allowable stress at room temperature from the tables in Appendix A.
These tables include the longitudinal weld joint efficiencies where applicable. Do not use these
efficiencies for flexibility stress calculations. If you define a value for Eff, then CAESAR II divides
the SC by the joint efficiency before using it in the allowable stress equations.
Stoomwezen (1989) - SC is the yield stress at room temperature. This value is referred to as
Re in the code.
RCC-M C, D - SC is taken from the Appendix. Eff is not used. If you define a value for Eff, the
software ignores it.
CODETI - This is famb from the code. Eff is not used. If you define a value for Eff, the software
ignores it.
Norwegian - This is f1 from the code. Eff is not used for longitudinal joint efficiency.
BS 7159 - Not used. Design stress is typed in the SH boxes.
UKOO - Not used. Design stress (in the hoop direction) is typed in the SH boxes.
IGE/TD/1 - Not used.
DN - Not used.
EN-13480 - SC is the basic allowable stress at minimum metal temperature as defined in
Section 12.1.3.
GPTC/Z380 - Not used.
PD 8010-1 - Not used.
PD 8010-2 - Not used.
ISO 14692 - SC is used in a different way. See reference for ISO 14692.
HPGSL - Not used.
JPI - Not used.
Gas (non-sour)
HVP
LVP
Class 1 - Location areas containing ten or fewer dwelling units intended for human
occupancy
Class 2 - Location areas containing 11 to 46 dwelling units intended for human occupancy
OR
buildings with more than 20 persons
outside areas with more than 20 persons
industrial installations
Class 3 - Location areas with more than 46 dwelling units intended for human occupancy
OR institutions where rapid evacuation may be difficult
Class 4 - Location areas where buildings intended for human occupancy have 4 or more
stories.
F2 = T - The temperature derating factor, is obtained from Table 4.4
150 0.97
180 0.93
200 0.91
230 0.87
F3 - F9 - Not used.
CAN Z662 Chapter 11 -
F1 - Not used.
F2 = T - Temperature derating factor obtained from Table 4.4
F3 = - Design factor for Condition A from Table 11.1.
F4 = - Design factor for Condition B from Table 11.1.
F5 - F9 - Not used.
BS 806 - Mean stress to failure in design life at design temperature. F1, F2, ... F9. This value
corresponds to the nine possible thermal states.
FDBR - Identical to B31.1,unless you type the expansion coefficients directly instead of
temperatures. In that case, the software cannot determine Ehot. In this case, type a value of 1.0
in the FAC box and use these boxes to specify the product of f * Ehot / Ecold for each
temperature case.
SWEDISH METHOD 1 - Creep rupture stress at temperature. F1, F2 ... F9. This value
corresponds to the nine possible thermal states.
STOOMWEZEN - Creep related material properties as follows:
F1 = Rrg - Average creep stress to produce 1% permanent set after 100,000 hours at
temperature (vm).
F2 = Rmg - Average creep tensile stress to produce rupture after 100,000 hours at
temperature (vm).
F3 = Rmmin - Minimum creep tensile stress to produce rupture after 100,000 hours at
temperature (vm).
BS 7159 - Fatigue factor Kn. This value is used inversely compared to other codes so that its
value is greater than 1.0. Kn is calculated as follows:
Kn = 1 + 0.25(As/sn) (log10(n) - 3)
Where:
As = stress range during fatigue cycle
n = Maximum stress during fatigue cycle
n = number of stress cycles during design life
UKOOA - Ratio r from the material UKOOA idealized allowable stress envelope. This ratio is
defined as sa(0:1)/sa(2:1) as shown on the figure below. One value should be given for each of
the operating temperature cases.
IGE/TD/12 - UTS value.
EN-13480 - Stress range reduction factor taken from Table 12.1.3-1 (which matches the B31.1
table above), or computed from equation 12.1.3-4. You can specify the number of cycles in this
box for EN-13480. This allows CAESAR II to compute the cyclic reduction factor according to
equation 12.1.3-4.
GPTC/Z380 - Not used.
PD-8010 (Part 1 & Part 2) - Not used.
ISO 14692 F is used in a different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.
HPGSL - Stress range reduction factor at design temperature.
JPI - Stress range reduction factor at design temperature.
Eff
Specifies the longitudinal weld joint efficiency. The field changes according to the current piping
code.
B31.1, B31.1-1967, B31.5 - Allowable stress tables include longitudinal weld joint efficiencies
where applicable. If Eff is specified, then values for SC and SH are divided by Eff before they
are used in the flexibility calculations. Eff is ignored in the minimum wall calculation.
B31.3, B31.4, B31.8, B31.8 Chapter VIII, B31.9, B31.11, NAVY 505, Z662 (J), BS 806 (e),
CODETI (z), FDBR (vl), GPTC/Z380 - Allowable stress or yield stress tables do not include
longitudinal weld joint efficiencies. Eff is ignored for the flexibility calculations. SH is multiplied
by Eff when calculating the minimum wall thickness.
B31.4 Chapter IX, ASME NC, ASME ND, RCCM-C, RCCM-D - Ignored for both flexibility and
minimum wall thickness calculations. The box is disabled for these codes.
Swedish Method 1, Swedish Method 2, Norwegian TBK 5-6 - Circumferential joint factor z
and is used in the calculation of the code stresses rather than in the calculation of the
allowables. This applies to both flexibility or minimum wall thickness.
Stoomwezen - Cyclic reduction factor referred to as Cf in the code. CAESAR II does not
consider weld joint efficiency for this code.
BS 7159 - Ratio of the hoop modulus to the axial modulus of elasticity Eh/Ea. The software uses
a default value of 1.0, as though the material is isotropic if you leave this box blank.
UKOOA - Replace this box with f2. This is the system design factor. The value is typically 0.67.
IGE/TD/12 - Replace this box with Dfac. This is the system design factor (f) as described in
Table 2 of the IFE/TD/12 code. The value must be 0.3, 0.5, and 0.67.
DNV - Replaces this box with usage factor Ns (pressure yielding) from Tables C1 or C2. The
value must be between 0.77 and 0.96.
EN-13480 - Ignored for the flexibility calculations. SH is multiplied by Eff when calculating the
minimum wall thickness.
PD-8010 Part 1 - Weld joint factor used in determining the allowable hoop stress. See Section
6.4.3.1 for details.
PD-8010 Part 2 - Not used.
ISO 14692 Eff is used in different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.
Sy
Specifies the yield stress. CAESAR II fills the box automatically after you select the material and
piping code. The field changes according to the current piping code, and is generally used for
the transmission and non-US piping codes.
B31.1 - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
B31.3 - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
B31.4, B31.4 Chapter IX - Used for the allowable stress determination.
B31.5 - Used to satisfy the requirements of Paragraph 523.2.2.f.4. This paragraph addresses
ferrous materials in piping systems between -20F and -150F. The value typed here should be
the quantity (40% of the allowable) as detailed in the Code. When Sy is defined, the OPE case
is considered a stress case. This value is the allowable reported in the output report. The
computed operating stress includes all longitudinal components and ignore torsion.
B31.8, B31.8 Chapter VIII - Specified minimum yield stress.
B31.9 - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
B31.11 - Specified minimum yield stress.
ASME Sect III Class 2 and 3 - Basic Material Yield Strength at design temperature for use in
Eqn. 9 for consideration of Level A and B service limits. Level C and Level D service limits must
be satisfied in separate runs by adjusting the value for the occasional factor in the CAESAR II
configuration file. If the occasional factor is set to 1.2, the allowable stress is the minimum of 1.2
x 1.5 SH or 1.5 SY. If the factor is 1.5, the allowable is the minimum of 1.5 x 1.5 SH or 1.8 SY. If
the factor is 2.0, the allowable is the minimum of 2.0 x 1.5 SH or 2.0 SY. To satisfy the code,
replace SH with SM for the latter two.
Navy 505 - Not used.
CAN Z662 - Minimum yield strength taken from the standards or specifications under which the
pipe was purchased or according to clause 4.3.3.
BS 806 - Sustained stress limit. The lower of 0.8 X 0.2% Proof stress value or the creep rupture
design stress value defined in Appendix A under cold, or any other, operating condition. See
17.2(c)
Swedish Method 1 - Not used. Type the yield stress at temperature in the respective SHn
boxes for the up to nine possible thermal states.
Swedish Method 2 - Ultimate tensile strength at room temperature.
B31.1 (1967) - Not used.
Stoomwezen (1989) - Tensile strength at room temperature. This value is referred to as Rm in
the code.
RCC-M C, D - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
CODETI - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
Norwegian - Allowable stress at 7000 load cycles, RS, from Code Table 10.2. If you do not type
a value, then this factor is not considered to control the expansion stress allowable.
FDBR - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
BS 7159 - Not used.
UKOOA - Not used.
IGE/TD/12 - Minimum yield stress (SMYS).
DnV - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
EN-13480 - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
GPTC/Z380 - Minimum yield stress.
PD-8010 Part 1 - Minimum yield stress.
PD-8010 Part 2 - Minimum yield stress.
ISO-14692 - Sy is used in a different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.
HPGSL - Not used.
JPI - Not used.
SYa
Specifies the specified minimum yield or stated proof stress of the pipe material at room
temperature. This is also referred to as SMYS or SY.
If you do not enter a value, the software takes the value from the Material Database if
that value is available and applicable.
SY (c)
Specifies the minimum yield point or 0.2% endurance strength at room temperature.
Ksd
Material shakedown factor described in Table 4 of the IGE/TD/12 code. Typical values are:
Carbon Steel: 1.8
Austenitic Steel: 2.0
UTSa
Specifies the ultimate tensile strength of the pipe material corresponding to the specified
ambient temperature.
UTS (c)
Specifies the minimum tensile strength at room temperature.
DFac
Specifies the system design factor (f) as described in Table 2 of the IGE/TD/12 code. Its value
must be 0.3, 0.5, and 0.67.
If you do not enter a value, the software takes the value from the Material Database if
that value is available and applicable.
Fac
Specifies the multiplication factor. The field changes according to the current piping code, and is
generally used for the transmission and non-US piping codes.
B31.1 - Not used.
B31.3 - Not used.
B31.4 - Indicates whether the pipe is restrained, such as long or buried, or unrestrained.
The equation for pipe under complete axial restraint is:
Stress = (Fac) x abs[ E(T2-T1) + (1-) Shoop ] + (SE + SL)(1-Fac)
Where:
E = elastic modulus
= thermal expansion coefficient per degree
T2 = operating temperature
T1 = ambient temperature
= Poisson's ratio
Shoop = hoop stress in the pipe.
SE = expansion stress due to bending
SL = sustained stress due to pressure.
Fac should be 1.0, 0.0, or 0.001. This value should be one for pipe under complete axial
restraint. This value should be one when the pipe is fully restrained, such as buried for a long
distance. The default value for Fac is 0.0. When Fac is 0.001, this indicates to CAESAR II that
the pipe is buried but that the soil supports have been modeled. This causes the hoop stress
component, rather than the longitudinal stress, to be added to the operating stresses if the axial
stress is compressive.
B31.4 Chapter IX - F1, hoop stress design factor, according to Table A402.3.5(a) of B31.4.
Appropriate values are 0.72 for pipelines or 0.60 for platform piping and risers.
B31.5 - Not used.
B31.8 - Construction design factor from Table 841.114B.
D (CLASS 4) Multi-Story Buildings are prevalent, traffic is heavy, and 0.40 (0.4 defaults if
where there may be numerous other utilities underground. left blank)
B31.8 Chapter VIII - F1, Hoop stress design factor, according to Table A842.22 of B31.8.
Appropriate values are 0.72 for pipelines or 0.50 for platform piping and risers.
B31.9 - Not used.
B31.11 - Indicates whether the pipe is restrained, such as long or buried, or unrestrained.
The equation for pipe under complete axial restraint is:
Stress = (Fac) x abs[ E(T2-T1) + (1-) Shoop ] + (SE + SL)(1-Fac)
Where:
E = elastic modulus
= thermal expansion coefficient per degree
T2 = operating temperature
T1 = ambient temperature
= Poisson's ratio
Shoop = hoop stress in the pipe.
SE = expansion stress due to bending
SL = sustained stress due to pressure.
Fac should be 1.0, 0.0, or 0.001. This value should be one for pipe under complete axial
restraint. This value should be one when the pipe is fully restrained, such as buried for a long
distance. The default value for Fac is 0.0. When Fac is 0.001, this indicates to CAESAR II that
the pipe is buried but that the soil supports have been modeled. This causes the hoop stress
component, rather than the longitudinal stress, to be added to the operating stresses if the axial
stress is compressive.
ASME Sect III, Class 2 and 3 - Not used.
B31.1 (1967) - Not used.
Navy 505 - Not used
CAN Z662 - Indicates whether the pipe is restrained, such as long or buried, or unrestrained.
The equation for pipe under complete axial restraint is:
Stress = (Fac) x abs[ E(T2-T1) + (1-) Shoop ] + (SE + SL)(1-Fac)
Where:
E = elastic modulus
= thermal expansion coefficient per degree
T2 = operating temperature
T1 = ambient temperature
= Poisson's ratio
Shoop = hoop stress in the pipe.
Pvar
Specifies the pressure variance. The field changes according to the current piping code.
ASME and RCC-M C, D - Variance in the pressure between operating and peak to be used as
the component in equation 9 above that found from B1 * P * Do / 2tn. Do not type the peak
pressure for Pvar. Type the difference between the operating pressure and the peak pressure.
Swedish Power Code, Methods 1 & 2 - Beta for the Seff calculation. If not given, this value
defaults to 10%. Type ten percent as 10.0. Values must be between 0.1 and 25.0. Values
specified outside of this range are automatically adjusted to the outer limit of the allowed range.
The definition for beta, as given in the Swedish piping code in section 5.6.2.1, is the "maximum
allowable minus the tolerance as a percentage of the nominal wall thickness".
Stoomwezen - Cm coefficient in the code whose value is usually 1.0.
Norwegian - Difference between design pressure P (in equation 10.7) and peak pressure
Pmaks (in equation 10.8).
The table that follows defines when each of these parameters is valid input for the piping code
(V) or not required (N).
DNV - Usage factor N for equivalent stress check from Table C4. Values must be between 0.77
and 1.00.
PD-8010 Part 1 - Design factor as discussed in Section 6.4.1.2. Typical limits on this value are
0.3 and 0.72, depending on categories and class locations. This design factor determines the
allowable hoop stress. This value has no units for PD-8010 Part 1.
PD-8010 Part 2 - Design factor as discussed in Section 6.4.1 Table 2. Type the value of fd for
the hoop stress evaluation. This value should be either 0.6 (riser/land fall) or 0.72
(seabed/tie-in). CAESAR II determines the appropriate fd values for the equivalent stress from
Table 2. This value has no units for PD-8010 Part 2.
This value is taken from the Material Database, if available and applicable, unless you
enter a value.
ISO 14692 - Pvar is used in a different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.
Fatigue Curves
Displays the Material Fatigue Curves dialog box.
Composition/Type
Specifies the material composition of the pipe.
Aluminum - Aluminum alloy or alloy steel containing 9% nickel. For use at temperatures
lower than room temperature.
Austenite - Austenite stainless steel and high nickel contained allows. For use at
temperatures higher than room temperature.
Others - Any material other than aluminum or austenite.
al(0:1)
Specifies the long term axial stress at 0:1 stress ratio. Typically, the axial stress (hoop stress is
0 at this point) is lower than the axial stress al(2:1) (hoop stress is double the axial stress at this
point). The ratio of these stresses, called bi-axial stress ratio, can range between 0.5 and 0.75
for plain pipe depending on the winding angle and specific pipe type.
al(1:1)
Specifies the long term axial stress at 1:1 stress ratio. According to ISO 14962,, hoop stress has
the same value as that for axial stresses at a 1:1 stress ratio, that is hl(1:1)=al(1:1). However,
CAESAR II allows you to type different values for al(1:1) and hl(1:1) for a generalized failure
profile. In this case, CAESAR II displays a warning message in the Error Checker.
If you leave both the al(1:1) and hl(1:1) boxes blank, CAESAR II assumes that a simplified
envelope is used for plain pipe.
hl(1:1)
Specifies the long term hoop stress at 1:1 stress ratio. According to ISO 14692, hoop stress has
the same value as that for axial stresses at a 1:1 stress ratio. That is, hl(1:1) = al(1:1). However,
CAESAR II allows a different value for al(1:1) and hl(1:1) for a generalized failure profile. In this
case, CAESAR II displays a warning message displays in the Error Checker.
If you specify al(1:1) and leave hl(1:1) blank, CAESAR II assumes that hl(1:1) is equal to al(1:1),
and displays a warning message in the Error Checker. For more information, see al(1:1) (on
page 211).
al(2:1)
Specifies the long term axial stress at a 2:1 stress ratio. According to ISO 14962, hoop stress is
twice the axial stress at a 2:1 ratio, that is hl(2:1) = 2 * al(2:1). This is a natural condition when a
pressurized pipe is enclosed at both ends. However CAESAR II allows you to type different
values for hl(2:1) 2 * al(2:1). In this case, CAESAR II displays a warning message in the Error
Checker.
hl(2:1)
Specifies the long term hoop stress at a 2:1 stress ratio. According to ISO 14692, hoop stress is
twice the axial stress at a 2:1 stress ratio. That is, hl(2:1)= 2*al(2:1). However, CAESAR II allows
hl(2:1) to have a different value than twice of al(2:1). In this case, CAESAR II displays a warning
message in the Error Checker.
If you specify al(2:1) and leave hl(2:1) blank, CAESAR II assumes that hl(2:1) is equal to twice
al(2:1), and displays a warning message in the error checker. For more information, see al(2:1)
(on page 211).
Qs
Specifies the qualified stress for joints, bends, and tees. A qualified stress, Qs, provided by the
manufacturer is defined as:
CAESAR II does not require qualified stress Qs for plain pipe. Qs for pipe = hl(2:1), and
hl(2:1) is required input for plain pipe.
You must enter qualified stress Qs for joints, bends and tees even if these fitting are not in
the piping model. You can enter positive values (1000.0 for Qs and 1.0 for r, for example) to
pass the Error Checker.
r
Specifies the bi-axial stress ratio for bends, tees, and joints. The bi-axial stress r is defined as:
where:
sh(2:1) is the short-term hoop strength, under 2:1 stress conditions;
sa(0:1) is the short-term axial strength, under axial loading only.
In the absence of data from the manufacturer, use the default values:
Short-term
Fitting Component Strength Bi-axial
Stress Ratio (r)*
Filament-wound unidirectional 90
0.45
and
Bends 1.0
Filament-wound and hand-lay 1
1.9
100% hand-lay
Other Hand
laminated
CSM/WR 1, 9 1.9
Spigot/Socket Adhesive or
1.0
Mechanical Connection
0.45
Joints Threaded
1.0
Flange
2.0
Laminated
You can use a higher factor for r if justified by testing according to 6.2.6
ISO 14692-2-2002.
CAESAR II assumes that the bi-axial stress ratio r is 1.0 for tees according to ISO 14692.
CAESAR II displays a warning message in the Error Checker if the bi-axial stress ratio r is
greater than 20 for bends or joints. You can ignore the warning message.
If a piping system has no joints or bends, the corresponding bi-axial stress ratio r should not be
required. However, you must type a positive value (such as 1.0) for r to get rid of error
messages.
Eh/Ea
Specifies the ratio of the hoop modulus to the axial modulus of elasticity. If you leave this box
blank, CAESAR II uses a default value of 2.0.
Hand Lay
Indicates that the bend is hand-layed. If this box is selected, the software assumes smooth
bends. This affects the calculations of both the flexibility factor and the SIFs for the bend.
In general, the aqueous fluids specified in the qualification procedures of ISO 14692-2:2002
are among the more aggressive environments likely to be encountered. However, strong
acids, alkalis, hypochlorite, glycol, aromatics and alcohol can also reduce the properties of
Glass Reinforced Plastic (GRP) piping components; the effect depends on the chemical
concentration, temperature and resin type.
The information from the manufacturers' tables is based on experience and laboratory tests
at atmospheric pressure, on published literature, raw material suppliers' data, and so on.
Chemical concentrations, wall stresses, reinforcement type and resin have not always been
taken into account. Therefore the tables only give an indication of the suitability of the piping
components to transport the listed chemicals. In addition, the mixing of chemicals may
cause severe situations.
where Fmin and Fmax are the minimum and maximum loads (or stresses) of the load (or stress)
cycle.
The partial factor, A3 , for cyclic service is given by:
Sustained Including
Long-term 0.67 1.24 0.83
Thermal Loads
Sustained
Excluding Thermal Long-term 0.67 1.00 0.67
Loads
The part factor for loading f2 is equal to System Design Factor times the Occ Load
Factor.
Material properties in the database can be changed permanently using the CAESAR II
Material Database editor. For more information, see Material Database (on page 1033).
Double-click >> to display the Edit Elastic Properties dialog box.
Material Properties
Displays the properties associated with the material. CAESAR II automatically fills in the
Modulus of Elasticity, Poisson's Ratio, and other material properties. If you want to change
any material property extracted from the material database, change the value in the
corresponding box.
FRP pipe is specified by setting the Material box to 20. The material name displays and FRP
properties from the configuration file display on the dialog box.
Some of the material parameters are renamed when the FRP material is selected: Elastic
Modulus changes to Elastic Modulus/axial and Poisson's Ratio changes to "E a/Eh*h/a". The
latter entry requires the value of the following expression: (Ea*h/a) / Eh. This expression is
equal to a/h, Poisson's ratio of the strain in the hoop direction resulting from a stress in the axial
direction. The shear modulus G is defined by typing the ratio of G/Ea (shear modulus to axial
modulus) on the special execution parameters screen. You can type only one ratio for each job.
The decrease in flexural stiffness at bends and intersections due to changes in the circular
cross-section is typically negligible because the hoop modulus is usually considerably higher
than the axial modulus for FRP pipe. Because of this, a default flexibility factor of 1 is used for
these components. Similarly, because the fatigue tests performed by Markl on steel pipe are
likely to have no bearing on FRP design, an SIF of 2.3 is applied for all fittings. CAESAR II uses
these recommendations for all FRP fittings unless you specifically override the defaults. You can
override the defaults on a point-by-point basis or by forcing all calculations to adhere to the
requirements of the governing code through a CAESAR II configuration parameter. Note that if
the BS 7159, UKOOA, or ISO 14692 code is in effect, all SIFs and flexibility factors are
calculated according to that code regardless of the configuration parameter settings.
Propagate Properties
Indicates whether to propagate the property changes. Clear this check box to indicate that
properties apply to the current element only.
Densities
The densities of the piping material, insulation, and fluid contents are specified in this block. The
piping material density is a required entry and is usually extracted from the Material Database.
You can also type Fluid density in terms of specific gravity, if convenient, by following the input
immediately with the letters: SG, for example, 0.85SG (there can be no spaces between the
number and the SG).
If an insulation thickness is specified (in the pipe section properties block) but no
insulation density is specified, CAESAR II defaults to the density of calcium silicate.
Refract Thk
Specifies the thickness of refractory to apply to the piping. Refractory is applied to the inside of
the pipe. It is included in the dead weight of the system and reduces the internal pipe area
affecting the fluid weight in the system.
Refract Density
Displays the density of the refractory lining. If you select a value from the list, the numeric value
replaces the material name when the box is registered.
Refractory densities are much higher than insulation densities and could lead to under
sized restraints.
Densities for some typical refractory materials display below:
Insul Thk
Specifies the thickness of the insulation to be applied to the piping. Insulation applied to the
outside of the pipe is included in the dead weight of the system and in the projected pipe area
used for wind load computations.
Even if you specify the unit weight of the insulation or cladding, the thickness values are
still required so that the software can determine the correct projected area.
Clad Thk
Specifies the thickness of the cladding to be applied to the piping. Cladding is applied to the
outside of the insulation. It is included in the dead weight of the system and in the projected pipe
area used for wind load computations.
Even if you specify the unit weight of cladding plus insulation, the thickness values are
still required so that the software can determine the correct projected area.
Insulation Density
Displays the density of the insulation on a per unit volume basis. If you select a value from the
list, the numeric value replaces the material name when the box is registered.
If you leave this box blank, then the software assumes that the insulation is CALCIUM SILICATE
having a density of 0.006655.
Verify that this assumed value is appropriate for the current application. Sample density values
for insulation materials are:
MATERIAL DENSITY
CAREYTEMP .005787
FOAM-GLASS/CELLULAR .004630
GLASS
SUPER X .01447
Cladding Density
Displays the thickness of the cladding to apply to the piping. Cladding is applied to the outside of
the insulation and is included in the dead weight of the system. Cladding is also included in the
projected pipe area used for wind load computations.
Propagate Properties
Indicates whether to propagate the property changes. Clear this check box to indicate that
properties apply to the current element only.
Line Number
Specifies the line number for an element.
Line numbers carry forward to successive elements. Because of this, you only need to specify
data on the first element of a new line.
To assign a line number name, do one of the following:
Select the Line Number box, or press F9. Select <new..> to automatically assign a name.
The line number is named Line Number X, where X is a sequential number.
Use the auto-complete feature that populates with the nearest match as you type. For
example, if you have a line named 8-300-123 and you want to assign 8-150-124, Type 8
and the box automatically fills with the first line number that matches what you have typed.
Press End to change the last character.
You can also select elements on the graphics model and click Create from Selection in the
Line Numbers dialog box.
See Also
Line Numbers (on page 278)
Available Commands
Topics
File Menu ....................................................................................... 223
Edit Menu ....................................................................................... 227
Model Menu ................................................................................... 235
Environment Menu ......................................................................... 279
Global Menu................................................................................... 321
Options Menu................................................................................. 328
View Menu ..................................................................................... 333
Tools Menu .................................................................................... 351
File Menu
Performs actions associated with opening, closing, and running the job file.
New
Creates a new CAESAR II job.
Open
Opens an existing CAESAR II job.
File Name - Specifies the name of the selected file. This field is automatically filled in if you click
a file in the Name list.
Files of type - Specifies the type of file listed in the Name list.
System - Changes the Look in field to the CAESAR II System folder.
Examples - changes the Look in field to the CAESAR II Examples folder.
Save <filename>
Saves the current CAESAR II job under its current name.
Save As
Saves the current CAESAR II job under a new name.
Archive
Assigns a password to the job to prevent inadvertent alteration of the model or to type
the password to unlock the file. Archived input files cannot be altered or saved without this
password; however, they can be opened and reviewed.
Batch Run
Error checks the model in a non-interactive way. This process halts only for fatal errors. It
uses the existing or default static load cases and performs the static analysis.
Print Setup
Sets up the printer for the input listing.
Print Preview
Displays a preview of the print job.
Print <filename>
Prints the current job. The software prompts you to select the reports to print, prior to
printing.
You can change the report contents by modifying the .inp file.
Any time an input listing is written to a file or to the printer, the format of each of the reports is
obtained from the .inp file. The .inp files are ASCII text files which can be modified to create
reports of differing styles or content. You can modify the Initial.inp to change the page length in
the report, and the starting and stopping column positions. Any text editor (such as Notepad)
can be used to change any of the .inp files. If you change the .inp file, you may receive fatal
errors during report generation if impossible formats, or if invalid commands are requested.
If you prefer a different (more columnar) form of the basic element data, three additional
formatting files have been provided.
ELEMENT0.INP - Intergraph CAS standard element format
ELEMENT1.INP - 1st alternate element format
ELEMENT2.INP - 2nd alternate element format
ELEMENT3.INP - 3rd alternate element format
To use any of these formatting files, change directories to the CAESAR II\System directory.
Then, copy the formatting file that you want to use into Element.inp.
To print an Input Echo from the input dialog box, click File > Print. To write an Input Echo to the
screen for review, click File > Print Preview.
You can print an input listing from the output module as part of the entire output report.
Exit
Closes the session. You are prompted to save unsaved changes.
Edit Menu
Performs actions associated with cutting and pasting, navigating through the elements, and
performing a few small utilities.
Cut
Cuts selected elements from the document and pastes them to the Clipboard. The selected
elements replace the previous contents of the Clipboard.
Copy
Copies selected elements to the Clipboard. When you use this command, it replaces the
previous contents of the Clipboard with the new contents.
Paste
Inserts the Clipboard contents into the file. The command is not available if the Clipboard is
empty.
Continue
Moves the dialog box to the next element in the model. The software adds a new element if
there is no next element.
Duplicate Element
Copies the selected element either before or after the current element.
Insert Element
Inserts an element.
Delete Element
Deletes the current element.
Find
Displays a specific element in the view. This command displays a dialog box that allows you
to specify the From and To nodes for which you want to search. You can enter the node
numbers in either of the two fields, or in both. If you entering only the From node number, the
software searches for the first available element that starts with that node number. If you enter
only the To node number, the software searches for an element ending with that node number.
When the software locates the element it highlights the element and fits it in the view. You can
zoom out to better identify the location of the highlighted element within the model.
Global
Specifies the absolute (global) coordinates for the start node of each discontiguous system
segment.
This may be required for three reasons:
1. To show nodal coordinates in absolute, rather than relative coordinates.
2. Defining global coordinates for discontiguous segments allows the piping segments to plot in
the correct locations, rather than superimposed at the origin.
3. It is important that the pipe be given the correct elevation if wind loading is present.
Close Loop
Closes a loop by filling in the delta coordinates between two nodes in the model.
Increment
Specifies the increment between nodes. CAESAR II uses the nodal increment set in
Configure/Setup when generating the From and To nodes for new elements. You can override
this behavior by typing a different value in this dialog box. For more information, see Auto Node
Number Increment (on page 65).
Distance
Finds the distance between two specified nodes or between any two points you select on the
model.
Use the Pan and Zoom functions to move around larger models when measuring the
distance between two nodes.
Press SHIFT to confine the measuring line to the x-, y-, or z-axis directions. When you press
SHIFT, the software selects the axis nearest to the cursor location. As the mouse moves
around the model, the software changes the measuring line direction to the closest axis to
the cursor location.
Snap to nearest node - Select for the software to choose the start and end point of an element
on the model by highlighting snap points. Snap points are markers that indicate element node
points. The software uses snap points to highlight a node when the mouse cursor comes within
a certain proximity range of it. The software defaults to having this check box selected. Clear
this check box for the software to measure without using the snapping functionality.
Clear the Snap to nearest node check box when measuring distance with imported
graphics models, such as from CADWorx or Smart 3D. The software cannot snap to nodes
on models created outside of CAESAR II.
Change the shape, size, and color of snap point markers by selecting Display Options from
the right-click context menu. Make changes to the Graphic Edit Options>Symbol
Information settings, and then click Apply in the Plot Settings dialog box.
Origin and Selected Node - Calculates the distance between the origin point (using the starting
node coordinates (0,0,0)), and a selected point on the model.
Nodes - Calculates the distance between two nodes. Type the node numbers in the boxes and
click Calculate (or press ENTER) for the software to perform the distance calculation. The
distance calculated displays in the Result area of the dialog box.
Result - Shows the results of the previous distance calculation. The software also displays the
result on the status bar at the bottom of the window. The results indicate the start and end point
and the length measured in the unit of measure specified for the current model. The software
also displays the difference of change along the three axes in the Delta X, Y, Z boxes.
After you select the method for measuring the distance, you can dock the Distance
dialog box to the side or even minimize the dialog box entirely. Then, as you measure
distances, the results display on the model and also in the status bar at the bottom of
the window.
Press ESC to stop the distance measuring functionality on the model.
Measure between two points on a model
1. Open a CAESAR II file.
2. Click Piping Input in the main menu.
The Classic Piping Input dialog box opens.
3. Click Distance on the Input Tools toolbar.
The Distance dialog box opens.
4. Double-click to select the element.
5. Click Origin and selected node.
You must have only one element selected on the model to use the Origin and
selected node option.
The software displays the measured distance from the To node of the element selected to
the origin (first) node in the model.
The distance calculation displays in the Delta X, Y, Z boxes at the bottom of the Distance
dialog box, on the measure line in the model, and in the status bar at the bottom of the
window.
After you select the method for measuring the distance, you can dock the Distance
dialog box to the side. Then, as you measure distances, the results display on the
model and also in the status bar at the bottom of the window.
Press ESC to stop the distance measuring functionality on the model.
List
Displays all of the applicable input data in a dialog box. You can edit, delete, or modify data in
the lists.
Show All Lists - Displays the all of the available List dialog boxes.
Close All Lists - Closes all of the List dialog boxes and clears (un-checks) all the list options,
such as Allowables, Bends, Elements, and so forth.
The List dialog boxes appear as a rows tabs at the bottom of the piping input. These tabs
specify the various list options that you can access.
When you select a tab, the headings at the top of the selected List dialog box display the
specific input data and controlling parameters in the corresponding columns. All of the input data
can be accessed through the various List dialog boxes.
The following shows an example of a List dialog box, the Elements dialog box.
The software displays the input information in the List dialog boxes in a column format. Move the
cursor into any box to type a new value to replace the original value. You can scroll through the
reports either vertically or horizontally.
Press F1 while within the data cells to display help information. You can delete the input
information by highlighting the selection and pressing Delete. The software supports many
standard Windows commands, such as Cut and Paste, on a box-by-box basis.
If you edit input data on a List dialog box, the software updates the Classic Piping Input dialog
box as well. The software indicates values that carry forward on the Classic Piping Input dialog
box by displaying the value in red if there is a change to the data value. For example, in the
example shown above, the PIPE OD value changes from 8.6250 inch to 6.6250 inch on the
element From Node 30 to To Node 50. The software displays the first element in the list with
the new value in red. Note that elements 2 through 3 inherit the value of element 1
automatically. In this example, the value of the PIPE OD does not change until you enter a new
value for element 4. All elements below element 4 inherit that value unless a new value is
entered.
Other options from the Elements dialog box include the following:
Find the current node - Use the Find command (started with Ctrl F or Edit > Find) to quickly
jump to the element where the given node is located. Find remembers the last node number
that you typed, so subsequent searches of the same node can be accomplished by pressing
Ctrl F.
Perform global (block) operations - Perform global editing operations on selected parts of the
piping system by highlighting an element row, right-clicking on an element line, and selecting
Block Operation and one of the global (block) options. These options include varieties of
rotations, deletions, duplications, node renumbering, and status reporting. For more information
on the block operations, see Block Operations Toolbar (on page 344).
Access element auxiliary data - Access the Auxiliary Data dialog boxes located on the piping
input by highlighting an element row, right-clicking on an element line, and selecting Block
Operation > Aux Screens. By single-clicking on any checked items from the dialog box shown
below the appropriate Auxiliary Data box displays. You can edit the data in the Auxiliary Data
box, which updates the input dialog box. Additionally, you can type new data by double-clicking
on any of the unchecked boxes to open the Auxiliary Data dialog box. You can delete an entire
Auxiliary Data box by double-clicking on the checked item. A prompt warns you of the
operation.
Display block status - View Block Status dialog box, which shows the piping data in the
current job and in the block.
Next Element
Skips to the next element.
Previous Element
Skips to the previous element.
First Element
Skips to the first element.
Last Element
Skips to the last element.
Undo
Reverses or cancels any modeling steps. This can also be accomplished by pressing Ctrl-Z.
You can undo an unlimited number of steps. Undo is limited only by the amount of available
memory.
Making any input change while in the middle of the undo stack resets the redo stack.
Redo
Repeats the last step done You can redo an unlimited number of steps. Redo is limited by
the amount of available memory.
Making any input change while in the middle of the redo stack resets the undo stack.
Review Units
Displays the Review Current Units dialog box. This dialog box displays the units used to create
the report file. Changing the units in the configuration does not affect the input. To change the
input units, click Tools > Change Model Units.
Model Menu
Performs actions associated with modeling as well as specifying associated system-wide
information.
Break
Divides an element into two or more individual elements.
Click Model > Break on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. This command displays the
Break at element <node> - <node> dialog box.
The example above illustrates a single nodal insert between the nodes 10 and 20. The node to
be inserted is 15 and is 6 ft. from the node 10. Alternatively, you could insert node 15 an
appropriate distance from the To node 20. If there was some other node in the model with a
restraint (or imposed displacements) like the one to be put on the newly generated node 15,
then the node identifying that restraint location could be filled in at the line Get Support From
Node and the restraint would be automatically placed at 15. In this case, the +Y support at node
10 is copied to node 15.
For multiple inserts in a rack piping system the dialog box might appear as follows:
If you type the node where a +Y restraint has already been defined at the prompt for "support
condition", a +Y restraint is placed at all of the generated nodes, namely 110, 112, ... , 120. The
multiple insert Break is used primarily for three reasons:
Rack piping supports where the total length and node spacing is known and typed directly
when requested at the prompts.
Underground pipe runs where the overall length of the run is known, and the lengths of the
individual elements in the run are known.
To add mass points in order to refine a model for dynamic analysis.
Break does not work when the element is an expansion joint or the delta dimensions in
the DX, DY, and DZ boxes are blank or zero.
Insert Single Node - Indicates that only one node is inserted.
Insert Multiple Nodes - Indicates that more than one node is inserted.
Valve
Provides access to the valve and flange databases. This command displays the Valve and
Flange Database: <database name> dialog box.
The default database, CADWorx Plant, is a subset of the full component database provided
with CADWorx Plant, Intergraph CAS's piping design and drafting software. This database
offers nine different component types (gate, globe, check, control, ball, plug, butterfly valves,
flange pair, and single flange) as well as four different end types (flanged, no-flanged, threaded,
or socket). Selection of flanged-end components or flanges themselves automatically provides
for gaskets.
Selecting flanged ends (FLG) for a valve simply adds the length and weight of two
flanges and gaskets to the valve length and weight. NOFLG selects a valve without including the
two mating flanges.
Rigid Type - Specifies the rigid type for the fitting.
End Type - Specifies the end type for the fitting.
Class - Specifies the class for the fitting.
Whole element - Indicates that the selections apply to the whole element.
From end - Indicates that the selections apply to the From end of the fitting.
To end - Indicates that the selections apply to the To end of the fitting.
Both ends - Indicates that the selections apply to both ends of the fitting.
Flange-Valve-Flange - Automatically generates data lengths and weights of rigid elements for
flange-valve-flange combinations.
Activate Flange Check - Turns on the flange check.
2. Click Valve/Flange on the toolbar, or click Model > Valve from the menu.
3. Highlight blocks to select the fitting.
4. Select where to insert the new element.
Clicking the Flange Valve Flange check box enables CAESAR II to generate three
RIGID elements whose length and weight are automatically populated with data from the
Valve/Flange database.
5. Click OK to accept the selection.
If the particular selection is valid for the current line size, CAESAR II displays the length of
the element in the DX, DY, and DZ boxes, designates the element as RIGID, and inserts the
weight in the appropriate slot in the Auxiliary box.
The assumed orientation of the rigid is taken from the preceding element. CAESAR II is doing a
table lookup based on line-size and is inserting the selected table values into the dialog box.
Should the line size change at a later time, you must come back and ask CAESAR II to perform
another table look-up for the new size.
Use of the CADWorx Plant database offers several benefits over the use of other databases:
The CADWorx Plant database provides more accurate component lengths and weights
than those typically available in the GENERIC database.
Using the same component data for CAESAR II and CADWorx Plant modeling promotes
the efficiency of the bi-directional interface between them. Total sharing of data files and
specifications between CAESAR II and CADWorx Plant occurs when the CADWorx
installation option is saved in the registry. In that case, you should edit the third line of the
CADWORX.VHD file to name the actual CADWorx specifications. These specifications are
located in the CADWORX\SPEC subdirectory. For more information on editing this file, see
below.
You can more easily modify the CADWorx Plant Valve and Flange database, because the
specification files and component data files are ASCII text files. This process, which involves
possibly editing the CADWORX.VHD, specification, and data files, is described below.
The CADWORX.VHD file is structured as follows:
The specification files are located in the SPEC subdirectory of the CAESAR installation
directory. They are designated by the extension .SPC. The specification files correlate pipe size
and component with the appropriate data file. Individual lines in the file list the library
(subdirectory to the LIB_I or LIB_M directory, depending on whether English or Metric units are
in effect), file name (with an extension equal to the library name), range of nominal pipe sizes for
which the specified data file applies. You can edit any of these items. The last item on the line is
the component type number, and should not be changed. Other items in the file pertain to
CADWorx Plant and are not significant to CAESAR II.
The data files hold the dimensional and weight values. Data files for different types of
components hold different types of data. The data columns are labeled. The only data with
significance to CAESAR II involves the weight and lengths. You can change these values. The
following is a typical component data file for weld neck flanges:
You can find more extensive information on editing these files in the CADWorx Plant User
Manual.
Expansion Joint
Displays the Expansion Joint Database <data file> and Expansion Joint Modeler dialog
boxes.
CAESAR II automatically generates an expansion joint model from catalog data that you select.
The catalog used may be selected in the CAESAR II Configure/Setup routine. You decide where
in the model the expansion joint should go, that is, between which two nodes, and the modeler
assembles the completed joint. Selectable joint styles include Untied, Tied, Hinged, Gimbaled,
Untied-Universal, and Tied Universal expansion joints.
An example selection session is illustrated as follows. Of particular note are the following items:
You can select any of four material types. These material types are used to adjust the
bellows stiffnesses to the actual highest temperature in the model. This typically results in
higher stiffnesses than those shown in the vendor's catalog because the stiffnesses in the
catalog may be based on a higher design temperature.
You can select any combination of end types.
Bellows, liner, cover, rod, and hinge or gimbal assembly weights are looked up from the
stored database and automatically included in the expansion joint model.
For universal joints, the minimum allowed length is stored, but when the available space
exceeds the minimum allowed, you are prompted for the length that you want the expansion
joint assembly to occupy.
The last screen that follows shows the "proposed" model before it is inserted into the
CAESAR II input. This allows you to investigate the characteristics of several joints before
settling on one.
Actual maximum pressure ratings are also a part of the database, and in many cases
exceed the nominal pressure rating shown in the catalog. You can use pressures up to
these actual allowed maximums.
Allowed joint movements are also stored as part of the database and are printed with each
proposed model. These values should be recorded for use in checking the model after a
successful design pass has been completed.
Pressure thrust is included in the modeling considerations for each of the expansion joint
styles, removing this concern.
In the case of "tied" expansion joints, rigid elements are used to model the tie-bars.
Restraints with connecting nodes are used to contain the pressure thrust, and to keep the
ends of the expansion joint parallel.
Slip-on flange
Weld neck flange
Plate flange
If the length of the element to receive the expansion joint model is given, then the expansion
joint assembly should fit within this length. If it does not, a warning message displays. If a
universal joint has been requested, the length of the receiving element should be at least long
enough to accept the smallest possible universal length, as defined by the minimum spool piece
size from the manufacturers' database. If the element to receive the universal expansion joint
model is zero, you are prompted for the expansion joint length. If the element to receive the
universal expansion joint model had an original length, then the maximum possible space
available for the universal is reported and you are asked for the length. If the element to receive
any expansion joint is longer than the expansion joint to be inserted, you are prompted for the
end of the element where the joint should be inserted. Overall universal lengths should be
limited to about 10 times the pipe diameter before the center spool piece weight begins to
become a problem.
If there is a bend at either the From or the To end of the element to receive the expansion joint,
then you must define the length of the element.
To find extra nodes needed for the expansion joint model, CAESAR II starts with the element
From node and increments by one until a sufficient number of nodes not used elsewhere in the
model are encountered. It is these nodes that are reported in the Proposed-model dialog box.
Angular stiffnesses reported are given in the current set of units. Only the translational stiffness
label is found at the top of the bellows stiffness report. If you are unsure about the rotational
stiffness units, they may be seen either in the help screens or in the UNITS report from the LIST
option.
You are prompted to adjust the stiffness for the expansion joint if the highest operating
temperature is given and not equal to the expansion joint catalog design temperature. This
reduces bellows stiffnesses greater than those published in the catalog.
Bellows, tie-bar, and hinge/gimbal assembly weights are combined together and distributed over
the expansion joint rigid end pieces.
The expansion joint modeler makes every attempt possible to generate nodes in the model that
are unique. Inspect the nodes that are generated closely and make sure that you do not use
them unintentionally in any future model building.
Review the generated CAESAR II models and be sure that everything is consistent with your
intentions.
Untied
Specifies a single unrestrained expansion joint. This type of joint can absorb movement in all
directions. It also subjects the system to pressure thrust which must be designed for, external to
the expansion joint. This type of joint should almost never be used by the expansion joint novice
needing to protect hot, pressurized equipment. Guide restrictions limiting displacements into the
joint, regular maintenance problems because of all of the support hardware away from the
bellows, and pressure thrust make using and analyzing this type of bellows difficult.
Tied
Specifies a tied single expansion joint that is capable only of transverse (lateral) movement.
Pressure thrust is restrained internally by the tie-bars. This is a good, dependable expansion
joint to use for several reasons:
You do not have to design for pressure thrust.
Tie rods provide stability to the overall joint. This makes working with it in the field easier.
There is a single displacement mode (lateral). You can compare this mode directly to the
rated lateral movement in the catalog without the need for the relatively complicated
geometric calculations in the Expansion Joint Rating.
The disadvantages to the single tied expansion joint are:
They are fairly stiff in practice. This joint often does not provide the needed flexibility to
sufficiently reduce the loads on sensitive equipment.
The tie-bar assembly does provide some nonlinear restraining effect on flexibility that is
unaccounted for in the analysis. This may be appreciable when the bellows displacement
becomes large, such as when it is most critical that it perform as predicted.
Hinged
Specifies a single hinged expansion joint. This type of joint can only angulate about one axis.
Pressure thrust is retained internally by the hinge mechanism. Hinge joints are often used in
pairs to absorb considerable displacement in a single plane while transmitting very little load to
any attached equipment. The piping system must be designed to assure that displacement into
the hinges is planar for all types of thermal and occasional loadings to be experienced by the
system. Where pressure loads to be absorbed by the hinge mechanism are high, considerable
friction forces can be generated that somewhat limits further flexing of the joint. This transmits
larger loads than expected back into the piping system.
Gimbal
Specifies a single gimbal expansion joint. This type of joint can angulate about two axes.
Gimbaled joints restrain both pressure thrust and torsion by the gimbal mechanism. These joints
are often used in pairs to absorb considerable displacement in several directions, while
transmitting very little load to any attached equipment.
U-UNIV
Specifies an untied universal expansion joint. This type of unit is similar to a single unrestrained
expansion joint. It can absorb movement in all directions and normally has a much higher
capacity for transverse (lateral) deflection than a single bellows. An untied universal subjects the
system to pressure thrust loads which must be designed for external to the expansion joint.
Even when pressure is negligible, these joints can often be difficult to use in practice unless
proper guiding of the thermal displacement protects the joint against unwanted movement.
T-UNIV
Specifies a tied universal expansion joint. This is similar to a tied single joint, except that the tied
universal has much higher transverse (lateral) movement capability. Pressure thrust loads are
restrained internally by the tie-bars. These types of joints are a good option where vertical pipe
runs close to the equipment are available. The tie-bars restrict movement to a single mode
(lateral) and eliminate the worry about pressure thrust design. Longer lengths result in smaller
lateral stiffnesses, but overall length is somewhat restricted by the weight of the center spool. A
good rule of thumb is to restrict the overall length of the assembly to ten times the pipe diameter.
Be careful not to put the assembly into compression, as the tie bar mechanisms are not
designed to take this load and damage to the bellows can result.
These six types of expansion joints are not all of the types available, but they are the most
common. If a joint is needed that is not covered by the above, select the style closest to that
required. Edit the resulting input after the EJ Modeler is complete and processing returns to the
Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Welded
Indicates standard pipe beveled for welding.
Slipon
Indicates a slip-on flange.
WN
Indicates a weld neck flange.
Plate
Indicates a plate flange in accordance with the manufacturers catalog.
Slip-on, weld neck, and plate flanges may not be available in all diameters and pressure ratings,
such as over 24-in. diameters. Consult the catalog for specific interface dimensions, codes, and
materials. When you select a combination that is not available, you are warned that there are no
database values for his particular geometry and line size.
Movement Capability
The more convolutions selected, the greater the movement capacity of the bellows. It is a
common practice to perform a quick hand calculation to estimate the required movement and
then select the number of convolutions from the rated movements in the catalog. After an
analysis is performed, the exact evaluation of the bellows performance can be made using the
expansion joint rating module provided with CAESAR II.
Spring Forces
Specifies the spring forces. The more convolutions that you select, the lower the resulting
bellows spring forces become. This is particularly critical when the expansion joint is located
near rotating equipment.
Available Space
The more convolutions selected, the greater the required overall length. If working in a confined
area, the number of convolutions may be restricted by the space.
Pressure Rating
The pressure rating should be equal to, or larger than the design pressure of the system. In
many instances, larger pressures can be tolerated than the rated pressure shown. In many
small diameter expansion joints, the same bellows is used in 50, 150, and 300 psi-rated joints.
The CAESAR II modeler contains the true minimum pressure limits for all of the bellows in the
database, and checks the maximum pressure in the line (as specified) against the allowed
pressure. This allows you to select a smaller joint with more flexibility for certain applications.
Materials
Bellows can be formed from most ductile materials that can be welded by the automatic T.I.G.
butt welding process and yield a homogeneous ductile weld structure. Because the specific
media content varies from system to system, and most media data specified prior to system
operation is approximate with considerable fluctuation possible, it is not feasible to make specific
recommendations concerning bellows materials. The following are the four most common
bellows materials that are supported by CAESAR II:
304SSA240 tp 304 Stainless Steel
316SSA240 tp 316 Stainless Steel
600IncInco 600 High Nickel
625IncInco 625 High Nickel
Liners
Internal liners smooth the flow through the expansion joint. The smooth flow reduces pressure
drop and also prevents flow-induced vibration of the bellows. Liners are generally recommended
when the flow velocity exceeds 1.3 ft./sec. as a minimum, and are definitely recommended when
the flow velocity exceeds about 25 ft./sec. Consult the manufacturers catalog for additional
information. Heavy gage liners should be used in high velocity or turbulent flow systems. Also,
heavy liners should be used when the media is abrasive.
Covers
External covers protect very thin bellows, (0.010 to 0.090 in.) from mechanical damage. Covers
are also recommended when the line is insulated.
Title Page
Displays the title page of the current job. This is up to 60 lines of text that is stored with the
problem, and may be used for detailing run histories, discussing assumptions, and so on. These
lines may be printed with the output report through the input echo.
In addition, the Hanger Design Control Data dialog box tells the hanger design algorithm the
number of temperature cases to be used in the hanger design, and whether or not the actual
cold loads should be calculated. All of these options are discussed in detail in the following
sections.
Actual cold loads should be calculated when springs in smaller diameter lines are to be adjusted
in the cold position.
The Allowable Load Variation value is typed as a percentage. For example, type twenty five
percent as 25.0.
Hanger Table
Specifies the active hanger table.
The following spring tables are currently included in CAESAR II:
5. Lisega 6. Fronek
Additional design options are invoked if you use the following check boxes.
Extended Range
Cold Load
Hot load centered (if possible)
The Hanger Design Control Data dialog box defaults to the hanger table-specified in the
configuration file.
Extended Load Range Springs - CAESAR II includes the maximum load range to permit the
selection of less expensive variable support hangers in place of constant effort supports when
the spring loads are just outside the manufacturers recommended range. Extended load ranges
are the most extreme ranges on the spring load table. Some manufacturers build double-spring
supports to accommodate this range. Others adjust the top or bottom travel limits to
accommodate either end of the extended table. Make sure that the manufacturer can supply the
spring before you use the maximum ranges. Use of the extended range often eliminates the
need to go to a constant effort support.
Lisega springs do not support an extended range. If you select Extended Range for
a hanger with Lisega springs, CAESAR II returns the standard Lisega spring table and
ranges.
Cold Load Spring Hanger Design - Cold load spring hanger design is a method of designing
the springs in which the hot (or operating) load is supported in the cold (or installed) position of
the piping. This method of spring design offers several advantages over the more usual hot load
design:
Hanger stops are easier to remove.
There is no excessive movement from the neutral position when the system is cold or when
the stops are removed.
Spring loads can be adjusted before the system is brought up to temperature.
Some feel that the cold load approach yields a much more dependable design.
Operating loads on connected equipment are lower in some system configurations. A hot
vertical riser anchored at the bottom turning horizontally into a nozzle connection is a typical
configuration resulting in this load-reduction. The spring to be designed is at the elbow
adjacent to the nozzle. Operating loads are lower because the difference between the hot
and cold loads counters the moment produced by the vertical thermal expansion from the
anchor.
The disadvantages to cold load design are:
In some systems, the loads on rotating equipment may be increased by a value proportional
to the spring rate times the travel in the hot condition.
Most installations are done on a hot load design basis.
Middle of the Table Hanger Design (Hot Load Centered) - Many designers prefer that the hot
load be centered as closely as possible to the middle of the spring table. This provides as much
variability as possible in both directions before the spring bottoms out when the system is hot.
This design was necessary prior to effective computer modeling of piping systems, when the
weights at hangers were approximated by chart methods or calculated by hand. Activating this
option does not guarantee that spring hot loads are at the middle of the spring table, but
CAESAR II makes every effort to move the hot load to this position. The CAESAR II design
algorithm goes to a higher size spring if the design load is closer to the middle of the larger
spring's range, but never switches spring types. This option, when it is effective, can only result
in a one-size larger spring. CAESAR II attempts to move the hot load to the next higher spring
when it is within 10% of the maximum travel range for the spring. If the new spring is not
satisfactory, then CAESAR II uses the old one.
Seismic Wizard
Selects a particular Seismic Code and its associated data.
The wizard computes the applicable g factor and fills in the appropriate data cells. X-component
is set into Vector 1, Y-component is set into Vector 2, and Z-component is set into Vector 3; all
other load components are set to zero.
A warning displays if the current element has uniform loads defined.
Because the wizard sets data in gravitational loading, you must verify other uniform load
definitions for correctness.
CAESAR II displays the calculated gravity factor on the Uniform Loads tab.
Low 0.8
Normal 1.0
High 1.3
Post-disaster 1.5
Sa(0.2) (NBC)
Specifies the spectral response acceleration value at 0.2 seconds as defined in Paragraph
4.1.8.4.(1).
NBC Example
For further information on the use of the Static Seismic Wizard see the example below.
Importance Factor IE = 1.0 for a "Normal" category by Table 4.1.8.5.
The Site Class is "C" for "Very dense soil and soft rock" by Table 1.1.8.4.A:
Sa (0.2) = 0.55, spectral response acceleration value at 0.2 s, as defined in Sentence
4.1.8.4.(1).
According to Table 4.1.8.4.B.,Fa = 1.0:
Sp = Cp Ar Ax / Rp = 1 * 1 * (1 + 2 * 0.5) / 3 = 0.6667
Cp = 1, Ar = 1 and Rp = 3 according to Table 4.1.8.17.
The maximum value of Sp is 4.0 and minimum value of Sp is 0.7, therefore:
Sp = 0.7
aH= 0.3 * Fa Sa (0.2)IE Sp = 0.3 * 1.0 * 0.55 * 1.0 * 0.7 = 0.1155
CAESAR II displays the calculated gravity factor on the Uniform Loads tab.
Optimization Wizard
Assists with expansion loop design.
This wizard allows you to specify the element into which the loop should be incorporated, the
loop type, the item to be optimized - nodal stress or restraint load, and the target value to which
the item should be optimized. The optimization routines run the analysis several times to arrive
at an acceptable loop size such that the code stress or restraint load on the target element is at
the specified limit. Besides offering the opportunity to specify various loop configurations and a
selection of height to width ratios, the wizard also provides an option to allow CAESAR II to
select the most economical (based on length of pipe and number of bends) of those possible.
The Optimization Wizard automatically chooses the most economical loop solution based on
your target input. If there is an issue with the target input or loop sizing, the wizard prompts you
and attempts to insert the most ideal loop possible. However, you can always revise your target
input or loop sizing and re-run the wizard.
To use the optimization wizard, the job must be run at least once so that there is an issue, such
as an overstress, to resolve. These results must be current. The process is illustrated by the
example LOOP-WIZARD.C2, as displayed below.
Reviewing the results of the LOOP-WIZARD job shows that it is suffering an expansion
overstress of 46,741 psi. The allowable value at node 20 is 41,288 psi. This is due to the
expansion of the long run 60-140. A loop should be installed somewhere along that run. The
questions are where, and how big should it be?
Before you start the Loop Optimizer, examine the area of the plant surrounding the piping
system. To do this, import the CADWorx (or AutoCAD) plant model, using the CADWorks
Model command. In this case, import the
...\EXAMPLES\LOOP-WIZARD-PLANT\OVERALL.DWG model. This model shows that there is
a convenient area to place a loop beside element 60-70.
Select element 60-70 and then click Model > Optimization Wizard start the Loop
Optimization Wizard. The Loop Design Wizard dialog box displays.
At this point there are two alternatives to indicating where the loop should be placed.
8. Click Draw Cube to generate a transparent cube anchored on the selected element. You
can adjust the size and location of this cube by using the mouse. Use the corner points (Pt1
or Pt2) to adjust the major direction of the loop and the available space. Use the triangle to
adjust the minor axis of the loop and the available space. Drag the cube over the decking
adjacent to element 60-70 to build a cube with a Major dimension of 17ft 11 inches in the X
direction.
9. After the dialog box is complete, Click Design to start the optimization procedure.
The progress of the design scheme displays. After the loop is designed, you are informed of
how much pipe and how many bends were required to create the loop.
10. Click Undo to restart the Loop Wizard using different loop types. You can use this
information to find the most economical implementation.
When the optimizer finishes, the new expansion loop is inserted into the selected element.
11. Run a final analysis to verify all results. There are instances where the optimizer reports an
error. Examples of such situations are: (a) requesting a loop insertion in an element that is
not long enough, or (b) setting an impossible target maximum.
Selecting the special loop type enables CAESAR II to select the best loop to reach the
indicated target. This loop type is indicated on the dialog box by a lightning bolt. The best
characteristic of each loop is based on the relative cost of bends to straight pipe. When you
select the lightning bolt loop type, the Bend Cost Factor box activates. The default value of
100 indicates that a bend costs 100 times as much as the equivalent length of straight pipe.
Adjust this value as necessary.
Optimization Type
Specifies the type of output value to reduce. The available values include Stress Level and
Restraint Load Component.
Target Stress
Specifies the target level to which you would like to reduce the output value. Typing a stress
value (or a Load, in conjunction with a Load Component type) acts as a filter, showing only
elements which have stress values exceeding that level. This target value also becomes the
stress or load for which the selected target (Maximum System Stress, Restraint Load
Component, or Node) is optimized.
Design is not activated until you designate both a Target and Optimization Type.
Max. Stress
Optimizes the maximum stress level in the system (as opposed to a stress level at a single
node) to the value in the Target Data box.
Design is not activated until you designate both a Target and Optimization Type.
At Node
Specifies either the node at which the stress level is to be optimized (and the element upon
which that node is located) or the node at which a restraint load component is to be optimized
(along with the Load Component Type). Double-click one of the entries in the
Element/Node/Stress list or a Load Component in the Restraint Load to automatically fill in
these entries.
Design is not activated until you designate both a Target and Optimization Type.
On Element
Loop Type
Specifies the general configuration of the loop.
Type #1 - places the loop at the From end of the original element in the plane of the
Major Direction.
Type #2 - Places a 2-D (both dimensions the same size) loop at the From end of the
original element, first in the plane of the Major Direction and then in the plane of the Minor
Direction.
Type #3 - Places the loop in the middle of the original element in the plane of the
Major Direction.
Type #4 - Places 2-D (both dimensions the same size) loop in the middle of the
original element, first in the plane of the Major Direction and then in the plane of the Minor
Direction.
Type #5 - Places the loop at the To end of the original element, in the plane of the
Major Direction.
Type #6 - Places 2-D (both dimensions the same size) loop at the To end of the
original element, first in the plane of the Major Direction and then in the plane of the Minor
Direction.
Type # 8 - Builds a 2-D (both dimensions the same size) loop of the same size as the
original element, first in the Major Direction and then in the Minor Direction.
Type #9 - Causes CAESAR II to try all eight loop types and find the most
economically efficient solution based on total pipe length and number of bends.
Draw Cube
Graphically creates the anticipated area where the loop is installed. This cube may then be
resized or moved to reflect the preferred area for the loop. The Loop Optimization Wizard tries
to design a loop that fits in the allocated space.
Major Direction
Specifies the direction and distance of the primary direction of the loop.
Minor Direction
Specifies direction and distance of the secondary direction of a 2-D loop.
Design (Button)
Begins the loop optimization process. If an appropriate loop cannot be designed, you must
change some of the parameters and try again.
Line Numbers
Displays the Line Numbers dialog box.
Create from Selection - Creates line numbers from the selected elements.
Remove Line Number - Deletes line numbers from the selected elements.
Color - Displays the Color dialog box from which you can specify a color for the element.
Name - Specifies the name of the element.
See Also
Line Number (on page 222)
Environment Menu
Performs actions associated with miscellaneous items.
2. CAESAR II applies user-defined SIFs to straight pipe going to points on a bend curvature
regardless of any parameter in the setup file. This option is commonly used to intensify
injector tie-ins at bends, or dummy legs, or other bend attachment-type of supports.
Type Specifies the type of tee or joint.
For non-FRP piping codes, there are six types of tees and ten types of joints. These
elements correspond to 1 to 6 and 7 to 16 in the previous table. For more information, see
Input Items Optionally Effecting SIF Calculations (see "Input Items Optionally Affecting SIF
Calculations (Except for ISO 14692)*" on page 127).
For BS 7159 and UKOOA, there are two types of tees: Moulded and Fabricated. Moulded
tee corresponds to either the Welding (3) or Extruded (6) welding tee Type. Fabricated tee
corresponds to a tee Type of Reinforced (1).
For ISO 14692, there are three types of tee and joints: Tee (1), Qualified Tee (3), and Joint
(2).
ASME NC and ND piping codes do not include equations for SIFs with a tee Type of Sweepolet
(4), Weldolet (5), or Extruded (6). When you specify one of these tee types, CAESAR II uses
B31.1 equations.
Pad Thk Specifies the thickness of the reinforcing pad for reinforced fabricated or full
encirclement tees (intersection type #1 and #17, respectively). The pad thickness is only valid
for these intersection types. If the thickness of a type #1 or type #17 intersection is left blank or
the value entered is zero, the software uses the SIFs for an unreinforced fabricated tee.
In most piping codes, the beneficial effect of the pad thickness is limited to 1.5 times the nominal
thickness of the header. This factor does not apply in BS 806 or Z184, and is 2.5 in the Swedish
piping code.
Ftg Ro Specifies the fitting outside radius for branch connections. This option is used for
reduced branch connections in the ASME and B31.1 piping codes, Bonney Forge Insert
Weldolets, and for WRC 329 intersection SIF calculations. Configuration options exist to invoke
the WRC 329 calculations and to limit the application of the reduced branch connection rules to
unreinforced fabricated tees, sweepolets, weldolets, and extruded welding tees. If omitted, Ftg
Ro defaults to the outside radius of the branch pipe.
Crotch R Specifies the crotch radius of the formed lip on an extruded welding tee, intersection
type 6. This is also the intersection weld crotch radius for WRC329 calculations. Specifying this
value can result in a 50% reduction in the stress intensification at the WRC 329 intersection. If
you attempt to reduce the stress riser at a fabricated intersection by guaranteeing that there is a
smooth transition radius from the header to the branch pipe, then you may reduce the resulting
stress intensification by a factor of 2.0.
Weld ID Specifies the weld ID value. The following values are valid.
0 or BLANK - As Welded
1 - Finished/Ground Flush
Used for:
BONNEY FORGE SWEEPOLETS
BONNEY FORGE INSERT WELDOLETS
BUTT WELDS IN THE SWEDISH PIPING CODE
If this value is 1 then the weld is considered to be ground flush on the inside and out and the SIF
is taken as 1.0.
For more information on how input parameters are used to compute SIFs for girth butt welds,
see WELD (D) (on page 133).
Weld(d) Specifies the average circumferential weld mismatch measured at the inside diameter
of the pipe. This value is used for Butt Welds and Tapered transitions. This is the average; not
the maximum mismatch. You must verify that any maximum mismatch requirements are
satisfied for your particular code.
Fillet Specifies the fillet leg length. This option is used only in conjunction with a socket weld
component. This value is the length of the shorter leg for an unequal leg fillet weld. If a fillet leg
is given, both socket weld types result in the same SIF. See appendix D of the B31 piping codes
for further clarification.
Header OD Specifies the actual outside diameter of the header matching pipe.
Header Thk Specifies the actual wall thickness of the header matching pipe.
Branch OD Specifies the actual outside diameter of the matching pipe.
Branch Thk Specifies the actual wall thickness of the matching pipe.
Header SIF(i) Displays the SIF in-plane for the header.
Header SIF(o) Displays the SIF out-of-plane for the header.
Branch SIF(i) Displays the SIF in-plane for the branch.
Branch SIF(o) Displays the SIF out-of-plane for the branch.
Flexibility Characteristic Displays the flexibility characteristic.
Branch Section Modulus Displays the branch section modulus.
Recalculate - Displays SIFs after you enter a different set of data. If you change the input data,
CAESAR II allows you to transfer the data back to the CAESAR II model.
Long - Indicates a long radius bend. The radius is equal to 1.5 times the nominal diameter.
Short - Indicates a short radius bend. The radius is equal to the nominal pipe diameter.
3D - Indicates a 3D bend. The radius is equal to 3 times the nominal diameter.
5D - Indicates a 5D bend. The radius is equal to 5 times the nominal diameter.
Bend Type Specifies the bend type. For most codes, this refers to the number of attached
flanges and can be selected from the list. If there are no flanges on the bend, leave Type blank.
A bend should be considered flanged if there is any heavy or rigid body within two diameters of
the bend that significantly restricts the bends ability to ovalize.
When using the BS 7159 or UKOOA Codes with Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe, this
entry refers to the material laminate type and may be 1, 2, or 3. These laminate types are
All chopped strand mat (CSM) constructing with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction with internal and external
surface tissue reinforced layer.
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and multi-filament roving construction with internal and external
surface tissue reinforced layer.
The laminate type affects the calculation of flexibility factors and stress intensification factors for
the BS 7159 and UKOOA Codes only.
For ISO 14692, only type 3 filament-wound laminate is considered.
Bend Angle Displays the bend angle.
Fitting Thickness Specifies the thickness of the bend if that thickness is different than the
thickness of the matching pipe. If the thickness is greater than the matching pipe wall thickness,
then the inside diameter of the bend is smaller than the inside diameter of the matching pipe.
CAESAR II calculates section modulus for stress computations based on the properties of the
matching pipe as defined by the codes.
The pipe thickness is used twice when calculating SIFs and flexibility factors; once as Tn, and
once when determining the mean cross-sectional radius of the pipe in the equation for the
flexibility characteristic (h):
h = (Tn)(R) / (r2)
Tn = Thickness of bend or fitting
R = Bend radius
r = Mean cross-sectional radius of matching pipe
= (OD - WT) / 2
OD = Outside Diameter of matching pipe
WT = Wall Thickness of matching pipe
Most codes use the actual thickness of the fitting (this entry) for Tn, and the wall thickness of the
matching pipe for the calculation of the mean cross-sectional radius of the pipe (the WT value).
More specifically, the individual codes use the two wall thicknesses as follows:
The bend fitting thickness (FTG) is always used as the pipe thickness in the stiffness matrix
calculations. However, the thickness of the matching pipe (WT) is always used in the bend
stress calculations.
Number of Miter Cuts Displays the number of cuts in the bend if it is mitered. When you type
a number, CAESAR II checks if the mitered bend input is closely or widely spaced. If the bend is
determined to be widely spaced, and the number of miter cuts is greater than one, the bend
should be broken down into n single cut widely spaced miters, where n is the total number of
cuts in the bend. The number of cuts and the radius of the bend are all that is required to
calculate the SIFs and flexibilities for the bend as defined in the B31 codes. The bend radius
and the bend miter spacing are related by the following equations:
Closely Spaced Miters
R = S / (2 tan )
q = Bend Angle / (2 n) where n = number of miter cuts
Widely Spaced Miters
R = r2 (1.0 + cot q) / 2.0
r2 = (ri + ro) / 2.0
= Bend Angle / 2.0
Seam Weld Indicates that the bend is seam welded.
B31.3
If the B31.3 piping code is active, the Seam Welded check box is used to activate the Wl
box for bends. The Wl box is the weld strength reduction factor used to determine the
minimum wall thickness of the bend element.
IGE/TD/12
Used by IGE/TD/12 to calculate the stress intensification factors due to seam welded elbow
fabrication as opposed to extruded elbow fabrication. This option is only available when
IGE/TD/12 is active.
Matching Pipe OD Specifies the outside diameter of the matching pipe. This is used in the
average cross sectional radius calculation:
r2 = (OD - WT) / 2
OD = Outside Diameter as entered
WT = Wall Thickness of attached pipe
The B31.3 (1993) code defines r2 as the mean radius of matching pipe.
Matching Pipe Thk Specifies the match pipe wall thickness. You should not subtract any
corrosion. All SIF calculations are made ignoring corrosion. This wall thickness is used in the
mean radius (r2) calculation as defined in the piping codes.
Elastic Modulus Specifies the elastic modulus among EC, E1 to E9. This value is used for
the pressure stiffening calculations.
Pressure Specifies the pressures among PMax, P1 to P9, PHydro and none. This value is
used for the pressure stiffening calculations.
Bend In-Plane SIF Displays the SIF under in-plane bending.
Bend Out-of-Plane SIF Displays the SIF under out-of-plane bending.
In-Plane Flexibility Factor Displays the flexibility factor under in-plane bending.
Out-of-Plane Flexibility Displays the flexibility factor under out-of-plane bending.
Flexibility Characteristic Displays the pipe factor.
Recalculate - Displays the SIFs after you enter a different set of data. If you change the input
data, CAESAR II allows you to transfer the data back to a CAESAR II model.
Earthquake loads are occasional loadings and as such are not directly addressed by the
CAESAR II recommended load case logic. You must form your own combination cases at
the output processor level that represent the algebraic sum of the stresses due to sustained
and occasional loads. For more information, see Occasional Load Factor (on page 88).
When you select this option, the in Gs radio button is activated on the first Uniform Load
auxiliary dialog box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. You can override this option by
selecting the in F/L option.
Ambient Temperature
Specifies the actual ambient temperature. The default ambient temperature for all elements in
the system is 70F/21C. If this does not accurately represent the installed, or zero expansion
strain state, then type the actual value in this box. The ambient temperature is used in
conjunction with the specified hot temperature and the interpolated expansion coefficient to
calculate the thermal expansion per inch of pipe length experienced by the element when going
from the ambient temperature to the hot temperature.
A default ambient temperature can be defined in the configuration file. For more information, see
New Job Ambient Temperature (on page 51). The software uses this configuration file value to
set the ambient temperature when you create a new model.
Z-Axis Vertical
Indicates that the Z axis is vertical. Traditionally CAESAR II has used a coordinate system
where the Y-axis coincides with the vertical axis. In one alternative coordinate system, the
Z-axis represents the vertical axis (with the X axis chosen arbitrarily, and the Y-axis being
defined according to the right hand rule. CAESAR II now gives you the ability to model using
either coordinate system. You can also switch between the systems in most cases.
You can specify that CAESAR II start with the Z axis vertical. For more information, see Z-Axis
Vertical (see "New Job Z-Axis Vertical" on page 66).
A new piping model determines its axis orientation based on the setting in the Configure/Setup
module. An existing piping model uses the same axis orientation under which it was last saved.
You can change the axis orientation from Y-Axis to Z-Axis vertical by clicking the check box on
the Environment-Special Execution Parameters dialog box.
Clicking this check box causes the model to immediately convert to match the new axis
orientation. That is, Y-values become Z-values or the reverse. There is no change in the model;
only the representation changes.
This allows any piping input file to be immediately translated from one coordinate system into
the other.
When including other piping files in a model, the axis orientation of the included files need not
match that of the piping model. Translation occurs immediately upon inclusion.
When including structural files in a piping model, the axis orientation of the include files need not
match that of the piping model. Translation occurs immediately upon inclusion.
The axis orientation on the Static Load Case Builder (such as wind and wave loads), the Static
Output Processor, The Dynamic Input Module, and the Dynamic Output Processor is dictated by
the orientation of the model input file.
PCFs may be selected all at once or each one may be added to the conversion list just prior
to being converted. Only those files with the check box selected are processed.
Files can be arranged in the order you want to process them by dragging-and-dropping the
file names in the conversion list.
In the example, the elements of the header, which includes files TPA-551-0012, 551-00513,
521-90100_BL, 521-90100, and 521-90102, are processed first.
Vents off of that header are processed next (in the example, 521-12101, 521-12113,
521-12112, 521-12111, 521-12138, 521-12137, 521-10103, 521-10104, 521-90461).
Finally, the separate detached section files (551-0012, 551-0041) are processed last.
5. Set the conversion options listed in the lower left-hand pane.
Condense Options
Miscellaneous Options
CAESAR II Element Properties
The options can be set identically for all conversion passes, or they can be changed for
each pass. The example uses Piping Materials based on Pipe Spec and also set a Diameter
Limit (exclude pipes below 3" nominal) as well as condense rigids, tees, and bends.
In this example, clear the check boxes for all files except those comprising the header. This
converts the header files. To process them together, define a Start Node of 0 for files 2
through 5 ("0" signifies "carry on numbering with the next available number"). Start
numbering the system with node 1000 and continue with an increment of 10.
This means that all of the elements from all of the files are combined, sorted, ordered,
numbered, and so forth. For example, a header from the first five files is processed before
adding branches from the first file as though they came from a single large PCF. This is
assured by processing a group of files together during the same process, and defining the
Start Node for files after the first in the group as "0". Processing files individually or entering
a Start Node (or changing the Node Increment) for specific files in the group being
processed causes those files to be processed individually.
6. Begin the conversion by clicking the Begin Processing button.
This creates the first portion of the CAESAR II piping input model.
At this point, all CAESAR II functions (3D graphics pane, Classic Input Piping dialog box,
Elements dialog box) are available for examining the resultant piping input model.
Remember that you can use the Undo button.
7. In the example, you can select the vent lines to be processed separately, each with their
own numbering system.
8. In the example, check each of the next 9 file names, plus define the Start Node for each.
This causes each individual vent line to be fully processed before proceeding to the next.
Alternatively these files could be processed individually simply by running them one at a
time.
Undo is available.
9. Process the second detached section, with both files processed together, and the Start
Node set at node at 10000.
After the conversion processing completes, the CAESAR II piping input model looks like this
in the example.
At this point, the entries for Delta Coordinates, Temperatures, Pressures, and so forth may
contain values calculated to several decimal places due to repetitive unit conversions and
other calculations during the conversion process. For example, see the DX = -5390.7523
mm and the Temp 1 = 250.0214C.
These entries can be automatically rounded to the nearest integer by closing the APCF
Import dialog box using the "X" in the right top corner.
We recommend that this round-off process not be done until all PCFs have been
imported. This is because connectivity is determined based upon sharing global
coordinates. If element delta coordinates get rounded off, then nodal global coordinates may
get changed enough that they fall outside of the connection tolerances.
Topics
PCF Interface Custom Attributes ................................................... 300
How to Use the Advanced PCF Import (APCF) ............................. 315
The only PCF SUPPORT attribute that is not ignored is the SUPPORT-DIRECTION
attribute. It must have a value of UP, DOWN, EAST, WEST, NORTH, or SOUTH.
One note on the Material Number setting is that the selected material is applied to a piping
element as the default only if the PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 for that element is not
specified or recognized.
You can achieve the best results by preparing customized mapping files before beginning the
conversion process.
You may use default mapping files if the values fit our model. There are a number of mapping
files that define various values. Locate these files in the CAESAR II System folder.
Conversion from CAESAR II -> PCF Displays the conversion factor used to convert the
user-supplied unit to a CAESAR II internal unit
Comments can be added at the end of each line separated from the last column value by
spaces and preceded by the "*" character.
All PCF component attributes can be specified inside the PCF with their associated units. Any
unit specified by the PCF component attributes which is not a standard internal CAESAR II unit
as defined by the Tools > Create/Review Units dialog box on the CAESAR II Main menu needs
to be mapped inside the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file.
CAESAR II divides the user-supplied value by this constant to calculate the value for the
attribute that is displayed by the software according to the units specified in the configuration
options (except that temperature from C to F will also add the 32 ).
2. Modify any of the units definitions or add another unit definition as needed.
3. Save, and close the file.
This is an optional task. You can review the default file and determine if you need to
make changes to fit your model.
1. Open the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file in any text viewer, such as Notepad.
The CAESAR II default file looks like this.
The example below shows a typical PCF SUPPORT component, highlighting the support NAME
value which should be used to define CAESAR II support mapping.
VERT, EW, NS These create translational restraints corresponding to the compass points
of the global axes (Y, X, Z respectively for the Y-up setting, and Z, X, Y respectively for the
Z-up setting). See the figure below. One-way restraints may be created by prefixing with "+"
or "-".
<MU=> Optional keyword followed by a value for adding a friction coefficient to the restraint (not
valid with ANC, VHGR, CHGR).
<GAP=> Optional keyword followed by a value and set of units for adding a gap to the restraint
(not valid with ANC, VHGR, CHGR).
The software also processes equipment nozzles designated by the
END-CONNECTION-EQUIPMENT keyword as imposed thermal displacements in all degrees of
freedom, all with values of 0.0. This creates an initial behavior of an anchor, but allows you to
easily impose actual thermal displacements when known.
Examples
The examples below illustrate typical restraint configurations, along with suggested mapping
entries.
Variable Spring Hanger
These represent variable spring hangers, and are mapped onto a single CAESAR II support (=
VHGR). This is interpreted as a program-designed spring hanger in CAESAR II.
These hanger rod assemblies only resist downward (weight) loads, and allow upward
movement. In CAESAR II, they are typically modeled as +Y (or +Z, depending on how the
vertical axis is set).
These sliding supports only resist downward (weight) loads, and allow upward movement. They
are represented as a single +VERT support. However, since they slide against a base, most
stress analysts prefer to add a friction coefficient (MU=x.xx).
YRIGID 1
VERT MU=0.3
or
YRIGID 1
B MU=0.3
These restraints resist load/movement in both directions (so the "+" of the previous two supports
is eliminated). If the restraint is always installed vertically, then use the first definition (VERT). If
the restraint is installed in any direction (for example, vertically or horizontally), use the second
definition B, indicating that it acts along the installed support direction. This assumes that the
installed direction of the restraint is always defined as the direction from the main steel towards
the pipe. Because sliding is involved, a friction coefficient is included as well.
UGUIDE 1
GUI MU=0.3
or
UGUIDE 1
C MU=0.3
If this restraint is always installed vertically on horizontal lines (as shown in the figure above),
then the support function can always be modeled as a Guide (with sliding friction). If the restraint
may be installed in any direction at all (with restraint direction corresponding to the direction of
the attachment point toward the pipe), then use the second definition (C) as it represents the
direction lateral to the pipe and the restraint.
TEESUPPORT 2
+VERT MU=0.3
GUI MU=0.3
This restraint maps to two functions:
+VERTical
GUIde
Because sliding is involved in both functions, friction coefficients are provided for both.
VERTLATERAL 2
VERT MU=0.3
GUI MU=0.3
or
VERTLATERAL 2
B MU=0.3
C MU=0.3
This restraint maps to two functions:
up/down restraint
side-to-side restraint
If it is always installed vertically, then it is defined as a VERTical and a GUIde. If it is possible
that the restraint may be rotated about the pipe to be installed in any direction, then use the
second definition, which represents restraint along the direction of the support as well as lateral
to the support and pipe.
VERTAXIAL 2
+VERT MU=0.3
LIM MU=0.3
or
VERTAXIAL 2
+VERT MU=0.3
A MU=0.3
This restraint maps to two functions:
+VERT support
An axial restraint. The axial restraint can be defined equally as LIM or A (as A corresponds
to restraint along the direction of the pipe centerline).
SWAYSTRUT 1
B
These represent sway struts, which may be installed in any direction, and provide restraint along
the line of action of the sway strut. Assuming that the restraint direction corresponds to the
direction of the sway strut, then the best way to define these restraints is B (restraint along the
support direction).
ANCHOR 1
ANC
These restraints all restrict movement of the pipe in all six degrees-of-freedom, so they can be
defined as Anchors ("ANC").
PENETRATION 4
+C GAP=aMM
-C GAP=bMM
-VERT GAP=cMM
+VERT GAP=dMM
In the example above, the pipe (and the local A-axis) is running into the page. With B up, +C is
to the right.
Some of these can get quite complex, especially if restraints have different gaps in different
directions. It may require trial and error to determine exactly how the +/- restraint directions
correspond to the support direction passed in the PCF. In some cases, you may want to model
the restraint behavior in CAESAR II rather than in the mapping file.
CAESAR II SIF TYPE Should be set to the SIF type number used by CAESAR II as
shown in the CAESAR II SIF TYPE figure below.
PAD=X.X UNITS (optional) Should be set to the SIF pad thickness, including the
applicable unit (for example, PAD=10 MM)
Applying the above example values to set the TERF SKEY to the associated reinforced type
requires the following mapping entry to be specified inside the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file:
TERF 1 PAD=10 MM Ii=1.23 Io=2.34
Each PCF component defines an SKEY. For an example, see the SUPPORT component
identifier listed in the figure in PCF Restraint Mapping (on page 303) (SKEY 01HG). In this case,
these are typically four-character words indicating tee type (CROSS, OLET) and end type. The
PCF menu command matches the SKEYS to the entries in this mapping file. If an SKEY is not
found in this file, you should add it.
Start Node
Indicates the starting node number in the resulting CAESAR II model. By default, the entire
model is renumbered using this value as the starting point. To disable renumbering, you must
set this option and Increment (on page 318) to zero.
Increment
Defines the value used as a node number increment. This value is used during the renumbering
of the model. To disable renumbering, you must set this option and Start Node (on page 318) to
zero.
Condense Rigids
Instructs the software to combine rigids that connect to each other into a single element.
This indicates whether these items should be condensed/merged into adjacent elements. For
example, a valve with adjacent gaskets and flanges would be combined into a single rigid
element.
If activated, then elements are condensed/merged unless there is a valid reason not to (change
of cross section, change of operating conditions, restraint at the location, and so forth).
The default value is TRUE.
Condense Elbows
Controls whether the software treats elbows as two designated elements. When set to TRUE,
this directive instructs the software NOT to treat elbows as two designated elements. Rather, it
is condensed into its adjacent elements for each direction in which the elbow travels.
The default value is TRUE.
Model Rotation
The rotation of the +X-axis of the CAESAR II model should be rotated about the vertical axis
away from the PCF's East compass point. The default setting is zero, which imposes no rotation.
Select +90 to rotate the model a positive 90-degrees. Select -90 to rotate the model a negative
90-degrees.
Z can also be vertical based on special execution setting.
Alternatively, you can rotate the model after importing it to CAESAR II. Use the Rotate
command on the Block Operations toolbar.
Diameter Limit
Use this to exclude the processing of small pipes, such as vents and drains, by specifying the
size (nominal diameter) below which pipes will be ignored. Enter a diameter limit of -1.000 to
include all pipe sizes that you want to import into CAESAR II.
Material Number
Select the CAESAR II material to be assigned to components which do not have the material
attribute explicitly set otherwise.
The default is low carbon steel (material number 1).
CAESAR II Configuration
Opens the configuration file for review and editing. For more information, see Configuration and
Environment (on page 45).
Global Menu
Performs actions associated with commands you can perform on a group of elements, such as
the block operations (Rotate, Invert, and so forth).
Rotate
Rotates elements defined in the block.
Displays the Block Rotate dialog box. This dialog box rotates the block through some angle
about the X, Y, or Z axis.
Unskew - Returns skewed geometry to an orthogonal orientation.
Setup - Determines what in the block should be rotated, including restraints, displacements,
force/moments, uniform loads, flexible nozzles, flanges, and element characteristics. The default
is for all items that appear in the block to be rotated with the block.
Degrees - Specifies the degrees of the rotation.
Add bends - Specifies that the software includes bends in the block rotation.
For more information, see Performing Block Operations (on page 371).
Delete
Deletes the selected block of elements.
A confirmation message displays before the delete action is taken.
For more information, see Performing Block Operations (on page 371).
Duplicate
Duplicates elements in a block.
Displays the Block Duplicate dialog box. You can make identical copies of the block. You can
also make a mirror image by flipping the chosen elements in one of the orthogonal planes.
Mirror imaging is done on the piping delta dimensions only. That is, restraints are copied but not
mirror imaged. A +Y restraint does not become a -Y restraint when mirrored in the XZ plane.
Renumber
Rearrange the node numbers in the block.
2. Select whether you want the software to increment or renumber the block nodes.
a. Select Increment to renumber the selected block of nodes by the Node Increment you
specify. For example, if you have nodes of 10, 30, 600, 25 and 670 in a block, and you
select Increment and specify a Node Increment of 100, the software changes the node
numbering in the block to 110, 130, 700, 125 and 770. respectively.
b. Select Renumber to activate the Start Node box and renumber the selected block of
nodes from the Start Node number by the Node Increment that you specify. For
example, if you have nodes of 10, 30, 600, 25, and 670 in a block, and you select
Renumber and specify a Start Node of 100 and a Node Increment of 10, the software
changes the node block numbering to 100, 110, 120, 130, and 140, respectively.
Be sure that the Start Node and Node Increment values results in unique node
numbers for the elements being renumbered.
3. If you want to renumber the nodes of the elements that are connected to the selected block,
leave the Renumber the boundary nodes check box selected.
CAESAR II renumbers the nodes of the elements that are connected to the selected block
and the model remains connected in the same way as it was before the renumber. The
boundary nodes include the From and To nodes of the elements connected to the selected
block, plus the nodes of the auxiliary data block that are connected to the selected block.
The software renumbers every node in the selected block on the model.
If you clear the Renumber Boundary Nodes check box, the software does not apply the
increment or renumber action to restraints, displacements and branch connections in the
selected block of nodes.
CAESAR II does not typically renumber a CNode in a block, because the CNode is
connected to a node outside the block. The software does not renumber CNodes if they do
not connect to a node in the block and on the piping system.
To avoid any confusion in these instances, start the renumbering at a node greater than the
largest node in the model. If all of the nodes renumber successfully (that is, there are not any
dangling CNodes), then you can specify a Node Increment with a negative increment to shift
the newly renumbered nodes back into the original range.
Typically, you may graphically select multiple blocks to renumber. However CAESAR II can only
perform the renumber operation for the first block. In this case, CAESAR II displays a message
box with information about which block that is renumbered. You can then continue to renumber
the second block and so on until all blocks are renumbered.
For more information, see Performing Block Operations (on page 371).
Invert
Assigns new From Node and To Node values to the selected block of elements. The Invert
command reverses the order of the elements in the selected group as well as the node
numbering while preserving the geometry of the input model.
Contiguous segments (sets of elements) may be selected in either the Elements dialog
box, the 3D Graphics pane, or the Line Numbers dialog box.
numbers. For example, for an imported run from a termination to a tee, invert it to run from the
tee to the termination.
To invert a block of elements
1. Select the block of elements (nodes) you want to invert, either from the Elements dialog box
or from the 3D Graphics pane or from the Line Numbers dialog box.
If you select a block of elements from the Elements dialog box or from the Line
Numbers dialog box, the corresponding elements are selected (highlighted) in the 3D
Graphics panel.
If you select a block of elements in the 3D Graphics pane or from the Line Numbers
dialog box, the corresponding elements are NOT selected (highlighted) in the Elements
dialog box.
2. Click the Invert icon on the Block Operations tool bar.
Alternatively, right-click in the Elements dialog box to display the menu and click Block
Operation > Invert.
The node numbers are reversed.
Notice that nothing changes in the 3D Graphics pane- only the node numbers are
changed.
3. Review the Elements dialog box to verify the new node number assignments.
The From Node and To Node values are renumbered for the selected elements.
For example:
For more information, see Performing Block Operations (on page 371).
Change Sequence
Changes or rearranges the sequence (order) of elements while preserving the geometry.
3. Choose where in the list you want to move the selected block.
To move the selected block after a given element, click Follow.
To move the selected block before a given element, click Precede.
The cursor changes to indicate the operation is in progress.
4. From the Elements dialog box, position the cursor in the line where you want the selected
block to be placed. Alternatively, you can select elements in the 3D Graphics pane and then
click on the element where you want to move them.
The selected block of elements displays in the new order.
The 3D graphics model does not change. This command only affects the Elements
dialog box display contents. Remember that this command provides you with the capability
of organizing "like" types of elements together.
To re-store the order of the Elements dialog box to the original list, use the
Undo button.
For more information, see Performing Block Operations (on page 371).
Options Menu
Performs actions associated with the display of the model.
Range
Displays only the elements that contain nodes within a range. This is helpful when you need
to locate specific nodes or a group of related elements in a large model. This command displays
the Range dialog box. Alternatively, press U.
Using the Range command affects the display and operation of other 3D graphics
highlighting options. For example, if part of the model is not visible because of the use of the
Range command, then the Diameters command only highlights the elements that are
visible. Also, if using the Range command hides any nodes containing the predefined
displacements, the Displacements legend grid still displays, but the model may not highlight
correctly.
Find may not work properly for the part of the model that is hidden by the range. The
corresponding message displays in the status bar.
Anchors
Turns the display of anchors on or off.
Click the arrow on the icon to indicate what size you want the anchors to display on your model,
as well as whether or not the software displays anchors with or without connecting nodes
(CNodes).
Displacements
Turns the display of displacements on or off.
Hangers
Turns the display of hangers on or off.
Click the arrow on the icon to indicate what size you want the hangers to display on your model ,
as well as whether or not the software displays anchors with or without connecting nodes
(CNodes).
Nozzle Flexibility
Turns the display of nozzle flexibility on or off.
Flange Check
Turns flange checking on or off.
Nozzle Check
Turns nozzle checking on or off.
Forces
Updates the model to show each force in a different color. Use this option to see the force
variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays
the force defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
The force parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data. Click Next >>
and Previous << to move through the displacement or force vectors.
Uniform Loads
Updates the model to show each uniform load in a different color. Use this option to see the
uniform load variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color
key displays the uniform loads defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.
The uniform load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data. Click
Next >> and Previous << to move through the displacement or force vectors.
Uniform Loads has three vectors defined. The Node column represents the start node number
where the uniform loads vector was first defined. Because the data propagates throughout the
model until changed or disabled, the model is colored accordingly.
Wind/Wave
Updates the model to show each wind or wave load in a different color. Use this option to
see the variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key
displays the wind or wave loads defined in the model.
The wind and wave load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data.
Click Next >> and Previous << to move through the loads.
All the elements with wind defined display in red. All the elements with wave data defined
display in green. The legend grid shows the relevant data.
Compass
Turns the display of the orientation tee on or off.
Node Numbers
Turns the display of node numbers on or off. Alternatively, press N. You can display node
numbers for a specific element such as only restraints or only anchors.
Length
Turns the display of element lengths on or off. Alternatively, press L.
Tees
Turns the display of tees on or off.
Expansion Joints
Turns the display of expansion joints on or off.
Diameters
Updates the model to show each diameter in a different color. Use this option to see the
diameter variations throughout the system or to verify that diameter changes have been made.
Alternatively, press D. A color key displays the diameters defined in the model. You can change
the assigned colors to meet your needs.
Wall Thickness
Updates the model to show each wall thickness in a different color. Use this option to see the
wall thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Alternatively, press W. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can
change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
Corrosion
Updates the model to show each corrosion allowance in a different color. Use this option to
see the corrosion variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the corrosion allowances defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.
Piping Codes
Updates the model to show each piping code in a different color. Use this option to see the
piping code variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Material
Updates the model to show each material in a different color. Use this option to see the
material variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Alternatively, press M. A color key displays the materials defined in the model. You can change
the assigned colors to meet your needs.
Pipe Density
Updates the model to show each pipe density in a different color. Use this option to see the
pipe density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color
key displays the pipe densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.
Fluid Density
Updates the model to show each fluid density in a different color. Use this option to see the
fluid density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color
key displays the fluid densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.
Refractory Thickness
Updates the model to show each refractory thickness in a different color. Use this option to see
the refractory thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.
Refractory Density
Updates the model to show each refractory density in a different color. Use this option to see the
refractory density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the refractory densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.
Insulation Thickness
Updates the model to show each insulation thickness in a different color. Use this option to
see the insulation thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have
been made. Alternatively, press I. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model.
You can change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
Insulation Density
Updates the model to show each insulation density in a different color. Use this option to see
the insulation density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the insulation densities defined in the model. You can change the
assigned colors to meet your needs.
Cladding Thickness
Updates the model to show each cladding thickness in a different color. Use this option to see
the cladding thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.
Cladding Density
Updates the model to show each cladding density in a different color. Use this option to see the
cladding density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the cladding densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.
Temperatures
Displays the temperature parameters that you have defined.
Pressures
Displays the pressure parameters that you have defined.
View Menu
Performs actions associated with viewing the model.
Toolbars
Changes the toolbars. The toolbars can be displayed or hidden by clicking View > Toolbars and
checking or unchecking the toolbar.
You can customize where toolbars display and their locations. Click View > Toolbars, or
right-click the toolbar, and then select Customize. You can also customize toolbars by pressing
Shift and dragging buttons to new positions.
Customize Dialog Box
Controls options for customizing the CAESAR II interface.
Click Reset on the Customize dialog box to undo changes.
Standard Toolbar
The Standard toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the
3D Model, contains the following functions.
New - Starts a new piping job. You can also click File > New on the main menu. CAESAR II
opens the New Job Name Specification dialog box.
Open - Opens a different piping input job. You are prompted for the file to open.
Save - Saves the selected piping input job. You are prompted for the file name.
Cut - Removes the selected data from its current location and places a copy on the
Clipboard.
Copy - Creates a copy of the selected data and places it on the Clipboard.
Zoom to Window - Changes the magnification of the model to fit an area that you specify.
Click one corner of the area and then while holding the mouse button, stretch a box
diagonally to the opposite corner of the area
Orbit - Rotates the model interactively. Rotate the model using the mouse or the arrow keys
on the keyboard. To use the mouse, click the left mouse button on the model to start a
bounding box. Hold the left mouse button and move the mouse to the other end of the
bounding box. Release the mouse button to update the view. If the bounding box is not
visible, check the corresponding box on the User Options tab of the Plot Configuration
dialog box For more information, see 3D Graphics Configuration (on page 363). During
rotation, the model may in centerline mode, or some of the geometry details may disappear
or become distorted. This is to improve the display speed. The actual conversion depends
on the size and complexity of the model. After the rotation is complete, the model returns to
its original state.
Another method of orbiting the model is the Gyro-operator. Press G. The model performs a
360-degree rotation in the plane of view.
Pan - Pans the model. The cursor changes to a hand. Move the cursor while holding down
the left mouse button. You can also pan the view while another command is active by
holding down the middle mouse button or mouse wheel while moving the mouse.
Zoom - Increases or decreases the magnification of the model. Move the cursor up or down
holding the left mouse button. Release the mouse button to stop the zoom. Alternatively,
press + and - to zoom in and out. You can change the zoom level of the model while in
another command by rotating the mouse wheel.
Walkthrough - Explores the model with a setup similar to a virtual reality application. This
command produces the effect of walking towards the model.
Select Element - Select a single element in the model. Hover over an element in the model
to display information about that element. Press Ctrl when you select to add or remove
elements from the selection.
Select Group - Select a group of elements in the model by dragging a window around
them. You can add elements to the selection by pressing Ctrl while dragging the window.
Remove elements from the selection by pressing Shift while dragging the window.
Shaded View - Displays the model as shaded 3D shapes. Restraints and other element
information items display.
Hidden Line Wire Frame - Displays the model as a wire frame with hidden lines removed.
Restraints and other element information items display.
Wire Frame - Displays the model as a wire frame. Restraints and other element information
items display.
Silhouette - Displays the model as a silhouette, or a two-line plot. Restraints and other
element information items display.
Translucent Objects - Displays the model as translucent 3D shapes. Restraints and other
element information items display. You can select Translucent Objects with any of the
other display options (Shaded View, Hidden Line Wire Frame, Wire Frame, Silhouette,
Center Line View). Select a different type of operator to deactivate Translucent Objects.
Center Line View - Displays model data in single line mode. This often makes the view
clearer. In this mode, restraints and other element information items display. Display the
volume or double line plot by clicking the corresponding button. Press V to switch among
the views in the following order: Shaded View (rendered mode) / Two Line Mode / Center
Line View.
Back - Displays the model from the back. Alternatively, press Shift + Z.
Bottom - Displays the model from the bottom. Alternatively, press Shift + Y.
Right - Displays the model from the right. Alternatively, press Shift + X.
Southeast ISO View - Displays the model isometrically from the southeast. Alternatively,
press F10.
Display Options
The Display Options toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box
or the 3D Model, contains the following functions.
Plot Properties - Opens the Plot Settings dialog where you can adjust properties for the
current model.
Markups
The Markups toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the
3D Model, contains the following functions.
Freehand Markup - Draws a line in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the line.
Rectangle Markup - Draws a rectangle in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the
rectangle.
Circle Markup - Draws a circle in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the circle.
Annotate - Adds a brief description to the model. The annotation may be especially useful
in the output processor. The annotation text box is a single line. Annotation is printed and
saved to the bitmap. Annotation is not saved to HTML.
Annotate w/Leader - Adds a brief description to the model. This annotation includes a
leader line. Drag the annotation box to extend the leader. The annotation text box is a single
line. The annotation with a leader stays with the model when you zoom, pan, rotate, or use
any of the highlight options. Annotation is printed and saved to the bitmap. Annotation is not
saved to HTML.
The markup annotation text box is a single line. The color and the font face/size cannot be
changed. The default color is red.
Markup annotations are saved to the .TIF file and spooled to the printer.
The geometry and the text of the markup annotations are temporary. They are not saved
with the model. These graphics and disappear from view with any change such as zoom,
rotate, pan, or reset all.
The color, font face, and size of the annotation text can be changed by clicking Tools >
Configure/Setup on the main menu. For more information, see 3D Graphics Configuration
(on page 363).
When you select an operator, the software keeps it active until you click another operator.
(For example, Freehand Markup stays selected until you select Orbit or Pan.)
3D Cutting Plane - Defines the cutting plane for the model. This option is useful when
trying to emphasize a specific element. In many cases, the elements or node numbers are
not defined consecutively. Because of this, it may be easier to cut a portion of the model at
a certain location to see more details.
When the cutting plane displays, use the handles to move and or rotate the planes. If cutting
the plane's handles are not visible, or the display goes blank, use the Zoom command to
expand the view. To disable the cutting plane, select the command again.
This command can be used along any of the three axes.
Restraints - Turns the display of restraints on or off on the current model. For more
information, see Restraints.
Anchors - Turns the display of anchors on or off on the current model. For more
information, see Anchors (on page 328).
Hangers - Turns the display of hangers on or off on the current model. For more
information, see Hangers (on page 329).
Nozzles - Turns the display of nozzle flexibility on or off on the current model.
Nozzle Limits - Turns nozzle checking on or off on the current model. You can also specify
the size the nozzle limit that displays on the model by clicking the arrow on the icon and
choosing a size.
Expansion Joints & Rigids - Turns the display of expansion joints or rigid elements on or
off on the current model.
Compass - Turns the display of the orientation compass on or off on the current model. The
compass indicates the X, Y and Z axis direction of the model.
Node Numbers - Turns the display of node numbers on or off. Alternatively, press N. You
can display node numbers for a specific element such as only restraints or only anchors.
Lengths - Turns the display of element lengths on or off on the model. Alternatively, press
L.
Range - Displays only the elements that contain nodes within a range. This is helpful when
you need to locate specific nodes or a group of related elements in a large model. This
command displays the Range dialog box. Alternatively, press U. For more information, see
Range (on page 328).
Find Node - Displays a specific element in the view. This command displays a dialog box
that allows you to specify the From and To nodes for which you want to search. You can
enter the node numbers in either of the two fields, or in both. If you entering only the From
node number, the software searches for the first available element that starts with that node
number. If you enter only the To node number, the software searches for an element ending
with that node number. When the software locates the element it highlights the element and
fits it in the view. You can zoom out to better identify the location of the highlighted element
within the model.
Legends Toolbar
The Legends toolbar lets you quickly view legends for areas of the model input. You can access
this toolbar from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the 3D Model. This toolbar contains the
following functions.
Materials- Opens the Materials legend, where you can make changes to the color display
settings for materials on the model.
Piping Codes - Opens the Piping Codes legend, where you can view and make changes to
the color display settings for piping codes on the model.
Insulation - Opens the Insulation legend, where you can view and make changes to the
color display settings for insulation on the model.
Diameter - Opens the Pipe Diameters legend, where you can view pipe diameter
dimensions and make changes to the color display settings for pipes on the model.
Wall Thickness - Opens the Wall Thickness legend, where you can view wall thickness
dimensions and make changes to the color display settings for wall thicknesses on the
model.
Forces - Opens the Forces/Moments legend, where you can view the forces and moments
applied to each node and make changes to the color display settings for forces and
moments on the model. Click the arrow buttons at the top of the legend to scroll through the
various forces and moments.
Uniform Loads - Opens the Uniform Loads legend, where you can view the uniform loads
applied to each node and make changes to the color display settings for uniform loads on
the model. Click the arrow buttons at the top of the legend to scroll through the various
uniform loads.
Wind/Wave - Opens the Wind/Wave Loads legend, where you can view the the wind or
wave loads applied to each node and make changes to the color display settings for loads
on the model. Click the arrow buttons at the top of the legend to scroll through the various
wind or wave loads.
Show Temps- Opens the Temperatures legend, where you can view the temperatures of
model elements and make changes to the color display settings for temperatures.
Show Pressures- Opens the Pressures legend, where you can view the pressures on
model elements and make changes to the color display settings for pressures.
Corrosion - Opens the Corrosion legend, where you can view the elements that have
corrosion specified and make changes to the color display settings for showing corrosion.
Pipe Density- Opens the Pipe Density legend, where you can view the elements with pipe
density specified and make changes to the color display settings for showing pipe density.
Fluid Density- Opens the Fluid Density legend, where you can view the elements with fluid
density specified and make changes to the color display settings for showing fluid density.
Insulation Density- Opens the Insulation Density legend, where you can view the elements
with insulation density specified and make changes to the color display settings for showing
insulation density.
Move Geometry (X-Axis) - Moves selected elements along the x-axis on the model.
Move Geometry {Y-Axis) - Moves selected elements along the y -axis on the model.
Move Geometry (Z-Axis) - Moves selected elements along the z-axis on the model.
Start/Run (Error Checker) - Sends the model through interactive error checking. This is the
first step of analysis. When the error check is complete, the Errors and Warnings dialog
box displays the results. For more information, see Error Checking (on page 513).
Batch Run - Error checks the model in a non-interactive way. This process halts only for
fatal errors. It uses the existing or default static load cases and performs the static analysis.
Edit Static Load Cases - Displays the Static Analysis dialog box. For more information on
static analysis, see Static Load Case Editor (on page 515).
View Static Results - Provides an interactive review of static analysis results for the open
job. The Static Output Processor window automatically displays upon completion of a
static analysis. For more information, see Static Output Processor (on page 567).
Dynamic Analysis - Performs dynamic analysis on a piping model. The command is also
available from Analysis > Dynamics. For more information, see Dynamic Analysis
Workflow (on page 622).
Continue - Moves the dialog box to the next element in the model. The software adds a
new element if there is no next element.
Duplicate Element - Copies the selected element either before or after the current element.
Reset View - Controls the way graphics behave when you add or modify elements. When
this option is turned on, CAESAR II resets the plot to the default view each time you refresh.
Lock Graphics - Locks the 3D model so you cannot make any graphics updates. When the
graphic is locked, the icon displays highlighted in the toolbar. Click Lock Graphics again to
unlock the model for updating.
Lock Graphics is not available on the Structural Modeler.
List Input - Displays the model in a spreadsheet view at the bottom of the Classic Piping
Input dialog box. From this view, you can quickly review and enter input data. Additionally,
you can rotate the 3D model along the various axises and duplicate input values from the
List Input view.
Archive - Assigns a password to the job to prevent inadvertent alteration of the model or to
type the password to unlock the file. Archived input files cannot be altered or saved without
this password; however, they can be opened and reviewed. For more information, see
Archive Dialog Box.
Insert - Inserts an element. For more information, see Insert Element Dialog Box.
Break - Divides an element into two or more individual elements. For more information, see
Break (on page 235).
Global Coordinates - Specifies the absolute (global) coordinates for the start node of each
discontiguous system segment. For more information, see Global (on page 229).
Close Loop - Closes a loop by filling in the delta coordinates between two nodes in the
model.
Increment Node - Specifies the increment between nodes. CAESAR II uses the nodal
increment set in Configure/Setup when generating the From and To nodes for new
elements. You can override this behavior by typing a different value in this dialog box. For
more information, see Auto Node Number Increment (on page 65).
Distance - Finds the distance between two specified nodes or between any two points you
select on the model.
Valve Flange Database - Provides access to the valve and flange databases. This
command displays the Valve and Flange Database: <database name> dialog box. For
more information, see Valve (on page 238).
Expansion Joint Modeler - Displays the Expansion Joint Database <data file> and
Expansion Joint Modeler dialog boxes. For more information, see Expansion Joint (on
page 243).
Title - Displays the title page of the current job. This is up to 60 lines of text that is stored
with the problem, and may be used for detailing run histories, discussing assumptions, and
so on. These lines may be printed with the output report through the input echo.
Hanger Design Criteria - Displays system-wide hanger design criteria. For more
information, see Hanger Design Control Data (on page 253).
Bend SIF Scratchpad - Opens a scratchpad for calculating stress intensification factors
(SIFs) for various bend configurations under different codes. You can access this
scratchpad by selecting Analysis > SIFs @ Bends or through the Bend SIF Scratchpad
option on the Classic Piping input or on the 3D model.
Special Execution Options - Displays the Special Execution Parameters dialog box.
Click Environment > Special Execution Parameters. These parameters remain set for
that particular job.
Undo - Reverses or cancels any modeling steps. This can also be accomplished by
pressing Ctrl-Z. You can undo an unlimited number of steps. Undo is limited only by the
amount of available memory.
Redo - Repeats the last step done You can redo an unlimited number of steps. Redo is
limited by the amount of available memory.
Rotate- Rotates elements defined in the block. For more information, see Rotate (on page
321).
Duplicate- Duplicates elements in a block. For more information, see Duplicate (on page
321).
Renumber - Rearrange the node numbers in the block. For more information, see
Renumber (on page 323).
Invert- Assigns new From Node and To Node values to the selected block of elements. The
Invert command reverses the order of the elements in the selected group as well as the
node numbering while preserving the geometry of the input model.
Contiguous segments (sets of elements) may be selected in either the Elements
dialog box, the 3D Graphics pane, or the Line Numbers dialog box.
For more information, see Invert (on page 325).
Bend - Puts a bend at the To node of every element that you have selected on
the model. Select an element(s) on the model and click Bend to view the Bends
tab on the Auxiliary Data dialog box of the current piping input job. Click the
down arrow to change the icon function to delete all bends or toggle between the
select and delete functions.
Rigids - Replaces the element(s) that you selected with a rigid. Select an
element(s) on the model and click Rigids to view the Rigids tab on the Auxiliary
Data dialog box of the current piping input job. Click the down arrow to change
the icon function to delete all rigid elements or toggle between the select and
delete functions.
Reducer - Select an element(s) on the model and click Reducer to view the
Reducers tab on the Auxiliary Data dialog box of the current piping input job.
Click the down arrow to change the icon function to delete all reducers or toggle
between the select and delete functions.
SIFs/Tees - Inserts a SIF or Tee at the end of the selected elements on the
model.
Hangers - Adds a hanger to each of the selected elements on the model. Click
the down arrow to change the icon function to delete all hangers or toggle
between the select and delete functions.
Wind/Wave - Adds wind or wave details to each of the selected elements on the
model.
Uniform Loads - Adds a uniform load to each of the selected elements on the
model.
Node Names - Adds a node name to each of the selected elements on the
model.
Flange - Adds a flange to either end or both ends of the selected elements on the
model. Click the down arrow to change the icon function to delete all flanges or
toggle between the select and delete functions.
Node Number Edit Window- Displays the Edit Node Numbers dialog box. For more
information, see Node Numbers (on page 101).
Mini-Delta Box - Displays the Edit Deltas dialog box. For more information, see Deltas
(on page 103).
Mini-Pipe Size Box - Displays the Edit Pipe Sizes dialog box. For more information, see
Pipe Sizes (on page 106).
Mini-Temps and Pressures Box - Displays the Edit Operating Conditions dialog box.
For more information, see Temperatures (on page 111).
Mini-Material Box - Displays the Edit Materials dialog box. For more information, see
Materials (on page 192).
Mini-Elastic Properties Box - Displays the Edit Elastic Properties dialog box. For more
information, see Material Elastic Properties (on page 216).
Mini-Densities Box - Displays the Edit Densities dialog box. For more information, see
Densities (on page 218).
Mini-Aux Screens Box - Displays the Auxiliary Data dialog box. For more information,
see Auxiliary Element Data (on page 1048).
CADWorx Model - Opens a CADWorx model for use with this model. If you have already
opened a CADWorx model, click the down arrow on the icon to select Load CWx Model.
For more information, see Open CADWorx Model (on page 223).
S3D/SPR Model - Opens the Load S3D/SPR Model (see "Load S3D/SPR Dialog Box"
on page 380) dialog box. If you have already opened a S3D or SPR model, click the down
arrow on the icon to select other options, including the Show/Hide S3D/SPR Model, Dim
S3D/SPR Model, S3D/SPR Visibility Options. These options only display when you have
a S3D/SPR model already open. For more information, see S3D/SPR Import View (see
"S3D/SPR Model View" on page 379) and S3D/SPR Visibility Options (on page 384).
Wizards Toolbar
The Wizards toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the 3D
Model, contains icons that let you access the most commonly used wizards in piping input. This
toolbar includes the following functions.
Include Piping Files - Opens the Include Piping Files dialog box, which lets you include
other piping models into the current piping model. For more information, see Include Piping
Input Files (on page 291).
Include Structural Files - Opens the Include Structural Files dialog box, , which lets you
include structural models into the current job. For more information, see Including
Structural Input Files (on page 291).
APCF - Opens the Advanced PCF Import (APCF) dialog box, which provides an
interactive, customizable way to import Piping Component Files (PCFs) into the CAESAR II
piping environment. For more information, see Advanced PCF Import (APCF) (on page
292).
Move Geometry (X-Axis) - Restricts mouse movement on the model to the X axis.
Move Geometry (Y-Axis) - Restricts mouse movement on the model to the Y axis.
Move Geometry (Z-Axis) - Restricts mouse movement on the model to the Z axis.
Copy the selected card - Copies the selected card from current card stack.
Paste the previously copied card - Pastes the card you previously copied into the card
stack.
Delete selected card - Deletes the selected card from the current card stack.
Find - Displays a specific element in the view. This command displays a dialog box
that allows you to specify the From and To nodes for which you want to search. You
can enter the node numbers in either of the two fields, or in both. If you entering only
the From node number, the software searches for the first available element that
starts with that node number. If you enter only the To node number, the software
searches for an element ending with that node number. When the software locates
the element it highlights the element and fits it in the view. You can zoom out to better
identify the location of the highlighted element within the model.
3D Cutting Plane - Defines the cutting plane for the model. This option is useful when
trying to emphasize a specific element. In many cases, the elements or node numbers
are not defined consecutively. Because of this, it may be easier to cut a portion of the
model at a certain location to see more details.
When the cutting plane displays, use the handles to move and or rotate the planes. If
cutting the plane's handles are not visible, or the display goes blank, use the Zoom
command to expand the view. To disable the cutting plane, select the command
again.
This command can be used along any of the three axes.
Range - Displays only the elements that contain nodes within a range. This is helpful
when you need to locate specific nodes or a group of related elements in a large
model. This command displays the Range dialog box. Alternatively, press U.
For more information, see Range (on page 328).
Line Numbers - Displays the Line Numbers pane which allows graphical editing of
line numbers. You can do the following from this pane.
Assign a new line number to the block of elements that have been selected on the
3D graphical display.
Remove an existing line number.
Set and reset visibility options to hide and unhide elements.
Assign a color to an individual line number.
To reassign one or more elements from one line number to another existing line
number, simply drag-and-drop (move) the elements between existing Line Numbers in
the Line Numbers pane.
When you click the Line Number name in the Line Number pane, the
corresponding elements are highlighted in the 3D pane and are selected to perform
Block operations.
Reset
Resets the view to the default settings.
Front View
Displays the model from the front. Alternatively, press Z.
Back View
Displays the model from the back. Alternatively, press Shift + Z.
Top View
Displays the model from the top. Alternatively, press Y.
Bottom View
Displays the model from the bottom. Alternatively, press Shift + Y.
Left-side View
Displays the model from the left side. Alternatively, press X.
Right-side View
Displays the model from the right side. Alternatively, press Shift + R.
4 View
Displays the model in four windows.
This command automatically places the horizontal and vertical dividers, or splitter bars, and
changes the cursor to a four-way arrow. You can change the position of the splitter bars by
moving the mouse. Click to fix the position.
Drag the splitter bars to change the size of the windows. Drag the splitter bars out of the view to
remove those views. You can drag the splitter located at the top or left scroll bar to add views.
You can manipulate the image in any of these panes individually.
Tools Menu
Performs actions associated with toolbars, mini-windows, and importing and exporting
displacements.
Mini-windows
Displays a list of mini-windows that you can display. Mini-windows provide a quick way to
provide specific types of data.
Temps & Pressures - Displays the Edit Operating Conditions dialog box.
Fixed Format
A fixed format displacement file has the .disp extension and this format:
1. The first line has only one the conversion factor value, which is used to divide the
translational displacements (DX, DY, and DZ) to convert them to the internal unit of inches.
2. The second line is either Y axis up or Z axis up to indicate the CAESAR II Coordinate
System that the following displacement data corresponds to.
3. All the remaining lines are displacement data lines:
a. Each line must have 58 values: Node X, Y, Z and 54 displacements for the nodes (6
degrees of freedom times 9 vectors is 54).
b. The first value is a node number.
c. The following three values, the three coordinates of a node, are ignored.
d. The final 54 values are displacements of the node, in the order: DX1, DY1, DZ1, RX1,
RY1, RZ1... DX9, DY9, DZ9, RX9, RY9, RZ9.
e. The first character space is reserved for the comment "*", each of the 58 values must be
12 characters long so the total length of a displacement data line should be 697
(1+58x12) characters long.
f. The position of each of the 54 displacement values is used to determine its location in a
CAESAR II model. For example, values at position 5, 8, 55 and 58 correspond to DX1,
and RX1, DZ9, and RZ9 of the node in the model.
g. A value must occupy a 12 character field. When a value has fewer than 12 characters,
you must pad either to the left or right of the blanks to make it 12 characters in length. If
there is no displacement value, a 12 character blank field must be reserved for it.
When creating the blank space use the Space Bar. Do not use the Tab key.
e. Values are separated by commas. The length of a displacement data line is not fixed.
f. Because each value is followed by a comma, a comma counter is used to determine the
placement of the value in a CAESAR II model. For example, values at positions 5, 8, 55
and 58 correspond to DX1, and RX1, DZ9, and RZ9 of the node in the model,
respectively.
g. A value can be any number of characters in length. When there is no displacement
value, you can use a zero length or blank field. For example, if a comma is followed by a
comma, or if a comma is followed by blank spaces and then a comma, it means that its
corresponding location in a CAESAR II model has no displacement value.
Generally, the csv format is recommended for a displacement file because it is relatively easy to
generate and maintain in Microsoft Excel. The fixed format of a displacement file is more
difficult to maintain.
A displacement file from version 5.10 or 5.20 cannot be used directly in CAESAR II
Version 2014 (7.0) because the formats are different.
Warning Messages
There are three kinds of warning messages:
1. Node xxx is not in the model - Indicates that a node in the displacement file does not exist in
the CAESAR II model.
2. Node xxx could not find an empty location - Indicates that a node in the displacement file
exists in the CAESAR II model but that the software thinks that all displacement slots in the
model have already been occupied by other nodes. In this case, it is still possible for you to
input displacements for the node through the CAESAR II Classic Piping Input dialog box.
3. Node xxx does not have displacements - Indicates that a node in the displacement file does
not have a displacement value.
where xxx denotes a node number such as 100.
Generally, when a warning message is issued it indicates that an error exists either in the
displacement file or in the corresponding CAESAR II model. Carefully examine the offending
node in the displacement file or in the corresponding model and correct the error.
Summary Report
The Import and Export Summary reports are generated in the import and export operations.
The reports provide information about the nodes in a displacement file just imported into a
CAESAR II Import model:
1. The number of displacement nodes existing in the model before import.
2. The number of displacement nodes existing in the model after import.
3. The number of displacement nodes that have been read in.
4. The number of displacement nodes that are not in the model.
5. The number of displacement nodes that cannot find empty locations in the model.
You can also choose displacement files with the fixed format (.disp) by clicking
Displacement Import File (*.dsp) from the Files of type list.
During the import process, if an erroneous condition is detected for a displacement node a
warning message displays. A summary report is generated after all displacement data is
processed.
For more details about warning messages and the summary report, see Imposed Loads.
6. After reviewing warning messages and a summary report, click Done.
The first two figures show displacement files Notepad for disp and csv formats. The third
and fourth figures show displacement files in Microsoft Excel.
For a detailed description of both file formats, see Displacement File Formats (on page 352).
3D Modeler
When you start CAESAR II and start the piping input processor, the software automatically
displays a graphic representation of the model to the right of the Classic Piping Input dialog
box. To increase the window space available for graphics you can hide the Classic Piping
Input dialog box by clicking . The initial view for a job that has never been plotted displays
according to the configuration defaults. These defaults include:
A rendered view - restraints shown
XYZ compass - isometric view
Tees and nozzles highlighted - orthographic projection
The plotting begins by displaying the model in centerline/single line mode to speed up the
process. Then all the elements are rendered one-by-one. Later, the restraints and other relevant
items are added.
The model is fully operational while it is being drawn. You can apply any available option
to the model at any time. The status bar at the bottom displays the drawing progress in the form
of Drawing element X of Y. When the plot operation is complete the status message changes
to Ready.
When you hover the cursor over a button, the name of the button and a short description of the
functionality displays in the status bar at the bottom of the view window.
There are several methods of accomplishing nearly every command in the Input Plot utility. You
can access commands by clicking buttons, by selecting menu items, or by using hot keys.
Center Line View - Displays model data in single line mode. This often makes the view
clearer. In this mode, restraints and other element information items display. Display the
volume or double line plot by clicking the corresponding button. Press V to switch among
the views in the following order: Shaded View (rendered mode) / Two Line Mode / Center
Line View.
Shaded View - Displays the model as shaded 3D shapes. Restraints and other element
information items display.
Silhouette - Displays the model as a silhouette. Restraints and other element information
items display.
Hidden Line Wire Frame - Displays the model as a wire frame with hidden lines removed.
Restraints and other element information items display.
Wire Frame - Displays the model as a wire frame. Restraints and other element
information items display.
Translucent - Displays the model as translucent 3D shapes. Restraints and other element
information items display.
Back - Displays the model from the back. Alternatively, press Shift + Z.
Bottom - Displays the model from the bottom. Alternatively, press Shift + Y.
Right - Displays the model from the right. Alternatively, press Shift + X.
Southeast ISO View - Displays the model isometrically from the southeast. Alternatively,
press F10.
Node Numbers - Turns the display of node numbers on or off. Alternatively, press N. You
can display node numbers for a specific element such as only restraints or only anchors.
Select Element - Select a single element in the model. Hover over an element in the
model to display information about that element. Press Ctrl when you select to add or
remove elements from the selection.
Select Group - Select a group of elements in the model by dragging a window around
them. You can add elements to the selection by pressing Ctrl while dragging the window.
Remove elements from the selection by pressing Shift while dragging the window.
You can turn off the display of nodes, restraints, hangers, and anchors for a clearer view.
The size of boundary condition symbols (such as restraints, anchors, and hangers) is relative to
the pipe size outer diameter. You can change the size of these symbols clicking the black arrow
to the right of the relevant button and selecting a size from the list.
You can adjust the color of the node numbers, lengths, elements, boundary conditions, and so
on by clicking Change Display Options . For more information, see 3D Graphics
Configuration (on page 363).
Reset - Returns the model returns to its default state as defined by the configuration. Any
elements hidden by the Range command are restored.
Zoom - Increases or decreases the magnification of the model. Move the cursor up or
down holding the left mouse button. Release the mouse button to stop the zoom.
Alternatively, press + and - to zoom in and out. You can change the zoom level of the
model while in another command by rotating the mouse wheel.
Zoom to Window - Changes the magnification of the model to fit an area that you
specify. Click one corner of the area and then while holding the mouse button, stretch a
box diagonally to the opposite corner of the area
Orbit - Rotates the model interactively. Rotate the model using the mouse or the arrow
keys on the keyboard. To use the mouse, click the left mouse button on the model to start
a bounding box. Hold the left mouse button and move the mouse to the other end of the
bounding box. Release the mouse button to update the view. If the bounding box is not
visible, check the corresponding box on the User Options tab of the Plot Configuration
dialog box For more information, see 3D Graphics Configuration (on page 363). During
rotation, the model may in centerline mode, or some of the geometry details may
disappear or become distorted. This is to improve the display speed. The actual
conversion depends on the size and complexity of the model. After the rotation is
complete, the model returns to its original state.
Another method of orbiting the model is the Gyro-operator. Press G. The model performs
a 360-degree rotation in the plane of view.
Pan - Pans the model. The cursor changes to a hand. Move the cursor while holding
down the left mouse button. You can also pan the view while another command is active
by holding down the middle mouse button or mouse wheel while moving the mouse.
Walk Through - Explores the model with a setup similar to a virtual reality application.
This command produces the effect of walking towards the model
3D Graphics Configuration
The CAESAR II 3D Graphics engine remembers the state of the model between sessions.
When you exit and return, the model displays in the same state in which it was last viewed.
To obtain a more uniform look for the graphics, change the color and font options:
1. Click Tools > Configure/Setup on the main menu to display the CAESAR II Configuration
Editor dialog box.
2. Open the Graphics Settings category.
3. Set the Always Use System Fonts and Always Use System Colors options to True under
the Visual Options section.
These settings are stored in the computer's registry and CAESAR II always displays the
graphics according to these settings.
If the settings are set to False, then the state of each model is maintained individually as an
XML data file (job- name.XML) in the current data folder. After starting another input session,
CAESAR II reads this XML file and restores the 3D graphics to its previous state. This includes
the rotation and zoom level of the model; color settings, data display, and the current graphics
operator.
Option Description
Colors Select any color item in the list, then click to display a Windows color selection
tool. Select the new color. Click Reset All to return all of the settings to CAESAR II
defaults, as defined in configuration,.
Fonts Selecting any font item in the list, then click to display the standard Windows
font selection tool. Set the options to meet your requirements and click OK.
Option Description
Show Bounding Box Determines if rotations using the mouse include an outline box
surrounding the model.
Hide Overlapped Prevents text from appearing on top of other text items.
Text
Restore Previous Determines whether the software remembers your last command
Operator (operator) between sessions or always defaults to a specified
command.
Restore Previous Determines whether the graphics engine remembers the last displayed
View view of the model, or defaults to a specified view.
Highlighting Graphics
You can review the piping model in the context of certain data such as by diameter, wall
thickness, temperature, or pressure.
You can make changes to some piping input properties from the Legends dialog box. The
software updates all elements that have the same property value in the model. For more
information, see Updating Properties from the 3D Model (on page 369).
Command Description
Diameters Updates the model to show each diameter in a different color. Use this
option to see the diameter variations throughout the system or to verify
that diameter changes have been made. Alternatively, press D. A color
key displays the diameters defined in the model. You can change the
assigned colors to meet your needs.
Wall Thickness Updates the model to show each wall thickness in a different color.
Use this option to see the wall thickness variations throughout the
system or to verify that changes have been made. Alternatively, press
W. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can
change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
Cladding Thickness Updates the model to show each cladding thickness in a different
color. Use this option to see the cladding thickness variations
throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can
change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
You can change the display to insulation thickness or refractory
thickness by selecting that option from the list.
Refractory Thickness Updates the model to show each refractory thickness in a different
color. Use this option to see the refractory thickness variations
throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can
change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
You can change the display to insulation thickness or cladding
thickness by selecting that option from the list.
Material Updates the model to show each material in a different color. Use this
option to see the material variations throughout the system or to verify
that changes have been made. Alternatively, press M. A color key
displays the materials defined in the model. You can change the
assigned colors to meet your needs.
Piping Codes Updates the model to show each piping code in a different color. Use
this option to see the piping code variations throughout the system or
to verify that changes have been made.
Pipe Density Updates the model to show each pipe density in a different color. Use
this option to see the pipe density variations throughout the system or
to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays the pipe
densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.
Fluid Density Updates the model to show each fluid density in a different color. Use
this option to see the fluid density variations throughout the system or
to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays the fluid
densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
Insulation Density Updates the model to show each insulation density in a different color.
Use this option to see the insulation density variations throughout the
system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays
the insulation densities defined in the model. You can change the
assigned colors to meet your needs.
You can change the display to cladding density, insulation or cladding
unit weight, or refractory density by selecting that option from the list.
Cladding Density Updates the model to show each cladding density in a different color.
Use this option to see the cladding density variations throughout the
system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays
the cladding densities defined in the model. You can change the
assigned colors to meet your needs.
You can change the display to insulation density, insulation or cladding
unit weight, or refractory density by selecting that option from the list.
Insul/Cladding Unit Wt. Updates the model to show each insulation or cladding unit weight in a
different color. Use this option to see the variations throughout the
system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays
the insulation or cladding unit weights defined in the model. You can
change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
You can change the display to insulation density, cladding density, or
refractory density by selecting that option from the list.
Refractory Density Updates the model to show each refractory density in a different color.
Use this option to see the refractory density variations throughout the
system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays
the refractory densities defined in the model. You can change the
assigned colors to meet your needs.
You can change the display to insulation density, insulation or cladding
unit weight, or insulation density by selecting that option from the list.
The Legend dialog box can be resized, docked, or removed from view.
You can still zoom, pan, or rotate the model while in highlight mode. You can also use any
of orthographic projections and single line or volume modes without affecting the model
highlighted state.
Clicking one of the highlight commands a second time cancels the coloring effect.
If you print the model while it is in highlight mode, the color key legend displays in the upper
left corner of the page, even if the actual legend window has been dragged away from the
view.
3. Type a new value in the Edit box and press ENTER or click anywhere in the dialog box.
The software updates all elements that have the same property value, represented in the
Legend dialog box, on the 3D model, and in the List dialog box.
Currently, the software does not include global update functionality for the following
piping input properties:
Materials
Piping Codes
Forces
Uniform Loads
Wind/Wave Data
Displacements
Pipe Density
displacement load vectors. If a DOF has a specified displacement in at least one of the load
vectors, then it is fixed in all other load vectors.
Forces - Updates the model to show each force in a different color. Use this option to
see the force variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the force defined in the model. You can change the
assigned colors to meet your needs.
The force parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data. Click
Next >> and Previous << to move through the displacement or force vectors.
Uniform Loads - Updates the model to show each uniform load in a different color. Use
this option to see the uniform load variations throughout the system or to verify that
changes have been made. A color key displays the uniform loads defined in the model.
You can change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
The uniform load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the
data. Click Next >> and Previous << to move through the displacement or force
vectors.
Uniform Loads has three vectors defined. The Node column represents the start node
number where the uniform loads vector was first defined. Because the data propagates
throughout the model until changed or disabled, the model is colored accordingly.
Wind/Wave - Updates the model to show each wind or wave load in a different color.
Use this option to see the variations throughout the system or to verify that changes
have been made. A color key displays the wind or wave loads defined in the model.
The wind and wave load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of
the data. Click Next >> and Previous << to move through the loads.
All the elements with wind defined display in red. All the elements with wave data
defined display in green. The legend grid shows the relevant data.
Alternatively, you can click Select Group on the Standard Operators toolbar and draw a
box around the items you want to select.
The highlighted elements define the set that any Block Operations command affects. A block
can contain any number of elements, from a single element to every element in the model.
Find - Displays a specific element in the view. This command displays a dialog box
that allows you to specify the From and To nodes for which you want to search. You
can enter the node numbers in either of the two fields, or in both. If you entering only
the From node number, the software searches for the first available element that
starts with that node number. If you enter only the To node number, the software
searches for an element ending with that node number. When the software locates
the element it highlights the element and fits it in the view. You can zoom out to better
identify the location of the highlighted element within the model.
3D Cutting Plane - Defines the cutting plane for the model. This option is useful when
trying to emphasize a specific element. In many cases, the elements or node numbers
are not defined consecutively. Because of this, it may be easier to cut a portion of the
model at a certain location to see more details.
When the cutting plane displays, use the handles to move and or rotate the planes. If
cutting the plane's handles are not visible, or the display goes blank, use the Zoom
command to expand the view. To disable the cutting plane, select the command
again.
This command can be used along any of the three axes.
Range - Displays only the elements that contain nodes within a range. This is helpful
when you need to locate specific nodes or a group of related elements in a large
model. This command displays the Range dialog box. Alternatively, press U.
For more information, see Range (on page 328).
Line Numbers - Displays the Line Numbers pane which allows graphical editing of
line numbers. You can do the following from this pane.
Assign a new line number to the block of elements that have been selected on the
3D graphical display.
Remove an existing line number.
Set and reset visibility options to hide and unhide elements.
Assign a color to an individual line number.
To reassign one or more elements from one line number to another existing line
number, simply drag-and-drop (move) the elements between existing Line Numbers in
the Line Numbers pane.
When you click the Line Number name in the Line Number pane, the
corresponding elements are highlighted in the 3D pane and are selected to perform
Block operations.
available viewing options such as orbit, pan, zoom, different render modes, and so on. The
image can be printed or copied to the clipboard.
Internet Explorer (IE) version 5.0 and earlier may not display the image properly.
Intergraph CAS recommends IE6 or later.
You can use the Markups toolbar functions to add additional lines or annotations to the image.
The Markups toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the
3D Model, contains the following functions.
Freehand Markup - Draws a line in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the line.
Rectangle Markup - Draws a rectangle in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the
rectangle.
Circle Markup - Draws a circle in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the circle.
Annotate - Adds a brief description to the model. The annotation may be especially useful
in the output processor. The annotation text box is a single line. Annotation is printed and
saved to the bitmap. Annotation is not saved to HTML.
Annotate w/Leader - Adds a brief description to the model. This annotation includes a
leader line. Drag the annotation box to extend the leader. The annotation text box is a single
line. The annotation with a leader stays with the model when you zoom, pan, rotate, or use
any of the highlight options. Annotation is printed and saved to the bitmap. Annotation is not
saved to HTML.
The markup annotation text box is a single line. The color and the font face/size cannot be
changed. The default color is red.
Markup annotations are saved to the .TIF file and spooled to the printer.
The geometry and the text of the markup annotations are temporary. They are not saved
with the model. These graphics and disappear from view with any change such as zoom,
rotate, pan, or reset all.
The color, font face, and size of the annotation text can be changed by clicking Tools >
Configure/Setup on the main menu. For more information, see 3D Graphics Configuration
(on page 363).
When you select an operator, the software keeps it active until you click another operator. (For
example, Freehand Markup stays selected until you select Orbit or Pan.)
Walking Around
You can begin walking by clicking and holding the left mouse button. Move forward by moving
the mouse toward the top of the window. Move back by doing the opposite.
Walk Through also provides an additional control that aids in navigation. Clicking the
various hot spots on the control duplicates mouse movements with the added benefit of
providing the ability to move in a perfectly straight line.
In addition, Walk Through also provides you with the added functionality of determining the
walking speed. In general, walking speed is determined by the distance between where you first
click and how far you move the mouse. The keys below which, if held down while walking, effect
walk through's operation:
Shift - Changes the walk mode to run mode, effectively doubling the walk speed.
Ctrl - Changes the walk mode to slow mode, effectively halving the walk speed.
Alt - Enables you to look left or right without changing the walk path. Releasing the key,
automatically returns your viewpoint to looking forward.
To exit from this command, click any other command.
Moving Elements
The Move Geometry commands, located in the Edit Mode toolbar, let you select and move
nodes or elements along a specified axis. Select the node or element, and then press Tab or
click to select the x-, y-, or z-axis option (located next to the Move Geometry option in the
toolbar). The software defaults to the X-Axis.
For example, to move a restraint along a corresponding pipe centerline, select Move Geometry
and specify the direction of the axis for the line. Or, if your model includes an expansion loop,
select Move Geometry to change the length or depth of the loop in the direction of the specified
axis.
Once you select an operator, the software keeps it active until you click another operator.
(For example, Move Geometry stays selected until you select Orbit or Pan.)
To move elements on the 3D model
1. Click Move Geometry to display marker control points at all nodes and tangent points.
On bends, the marker control points display on the far weld-line.
2. Click and drag the cursor to select the nodes to move.
3. Click any of the selected nodes.
The mouse is in move mode. The mouse movement is clamped to either the x, y, or z axis.
4. To change the axis press Tab or click one of the Axis commands on the Edit Mode toolbar.
5. Click to specify the new location.
The model geometry is updates.
6. Alternatively, you can type the magnitude of the movement. If you type a single number, the
movement is applied to the currently selected axis. You can move in multiple directions at
once by typing <x-value>, <y-value>, <z-value>.
Click S3D/SPR Model in the Reference CAD Models toolbar in the Classic Piping Input
and select one of the following drop-down menu options:
Load S3D/SPR Model
Show/Hide S3D/SPR Model
Dim S3D/SPR Model
S3D/SPR Visibility Options
Alternatively, select elements in the area of interest by drawing a selection window around them
using the Selection Group option in the Standard Operators toolbar. Then click the option
Bounding-box from Selection.
1. Click Draw Cube at the bottom of the dialog box.
You can then re-size or pan the cube is all six dimensions (up, down, left, right, front, back)
until you have enclosed all the parts of the model you want to load into a CAESAR II model.
As shown in the figure above, the bounding box has 6 markers:
Anchor Marker - This marker indicates the starting point of the bounding box (shown in
red). You cannot resize the model using this marker.
The 3 faces to which the anchor marker is connected are fixed (cannot be moved via
any of the markers). You can move the whole bounding box by panning it.
Top Face Marker - This marker is used to move the top face (for example, the face
which is perpendicular to top-view-axis of the model, such as Y_Up, Z_Up).
Base Markers - The bounding box has 3 base markers which allow you to re-size the
bounding box by selecting any one of them and dragging the mouse.
Base Marker 1 moves the rest of the two faces along with Base Marker 3
Select a file
Select a Smart 3D VUE file from your hard drive.
Alternatively, you can type the path name to the location of your VUE file.
Full Load
Click this radio button if you want to load the entire Smart 3D model from the selected VUE file.
You can select either Full Load or Partial Load as one of the VUE Loading Options.
Partial Load
Click this radio button if you want to load a selected portion of the Smart 3D model from the
selected VUE file. This option allows you to use the bounding box to filter the S3D/SPR model to
the area of interest.
You can select either Full Load or Partial Load as one of the VUE Loading Options.
Re-Import
Select this check box if you want to re-import or refresh a Smart 3D VUE file.
Starting Point X
The values for the X, Y, and Z axes display in the Starting Point boxes depending on how you
manipulate the size and shape of the cube with the graphics tools. You cannot enter data in the
Starting Point boxes; they are for informational purposes only.
Starting Point Y
The values for the X, Y, and Z axes display in the Starting Point boxes depending on how you
manipulate the size and shape of the cube with the graphics tools. You cannot enter data in the
Starting Point boxes; they are for informational purposes only.
Starting Point Z
The values for the X, Y, and Z axes display in the Starting Point boxes depending on how you
manipulate the size and shape of the cube with the graphics tools. You cannot enter data in the
Starting Point boxes; they are for informational purposes only.
Use this option to hide details of the S3D/SPR reference model that are not needed or could
be distracting while you are working with this model. For example, if you import a Smart 3D
piping model using the CAESAR II APCF or PCF option and want to reference the S3D/SPR
graphic model for context, the piping elements in the CAESAR II model and the S3D/SPR
graphic reference model can overlap and cause confusion. You can turn off the display of
piping elements from the S3D/SPR graphic reference model enabling you to compare the
changes more easily.
2. You can select a value from 0% to 100% for each of the five categories of components in a
Smart 3D model.
The value is the percentage of light allowed to pass through the object. For example, a low
percentage value indicates the graphics elements are nearly invisible.
3. Check the corresponding check box(es) to display the elements for a given category or
select the top check box to display all the categories.
The Smart 3D graphic displays the categories you select at the given visibility values.
4. Click the Hide/show icon to hide or display the S3D model graphic.
5. Click the refresh visibility icon to refresh the S3D model graphic to display the revised
visibility settings.
In This Section
Structural Steel Model Basics.........................................................387
Structural Steel Graphics ................................................................392
CAESAR II Structural Input ............................................................393
Structural Steel Input Examples .....................................................397
Insert Menu .....................................................................................424
Commands Menu ...........................................................................424
Structural Databases ......................................................................465
Start the Structural Steel Modeler from the CAESAR II main menu by opening a structural file,
and then choosing Input > Structural Steel. The software opens the CAESAR II Structural
Input dialog box.
Because many structures have a considerable degree of repeatability, there are various forms,
options, and deviations for these commands to help you generate large structural models. The
method of single element generation is well suited to the needs of most pipers.
Create new lines by selecting a keyword command from the Edit menu or from the toolbar. The
most typically used commands are as follows:
EDim (on page 438) - Defines structural elements.
Fix (on page 428) - Defines structural anchors (ALL) or restraints.
Load (on page 445) - Defines concentrated forces.
Unif (on page 441) - Defines uniform loads.
Secid (on page 450) - Defines cross-section properties.
From the Edit menu, you can complete other frequently used functions, including:
Edit > Undo - Reverse the last action.
Edit > Copy Card - Copies an existing command. You must first select the command to
copy.
Edit > Paste Card - Pastes a command in the model at the location specified from the
Insert menu.
Edit > Delete Card - Deletes an existing command. You must first select the command to
delete.
Certain commands set parameters that the software uses for all future element generations:
Default (on page 462) - Sets the default Section ID and Material ID.
Angle (on page 440) - Sets the default element orientation.
Beams (on page 454), Braces (on page 457), and Columns (on page 459) - Sets the
default end connection type.
Before you start working with structural models in CAESAR II, you must specify the database for
upon which the software bases the model.
You can use stand-alone AISC Code Check software to verify that forces and moments
on standard structural shapes do not exceed the various allowable stress limits as defined by
the American Institute of Steel Construction.
From the model, you can show or hide the supports and restraints, anchors, the compass, node
numbers, and element lengths.In addition, you can change the size of restraints relative to the
structural elements.
The graphics view displays in the right pane when you define enough information in the
Card Stack pane. For example, if you specify the method as Method 2 - Node/Element
Specifications in the Structural Steel Wizard, and you have only specified the Nodes in the
list of commands, the software does not display anything in the graphical view because there is
not yet a model to show. However, after you define a single element (Elem) between two points
in space, the software displays the corresponding element in the graphical view. When using
Method 1 - Element Definitions (EDIM), which is similar to defining elements in the CAESAR II
Classic Piping Input, the corresponding graphic element displays after you specify the EDim
command parameters.
You can resize or disable the Card Stack pane to allow the graphical view to fill the entire
screen. Additionally, you can dock the Card Stack pane on or off of the main window. After you
dock the pane, you can remove it completely from the view or close it. To show or hide the Card
Stack pane, click .
The CAESAR II Structural Input dialog box has a Change Display Option that lets you
change the default colors for all steel elements and restraints. For more information, see 3D
Graphics Configuration (on page 363).
Loads, such as uniform or wind, are not available in graphics mode in the Structural Steel
Modeler.
You can also flip the coordinate system automatically between displaying the Y-axis up (or Y-up)
to the Z-axis up (or Z-up) in the Structural Steel Modeler. The software modifies all relevant data
match with the new coordinate system. Click Vertical to insert the VERTICAL command
into the command list, and then select Y or Z-from the axis parameter options.
The Card Stack pane is sub-divided into two columns. The first column displays commands and
parameters. Click the arrow to the left of any command to view the parameter data in the second
column of the pane.
To add a command to the model, select the command from either the Commands menu or the
Commands toolbar. For more information, see Commands Menu (on page 424).
Click + to expand command and view the parameters available. Type or select the values in the
second column. Add all the commands to the structural model, and then click Save to
generate the structural model.
Card Stack, List Options, and Errors tabs at the bottom of the Card Stack pane display mode,
keyword and error information for the model. Click Auto Hide to collapse the tabs to the left
side of the window and expand the graphical view. Click Close X to hide the tabs.
The Errors tab does not display when there are no errors in the model.
Use the Input Card Toolbar (on page 348) functions to copy, paste, or delete commandsd from
the structural model.
The software displays the Material Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard.
Define a cross-section
Use the Cross Section Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard to specify the
cross-sections in the model.
1. Click Select Section ID.
The Section ID Selection dialog box appears.
The software defaults the Section ID to 1, but you can type a new ID.
2. Expand the hierarchy as needed, select a cross section and click OK.
You can also type a cross section name in the NAME box. For more information, see
Structural Databases (on page 465) for cross section names in the CAESAR II databases.
3. Optionally, select User Defined? to create a custom cross section. Type values for Area,
Ixx (moment of inertia about the strong axis), Iyy (moment of inertia about the weak axis), J
(torsion) (torsional resistivity constant), BoxH (overall height) and BoxW (overall width).
4. Click Add Another Section if you need to define additional cross-sections.
The value for the Section ID increases by one.
Use the up and down arrows next to Add Another Section to scroll through all
sections.
5. Click Next.
The software displays the Model Definition Method Selection page of the Structural
Steel Wizard.
A U-bolt pins the pipe to the top of the channel at node 20. The piping loads output from the pipe
stress program are:
Fx= -39.0 lbs.
Fy= -1975.0 lbs.
Fz= 1350.0 lbs.
6. Specify the cross section by typing in the name exactly as it appears (including exact
capitalization and trailing zeros) or by clicking Select Section ID and selecting the name
from the list.
For this example, enter the Section ID 1 name as W16X26.
7. Click Add Another Section to create other cross sections. Enter Section ID 2 as MC8X22.8
and Section ID 3 as L6X4X0.5000. Repeat this until you have three sections specified in this
example, then click Next.
The software displays the Model Definition Method Selection page.
8. Select Method 1 - Element Definitions Method Selection (the default setting) to use the
Element Dimension (EDim) option to define individual elements that span between two node
points. Then, click Finish. This input works similarly to piping input, where elements are
defined by their end points and delta X, Y, Z distances between those end points.
The Method 2 - Node/Element Specifications option uses commands to define an array of
nodes in space and commands to add elements bounded by these nodes.
The software opens the CAESAR II Structural Modeler dialog box, where you can
interactively input data. Click the arrow on each line in the modeler to expand or condense
the information.
2. Click EDim to add the first element to the end of the list, then click the arrow to the left
to expand the data for that group, and enter the column data.
Notice that the first element is at node 5 to node 10 and runs 12 feet in the Y direction and
has a section number of 1 (the default section).
Press TAB to move quickly from one Card Stack box to the next.
3. When you complete the first element, click EDim and repeat the entry process to add
the next four elements.
Use the Input Card Toolbar (on page 348) functions to copy, paste, or delete a card
from the Structural Modeler. Alternatively, you can copy or delete a card element by
selecting Edit > Copy Card or Edit > Delete Card.
After you complete the element entry, the software displays the current model.
Select Reset View to return the model to a default view each time the model
refreshes. When activated, this function appears highlighted. You can use Reset View to
zoom in and out on the model to make changes, and then quickly return to your default
view.
5. Click Loads to enter the loads on this support. You can use a previous CAESAR II
analysis for these loads.
6. Enter the loads at Node 20 [(FX, FY, FZ)=(-39, -1975, 1350)].
7. Add comments to the model by first setting where CAESAR II inserts comments from the
Insert menu option. You can specify for comments to appear before or after the currently
selected element, or at the end of the model elements list. Click Comment to add
comments to the model.
After you insert a comment, you must click the down arrow to expand the comment
element and add the comment text. The following example shows the completed model with
new comments inserted.
8. Click File > Save to check and save the model. Then, click OK.
CAESAR II checks the input. If the error checker does not find any fatal errors, CAESAR II
writes the execution files and you can use the model in a piping analysis or you can analyze
the model singularly. For the purposes of this example, you will analyze the model by itself.
9. Close the CAESAR II Structural Modeler dialog box and return to the CAESAR II main
menu.
10. With the SUPP file still open as the current model, click Analysis > Statics on the toolbar.
Remember to replace the Weight load in Load Case 1 (L1) with F1 (the applied
loads).
11. Click Run the Analysis.
CAESAR II performs the structural steel analysis, just as a piping analysis.
The output from a structural analysis is comprised of displacements, forces, and moments. The
results from the analysis of the SUPP model show the displacements at Node 20.
These displacements are excessive for a support, which is to be assumed rigid in another
analysis. The translational stiffness for the support can be computed as follows:
Kx = 39 lb. / 10.125 in. = 3.85 lb./in
Ky = 1975 lb. / 0.4228 in. = 4671 lb./in.
Kz = 1350 lb. / 0.8444 in. = 1599 lb./in.
Check the piping and structure shown in the following four figures:
Import the structural input file into the Structural Steel Modeler
1. Click File > Open from the CAESAR II main menu.
2. Change File of type to Structural (*.str) and navigate to the file you created,
SUPP2.str. Then, click Open.
3. Click Input > Structural Steel from the CAESAR II main menu.
The software opens the structural model for SUPP2.str.
4. After you have confirmed that the model is correct, click File > Save, and click Yes to save
the model.
5. Select all the check boxes in the Model Generation Status dialog box, and click OK.
CAESAR II checks the input. If the error checker does not find any fatal errors, CAESAR II
writes the execution files and you can use the model in a piping analysis or you can analyze
the model singularly. For the purposes of this example, you will analyze the model with a
piping model.
6. Close the CAESAR II Structural Modeler dialog box and return to the CAESAR II main
menu.
PIPE DATA
From 5 to 10 DX= 6.417 ft.
PIPE
Dia = 30.000 in. Wall= .375 in.
GENERAL
T1= 850 F Mat= (186)A335 P5
Insul Thk= .000 in.
BEND at "TO" end
Radius= 45.000 in. (LONG)
RESTRAINTS
Node 5 ANC
ALLOWABLE STRESSES
B31.3 (2008)
----------------------------------------------------------
From 10 to 15 DY= -8.000 ft.
----------------------------------------------------------
From 15 to 20 DY= -13.833 ft
----------------------------------------------------------
From 20 to 25 DY= -8.000 ft.
BEND at "TO" end
Radius= 45.000 in. (LONG)
----------------------------------------------------------
From 25 to 30 DX= 10.000 ft.
RESTRAINTS
Node 30 +Y
----------------------------------------------------------
From 30 To 35 DX= 30.000 ft.
RESTRAINTS
Node 35 +Y
----------------------------------------------------------
From 35 To 40 DX= 10.000 ft.
BEND at "TO" end
Radius= 45.000 in. (LONG)
----------------------------------------------------------
From 40 To 45 DZ= -3.750 ft.
----------------------------------------------------------
From 45 To 50 DZ= -4.000 ft.
PIPE
Dia= 30.000 in. Wall= .375 in.
Insul Thk= .000 in.
REDUCER
Diam2= 36.000 in. Wall2= .375 in.
----------------------------------------------------------
From 50 To 55 DZ= -20.000 ft.
PIPE
Dia= 36.000 in. Wall= .375 in.
Insul Thk= .000 in.
----------------------------------------------------------
From 55 To 60 DZ= -20.000 ft.
----------------------------------------------------------
From 60 To 65 DZ= -10.000 ft.
RESTRAINTS
Node 65 ANC
----------------------------------------------------------
From 15 To 115 DX= -2.500 ft.
PIPE
Dia= 30.000 in. Wall= .375 in.
Insul Thk= .000 in.
RIGID Weight= .00 lb.
RESTRAINTS
Node 115 X Cnode 215
Node 115 Z Cnode 215
----------------------------------------------------------
From 20 To 120 DX= -2.500 ft.
RIGID Weight= .00 lb.
RESTRAINTS
Node 120 X Cnode 240
In this piping input example, there are two weightless, rigid elements at nodes 15 to 115 and 20
to 120 that run out from the pipe centerline to the connecting points of the structure.
The two restraint sets at the end of the data115 and 120are pipe nodes and their
CNodes215 and 240are structural steel nodes in SUPP2.
4. After the software plots the pipe and structure relative to one another, exit the Piping Input
(see "Piping Input generation" on page 31) dialog box and run the error check.
The error checker includes the pipe and structure together during checking. The execution
files that the software writes also include the structural data.
5. Run the analysis using the default load cases.
The following shows the restraint report for Load Case 1, W+T1 (OPE):
The loads on the anchor at 5 are excessive. The structural steel frame and pipe support
structure as shown are not satisfactory.
In this example, displacement of the structure is small relative to the displacement of the pipe.
The pipe is thermally expanding out away from the boiler nozzle and down, away from the boiler
nozzle.
The pipe is pulling the structure in the positive X direction at the top support and pushing the
structure in the negative X direction at the bottom support. These displacements result in higher
loads on the boiler nozzle. The vertical location of the structural supports should be studied
more closely.
You could add vertical springs at 30 and 35, which might help, along with a repositioning of the
structural supports vertically. For example, the support at node 120 should be moved down so
that its line of action in the X direction more closely coincides with the center line of the pipe
between nodes 25 and 40.
3. Navigate and select the CAESAR II data folder, and click OK.
The software displaysthe Units Selection page.
4. Click Next to accept ENGLISH,FIL, the default value for current units.
The software displays the Vertical Axis Selection page.
5. Verify that the vertical axis is set to the y-axis, and then click Next.
The software displays the Material Selection page.
6. Click Next in the Material Selection dialog box to use default material properties.
The software displays the Cross Section Selection page.
7. Specify the two cross sections, Section ID 1 as W12X65 and Section ID 2 as W10X22, and
then click Next.
The software displays the Model Definition Method Selection page.
Select Method 1 - Element Definitions (the default setting) to use the element dimension
(Edim) method of input. Then, click Finish.
The software opens the CAESAR II Structural Input dialog box, where you can
interactively input data. Click the arrow on each line in the modeler to expand or condense
the information.
8. Use the interactive input processor to input the following commands.
You can also import these commands by inputting them in a text editor and then
importing the .str file into the model. For more information, see Structural Steel Example 2
(see "Structural Steel Example #2" on page 407).
UNIT ENGLISH.FIL
VERTICAL=Y
MATID 1 YM=29E6 POIS=0.3 G=11.6E6 DENS=0.283
SECID 1 W12X65
SECID 2 W10X22
; Preceding entries completed by opening dialog
; Columns have strong axis in Z (Default is X)
ANGLE=90
; Generate all columns
EDIM FROM=5 TO=10 BY=5 LAST=20 DY=12-
EDIM 25 30 BY=5 LAST=40 DY=12-
EDIM 45 50 BY=5 LAST=60 DY=12-
EDIM 65 70 BY=5 LAST=80 DY=12-
; Beam orientation is standard
ANGLE=0
; Set the default Section ID to 2
DEF SECID=2
; Beams are pinned, both ends are free to rotate
BEAM FREE FBNDSTR FBNDWEAK FTORS TBNDSTR TBNDWEAK TTORS
; Define most beams
EDIM 10 30 5 LAST=35 DZ=-14-
EDIM 30 50 5 LAST=60 DX=-10-
EDIM 50 70 5 LAST=80 DZ=14-
EDIM 70 10 5 LAST=20 DX=10-
; Node 1000 will be fixed in rotation
10. When you are satisfied that the model has been entered properly, click File > Save to check
and save the model.
CAESAR II checks the input. If no fatal errors are found, the software writes the CAESAR II
Execution files. The model may now be used in a piping analysis or analyzed by itself. For
the purposes of this example the model will be analyzed by itself.
11. Click OK, and then close the CAESAR II Structural Modeler Input dialog box.
12. Return to the CAESAR II Main menu.
Notice that the structure is more stiff in the X direction, even though the Z dimension is greater,
due to the orientation of the columns. The Global Element Forces (which displays forces and
moments) report is particularly interesting because all of the beams have pinned ends. Most of
the beams carry no load. This is because the transfer of the load to the beams in this model is
due to rotations at the column ends, and not translations.
By adding cross-braces you can eliminate this problem and cause the beams to pick up more of
the load. The 1000 end node of the elements from 20-1000 and from 40-1000 carries a moment
because it is not a pinned end connection. The 1000 end node is just a point at midspan for the
application of the load.
Insert Menu
Use the Insert menu to specify where to place a command from the Command menu in the
Card Stock pane.
At End of Model
Places a new card at the end of the model (that is, at the bottom of the Card Stack).
Commands Menu
Use the Commands Menu to add cards in the Card Stack pane. The cards define parameters
used in the structural model.
Node
Node or Commands > Node defines the coordinates of a point in global X, Y, and Z space
and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
node number
Specifies the node number.
x, y, z
Specifies the global coordinates.
NFill
NFill or Commands > NFill defines evenly spaced nodes between two end points and
places the following card in the Card Stack:
3. Click Nfill .
The NFILL card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the NFILL card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the NFILL properties.
6. Click Save if you are finished.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.
from
Specifies the from node number.
to
Specifies the to node number.
by
Specifies the increment in the range.
NGen
NGen or Commands > NGen duplicates patterns of nodes and places the following card in
the Card Stack pane:
The first and last node in the base node pattern must exist before you can use NGen. Other
nodes not previously defined in the base node pattern are evenly spaced by a defined increment
between the first and last node. Subsequent nodal patterns start from the base pattern. DX, DY,
and DZ offsets define nodes duplicated from the base pattern of nodes.
Duplicate node
1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the NGEN card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 424).
3. Click NGen .
The NGEN card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the NGEN card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the NGEN properties.
6. Click Save to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.
from
Specifies the first node in the base node pattern. You must enter a value for an existing node
before you can use NGen.
to
Specifies the last node in the base node pattern. You must enter a value for an existing node
before you can use NGen.
inc
Specifies a value for the increment you want to use in the base node pattern between the first
node and the last node. If you do not enter a value, the default is 1.
last
Specifies the number of times to duplicate the base node pattern. If you do not enter a value,
single pattern duplication occurs.
nodeInc
Specifies a value for the increment that you want to use in the base node pattern to the nodes in
the first generated pattern and then from this pattern to the next generated pattern and so forth.
dx, dy, dz
Specifies the global coordinate offsets to get from the nodes in the base pattern to the nodes in
the first generated pattern, and then from this pattern to the next generated pattern, and so forth.
Example
The nodes from 1100 to 2000 with an increment of 100 are duplicated twice. Each new pattern
is offset by 10 ft. in the Z-direction. The new nodes created are from 2100 to 3000 and also from
3100 to 4000.
Fix
Fix or Commands > Fix defines the restraint boundary conditions at the structural member
end points and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
from
Specifies the first node number in the range.
If you are using FIX to define a single node point, you do not need values for to and by.
to
Specifies the last node number in the range.
If you are using FIX to define a single node point, you do not need values for to and by.
by
Specifies the increment in the range.
If you are using FIX to define a single node point, you do not need values for to and by.
all
Specifies that all six degrees of freedom (DOF) are Free or Fixed.
This parameter is the equivalent of an anchor.
all stiffness
Specifies the same stiffness value for all six degrees of freedom (DOF).
x
Specifies the Free or Fixed value in the x direction.
x stiffness
Specifies the value for the translational stiffness in the x direction.
y
Specifies the Free or Fixed value in the y direction.
y stiffness
Specifies the value for the translational stiffness in the y direction.
z
Specifies the Free or Fixed value in the z direction.
z stiffness
Specifies the value for the translational stiffness in the z direction.
rx
Specifies the value for the rotation in the x direction.
rx stiffness
Specifies the value for the rotational stiffness in the x direction.
ry
Specifies the value for the rotation in the y direction.
ry stiffness
Specifies the value for the rotational stiffness in the y direction.
rz
Specifies the value for the rotation in the z direction.
rz stiffness
Specifies the value for the rotational stiffness in the z direction.
Example
1. FIX 1 ALL. Fix all degrees of freedom at node #1.
2. FIX 5 X1000 Y1000 Z1000. Fix X, Y and Z degrees of freedom at node #5, and use 1,000
lb./in. springs.
3. FIX 100 TO 110. ALL Fix rigidly all degrees of freedom for the nodes from 100 to 110. The
increment between 100 and 110 defaults to 1. Eleven nodes have their fixities defined here.
4. FIX 105 TO 125 BY 5 X1000,1000,1000 Fix X, Y, and Z degrees of freedom for the nodes:
105, 110, 115, 120, and 125, and use 1,000 lb./in. springs.
5. FIX (1) to (10) ALL Fix all degrees of freedom for the first 10 nodes in the node list.
Elem
Elem or Commands > Elem defines a single element between two nodes and places the
following card in the Card Stack pane:
You can use a section identifier and a material identifier for the element. If you omit the section
and/or material IDs the program uses the current default.
from
Specifies the from node number.
to
Specifies the to node number.
secId
Specifies the Section ID for the first element generated.
matId
Specifies the Material ID for the first element generated.
EFill
EFill generates a consecutive string of elements and places the following card in the Card
Stack pane:
You can use the EFill command at any time, none of the elements generated need to exist
prior to adding the EFill command.
3. Click EFill .
The EFILL card is added to the card stack.
4. Click to expand the EFILL card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the EFILL properties.
6. Click Save to finish adding cards to the Card Stack.
The stack is saved and the Error Checker checks your model for errors
from
Specifies the from node number on the first element generated.
to
Specifies the to node number on the first element generated.
inc
Specifies the increment to get from the from node on the first element to the from node on the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 1.
incTo
Specifies the increment to use to get from the to node of the first element to the to node of the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the value of inc is used.
last
Specifies the to node on the last element generated.
secId
Specifies the Section ID for the first element generated.
matId
Specifies the Material ID for the first element generated.
insecid
Specifies the increment to use to get from the Section ID for the first element to the Section ID
for the second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 0.
incMatId
Specifies the increment to get from the Material ID for the first element to the Material ID for the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 0.
Example
Elements are generated between each pair of nodes between nodes 1200 and 2000. The
increment between From nodes and To nodes is 100. Nine elements are created in this
example.
Elem was not necessary here. Create all nine elements using EFill and by substituting node
1100 in place of node 1200 in the from field.
EGen
EGen or Commands EGen duplicates patterns of elements and places the following card in
the Card Stack pane:
Duplicate elements
1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the EGEN card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 424).
3. Click EGen .
The EGEN card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the EGEN card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the EGEN properties.
6. Click Save to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker checks the model for errors.
from
Specifies the from node on the first element in the base pattern.
to
Specifies the to node on the first element in the base pattern.
inc
Specifies the increment to use to get from the from node on the first element in the base pattern
to the from node on the second element in base pattern. If you do not enter a value, the default
is 1.
incTo
Specifies the increment to use to get from the to node of the first element to the to node of the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the value of inc is used.
last
Specifies the to node on the last element in the base pattern. The software generates multiple
copies from the base pattern of elements.
genInc
Specifies the increment to get from the from node on the first element in the base pat\-tern to
the from node on the first element in the first duplicate pattern.
genIncTo
Specifies the increment to use to get from the to node on the first element in the base pattern to
the to node on the first element in the first duplicate pattern. If you do not enter a value, the
value of genInc is used.
genLast
Specifies the to node on the last element in the last pattern to be duplicated from the base
pattern.
secId
Specifies the Section ID to use for the elements in the base pattern. If you do not enter a value,
the value from the Default card is used. For more information, see Default (on page 462).
matId
Specifies the Material ID to use for the elements in the base pattern. If you do not enter a value,
the value from the Default card is used. For more information, see Default (on page 462).
inSecId
Specifies the Section ID increment to use between patterns. For example, the first pattern of
elements generated from the base pattern of elements has a Section ID of SECID + INCSECID.
If you do not enter a value, the default is 0.
incMatId
Specifies the Material ID increment to use between patterns. If you do not enter a value, the
default is 0.
Example
Building on the Example for EFill (see "Example" on page 434). The base element pattern from
1100 to 2000 is reproduced two additional times, from 2100 to 3000 and from 3100 to 4000.
Each element has nodal increments of 100. The increment between the Base Element and the
Next Element is 1000 and the last node in the last pattern is 4000. The cross members are
created using the base pattern from 1100 to 2100 and reproducing it in nodal increments of 100
until node 4000 is reached.
EDim
EDim or Commands > EDim defines elements using the dimensions of the element instead
of references to nodes and places the following card in the Card Stock pane:
Any existing elements encountered are redefined. If you are defining a single element, do not
enter values for inc, incto, and last.
from
Specifies the from node on the first element to be defined.
to
Specifies the to node on the last element to be defined.
inc
Specifies the increment to get from the from node on the first element to the from node on the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 1.
incTo
Specifies the increment to use to get from the to node of the first element to the to node of the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the value of inc is used.
last
Specifies the to node on the last element to be defined.
dx, dy, dz
Specifies the global coordinate offsets to get from the nodes in the base pattern to the nodes in
the first generated pattern, and then from this pattern to the next generated pattern, and so forth.
secID
Specifies the Section ID for the first element. If you do not enter a value, the current default is
used.
matID
Specifies the Material ID for the first element. If you do not enter a value, the current default is
used.
incSecId
Specifies the Section ID increment to use to get from the Section ID of the first element to the
Section ID of the second element.
incmatId
Specifies the Material ID increment to get from the Material ID of the first element to the
Material ID of the second element.
Example
1. EDIM 5 to 10 DY = 12-3 SECID=2. Column 12-3 high from 5 to 10.
2. EDIM 5,10 DY=12-3,2. Same column
3. EDIM 2 TO 3 LAST=8 DX=13-3. Defining beams 13-3 long and elements 2-3, 3-4, 4-5, 5-6,
6-7, and 7-8. INC defaults to 1.
Angle
Angle or Commands > Angle defines the default element strong axis orientation and places
the following card in in the Card Stack pane:
Define structural columns when the strong axis is not parallel to the global X-axis
Use Angle with a structural column when the strong axis of the column is not parallel to the
global X-axis. When the strong axis of the column is parallel to the global Z-axis, redefine the
default orientation to ANGLE=90. Define the column elements then use ANGLE again to reset
the default orientation to its original value of ANGLE=0.0.
angle
Specifies a value for the default Strong Axis Orientation Angle to use for all subsequent
defined elements.
Unif
Unif or Commands > Unif defines a constant uniform load that acts over the full length of
the member and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
Uniform loads can have special meanings when used in CAESAR II Piping runs.
If you are defining a uniform load that acts on a single element only, do not enter values for
inc, incTo, and last.
3. Click Unif .
The UNIF card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the UNIF card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the UNIF properties.
6. Click Save to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.
from
Specifies the from node on the first element this uniform load is to act on.
to
Specifies the to node on the first element this uniform load is to act on.
inc
Specifies the increment to get from the from node on the first element to the from node on the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 1.
incTo
Specifies the increment to use to get from the to node of the first element to the to node of the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the value of inc is used.
last
Specifies the to node on the last element this uniform load is to act on.
ux, uy, uz
Specifies the magnitude of the uniform load in the global X, Y, and Z directions. Unless used in
a piping analysis using G loads, use uniform loads in units of force per unit length of member.
When used in a piping analysis with G loads the uniform loads are in units of gravitational
acceleration, for example, uy=-1 would define a uniform load identical to the member weight
load.
Examples
1. UNIF 1 TO 2 UY=-2.3 On the element from 1 to 2 a uniform load with a magnitude of 2.3
lbs. per inch acts in the -Y direction.
2. UNIF 1, 2, UY -2, 3 Same
3. UNIF 100 TO 200 INC=2 INCTO=3
4. LAST=500 UX=0.03, -1, 0.03 There are uniform loads acting on elements 100-200,
102-203,...,300-500 with a small horizontal component and a -1 load in the Y. It looks like
you have G load input for the piping problem.
5. UNIF (1) to (30) UY=-2.3 The first thirty elements in the element list have a uniform load of
-2.3 pounds per inch acting in the -Y direction.
Orient
Orient or Commands > Orient defines the element strong axis orientation and places the
following card in the Card Stack pane:
from
Specifies the from node on the first element.
You can use node numbers or element indices as values for from.
to
Specifies the to node on the first element.
You can use node numbers or element indices as values for to.
inc
Specifies the increment to get from the from node on the first element to the from node on the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 1.
incTo
Specifies the increment to use to get from the to node of the first element to the to node of the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the value of inc is used.
last
Specifies the to node on the last element to have its orientation angle defined.
angle
Specifies the rotation in degrees from the default position to the actual position of the member
strong axis.
Examples
1. ORIENT 1 TO 2 ANGLE=90. The strong axis for the element from 1 to 2 is 90 away from
the default position.
2. ORIENT 5 TO 10 INC=5 LAST=30 ANGLE=90. The vertical column elements: 5-10, 10-15,
15-20, 20-25, and 25-30 have their strong axes 90 away from the default position. Their
new strong axis is along the Z axis. With their new orientation, the columns are better suited
to take X direction forces.
3. ORIENT 1 TO (20) ANGLE=90. The first twenty elements in the element list have their
strong axes 90 away from the default position.
Load
Load or Commands > Load defines concentrated forces and moments that act at structural
member end points. It places the following card in the Card Stock pane:
from
Specifies the from node on the first element the load is to act on.
If you are defining a load for a single node point, you do not need values for to and by.
to
Specifies the to node on the first element the load is to act on.
If you are defining a load for a single node point, you do not need values for to and by.
by
Specifies the increment in the range.
If you are defining a load for a single node point, you do not need values for to and by.
fx, fy, fz
Specifies the magnitude of concentrated forces in the global X, Y, and Z directions.
mx, my, mz
Specifies the magnitude of the moments in the global X, Y, and Z directions.
Examples
1. LOAD 305 FY-1000. Have a minus 1,000 lb. Y direction load acting at the structural node
#305.
2. LOAD 10 TO 18 BY=1 FX=707, FZ=707. Have skewed loads in the horizontal plane acting
at each of the nodes 10, 11,...,17, 18. You do not have to use by here, the default is 1.
3. LOAD (15) to (25) FY=-383. A load of 383 pounds acts in the -Y direction on the 15th
through the 25th nodes in the Node list.
Wind Loads
Wind or Commands > Wind defines the magnitude of the wind shape factor for the
structural elements and places a card in the Card Stack pane:
from
Specifies the from node on the first element the wind load is to act on.
to
Specifies the to node on the first element the wind load is to act on.
inc
Specifies the increment to get from the from node on the first element to the from node on the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 1.
incTo
Specifies the increment to use to get from the to node of the first element to the to node of the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the value of inc is used.
last
Specifies the to node of the last element the wind load is to act on.
shape
Specifies a value for the magnitude of the wind shape factor. For structural steel members this
value is usually 2.0. For elements not exposed to the wind, disable wind loading on the structure
by resetting this value to 0. This value populates to all subsequently defined elements. If you do
not enter a value, the default is 2.0.
Examples
1. WIND 1 TO 2 SHAPE=2.0. The element from 1 to 2 has a shape factor with a magnitude of
2.0 applied. This value is applied to all the following elements.
2. WIND 1, 2, SHAPE 2.0. Same
3. WIND 100 TO 200 INC=2 INCTO=3
4. LAST=500 SHAPE=1.8 There is a wind shape factor of 1.8 on elements 100-200,
102-203,...,300-500.
GLoads
GLoad or Commands > GLoad processes all specified uniform loads as G loads instead of
force/length loads and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
Specify GLoads
1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the GLOADS card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 424).
3. Click GLoad .
The GLOADS card is added to the card stack.
4. Click Save to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.
MatId
MatId or Commands > MatId specifies material properties that correspond to a Material ID
number and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
You must have at least one valid material specification in the input file. For more information,
see Material Properties (on page 217).
matId
Specifies a Material ID number. This number is usually 1, and numbered sequentially for
additional materials.
You can change the value assigned by the model input file.
ym
Specifies a value for Youngs Modulus of Elasticity. The default value is 30,000,000 (30x106) psi
for A-36 structural steel.
pois
Specifies a value for Poissons Ratio. The default value is 0.3 for A-36 structural steel.
g
Specifies a value for the shear modulus. The default value is 11,000,000 (11x106) psi for A-36
structural steel and is typically about one-third the value of Young's Modulus.
ys
Specifies a value for the yield strength. The default value is 36,000 (36x103) psi for A-36
structural steel. This property is currently not used.
dens
Specifies a value for the material density. The default value is 0.283 for A-36 structural steel.
Alpha [x]
Specifies from one to nine values for the coefficients of thermal expansion.
Enter values for Alpha after entering a value for dens.
SecId
SecId or Commands > SecId assigns member cross-section properties to the Section ID
numbers and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
section Id
Specifies a user-defined Section ID for this set of cross-section properties. Section IDs usually
start at 1 and increase incrementally by one, but you can assign values in any order.
name
Specifies an American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) shape name. For a user-defined
shape, type USER. You must enter the AISC names exactly as shown in the AISC handbook
with the exceptions:
Enter fractions as decimals. For example, type LX6X3-1/2X1/2 as L6X3.5X0.5
Omit all leading or trailing zeros.
You can select the section name from the window after clicking the Select Section ID
button.
User-Defined
Specifies a user-defined shape. You must enter values for the additional parameters to define a
user-defined cross-section.
area
Specifies the cross-section area (in length2 units).
lxx
Specifies the strong axis moment of inertia (in length 4 units).
lyy
Specifies the weak axis moment of inertia (in length4 units).
torsion
Specifies the torsional resistivity constant (in length4 units).
boxH
Specifies the height (along the weak axis) of a rectangular box for plotting.
boxW
Specifies the width (along the strong axis) of a rectangular box for plotting.
For example, use Free to describe the element ends in a structure that has pinned-only
beam-to-column connections.
You can also use Beams , Braces , and Columns to set the free end connection
defaults for certain types of members. For more information, see Beams (on page 454), Braces
(on page 457), and Columns (on page 459).
After you define each element and set the defaults, the program automatically adds a card
to the Card Stack and adds values to FREE parameters. Use this to help keep track of the
connections and nodes that define the element.
from
Specifies the from node on the first element that this FREE command is to apply to.
to
Specifies the to node on the first element that this FREE command is to apply to.
inc
Specifies the increment to get from the from node on the first element to the from node on the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 1.
incTo
Specifies the increment to use to get from the to node of the first element to the to node of the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the value of inc is used.
last
Specifies a value for the to node on the last element this FREE command is to apply to. You
can omit last, inc, and incTo if the FREE command is only to apply to a single element.
At the to node
TAXIAL Axial translational DOF
Examples
1. A small WF shape has a pinned connection to a large I-beam. The weak axis bending of the
WF shape is not transmitted to the web of the I-beam. If the element defining the WF shape
uses nodes 1040 to 1045 then the FREE card for this element has the following format:
FREE 1040 TO 1045 fbndweak, tbndweak
2. The westward side of a building has a row of beams on the ground floor that are attached
rigidly to columns at the other end. The beams are identified by the pattern of nodes:
610-710, 620-720, 630-730, ..., 690-790. There are eight beams in this group. The 600 end
is pinned. The FREE cards for this group have the following format:
FREE 610 TO 710 INC=10 LAST=790 ftors, fbndstr, fbndweak
Beams
Beams or Commands > Beams defines default end connection types for members identified
by the orientation of their center lines. It places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
A beam is any member whose center line lies completely along either the global X or global Z
axis. After you use Beams to define the element end connections, any element subsequently
defined inherits those end connection conditions.
Use the standard structural element connections Beams , Braces , and Columns
to define default end connection types for members identified by the orientation of their center
line. For more information, see Braces (on page 457), and Columns (on page 459).
mode
Defines the beams end connection type:
Free - Releases end connections.
Fix - Resets released end connections.
If fix is the only parameter defined for Beams, then all degrees of freedom for the beam
are fixed.
At the to node
TAXIAL Axial translational DOF
Examples
1. A group of beams that has both ends pinned must use the Free command. The BEAMS
card for this group has the following format:
Beams FREE
ftors
fbndstr
fbndweak
tbndstr
tbndweak
2. Pinned-end beams must be returned to end connection default values. The BEAMS card for
this group has the following format:
Beams FIX
ftors
fbndstr
fbndweak
tbndstr
tbndweak
Braces
Braces or Commands > Braces defines default end connection types for members
identified by the orientation of their center lines. It places the following card in the Card Stack
pane:
A brace is any member whose center line does not completely lie along any of the global axes.
After you use Braces to define element end connections, any brace element subsequently
defined inherits those end connection conditions.
Use the standard structural element connections Beams , Braces , and Columns
to define default end connection types for members identified by the orientation of their center
line. For more information, see Beams (on page 454) and Columns (on page 459).
Add Braces
1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the BRACES card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 424).
3. Click Braces .
The BRACES command is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the BRACES card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the BRACES properties.
6. Click Save to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.
If fix is the only parameter defined for Braces, then all degrees of freedom for the brace
are fixed.
mode
Defines the braces end connection type:
Free - Releases end connections.
Fix - Resets released end connections.
If fix is the only parameter defined for Braces, then all degrees of freedom for the brace
are fixed.
At the to node
TAXIAL Axial translational DOF
Examples
1. A group of braces that has both ends pinned to adjoining columns must use the Free
command. The BRACES card for this group has the following format:
Braces FREE
ftors
fbndstr
fbndweak
tbndstr
tbndweak
2. Pinned-end braces must be returned to end connection default values. The BRACES card
for this group has the following format:
Braces FIX
ftors
fbndstr
fbndweak
tbndstr
tbndweak
If Fix appears on the line following Braces then all end connections for the brace are
fixed.
Columns
Columns or Commands > Columns defines default end connection types for members
identified by the orientation of their center lines. It places the following card in the Card Stack
pane:
A column is any member whose centerline is completely vertical. After you use Columns to
define the element end connections, any element subsequently defined inherits those end
connection freedoms.
Use the standard structural element connections Beams , Braces , and Columns
to define default end connections types for members identified by the orientation of their center
line. For more information, see Beams (on page 454) and Braces (on page 457).
Add columns
1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the COLUMNS card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 424).
3. Click Columns .
The Columns command is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the COLUMNS card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the COLUMNS properties.
6. Click Save to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.
If fix is the only parameter defined for Columns, then all degrees of freedom for the
column are fixed.
mode
Defines the columns end connection type:
Free - Releases end connections.
Fix - Resets released end connections.
If fix is the only parameter defined for Columns, then all degrees of freedom for the column are
fixed.
At the to node
TAXIAL Axial translational DOF
Examples
1. A group of corner columns that are pinned at their to ends must use the Free command.
The COLUMNS card for this group has the following format:
Columns FREE
ftors
fbndstr
fbndweak
tbndstr
tbndweak
2. Pinned-end columns must be returned to end connection default values. The COLUMNS
card for this group has the following format:
Columns FIX
ftors
fbndstr
fbndweak
tbndstr
tbndweak
If Fix is all that appears on the line following Columns, then all end connections for the
column are fixed.
As a general rule an element cannot undergo rigid body motion. Therefore, an element cannot
have both ttors and ftors released at the same time. Additionally beams typically have moment
releases only at their ends, not at intermediate nodes used to apply loads or connect bracing.
Default
Default or Commands > Default specifies the default values of the Section ID and the
Material ID and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
If you create an element without a Section ID or Material ID, the default values defined here are
used.
3. Click Default .
The DEFAULT card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the DEFAULT card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the DEFAULT properties.
6. Click Save to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.
Comment
Comment or Commands > Comment adds a comment card to the Card Stack pane:
Add a comment
1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the COMMENT card in the
needed position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 424).
3. Click Comment .
The COMMENT card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click to expand the COMMENT card.
5. Type the information to add.
6. Click Save to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.
Vertical
Vertical or Commands > Vertical specifies the axis orientation of a new or existing model
and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
The axis orientation of the Static Load Case Builder, (for example in wind and wave
loads), the Static Output Processor, the Dynamic Input Module, and the Dynamic
Output Processor is specified only by the orientation in the input file. For more information,
see Select a Vertical Axis (on page 394).
Unlike the piping and equipment files elsewhere in CAESAR II, changing this command
does not change the orientation of the structural input file. It rotates the model into the new
coordinate system.
When you include the structural files in a piping model, the axis orientations of the structural
files do not have to match the orientation of the piping model. The software translates the
orientation.
2. Click Vertical .
The Vertical command is added to the Card Stack.
3. Select Y or Z as the vertical axis.
Unit
Unit displays the units file you specified in the Units Selection page of the Structural Steel
Wizard in the Card Stack pane:
You cannot change the units from the Card Stack pane. The structural file uses the units file
specified in the wizard as the unit of measure.
You do not have to choose the same file selected in configuration setup. For more
information, see Select a units file (on page 394).
List Options
List Options displays node and coordinate data, specifies node ranges, and selects reports.
Click ALL to display a copy of each report.
View reports
1. Click the List Options tab located at the bottom of the Card Stock.
The List Options pane appears.
2. Select the report you want to see.
The selected report appears in the Report pane.
Structural Databases
The CAESAR II Structural databases contain over 20 different properties for each cross-
section. For the finite element solution, only six of these items are employed:
Area
Strong axis moment of inertia
Weak axis moment of inertia
Torsional resistivity constant
Member section height
Member section depth
There are seven different structural databases included in CAESAR II
AISC 1977
AISC 1989
German 1991
Australian 1990
South African 1992
Korean 1990
UK 1993
W4X13
M5X18.9 M4X13
S3X5.7
D2.5X2X0.1875
B2.5X2X0.1875
0 6
WT7X155.
ST1.5X2.85
TFB125X65 TFB100X45
PFC150X75
EL25X25X3
UL65X50X5
IPEO600
T120 T140
W125X125 W100X100
UK 1993 Database
CAESAR II places three elements in the vicinity of this bearing span to properly model the local
load distribution. The bearing span lengths in a piping system are called the Zone 1 lengths. The
intermediate lengths in a piping system are called Zone 2 lengths, and the axial displacement
lengths in a piping system are called the Zone 3 lengths. To properly transmit axial loads, Zone
3 element lengths are computed using 100 x Do, where Do is the outside diameter of the piping.
The Zone 2 mesh consists of four elements of increasing length; starting at 1.5 times the length
of a Zone 1 element at its Zone 1 end, and progressing in equal increments to the last which is
50 x Do long at the Zone 3 end. CAESAR II views a typical piping system element breakdown or
mesh distribution as shown below. All pipe density is set to zero for all pipe identified as buried
so that deadweight causes no bending around these point supports.
CAESAR II automatically puts a Zone 1 mesh gradient at each side of the pipe framing
into an elbow. You must tell CAESAR II where the other Zone 1 areas are located in the piping
system.
A critical part of the modeling of an underground piping system is the proper definition of Zone
1or lateral bearing regions. These bearing regions primarily occur:
On either side of a change in direction.
For all pipes framing into an intersection.
At points where the pipe enters or leaves the soil.
Data Conversion
CAESAR II converts the original job into the buried job by meshing the existing elements and
adding soil restraints. The conversion process creates all of the necessary elements to satisfy
the Zone 1, Zone 2, and Zone 3 requirements, and places restraints on the elements in these
zones. All elbows are broken down into at least two curved sections, and very long radius
elbows are broken down into segments whose lengths are not longer than the elements in the
immediately adjacent Zone 1 pipe section. Node numbers are generated by adding 1 to the
elements FROM node number. The software checks a node number to make sure that is
unique in the model. All densities on buried pipe elements are zeroed to simulate the continuous
support of the pipe weight. A conversion log is also generated, which details the process in full.
See also
Buried Pipe Modeler Window (on page 487)
Soil Models (on page 492)
A finer mesh area is necessary for buried areas that will need to undergo lateral
displacements.
The remaining eight columns are used to define soil stiffnesses and ultimate loads.
Open - Opens an input data file that will serve as the original job.
Save - Creates an input data file that contains the buried pipe model. By
default, the software appends the filename of the original job with the letter B
to create the second input data file (the buried job).
Print - Prints the data input from the Buried Pipe Modeler window.
Soil Models - Opens the Basic Soil Modeler dialog box in which you
specify soil properties for the CAESAR II buried pipe equations used by the
software to generate one or more soil restraint systems. For more
information, see Basic Soil Modeler Dialog Box (on page 498).
Convert - Converts the original job into the buried job by meshing the
existing elements and adding soil restraints.
From Node
Displays the node number for the starting end of the element
To Node
Displays the node number for the end of the piping element.
5 10 0
10 15 0
15 20 1
20 25 1
25 30 1
30 35 2
35 40 2
The pipe from nodes 5 through 15 is not buried. From nodes 15 through 30, you will specify
your own stiffnesses (using columns 6 through 13 of the data input area). From nodes 35
through 40, the software will use the property values indicated in the corresponding soil
model number to generate stiffnesses.
and along the element leaving the bend. At all other locations, you must tell the software where
the fine meshes must go. These locations include:
1 - Element ends that frame into intersections.
2 - Element ends that enter or exit from the soil.
3 - Element ends where there is any change in direction not defined by a bend.
Follow the rule that too many mesh elements will never hurt the solution, whereas too few
may produce incorrect results. Thus, always check the appropriate box if you are uncertain.
Consider the following example:
CAESAR II places a fine mesh at the 5 end of the element because the pipe enters the soil at 5
and there are probably some displacements there. The software automatically places fine
meshes at element ends where there are bends, so checking the FROM END MESH/TO END
MESH boxes is not needed on the 10-15 element. A fine mesh is also placed at each element
end that frames into the intersection at 20. Finally, a fine mesh is placed at the terminal points
35 and 30.
If the upward and downward stiffnesses are equal, then you need only enter a value for
one--the stiffness value that is not entered defaults to the stiffness value that is entered.
If both User-Defined Upward Stif and User-Defined Downward Stif (on page 491) are set
to 0 or left blank, a fatal error results.
If the upward and downward ultimate loads are equal, then you need only enter a value for
one. The other load defaults to the entered value.
If both Ultimate Upward Load and Ultimate Downward Load (on page 492) are set to 0 or
left blank, a fatal error results.
If the upward and downward stiffnesses are equal, then you need only enter a value for one.
The other stiffness defaults to the entered value.
If both User-Defined Upward Stif (on page 491) and User-Defined Downward Stif are set
to 0 or left blank, a fatal error results.
If the upward and downward ultimate loads are equal, then you need only enter a value for
one. The other load defaults to the entered value.
If both Ultimate Upward Load (on page 491) and Ultimate Downward Load are set to 0
or left blank, a fatal error results.
Soil Models
Only use the following procedures for estimating soil distributed stiffnesses and
ultimate loads when you do not have better available data or methods suited.
The soil restraint modeling algorithms used by the software are based on the following:
CAESAR II Basic Model - Stress Analysis Methods for Underground Pipelines, L.C. Peng,
published in 1978 in Pipeline Industry. For more information, see CAESAR II Basic Model
(on page 493).
American Lifelines Alliance - "Appendix B: Soil Spring Representation" from the
Guidelines for the Design of Buried Steel Pipe by the American Lifelines Alliance
(http://www.americanlifelinesalliance.org/pdf/Update061305.pdf). For more information, see
American Lifelines Alliance (see "American Lifelines Alliance Soil Model" on page 494).
Soil supports are modeled as bi-linear springs having an initial stiffness, an ultimate load, and a
yield stiffness. The yield stiffness is typically set close to zero. After the ultimate load on the soil
is reached, there is no further increase in load even though the displacement may continue. The
axial and transverse ultimate loads must be calculated to analyze buried pipe. Many researchers
differentiate between horizontal, upward, and downward transverse loads, but when the
variance in predicted soil properties and methods are considered, this differentiation is often
unwarranted.
The software allows the explicit entry of these data if it is necessary to your specific
project.
After the axial and lateral ultimate loads are known, the stiffness in each direction can be
determined by dividing the ultimate load by the yield displacement. Researchers have found that
the yield displacement is related to both the buried depth and the pipe diameter. The calculated
ultimate loads and stiffnesses are on a force per unit length of pipe basis.
See also
Basic Soil Modeler Dialog Box (on page 498)
The soil restraint equations use these soil properties to generate restraint ultimate loads and
stiffnesses. Defining a value for TEMPERATURE CHANGE is optional. If entered the thermal
strain is used to compute and print the theoretical virtual anchor length. These equations are:
Axial Ultimate Load (Fax)
Fax = D[ (2sH) + (pt) + (f)(D/4) ]
Where:
D = Friction coefficient, typical values are:
0.4 for silt
0.5 for sand
0.6 for gravel
0.6 for clay or Su/600
s= Soil density
H = Buried depth to the top of pipe
p= Pipe density
t = Pipe nominal wall thickness
f= Fluid density
D = Pipe diameter
Su = Undrained shear strength (specified for clay-like soils)
Transverse Ultimate Load (Ftr)
Ftr = 0.5s(H+D)2[tan(45 + /2)]2OCM
If Su is given (that is, the soil is clay), then Ftr as calculated above is multiplied by Su/250 psf.
Where:
= Angle of internal friction, typical values are:
27-45 for sand
26-35 for silt
0 for clay
f = coating-dependent factor relating the internal friction angle of the soil to the friction angle at
the soil-pipe interface
= internal friction angle of soil
Elastic range of soil is either fixed or a function of D & H with limits based on D.
Axial
Tu = peak friction force at pipe-soil interface maximum axial soil force per unit length that can be
transmitted to pipe)
D = pipe OD
= adhesion factor (for clays only)
Pipe Coating f
Concrete 1.0
Polyethylene 0.6
Lateral
Pu = maximum horizontal soil bearing capacity (maximum lateral soil force per unit length that
can be transmitted to pipe)
Nch = horizontal soil bearing capacity factor for clay (0 for c=0)
Nqh = horizontal soil bearing capacity factor for sand (0 for =0)
Factor j x a b c d e
Vertical Uplift
Qu = maximum vertical upward soil bearing capacity (maximum vertical uplift soil force per unit
length that can be transmitted to pipe)
Ncv = vertical upward soil bearing capacity factor for clay (0 for c=0)
Vertical Bearing
Qd - maximum vertical bearing soil force per unit length that can be transmitted to pipe.
Nc, Nq, N = vertical downward soil bearing capacity factors
4.33E-2 1.200E-3
Clay
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
5.79E-2 1.606E-3
Very Loose Sand <= <=
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
6.08E-2 1.686E-3
Loose Sand
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
6.48E-2 1.797E-3
Medium Sand
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
6.66E-2 1.847E-3
Dense Sand
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
6.95E-2 1.928E-3
Very Dense Sand >= >=
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
4.33E-2 1.200E-3
Clay <=
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
5.79E-2 1.606E-3
Very Loose Sand <= <=
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
6.08E-2 1.686E-3
Loose Sand
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
6.48E-2 1.797E-3
Medium Sand
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
6.66E-2 1.847E-3
Dense Sand
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
6.95E-2 1.928E-3
Very Dense Sand >= >=
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
2.73E-2 7.572E-4
Clay
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
3.62E-2 1.005E-3
Very Loose Sand <= <=
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
3.80E-2 1.055E-3
Loose Sand
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
4.05E-2 1.123E-3
Medium Sand
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
4.17E-2 1.155E-3
Dense Sand
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
4.35E-2 1.206E-3
Very Dense Sand >= >=
lb/cu.in. kg/cu.cm.
F - COATING FACTOR
Specifies the coating dependent factor that relates the internal friction angle of the soil to the
friction angle at the soil-pipe interface. This option displays only if you select American Lifeline
Alliance in the Soil Model Type list and Sand/Gravel as the Soil Classification.
Typical values for external pipe coatings are:
Concrete - 1.0
Coal Tar - 0.9
Rough Steel - 0.8
Smooth Steel - 0.7
Fusion Bonded Epoxy - 0.6
Polyethelyne - 0.6
FRICT. ANGLE
Specifies the internal friction angle of the soil. Typical values are:
Clay - 0
Silt - 26-25
Sand - 27-45
For the American Lifelines Alliance soil model, this entry must be between 20- and
45-degrees.
For the CAESAR II basic soil model, this entry is used in the soil restraint equations to
generate restraint ultimate loads and stiffnesses.
FRICTION COEFFICIENT
Specifies the coefficient of friction between pipe and soil. If the undrained shear strength (on
page 505) is entered, the friction coefficient may be left blank. The friction coefficient is
calculated using the following equation:
Friction Coeffecient = Su/0.4167E + 1
Typical friction coefficient values are:
Silt - 0.4
Sand - 0.5
Gravel - 0.6
Clay - 0.6 or Su/ 0.4167E + 1
This option displays only when you select CAESAR II Basic Model in the Soil Model Type list.
SOIL DENSITY
Specifies the weight of the soil on a per unit volume basis. This value is used in the soil restraint
equations to generate restraint ultimate loads and stiffnesses. This option displays only when
you select CAESAR II Basic Model in the Soil Model Type list.
TEMPERATURE CHANGE
Specifies the installed to operating pipe temperature difference.
The thermal expansion coefficient and the temperature change inputs are required if you want
CAESAR II to calculate and display the virtual anchor length.
original job is named UndergroundPipe, the software saves the second input file with the
name UndergroundPipe B. If the default name is not appropriate, click File > Change
Buried Pipe Change Name and rename the buried job.
8. Click File > Exit to return the CAESAR II main window. From here, you can use Input >
Piping to review and edit the buried model, add any additional underground restraints (such
as thrust block) to the buried model, and perform the analysis of the buried pipe job.
A buried pipe example problem is provided to illustrate the features of the modeler. This
example should not be considered a guide for recommended underground piping design.
For more information, see Buried Pipe Example (on page 506).
The following input listing represents the unburied model shown above.
Terminal nodes 100 and 1900 are above ground. Nodes 1250 and 1650 (on the sloped runs)
mark the soil entry and exit points.
Using the Basic Soil Modeler dialog box (on page 498), Soil Model Number 2 properties for a
sandy soil is defined.
Elements 1250-1300 through 1600-1650 are buried using soil model number 2. Zone 1 meshing
is indicated at the entry and exit points.
Clicking Convert on the Buried Pipe Modeler toolbar begins the conversion to a buried
model.
The original unburied model is shown along with the buried model below. Restraints have been
added around the elbows and along the straight runs.
Bi-linear restraints have been added to the buried model. The stiffness used is based upon the
distance between nodes.
Static Analysis
Displays the Static Analysis dialog box.
In This Section
Static Analysis Overview ............................................................... 513
Static Analysis Dialog Box ............................................................. 534
Error Checking
You must successfully complete the error checking portion of the piping preprocessor before
you can perform static analysis. The required analysis data files are created after error checking
is completed. Similarly, any changes that you make to the model are not reflected in the analysis
unless you rerun the error checking. CAESAR II does not allow an analysis to take place until
you successfully run the error checker if the input has changed.
Error Check - Saves the input and starts the error checking procedure. This command is
only available from the piping or structural steel input dialog boxes.
Batch Run - Checks the input data, analyzes the system, and presents the results without
any additional actions from you. The software assumes that the loading cases do not need to
change and that the default account number (if accounting active) is correct. These criteria are
usually met after the first pass through the analysis.
The error checker software reviews the CAESAR II model and alerts you to any possible errors,
inconsistencies, or noteworthy items. These items display in a grid as errors, warnings, or notes.
The total numbers of errors, warnings, or notes display in corresponding boxes above the
message grid. Double-click the column headers to sort the messages by type, message
number, or element/node number. Click File > Print to print the messages.
Warning Message
The software reports a warning when there is a problem that can be overcome using some
assumptions. An example of this is the wall thickness of an element that is insufficient to meet
the minimum wall thickness for the given pressure (hoop stress). You do not have to correct
warnings to get a successful analysis, but you should carefully review them.
Note Message
The software reports a note to inform you of a fact related to the model. An example of a note is
the number of hangers to be designed by CAESAR II. There is nothing for you to correct when a
note displays.
CAESAR II lists recommended load cases if the job is entering static analysis for the first time.
The list displays loads saved during the last session if the job has been run previously.
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+P1 (SUS)
L3 L1-L2 (EXP)*
* Use the algebraic combination method on the Load Case Options tab for the expansion case.
Some of the piping codes perform a code stress check on the operating case and some
do not. For more information, see the CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide for the equations used
by the various piping codes to obtain code stress and allowable stress.
The expansion case is a combination case that results from subtracting the sustained case from
the operating case. Because of this, the expansion case represents the change in the piping
system due to the effect of temperature, but in the presence of other loads. This is important
because the restraint status of the operating and sustained cases can be different if there are
nonlinear restraints (such as +Y, -Z, any restraint with a gap, and so on) or boundary conditions
(such as friction).
Standard load cases for B31.4 Ch IX, B31.8 Ch VIII, and DNV codes:
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+P1 (SUS)
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
L5 L3-L4 (EXP) **
*HS is the hanger stiffness defined on the Load Case Options tab.
** Use the algebraic combination method on the Load Case Options tab.
When you use only predefined spring hangers, there is no need for the first two load cases.
However, the letter H is still required in the operating and sustained load cases. Other hanger
load cases are required when you use multiple load case design. In such instances, let
CAESAR II recommend the load cases. You can then add or edit the non-hanger design load
cases as necessary.
L1 W+T1+D1+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+T2+D2+P1 (OPE)
L3 W+P1 (SUS)
* Use the algebraic combination method on the Load Case Options tab.
Include the thermal displacements in the operating cases as shown for piping codes with
no expansion stress computation.
L1 W+T1+D1+D3+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+T2+D2+D3+P1 (OPE)
L3 W+P1 (SUS)
L4 W+P2 (SUS)
* Include the thermal and settlement displacements in the operating cases as shown for piping
codes with no expansion stress computation.
L1 W+T1+D1+D3+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+T1+D1+D4+P1 (OPE)
L3 W+P1 (SUS)
L4 L1-L3 (EXP) *
L5 L2-L3 (EXP) *
* Use the algebraic combination method on the Load Case Options tab of the Static Analysis
dialog box.
It is likely that you will want to perform a fatigue analysis because of the large number of
displacement cycles common in pitch and roll situations. Select the appropriate fatigue curve on
the first piping input under the Allowable Stress area on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Add the following cases to the previous example on the Load Case Options tab. Enter the
number of cycles for each pitch condition for fatigue stress type (FAT).
The 21000000 represents 21 million load cycles during the life of the piping system. Use the
number of cycles that you would expect to occur during the life of such a storm for large
displacements, such as those that occur during a 1-year, 30-year, or 100-year event. Multiply
this number by the number storms likely to happen during the lifetime of the piping system.
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+T1+P1+U1 (OPE)
L3 W+T1+P1-U1 (OPE)
L4 W+T1+P1+U2 (OPE)
L5 W+T1+P1-U2 (OPE)
L6 W+T1+P1+U3 (OPE)
L7 W+T1+P1-U3 (OPE)
L8 W+P1 (SUS)
L9 L1-L8 (EXP)
Load cases 2 through 7 include all the loads and call these operating cases. The subtracted
uniform load vectors reverse the direction of the uniform load applied. Use these load case
results for occasional restraint loads and occasional displacements. Load cases 10 through 15
signify the segregated occasional loads. These are called occasional load cases, but you do not
need a code stress check here because these are only part of the final solution for code
compliance. Because of this, you can select the Suppress option for the Output Status on the
Load Case Options tab. Also, these combination load cases all use the Algebraic
Combination Method on the Load Case Options tab. Load cases 16 through 21 are all used
for code compliance. Add the segregated occasional results to the sustained case results and
use either the Scalar or ABS Absolute Value Combination Method on the Load Case
Options tab. Both scalar and absolute will give the same code stress results although the
displacements, forces, and moments could be different. Because you do not use any results
except the stresses for combination cases, it does not matter which combination method you
use.
Sometimes you want to combine the results of vertical g-loads with horizontal g-loads. A factor
is often applied to the vertical g-load component of the combined load. You can accomplish this
when you type the Uniform Load data on the Classic Piping Input dialog box for the vertical
component, or you can do this directly in the load case editor as shown below. Using the
previous example, combine .67 vertical g-load with each horizontal component.
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+T1+P1+U1+0.67U2 (OPE)
L3 W+T1+P1-U1+0.67U2 (OPE)
L4 W+T1+P1+U1-0.67U2 (OPE)
L5 W+T1+P1-U1-0.67U2 (OPE)
L6 W+T1+P1+U3+0.67U2 (OPE)
L7 W+T1+P1-U3+0.67U2 (OPE)
L8 W+T1+P1+U3-0.67U2 (OPE)
L9 W+T1+P1-U3-0.67U2 (OPE)
Sometimes you need to combine the horizontal and vertical components of seismic loading. You
can do this on the Static Analysis dialog box. Set up the static seismic load cases as shown in
the first example, then combine the segregated horizontal and vertical load cases together using
the SRSS Combination Method on the Load Case Options tab. Add these results to the
sustained case.
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+T1+P1+U1 (OPE)
L3 W+T1+P1-U1 (OPE)
L4 W+T1+P1+U2 (OPE)
L5 W+T1+P1-U2 (OPE)
L6 W+T1+P1+U3 (OPE)
L7 W+T1+P1-U3 (OPE)
L8 W+P1 (SUS)
L9 L1-L8 (EXP)
* Use the algebraic combination method on the Load Case Options tab.
** Use the SRSS combination method on the Load Case Options tab.
*** Use the ABS or Scalar combination method on the Load Case Options tab.
Change the operating load cases that include seismic loads to OCC for piping codes that
do not perform a sustained code stress check. Use these cases for code compliance. The
combination cases are not needed in such cases.
These hanger sizing load Cases 1 and 2 generally supply no information to the output reports
other than the data found in the hanger tables. Cases 3, 4, and 5 match the recommended load
cases for a standard analysis with one thermal and one pressure defined. The displacement
combination numbers in Case 5 have changed to reflect the new order. If multiple temperatures
and pressures existed in the input, they too would appear in this set after the second spring
hanger design load case. Two other hanger design criteria also affect the recommended load
cases. If the actual cold loads for selected springs are to be calculated, one additional load
case, WNC+H, would appear before Case 3. If the hanger design criteria of the piping system is
set so that the proposed springs must accommodate more than one operating condition, other
load cases must appear before Case 3 above. You must perform an extra hanger design
operating load case for each additional operating load case used to design springs. See Load
Cases with Hanger Design (on page 517) for more information on these options.
You can specify up to four different wind load profiles. Omit any of them to exclude the data from
the analysis. CAESAR II supports thirteen wind codes. For more information, see Wind Loads
Tab (Static Analysis Dialog Box) (on page 545).
EN 1991-1-4:2005 UBC
ASCE # 7 Standard Edition 2005 User -Defined Pressure versus Elevation Table
elevation table. After clicking User Wind Profile, a dialog box prompts you for the
corresponding pressure or velocity table. You only need to make a single entry in the table if a
uniform pressure or velocity is to act over the entire piping system. Otherwise, type the pressure
or velocity profile for the applicable wind loading.
You can specify up to four different wave load profiles. Current data and wave data can be
specified and included together. Omit either of them to exclude the data from the analysis.
CAESAR II supports three current models and six wave models. For more information, see
Wave Loads Tab (Static Analysis Dialog Box (on page 561).
This dialog box serves as a monitor of the static analysis. It is divided into several areas. The
upper-left side reflects the job size by listing the number of equations to be solved and the
bandwidth of the matrix that holds these equations. Multiplying the number of equations by the
bandwidth gives a relative indication of the job size. This area also lists the current load case
being analyzed and the total number of basic load cases to be solved. The iteration count, as
well as the current case number, shows how much work has been completed. Load cases with
nonlinear restraints can require several solutions, or iterations, before the changing assumptions
about the restraint configuration, such as resting or lifting off, active or inactive, are confirmed.
In the lower-left corner of the Incore Solver dialog box are two bar graphs that indicate where
the program is in an individual solution. These bar graphs illustrate the speed of the solution. By
checking the data in this first box, you have an idea of how much longer to wait for the results.
The right side of the solution screen also provides information regarding the status of nonlinear
restraints and hangers in the job. For example, messages noting the number of restraints that
have yet to converge or any hangers that appear to be taking no load, are displayed here. You
can step through nonlinear restraint status on an individual basis by pressing the F2 through F4
keys.
After the analysis of the system deflections and rotations, the results are post-processed to
calculate the local forces, moments, and stresses for the basic load cases and all results for the
algebraic combinations, for example L1-L2. These total system results are stored in a file with
the suffix _P (for example, TUTOR._P).
The _A, or input file, the _P, or output file, and the OTL (Output Time Link file) are all that
are required to archive the static analysis. The remaining scratch files can be deleted without
any impact on the completed work.
During this post-processing, the Status frame lists the element for which the forces and stresses
are being calculated. After the last stresses of an element are computed, the output processor
dialog box displays. Use this dialog box to review the graphic and tabular results of the analysis.
For more information on interactive processing of output results, see Dynamic Input and
Analysis.
Available piping system loads display on the left side of the Static Analysis dialog box.
You must specify the expected number of load cycles for all load cases with stress type
FAT.
Load
Case Designation Comments
1 W+T1+P1+H+0.67C Hot operating. The 0.67scale factor takes credit only for 2/3
S (OPE) of the cold spring.
Load
Case Designation Comments
CAESAR II permits the specification of up to 999 load cases for analysis. Copy the model
to a new file to specify the additional load cases if more cases are required.
Controlling Results
CAESAR II allows you to specify whether any or all of the load case results are retained for
review in the Static Analysis dialog box. You can use the two options found on the Load Case
Options tab. These are Output Status (on page 539) and Output Type (on page 540).
File Menu
Save - Saves the file. For more information, see Save <filename> (on page 224).
Print - Prints the file. For more information, see Print <filename> (on page 226).
Analyze - Runs the static analysis.
Exit - Closes the Static Analysis dialog box.
Edit Menu
Add Entry - Inserts a blank load case following the selected line in the list. If no line is
selected, the load case is added at the end of the list. To select a load case, click the number to
the left of the list.
Delete Entry - Removes the current entry from the Load Cases list.
Recommend - Replaces the current load cases with the CAESAR II recommended load cases.
Load Cycles - Hides or displays the Load Cycles column in the Load Cases list. Entries in this
column are only valid for load cases defined with the fatigue stress type.
Import Load Cases - Copies the load cases from a file. The units and load types of the copied
file must match those of the current file.
Click the blank line above L1, and then click Add Entry to add a new load case to
the beginning of the currently defined load cases.
Tabs
Load Case Editor Tab (Static Analysis Dialog Box) (on page 536)
Load Case Options Tab (Static Analysis Dialog Box) (on page 539)
Wind Loads Tab (Static Analysis Dialog Box) (on page 545)
Wave Loads Tab (Static Analysis Dialog Box (on page 561)
Load Cases
Defines the load cases to be analyzed. Load cases are comprised of one or more major load
types as defined in the input. Major load cases are load cases that require a solution to the
matrix equation [K]{x} = {f}.
For example:
W+T1+P1+F1 (OPE) is a major load case
W+P1+F1 (SUS) is a major load case
Algebraic combination load cases are combinations of previously solved major load cases. For
example:
L1-L2 (EXP) is a combination case which combines the displacements, forces, and stresses
using a combination method that you select in Load Case Options.
L4+L6+L8 (OCC) is a combination case which combines the displacements, forces, and
stresses using a combination method that you select in Load Case Options.
The + and - signs are unary operators/sign of multiplier. If no value precedes the load for
major load cases or the load case for combination cases, then the multiplier is +1.0 or -1.0. If a
value precedes the load or the load case, then the multiplier is +value or -value.
Stress Types
Displays the stress types. The stress type applies to the load cases. It defines how the element
stresses and allowables are computed. The available stress types are:
OPE - Operating case. For B31.1 and B31.3 (and similar codes) this case is not a code
compliance case. Allowable stresses are not reported.
SUS - Sustained case.
EXP - Expansion case.
OCC - Occasional load case.
FAT - Fatigue load case.
HGR - Spring hanger design. These are load cases that CAESAR II uses internally to design
and select spring hangers. Results are not available for these cases.
HYD - Hydro test. Select hanger status. For a hydrotest case, the default hanger status is rigid
or locked.
Load Cycles
Load cycles are used only for fatigue type load cases. The load cycle value is the anticipated
number of applications of this load on the system. This value is used to determine the allowable
stress from the fatigue curve for the material. For static cases, calculated stresses are
considered full range. For dynamic cases, calculated stresses are considered half range, which
is the amplitude of the full stress range.
Recommend
Displays the Recommended Load Cases dialog box. This dialog box suggests the load cases
that should be run to satisfy the basic requirements of the piping codes. You can then choose to
run the load cases as presented, or you can modify them to meet your requirements.
Load Cycles
Adds a Load Cycles column to the dialog box.
The user-defined names appear in the Load Case report. For more information, see Controlling
Results (on page 534). You can use these names in place of the default load case names
anywhere in the Static Analysis dialog box.
Output Status
Controls the disposition of the load case results. The available options are Keep or Suppress.
Use Keep when the load case is producing results that you want to review. The default for
all new cases (except for HGR load cases) is Keep.
Use Suppress for artificial cases such as the preliminary hanger cases, or intermediate
construction cases. Load cases used for hanger design, that is, the weight load case and
hanger travel cases designated with the stress type HGR, must be designated as Suppress.
For example, a wind only load case could be designated as Suppress because it was built only
to be used in subsequent combinations and has no value as a standalone load case. For all load
cases created under previous versions of CAESAR II, all load cases except the HGR cases are
converted as Keep.
Output Type
Designates the type of results available for load cases that have a Keep status. Use this field to
help minimize clutter on the output and to ensure that only meaningful results are retained. The
available options are:
Disp/Force/Stress - Provides displacements, restraint loads, global and local forces, and
stresses. This is a good choice for operating cases where you are designing to a code which
does a code check on operating stresses, because the load case is of interest for
interference checking (displacements) and restraint loads at one operating extreme (forces).
Disp/Force - Provides displacements restraint loads, global and local forces. This is a good
choice for OPE cases where you are designing for those codes which do not do a code
check on OPE stresses.
Disp/Stress - Provides displacements and stresses only.
Force/Stress - Provides restraint loads, global and local forces, and stresses. This is a
good choice for the Sustained (cold) case, because the load case would be of interest for
restraint loads at one operating extreme (forces), and code compliance (stresses). FR
combination loads cases developed under previous versions of CAESAR II are converted
with this force/stress type.
Disp - Provides displacements only.
Force - Provides restraint loads, global, and local forces only.
Stress - Provides stresses only. This is a good choice for a sustained plus occasional load
case (with Abs combination method), because this is an artificial construct used for code
stress checking purposes. ST combination load cases developed under previous versions of
CAESAR II are converted with this stress type.
Combination Method
Specifies the combination method to use for combination cases only. Load cases to combine
are designated as L1, L2, and so on. Select the combination method from the list.
Load case results are multiplied by any associated scale factors before performing the
combination and comparison.
The available methods are:
Algebraic - Indicates a signed algebraic combination of displacement and force level. This
method combines the displacement vectors and the force vectors algebraically and then
calculates the stresses from the combined forces. Displacements are the algebraic combination
of the displacement vectors. Forces are the algebraic combination of the force vectors. Stresses
are not combined. Stresses are calculated from the algebraically combined forces. The
Algebraic method would typically be used to calculate EXP code stresses.
The obsolete CAESAR II combination methods DS and FR used an Algebraic combination
method. Therefore, load cases built in previous versions of CAESAR II using the DS and FR
methods are converted to the Algebraic method. Also, new combination cases automatically
default to this method, unless you change them.
Algebraic combinations can be built only from basic load cases. Basic load cases are
non-combination load cases or other load cases built using the Algebraic combination method.
Scalar - Indicates a signed combination of displacement, force, and stress level. This method
combines the displacement vectors, force vectors, and stress scalars. Displacements are the
algebraic combination of the displacement vectors. Forces are the algebraic combination of the
force vectors. Stresses are the scalar combination of the stress scalars.
The combination of displacements and forces are the same for ALG and Scalar methods. The
combinations of stress levels are different between ALG and Scalar methods because the
stresses are calculated from the combined forces in the ALG method and summed in the Scalar
method. .
For example:
Load Case 1: bending stress = 100 psi, due to X-moment
Load Case 2: bending stress - 100 psi, due to Z-moment
Algebraic (vectorial) sum = square root of (100*100 + 100*100) = 141.4 psi
Scalar sum = 100 + 100 = 200 psi
Scalar is typically used to sum (SUS + OCC) code stresses.
The obsolete CAESAR II combination methods ST used a Scalar combination method.
Therefore, load cases built in previous versions of CAESAR II using the ST method are
converted to the Scalar method.
SRSS - Indicates a combination of the square root of the sum of the squares of quantities, such
as the displacements of the forces or the stresses. Displacements are the square root of the
sum of the squares of the displacements of all cases included in the combination. Forces are the
square root of the sum of the squares of the forces of all cases included in the combination.
Stresses are the square root of the sum of the squares of the stresses of all cases included in
the combination. This method is typically used to combine seismic directional components.
ABS - Indicates a combination of the absolute values of quantities, such as the displacements,
the forces, or the stresses. Displacements are the sum of the absolute value of the
displacements of all cases included in the combination. Forces are the sum of the absolute
value of the forces of all cases included in the combination. Stresses are the sum of the
absolute value of the stresses of all cases included in the combination. This method is typically
used to combine SUS cases with OCC cases for occasional stress code check.
For flange checks that use the ABS load case combination method (specified in CAESAR II
piping input), the software uses the following calculated (local) values:
The axial force and torsion, which is the absolute sum of these values from all load cases
included the combination.
The bending moment, which is the sum of resultant bending moments from all load cases
included in the combination.
The flange pressure, which is the maximum pressure defined in the load cases included in the
combination.
MAX - Indicates a combination that reports the maximum displacement, the maximum force,
and the maximum stress value of the cases combined. This method retains the original sign.
Displacements are the displacements having the maximum absolute values of all the load cases
included in the combination. Forces are the forces having the maximum absolute values of all
the load cases included in the combination. Stresses are the stresses having the maximum
absolute values of all the load cases included in the combination. This method is typically used
to report the greatest restraint loads from among a selected set of load cases.
For flange checks that use the MAX load case combination method (specified in CAESAR II
piping input), the software uses the following calculated (local) values:
The axial force and torsion, which is the maximum magnitude of these values from all load
cases included the combination.
The bending moment, which is the maximum resultant bending moment from all load cases
included in the combination.
The flange pressure, which is the maximum pressure defined in the load cases included in the
combination.
MIN - Indicates a combination that reports the minimum displacement, the minimum force, and
the minimum stress value of the cases combined. This method retains the original sign.
Displacements are the displacements having the minimum absolute values of all the load cases
included in the combination. Forces are the forces having the minimum absolute values of all the
load cases included in the combination. Stresses are the stresses having the minimum absolute
values of all the load cases included in the combination.
SIGNMAX - Indicates a combination that reports the maximum displacement, the maximum
force, and the maximum stress value of the cases combined. The sign is considered in the
comparison. Displacements are the maximum signed values of all the displacements from each
case included in the combination. Forces are the maximum signed values of all the forces from
each case included in the combination. Stresses are the maximum signed values of all the
stresses from each case included in the combination. This method is typically used in
conjunction with SignMin to report the envelope of restrain loads from among a selected set of
load cases.
SIGNMIN - Indicates a combination that reports the minimum displacement, the minimum force,
and the minimum stress value of the cases combined. The sign is considered in the comparison.
Displacements are the minimum signed values of all the displacements from each case included
in the combination. Forces are the minimum signed values of all the forces from each case
included in the combination. Stresses are the minimum signed values of all the stresses from
each case included in the combination. This method is typically used in conjunction with
SignMax to report the envelope of restraint loads from among a selected set of load cases.
Snubbers Active
Indicates whether snubbers are active. Select the check box to indicate that snubbers are
considered to be rigid restraints for the load case. By default, OCC load cases activate this
option while other types of load cases clear this option.
Hanger Stiffness
Specifies the hanger stiffness for the load case. The three options are: As Designed, Rigid,
and Ignore.
As Designed - Causes the software to consider the actual spring hanger stiffnesses. Use this
option for most real (non-hanger design) load cases.
Rigid - Causes the software to model the spring hangers as rigid restraints. Use this option for
restrained weight cases and hydrotest cases if the spring hangers are pinned.
Ignore - Causes the software to remove the spring hanger stiffnesses from the model. Use this
option for hanger travel cases, unless you want to include the stiffness of the selected spring in
the operating for hanger travel case and iterate to a solution. In that case, select As Designed.
You must also adjust the hanger load in the cold case (in the physical system) to match the
reported hanger cold load.
User-defined hangers are not made rigid during restrained weight cases.
Elastic Modulus
Designates use of Cold (EC) or any of the nine (EH1-EH9) hot elastic moduli to determine
results on a load case per condition basis.
EC - Cold elastic modulus.
EH1 - Hot elastic modulus corresponding to T1.
EH2 - EH9 - Hot elastic modulus corresponding to T2 through T9.
SUS Case Sh
Designates the use of a hot allowable stress (Sh) to determine the results on a per-load case
basis. Use this option for sustained (SUS) and occasional (OCC) load cases.
Sh_min - Minimum of Sh1 through Sh9.
Sh1 - Sh9 - Hot allowable stresses corresponding to T1 through T9.
The SUS Case Sh option applies only to B31.3 2010 Edition codes and later.
Friction Multiplier
Specifies the multiplier of friction factors used in this particular load case. The friction factor (Mu)
used at each restraint is this multiplier times the Mu factor at each restraint. Set this value to
zero to deactivate friction for this load case.
Load Case Type System Design Occasional Load Part Factor for
Factor Factor Loading
Wind Exposure
Specifies the wind exposure. This value is the exposure category that adequately reflects the
characteristics of ground surface irregularities. Exposure categories are defined in ASCE
#7-2005 Sec. 6.5.6.3 as follows:
2 - Exposure B - Urban, suburban, and wooded areas, prevailing, for at least 2,600 ft
upwind.
3 - Exposure C - All cases not "B" or "D".
4 - Exposure D - Flat coastal areas, prevailing at least, 5,000 ft upwind.
2, 3 and 4 are the options for wind exposure categories, and are equivalent to categories
B, C, and D, from ASCE #7-2005.
Structural Classification
Specifies the classification of buildings and structures based on the type of occupancy.
ASCE #7-1995 Table 1-1, classification is as follows:
1 - Category I - Failure represents low hazard.
2 - Category II - All structures except 1, 3, and 4.
3 - Category III - Primary occupancy more than 300 people.
4 - Category IV - Essential facilities (Hospitals, and so forth)
1, 2, 3 and 4 are the options for structural classification categories, and are equivalent to
categories I, II, III and IV defined in ASCE#7.
Importance Factor
Specifies the importance factor (I). This value is used to calculate the velocity pressure for wind
load calculations. The importance factor depends on the structural classification and whether or
not the region is prone to hurricanes, as shown in the table below.
For ASCE #7-2005 Input the importance factor from ASCE #7-2005 Table 6-1
1, 2, 3, and 4 are the options for structural classification categories, and are equivalent to
categories I, II, III and IV, defined in ASCE #7.
Crest Distance
Specifies the distance upwind of crest to where the difference in ground elevation is half the
height of hill or escarpment.
Hill Type
Specifies the hill type. This value is the hill type is defined as follows:
0 - NO HILL
1 - 2-D Ridge
2 - 2-D Escarpment
3 - 3-D Axisymmetric Hill
UBC Options
Specifies options for the UBC and IBC wind codes.
UBC Exposure Factor/IBC Exposure Constant - Specifies the UBC Exposure Factor as
defined in UBC-91 Section 2312 or the IBC Exposure Constant:
Exposure B - Terrain with building, forest or surface irregularities 20 feet or more in height
covering at least 20 percent or the area extending one mile or more from the site.
Exposure C - Terrain which is flat and generally open, extending one-half mile or more from
the site in any full quadrant.
Exposure D - The most severe exposure with basic wind speeds of 80 mph or more.
Terrain which is flat and unobstructed facing large bodies of water over one mile or more in
width relative to any quadrant of the building site. This exposure extends inland from the
shoreline 1/4 mile or 0 times the building (vessel) height, whichever is greater.
Most petrochemical sites use a value of 3, exposure C. This value is used to set the Gust
Factor Coefficient (Ce) found in Table 23-G.
UBC Importance Factor - Specifies the UBC importance factor. The software uses this value
directly without modification. This value is taken from Table 23-L of the UBC standard.
Followings are the context of Table 23-L:
Category Value
ULS SLS
Roughness Factor
Specifies the Roughness Factor:
1 - Round, moderately smooth
2 - Round, rough (D'/D = 0.02)
3 - Round, very rough (D'/D = 0.08)
Terrain Description
Category
1 Lakes or flat and horizontal areas with negligible vegetation and without
obstacles
2 Area with low vegetation such as grass and isolated obstacles (trees,
buildings) with separations of at least 20 obstacle heights
4 Area in which at least 15% of the surface is covered with buildings and their
average height exceeds 15 m
Directionality Factor [Cdir] - Value of the directional factor Cdir found in the National Annex.
The recommended value is 1.0.
Season Factor [Cseason] - Value of the season factor Cseason found in the National Annex.
The recommended value is 1.0.
Structural Factor [CsCd] - Structural factor used to determine the force on the vessel. This
value is defined in Section of the EN 1991-1-4:2005(E) Wind load specification in Annex D. This
value normally ranges between 0.90 and 1.10. The greater the structural factor value, the higher
the element load.
Force Coefficient [Cf] - Force coefficient which accounts for the fact that the vessel is circular
in cross section. This value modifies the area of the vessel that the wind is blowing against. This
value is often specified in the design specifications or can be computed based on the
methodology given in Section 7.9 for circular cylinders. A typical value for Cf would be between
0.7 and 0.8.
Class Description
Terrain Category - Defined in Table I.1, based on the type of soil and roughness.
Category Description
TOPOGRAPHY FACTOR, FT (Paragraph 4.5.4) - This factor takes into account the local
topographic effect from the place in which the structure uproots. For example, if the building is
found on the hillsides, on top of hills or on mountains at important heights with respect to the
general level of the terrain of its outskirts, it is probable that wind accelerations generates and
the regional velocity should be increased.
Damping Factor - Typically, this value is 0.01.
DRAG COEFFICIENT, Ca (Table 1.28)
1 7 25 40
where:
b is the diameter or the horizontal dimension of the structure, including the roughness of the
wall; to determine the product bVD, this diameter is the one that is located at two thirds of the
total height, from the level of the land, in m
d' is the dimension that exceeds from the roughness, such as ribs or "spoilers", in m
VD is the velocity of the wind of design (4.6), in m/s, and it is valued for the two thirds of the
total height
For intermediate values of H/b and d'/b lineal interpolation is permitted.
Strouhal Number St - The Strouhal number is unitless; 0.2 for circular sections and 0.14 for
rectangular sections.
Barometric Height -
0 760
500 720
1000 675
1500 635
2000 600
2500 565
3000 530
3500 495
Ambient Temperature
Specifies the actual ambient temperature. The default ambient temperature for all elements in
the system is 70F/21C. If this does not accurately represent the installed, or zero expansion
strain state, then type the actual value in this box. The ambient temperature is used in
conjunction with the specified hot temperature and the interpolated expansion coefficient to
calculate the thermal expansion per inch of pipe length experienced by the element when going
from the ambient temperature to the hot temperature.
A default ambient temperature can be defined in the configuration file. For more information, see
New Job Ambient Temperature (on page 51). The software uses this configuration file value to
set the ambient temperature when you create a new model.
1 Open terrain, Coastal flat stripes, swamp The minimum length for this
practically smooth and zones, aerial fields, pasture fields type of terrain in the
without obstructions. and crop lands with no hedges or direction of the wind must be
fences. Flat snow-covered of 2000 m or 10 times the
surfaces. height of the structure to be
designed.
2 Flat terrain or Crop lands or farms with few The obstructions have a
undulated, with few obstructions around such as height of 1.5 to 10 m, in a
obstructions. hedges of fences, trees and minimum length of 1500 m.
scattered buildings.
4 Terrain with many big, Cities with downtown areas and At least 50% of the buildings
tall, and narrowly well developed industrial complex have a height of more than
spaced-out areas. 20 m. The obstructions
obstructions. measure up from 10 to 30 m
in height. The minimum
length for this type of land in
the direction of the wind
should be the biggest
between 400 m and 10 times
the height of the
construction.
Category Description
2 Plain (or slightly uneven) ground with few, and separated, obstacles
Using Category I produces a higher wind load than Category II and so forth.
Dimension Class -
Class Description
Statistical Factor (S3) - Accounts for security and the expected life of the equipment. For
industrial plants S3 is generally taken to be 1.0.
Pipe Surface Condition - Vessel surface condition can be classified as smooth or rough. A
selection of rough results in an increased value of the shape coefficient. Using a rough
classification generates a higher wind load on the vessel as there is more drag. The shape
coefficient is computed based on the height to diameter ratio of the vessel.
IS-875 Options
Specifies options for the IS-875 wind code
IS-875 Basic Wind Speed - Basic wind speed as applicable to 10 m height above mean ground
level for different zones in the country can be directly calculated if the proper value is defined in
the Wind Zone Number box. Alternatively, wind speed can be defined here. Basic wind speed
should be based on peak gust velocity averaged over a short time interval of about 3 seconds
and correspond to mean heights above ground level in an open terrain. This box is optional.
IS-875 Wind Zone Number - Figure 1 of IS-875 shows different Wind Zones of the country.
Various zone numbers and corresponding Basic Wind Speed values are:
The value typed here must be between 1 and 6. The zone the vessel is in is determined from a
map of India showing the various wind zones.
Optionally, you can define the basic wind speed directly in the Basic Wind Speed box. If the
wind speed is specified, it overrides the value of wind speed and zone based on the table
above.
IS-875 Risk Factor (K1) - Assuming the mean probable design life as 100 years, the
corresponding risk coefficient values for various wind zones are:
Zone K1
Zone 1 1.05
Zone 2 1.06
Zone 3 1.07
Zone 4 1.07
Zone 5 1.08
Zone 6 1.08
IS-875 Terrain Category - Terrain in which specific equipment is assessed as one of the
following categories:
Category 1 - Exposed open terrain with few or no obstructions and in which the average
height of any object surrounding the equipment is less than 1.5 m. This category includes
open sea - coasts and flat treeless plains.
Category 2 - Open terrain with well scattered obstructions having height generally between
1.5 to 10 m. This includes airfields, open parklands and undeveloped sparsely built up
outskirts of towns and suburbs. This category is commonly used for design purpose.
Category 3 - Terrain with numerous closely spaced obstructions having the size of buildings
and structures up to 10 m in height. This includes well wooded areas, towns, and industrial
areas full or partially developed.
Category 4 - Terrain with numerous tall, closely spaced obstructions. This includes large
city centers, generally with obstructions above 25 m, and well developed industrial
complexes.
IS-875 Equipment Class - Equipment and structures are classified into following classes
depending upon their size.
Class A - Equipment and components having a maximum dimension (greatest horizontal or
vertical dimension) less than 20 m.
Class B - Equipment and components having a maximum dimension (greatest horizontal or
vertical dimension) between 20 and 50 m.
Beta
Specifies the structural damping coefficient. Type the value of structural damping coefficient
(percentage of critical damping) beta. The default value is 0.01.
This value is used to compute the dynamic gust effect factor G as outlined in the commentary
section 6.6 page 158 of ASCE 95 or section 6.5.8 pages 29-30 of the 98 standard. If your design
Code is not ASCE, then the software uses the damping coefficient in accordance with that
particular wind design code.
If your design specification does not call out for a specific value of beta, then leave the value of
0.01 in this cell. Please note that other values of beta can be specified for the filled case and the
empty case. Again if the specifications do not supply these values for empty and filled leave
these cells blank.
Choose the terrain category with due regard to the permanence of the obstructions that
constitute the surface roughness. In particular, vegetation in tropical cyclonic regions cannot be
relied upon to maintain surface roughness during wind events.
Lee Effect Multiplier (Mlee) - Specifies the Lee Effect Multiplier. The default value is 1.0.
Paragraph 4.4.3 discusses the issue of the lee effect multiplier. In the case of New Zealand,
reference is made to the New Zealand site map. For all other sites, it shall be taken as 1.0.
Hill Shape Factor (Mh) - Specifies the appropriate hill shape factor, which can be obtained from
Table 4.4 of the code. Please refer to paragraph 4.4.2 which gives precise details for the
derivation of the hill shape factor.
Upwind Slope
(H/2Lu) Mh
0.05 1.8
0.10 1.16
0.20 1.32
0.30 1.48
Wind Direction Multiplier (Md) - Specifies the wind direction multiplier. The default value is 1.0
The wind direction multiplier is detailed in paragraph 3.4 of the code, specifically Table 3.2. As
the wind multiplier is determined from the cardinal wind directions (N, NE, E, SE, S SW, W and
NW), the value for any direction is specified in the table as 1.0. We recommend this value be
used for all cases.
Convert to Permissible Stress Gust Wind Speed - In the standard AS/NZS 1170.2 Supp
1:2002 Section C3 there is a discussion regarding the division of the wind speed given in the
standard by the square root of 1.5. Checking the box converts the wind speed given to a
permissible stress basis. Doing this lowers the wind loads on the vessel.
Surface Roughness Value (hr) - This value is used to compute the ratio hr/d which is then
used to compute the drag force coefficient (Cd) for rounded cylindrical shapes per Table E3. For
pressure vessels, this value ranges from 0.003 mm for painted metal surfaces to 15 mm for
heavily rusted surfaces. Light rust has a value of 2.5 mm while galvanized steel has a value of
0.15 mm.
The ratio hr/d is taken to be unitless (mm/mm).
Site Elevation (E) Specify the height of the site above the mean sea level, E.
Average Spacing of Shielding Buildings - Specifies the average spacing of the shielding
buildings. This is discussed in paragraph 4.3.3 of the code.
Average Breadth of Shielding Buildings (bs) - Specifies the average breadth of the buildings
that shield the piping.
Average Height of Shielding Buildings (hs) - Specifies the average height of the buildings
that shield the piping.
Number of Upwind Bldgs at 45 degs - Specifies the number of upwind buildings within a 45
degree arc. The upwind buildings are the ones shielding the piping.
BS-6399-97 Options
Specifies options for the BS-6499-97 British Wind Code.
Design Wind Speed - Specifies the design value of the wind speed. These vary according to
geographical location and according to company or vendor standards. Here are a few typical
wind speeds in miles per hour. Typical wind speeds are shown in Figure 6 of BS 6399. The wind
speeds are only relevant to the United Kingdom. The wind speeds vary typically from 20 m/sec
to 31 m/sec (44.7 mph to 69.3 mph).
Type the lowest value reasonably allowed by the standards you are following, because the wind
design pressure (and thus force) increases as the square of the speed.
Site Elevation - delta s - Enter the site altitude above mean sea level (paragraph 2.2.2.2 of the
code). Use this value plus the Base Elevation to calculate the height of each point in the vessel
above mean sea level. For example, if the vessel is installed on a site that is 100 m (328 ft)
above sea level, it is exposed to a higher wind pressure (P) than if installed on the beach (at
mean sea level).
Upwind Building Height (Obstruction Height) - Ho - For buildings in town terrain, type the
average height of the building upwind of the piping (as they tend to shield the piping from the
wind). To be conservative, this value can be zero, so the piping takes the full force of the wind.
Ho is used to modify the effective piping wind height (He) for any piping element. See paragraph
1.7.3.3 of BS6399.
Upwind Building Spacing - X - For buildings in town terrain, type the average spacing of the
buildings upwind of the piping (as they tend to shield the piping from the wind). If the buildings
are closer together, they provide greater protection from the wind. See paragraph 1.7.3.3 of
BS6399.
Pipe Location - Specifies the location where the system is installed, either in the country, or in a
town. The BS6399 factors in Table 4 modify the wind velocity. The final wind pressure acting on
any element of the piping is determined by the distance from the coast, whether located in the
country or a town, and the effective height (He). This table derives Sb, which is calculated by
internally.
Distance to Coast Line - Specifies the distance the vessel is located from the coast in
kilometers. This distance affects the corrected wind speed (Ve). The BS6399 factors in Table 4
modify the wind velocity. The final wind pressure acting on any element of the vessel is
determined by the distance from the coast, whether located in the country or a town, and the
effective height (He). This table derives Sb, which is calculated by internally.
Size Effect Factor - Ca - Specifies the size effect factor Ca. This value is normally taken from
Figure 4 of BS-6399-2. This factor generally ranges from 0.53 to a maximum value of 1.0. The
size effect factor is a function of the diagonal dimension a, the effective height, the site in the
town or country and the distance to the sea.
Factor Kb from Table 1 - Kb - Specifies the 'Building-type factor Kb' taken from Table 1 of
BS6399. Choose from one of five values: 8, 4, 2, 1 or 0.5. CAESAR II sets the default to 2, but
any other value may be chosen. Please note the following limitations of Kb based on the vessel
height:
8 23 m (75.4 ft)
4 75 m (246 ft)
Designing towers over 75 meters in height is unlikely and you would need to consider many
other things.
BS 6399 Table 1. Building-type Factor Kb
2 Portal sheds and similar light structures with few internal walls
1 Framed buildings with structural walls around lifts and stairs only (e.g. office
buildings of open plan or with partitioning)
0.5 Framed buildings with structural walls around lifts and stairs with additional
masonry subdivision walls (for example, apartment buildings), building of masonry
construction and timber-framed housing
Annual Probability Factor - Q - Calculates the final probability factor (Sp) associated with the
likelihood of high velocity gusts occurring over certain periods such as 50 years. The default
value is Q = 0.02. The code sets 0.02 as a standard value for a mean recurrence value of 50
years. Annex D of BS6399 should be consulted for a fuller explanation.
Q Explanation
0.632 NOTE 1: The annual mode, corresponding to the most likely annual
maximum value. (Sp = 0.749)
0.227 NOTE 2: For the serviceability limit, assuming the partial factor for loads for
the ultimate limit is f = 1.4 and for the serviceability limit is f = 1.0, giving Sp
= Sqrt(1 / 1.4) = 0.845. (Sp = 0.845)
0.0083 NOTE 4: The design risk for bridges, corresponding to a mean recurrence
interval of 50 years. (Sp = 1.048)
0.00574 NOTE 5: The annual risk corresponding to the standard partial factor for
loads, corresponding to a mean recurrence interval 1754 years. This is
back-calculated assuming the partial factor load for the ultimate limit is ?f =
1.4 and all risk is ascribed to the recurrence of wind. (Sp = Sqrt(1.4))
0.001 NOTE 6: The design risk for nuclear installations, corresponding to a mean
recurrence interval of 10,000 years. (Sp = 1.263)
Seasonal Factor - Ss - BS6399 in paragraph 2.2.2.4 states: "...For permanent buildings and
buildings exposed for continuous periods of more than 6 months a value of 1.0 should be used
for Ss..." PVElite uses 1.0 as the default value for this reason. Using a value of less than 1.0 is
not recommended, or should only be used with solid research.
Directional Factor - Sd - Taken from Table 3 of BS6399. Because a tower is symmetrical about
its central axis, the default value has been taken as 1.0. It is recommended that this value not be
reduced other than for exceptional circumstances. For other values, please consult Table 3. The
values in that table range between 0.73 and 1.00.
Surface Velocity
Specifies the current speed at the free surface elevation, excluding the wave. This value is
superseded by the entries in a depth versus speed table.
Direction Cosines
Specifies the X- and Z- cosines defining the direction of the current. The current direction may
differ from the direction of any accompanying wave.
Wave Theory
Specifies the wave theory by which to model any wave effects. The available theories are:
Stream Function - Dean's stream function theory
Stream Function, Modified - Dean's stream function theory modified to include a shear
current. This shear current is assumed to vary linearly from the surface speed to the bottom
speed. Therefore, this option only works with the Linear current profile.
STOKE'S 5th - Stoke's 5th order wave theory.
STOKE'S 5th, Modified - Stoke's 5th order wave theory modified to address particle data
above the mean sea level.
AIRY - Basic linear wave theory.
AIRY, Modified - Basic linear wave theory modified to address particle data above the
mean sea level.
Water Depth
Specifies the water depth at this location.
Wave Height
Specifies the wave height (the crest to trough distance).
Wave Period
Specifies the wave period. That is, the time it takes for successive crests to pass a fixed
reference point.
Phase Angle
Specifies the wave phase angle to use to calculate the wave loadings at either:
every element
model origin.
Kinematic Viscosity
Specifies the kinematic viscosity of the fluid. Typical values for seawater are:
Density
Specifies the density of the sea water. A typical value for salt water is 0.037 (lb/cu.in.) or
0.00103 (kg/cu.cm.)
Output Viewer Wizard - Selects specific reports and reviews their order before sending the
output to the selected device. To close the Output Viewer Wizard, click Less <<. For more
information, see Output Viewer Wizard (on page 589).
When a report is open, you can double-click the column headings to sort the report by
ascending or descending value order. Column order can be re-arranged by dragging columns to
another location. You can also adjust the column size or hide the column altogether. All changes
are for the current report in the current viewing session. To make permanent changes to the
report, use the Report Template Editor (on page 590).
You can print or save individual reports to a text file or to Microsoft Word or Microsoft Excel by
selecting Send Report To or Send All To from the right-click menu.
While the report is active, you can adjust the display properties available from the View menu,
change the background color, and turn on horizontal and vertical grid lines. Grid lines can help
in generating better print results.
Click View > Change Page Break to adjust the page configuration for an active report. You can
also scale the report to fit on one page, or adjust it to fit on a specified number of pages by using
the Allow Adjustment of Page Breaks and Show Page Break Lines options.
Filter Reports
Using Filters
1. Select Filters on the menu.
2. Type the From node and To node numbers.
If you enter both a From and To node number, then the nodes in the specified range
display.
If you enter just a From node number, then the From node and all nodes greater than it
display.
If you enter just a To node number, then the To node and all nodes less than it display.
3. Select the Filter Options tab.
4. Select the appropriate Filter Options option: Absolute Value or Signed Value. The default
is to filter by the magnitude, regardless of the sign or direction. You can filter by a specific
direction of load or displacement. This feature is particularly useful when looking for lifting off
the supports in directional restraints (such as +Y).
5. Select the appropriate Combinations Fields option. Fields refer to the particular data items
(columns) in each class. For example, DX and RZ are in the Displacements class, or FX
and MZ are in the Restraints class, or Code Stress and Bending Stress are in the
Stresses class.
6. Select the appropriate Combinations Classes. Classes refers to the major types of output,
for example Displacements, Restraints, Forces, or Stresses.
7. Click the Class tab you want to apply the filter to.
8. Enter the information on the Class tab. Each tab contains related fields with a drop box and
an edit box. Each corresponding edit box displays the value to compare to. Each of the
drop boxes has a list of comparison operators:
Operator Description
== Equal
Operator Description
\= Not Equal
Prints copies of the reports. To print copies of multiple reports as a single report,
use the Output Viewer Wizard to populate the report order tree, click Send To
Printer and then Finish.
Sends reports to a file (in ASCII format) rather than the printer. After selection, a
dialog displays where you select the file name. To change the file name for a new
report, select FILE-SAVE AS.
Typically, the set of output reports to print out for documentation purposes is:
Load cases used for hanger sizing produce no reports. Also, the hanger table and hanger
table with text reports are printed only once even though more than one active load case may be
highlighted.
To save multiple reports as a single report to a file, use the Output Viewer Wizard.
The signs in all CAESAR II Reports show the forces and moments that act "ON"
something. The Element Force/Moment report shows the forces and moments that act
"ON" each element to keep that element in static equilibrium. The Restraint Force/Moment
report shows the forces and moments that act "ON" each restraint.
When sending reports to MSWord, if a file named "header.doc" exists in the \caesar\system
directory, its contents are read and used as the page header when CAESAR II exports the
report to MSWord. The intent is that "header.doc" contains the company logo, address
details and formatting for tables. The interface uses a style names "report table" which you
can set up in "header.doc".
Report Options
For most load cases, except hanger design and fatigue, there are a variety of different report
options that can be selected for review.
Most standard reports have short and long versions, designated by the word Extended.
The extended reports usually have more data items available and may require a landscape
option when printed.
Displacements - Shows the nodal translations and rotations at each of the nodes. These
values represent the solution vector for each load case. For more information, see
Displacements (on page 572).
Restraints - Shows the loads imposed on the system supports for each load case. For more
information, see Restraints (on page 573).
Restraint Summary - Combines the restraint reports for any number of (user selected) load
cases. This provides a concise summary of the loads on the restraints, across load cases.
For more information, see Restraint Summary (on page 576).
Global Element Forces - Shows the element forces and moments acting on the ends of the
element. These forces and moments are aligned with the global coordinate system, and
represent the element free-body diagram. For more information, see Global Element Forces
(on page 579).
Local Element Forces - Shows the element forces and moments acting on the ends of the
element. These forces and moments are aligned with the local element coordinate system,
and represent the element free-body diagram. For more information, see Local Element
Forces (on page 579).
Stresses - Shows the element stresses acting on the ends of the elements. This report
also includes codes SIFs, code allowables, and the "code" stress when applicable. For more
information, Stresses (on page 580).
Cumulative Damage - Lists the combined fatigue stresses for all selected fatigue load
cases and compares it to the corresponding allowable for each node of each element. Note
that this report is only available for those jobs that include fatigue cases. For more
information, see Cumulative Usage Report (on page 583).
Displacements
Translations and rotations for each degree of freedom are reported at each node in the model.
Use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class. For
more information, see Filter Reports (on page 569).
Restraints
Forces and moments on each restraint in the model are reported. There is a separate report
generated for each load case selected.
Use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class. For
more information, see Filter Reports (on page 569).
This system consists of two small horizontal lines anchored at both ends. The last element of
each line is skewed 45 degrees in the X-Z plane. At the end of this skewed line is an axial
restraint, as illustrated in the following figure:
The typical Global Restraint report for this system displays in the following table. At node 140,
this report shows two equal loads in the (global) X and Z directions. These values (24,463) are
the global component loads acting on the skewed restraint. The actual magnitude of the restraint
load, acting in-line with the pipe can be found by performing the SRSS of these component
loads, which yields 34595. This value is the load on the restraint acting axially with the pipe.
Operating Case Restraint Loads Global Coordinate System
The process of performing SRSS or sine/cosine operations to obtain restraint loads in the
element coordinate system can be tedious. As an alternative, generate a restraint report where
all of the loads are aligned with the associated element coordinate system. The report for the
same small job displays in the table below.
In reviewing the relationship between the local versus global restraint loads note the following:
The global FY (vertical) load at node 100 of -514 translates to a local fz load. For details on the
global to local coordinate system relations, see Technical Discussions (on page 883). (These
two values are shown in the tables in bold.)
At node 140, the skewed axial restraint, the first table showing the global coordinate system
loads, reports the two equal component loads. The second table showing the local loads,
reports only the resultant axial load at the restraint. (These values are shown in the tables in
bold.)
Restraint Summary
Similar to the restraint report, this option provides force and moment data for all valid selected
load cases together on one report.
Use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class. For
more information, see Filter Reports (on page 569).
Data for each load case reported is a result of calculation (and can also be viewed on a Local
Restraints report). The Limits shown in the report are the values from the input. Similarly, the
Comparison method also reflects the input setting. The loads shown are the loads on the
nozzle for the indicated load cases. If any load exceeds its corresponding allowable load, then
the entire line is shown in red (with an asterisk at the far right in the event the report is printed in
black and white.)
The Resultant column reports the resultant forces and moments for the SRSS Comparison
method, and the unity check value for the Unity Check method.
Flange Reports
Flange Reports are available after completing the In-line Flange Evaluation analysis. There
are two methods and two corresponding reports for evaluating flanges under load: Kellogg
Equivalent Pressure Method (Peq) and ASME B&PVC Section III Subsection NC-3658.3
Method (NC-3658.3).
The reports display some of the relevant input items along with the calculated corresponding
moments and stresses or equivalent pressure for each node where the flange evaluation was
requested. This is an elemental type report, and the flanges may be defined on either end of the
element. Because of this, some lines in the report with no corresponding output are blank.
Use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class. For
more information, see Filter Reports (on page 569).
Use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class. For
more information, see Filter Reports (on page 569).
Stresses
SIFs and code stresses are reported for each node in the model. The code stresses are
compared to the allowable stress at each node as a percentage. Stresses are not computed at
nodes on rigid elements or on structural steel elements.
Use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class. For
more information, see Filter Reports (on page 569).
Stress Summary
The highest stresses at each node are presented in summary format for all selected load cases.
Use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class. For
more information, see Filter Reports (on page 569).
Topics
Load Case Report .......................................................................... 584
Hanger Table with Text .................................................................. 585
Input Echo ...................................................................................... 586
Miscellaneous Data ....................................................................... 587
Warnings ........................................................................................ 588
Input Echo
The Input Echo option allows you to select which portions of the input are reported in this
output format. All basic element data (geometry), operating conditions, material properties, and
boundary conditions are available in this report option. Select what you want to see, and then
click OK.
Miscellaneous Data
The Miscellaneous Data report displays SIF and Flexibility data for Bends and Tees, Allowable
Stress Summary, Reducers report, Nozzles Flexibility data, Pipe Properties report with weights
and minimum calculated wall thickness for each element, Thermal Expansion Coefficients for
each element as used during analysis, Center-of-Gravity report (C.G.), Bill of Materials (B.O.M.),
Wind, and Wave input data.
Warnings
All warnings reported during the error checking process are summarized here.
The Output Viewer Wizard consists of the Report Order window and auxiliary operational
buttons. You can add any report to the view by clicking Add. You can delete any report by
clicking Remove. You can arrange the order of the reports by highlighting the report and then
moving it up or down by clicking Move Up or Move Down.
You can send a report to the screen or to a printer by selecting the appropriate radio button in
the upper section of the Output Viewer Wizard dialog box. After clicking Finish, the reports are
automatically sent to the specified device in the order displayed in the Report Order window.
To generate a table of contents, select Generate Table of Contents (TOC).
The Table of Contents does not display if Send to Screen is selected, regardless if the
Generate Table of Contents (TOC) check box was selected or cleared.
The Report Template Editor dialog box consists of two sections: the template editor to the left
and the preview grid to the right.
The template editor has a tree-like structure and resembles Window Explorers folder view.
There are 11 major categories available: Template Name and Template Settings for general
report editing, and several output fields; Displacements, Restraints, Local Restraints, Equipment
Nozzle Checks, Global and Local Forces, Flange Evaluation, Stresses, and Hanger Table Data.
The Template Name category allows you to specify the report name, enter a brief description of
the report, and select the report type. The report name followed by the template description
displays on the preview grid if the Include Report Name option is checked under the Template
Settings category.
There are three report types available:
Individual - Generates output reports, one per selected load case, in a format similar to the
standard Displacements or Restraints reports.
Summary - Generates a single output report for all the specified load cases as a
sum\-mary, in a format similar to the standard Restraint Summary report.
Code Compliance - Generates an output stress check report for multiple load cases as a
single report, similar to the standard Code Compliance report.
Actual columns and their order on the reports are controlled solely by you. Data from
various categories can be customized on a single report to suit your needs.
The Template Settings category provides options for the report header and the report body
text, formatting, and alignment. You can also set the font face, size, and color for the header and
the report body. You can include or remove specific header text (such as Report Name, Job
Title or Filters Description) by selecting and clearing the check box next to the corresponding
item. Report Line Spacing changes the spacing between lines of text. The Summary Line
check box (used with Summary-type reports) toggles the appearance of the summary line with
MAX values for each field or column per node. Select the Node Number/Name check box (used
with Summary-type reports) to repeat the Node information on each Loadcase line. If you clear
this option, then the node will appear on the separate line above the data for load cases. These
two options may help with later data manipulations when sending the reports to a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet
Any changes in the editor are immediately reflected in the preview window.
Each of the following categories consists of related output data. For example, the
Displacements category contains three translational (DX, DY, and DZ) and three rotational
(RX, RY, and RZ) fields, Stresses contains Axial, Bending, and Code stresses among other
stress related fields. A number next to the field name indicates the Column Order this field will
be placed in. When nothing or a zero value is specified, this column will not be included in the
current report.
Each field contains the following information:
Column Number Indicates the order of the fields in the output report.
Font Specifies the text font face, size and color for this field whenever
special formatting is required. Set the generic font settings for the
entire report at the Template Settings > Body category.
Align Values Controls left, right, or center alignment of the values in the
column.
Field Caption Customize the name of the field as it appears on the report. This
may be useful to customize the display of the output
displacements in the report to reflect the plant
North/South/East/West directions or vertical and Horizontal
notations instead of generic X, Y, Z.
Column Width Controls the size of the column in terms of the number of
displayed characters or digits. In addition, resizing the columns in
the Preview Grid adjusts the Column Width value. Type 0 to
close the column and remove it from the report. Type -1 to size
the column to the predefined default size.
Units Based Indicates whether to enable the automatic control of the displayed
Precision number of decimal places to be calculated based on the selected
display units. This value is used together with the Units
Conversion Label value. The Precision value is ignored in this
case. When set to No, the Precision value takes place.
When a category or any particular field is highlighted in the editor, the help text for this
field displays in the Help box at the bottom of the editor window.
The Preview Grid on the right of the Custom Report Template Editor dialog is interactive. You
can drag the columns by their heading to arrange the order of the fields in the reports.
Double-clicking the column header sorts that columns values in ascending or descending order.
The dragged column number or sorted order value will automatically be saved in the Column
Number or Sort Order entry of that field in the editor tree. Click the column header once to
highlight that field in the editor tree, extend its contents and scroll it to view.
The Preview Grid is limited to the first 50 lines. The entire report is available after you
select the appropriate load cases and custom report name on the Static Output Processor
dialog box and click View Report.
Any current changes to the custom report template can be saved by clicking Save. The custom
report template can also be saved under a different name by clicking Save As... The Save As...
dialog box prompts you to enter the new template name, a brief description, and the report type.
Click Preview Report to remove the grid lines from the Preview Grid. Click the same button
again to add the grid lines for editing.
Available Commands
The Static Output Processor window menus and toolbars provide commands to review,
create, and modify reports. The 3D/HOOPS Graphics toolbars navigate and display report
information in graphics mode.
Topics
View Menu ..................................................................................... 593
Options Menu ................................................................................ 597
Plot Options Menu ......................................................................... 604
Plot View Menu .............................................................................. 610
Event Viewer Dialog Box ............................................................... 612
View Menu
Activates and disables toolbars.
Topics
Standard Toolbar ........................................................................... 593
Displacements Toolbar .................................................................. 594
Grow Toolbar ................................................................................. 594
Restraints Toolbar ......................................................................... 595
Stresses Toolbar ............................................................................ 595
Reports Navigation Toolbar ........................................................... 596
Custom Reports Toolbar................................................................ 597
Standard Toolbar
Open - Opens a different job for output review. You are prompted for the file to
open.
Save - Saves the selected reports to a text file. You are prompted for the file
name. A table of contents for all currently selected reports is added to the end of
the text file.
Load Case Name - Selects either the CAESAR II Default Load Case Names or
the User-Defined Load Case Names for output reports. The selected name also
displays in the Load Cases Analyzed list box in the Static Output Processor
window. The user-defined load case names are entered in the Load Case Editor
on the Load Options tab, see Load Case Options Tab (see "Load Case Options
Tab (Static Analysis Dialog Box)" on page 539).
Node Name - Defines the formatting of the node numbers and names for
generated reports. Select the format to use from the Node Name Choice dialog
box.
Title Lines - Inserts report titles for a group of reports. For more information, see
Title Lines (on page 603).
Return to Input - Opens the Piping Input Processor. For more information, see
Piping Input Reference (on page 99).
Print - Prints the selected reports. After closing, or exiting, a Table of Contents is
printed.
Using Microsoft Word - Send the report directly to Microsoft Word. For more
information, see Using Microsoft Word (on page 598).
Using Microsoft Excel - Sends output reports directly to Excel. For more
information, see Using Microsoft Excel (on page 599).
Displacements Toolbar
Maximum Displacements - Places the actual magnitude of the X, Y, or
Z displacements on the currently displayed model.
The element containing the displaced node is highlighted, and the
camera viewpoint is repositioned preserving the optical distance to the
model. This brings the displaced node to the center of the view.
1. The software starts with the highest value for the given direction.
After you press Enter, the remaining values are placed in a similar
manner until all values become zero.
2. Click Maximum Displacements again to clear the view of the
displayed values and highlighting.
Click Show > Displacement > Maximum Displacement >X, Y, or
Z to access this command from the menu. If Show Element Viewer
Grid is selected, then the viewer displays the Displacements report for
the selected load case and highlights the column and row to represent
the displacement direction and current node.
Grow Toolbar
Deflected Shape - Overlays the scaled geometry with a different color into the
current plot for the selected load case. Click the down arrow to display an
additional menu with the selected feature checked and the Adjust Deflection
Scale option.
Adjust Deflection Scale - Specifies the deflected shape plot scale factor. You
may not be able to see the deflected shape if the value is too small. If you enter
a scale value that is too large, the model may be discontinued. Select Show >
Displacement > Scale to access this command from the menu.
Grow - Displays the expansion of a selected pipe due to the addition of heat.
Restraints Toolbar
Output Restraints Symbols - Adds restraint symbols to the plot.
Restraints are plotted as arrowheads with the direction of the arrow
indicating the direction of the force exerted by the restraint on the piping
geometry.
Stresses Toolbar
Overstress - Displays the overstressed point distribution for a particular load
case. Nodes with a calculated code stress to allowable stress ratio of 100%
or more display in red. The remaining nodes or elements display in the color
selected for the lowest percent ratio. This feature is useful to quickly observe the
overstressed areas in the model.
Overstressed conditions are only detected for load cases where a code
compliance check was done (such as where there are allowable stresses
available).
Overstressed nodes display in red in the Event Viewer dialog box (if it is
enabled).
The model is still fully functional. You can zoom, pan, or rotate it.
Code Stress Colors by Value - Displays the piping system in a range of colors
where the color corresponds to a certain boundary value of the code stress. Use
this feature to see the distribution of the code stresses in the model for a
particular load case.
In addition to the model color highlight in the graphics view, the corresponding
color key legend window is displayed in the top left corner of the graphics view.
The legend window can be resized and moved.
The colors and corresponding stress levels can be set in the
Configuration/Environment. For more information, see Configuration and
Environment (on page 45).
Zoom In / Zoom Out - Zooms the view in or out without affecting the
actual report font or formatting. The zoom level can also be controlled
from the right-mouse-click context menu. The zoom level is applied to the
current report and is temporal until the report is closed.
Preview Report - Removes the grid lines from the Preview Grid.
Clicking the button again adds the grid lines.
Add New Custom Report Template - Creates a new custom report. For more
information, see New Custom Report Template (on page 599).
Edit Existing Custom Report Template - Modifies an existing custom report. For
more information, see Edit Custom Report Template (on page 600).
Reset Default Custom Report Templates - Replaces the current custom report
templates with the default templates. For more information, see Reset Default
Custom Report Templates (on page 601).
Import Custom Report - Imports a custom report template. For more information,
see Import Custom Report (on page 601).
Export Custom Report - Saves any custom generated report to a text file. For
more information, see Export Custom Report (on page 601).
Options Menu
Specifies common settings that are available on all reports such as how node numbers display
and title information.
Topics
On Screen ...................................................................................... 598
Set Report Font ............................................................................. 598
Using Microsoft Word .................................................................... 598
Using Microsoft Excel .................................................................... 599
New Custom Report Template ...................................................... 599
Edit Custom Report Template ....................................................... 600
Delete Custom Report Template ................................................... 600
Reset Default Custom Report Templates ...................................... 601
Import Custom Report ................................................................... 601
Export Custom Report ................................................................... 601
View Animations ............................................................................ 602
Graphical Output ............................................................................ 603
Title Lines....................................................................................... 603
Load Case Name ........................................................................... 604
Node Name .................................................................................... 604
Return to Input ............................................................................... 604
On Screen
Displays the selected reports on the monitor. This permits the analysis data to be reviewed
interactively in text format. After selecting the combination of one or more active load cases with
any combination of report options, select Options > View Reports > On Screen. Each report is
presented one at a time for inspection. You can scroll through the reports vertically and
horizontally. You can also click On Screen on the toolbar.
A table of contents, reflecting the cumulatively produced reports, displays on the first page of the
Microsoft Word document.
Do not use File > Save or the Save command on the main toolbar.
Your report appears in the Custom Reports list.
Do not use File > Save or the Save command on the main toolbar.
- OR -
Click Save Current Custom Report Template with a New Name to save your edit to a
new custom report leaving the original report unchanged.
View Animations
Displays the piping system as it moves to the displaced position of the basic load cases. To
animate the static results, select Options > View Animations. The following screen appears:
The Animated Plot menu has several plot selections. Motion and Volume Motion are the
commands to activate the animation. Motion uses centerline representation while Volume
Motion produces 3D graphics. Select the load case from the drop down list. Animations may be
sped up, slowed down, or stopped using the toolbars.
CAESAR II also enables you to save animated plots as HTML files by selecting File > Save As
Animation. After saving these files, you can view them on any computer outside of CAESAR II.
The corresponding animation graphics file <job_name>.HSF must be transferred along
with the HTML file for proper display.
Graphical Output
To support a graphics mode, the Static Output Processor window provides 3D/HOOPS
Graphics toolbars that contain commands to zoom, orbit, and pan, as well as provide the ability
to switch views and modes.
The 3D/HOOPS Graphics Output toolbar commands include the display of displaced shapes,
highlighting and zooming to maxi\-mum displacements, restraint loads, and stresses of the
model. Another advantage provided by 3D/HOOPS graphics is the graphical representation of
stresses by value and by percentage use color.
A variety of CAESAR II Output Plot functions, accessed from the Output toolbar or the Show
menu, are broken into sub-menus:
Displacements
Restraints
Forces/Moments
Stresses
Output Toolbar
Show Event Viewer Grid - Shows or hides the Event Viewer on the plot. See
Event Viewer Dialog Box (on page 612).
Select Elements - Selects one element at a time in the graphics. The Event
Viewer dialog box is also used in conjunction with Select Elements. When
Select Elements is active, or when you double-click on an element, CAESAR II
highlights the element and displays it in the Event Viewer dialog box with the
correspond\-ing element highlighted in the report grid.
Title Lines
Inserts report titles for a group of reports. You can enter a two-line title or description for a
report. The title can be assigned once for all load case reports sent to the printer or a disk drive;
or the title can be changed for each individual report before it is moved to the output device.
The title line allows for 28 characters per line.
Node Name
Defines the formatting of the node numbers and names for generated reports. Select the
format to use from the Node Name Choice dialog box.
Return to Input
Opens the Piping Input Processor. For more information, see Piping Input Reference (on
page 99).
Topics
Range ............................................................................................ 605
Restraints ....................................................................................... 606
Anchors .......................................................................................... 606
Displacements ............................................................................... 606
Hangers ......................................................................................... 606
Nozzle Flexibility ............................................................................ 606
Flange Check ................................................................................. 606
Nozzle Check ................................................................................. 606
Forces ............................................................................................ 607
Uniform Loads ............................................................................... 607
Wind/Wave..................................................................................... 607
Compass ........................................................................................ 607
Node Numbers ............................................................................... 607
Length ............................................................................................ 608
Tees ............................................................................................... 608
Expansion Joints ............................................................................ 608
Diameters....................................................................................... 608
Wall Thickness ............................................................................... 608
Corrosion ....................................................................................... 608
Piping Codes ................................................................................. 608
Material .......................................................................................... 609
Pipe Density ................................................................................... 609
Fluid Density .................................................................................. 609
Refractory Thickness ..................................................................... 609
Refractory Density ......................................................................... 609
Insulation Thickness ...................................................................... 609
Insulation Density .......................................................................... 610
Cladding Thickness ....................................................................... 610
Cladding Density ............................................................................ 610
Insul/Cladding Unit Wt. .................................................................. 610
Temperatures ................................................................................ 610
Pressures ....................................................................................... 610
Range
Displays only the elements that contain nodes within a range. This is helpful when you need
to locate specific nodes or a group of related elements in a large model. This command displays
the Range dialog box. Alternatively, press U.
Using the Range command affects the display and operation of other 3D graphics
highlighting options. For example, if part of the model is not visible because of the use of the
Range command, then the Diameters command only highlights the elements that are
visible. Also, if using the Range command hides any nodes containing the predefined
displacements, the Displacements legend grid still displays, but the model may not highlight
correctly.
Find may not work properly for the part of the model that is hidden by the range. The
corresponding message displays in the status bar.
Anchors
Turns the display of anchors on or off.
Click the arrow on the icon to indicate what size you want the anchors to display on your model,
as well as whether or not the software displays anchors with or without connecting nodes
(CNodes).
Displacements
Turns the display of displacements on or off.
Hangers
Turns the display of hangers on or off.
Click the arrow on the icon to indicate what size you want the hangers to display on your model ,
as well as whether or not the software displays anchors with or without connecting nodes
(CNodes).
Nozzle Flexibility
Turns the display of nozzle flexibility on or off.
Flange Check
Turns flange checking on or off.
Nozzle Check
Turns nozzle checking on or off.
Forces
Updates the model to show each force in a different color. Use this option to see the force
variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays
the force defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
The force parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data. Click Next >>
and Previous << to move through the displacement or force vectors.
Uniform Loads
Updates the model to show each uniform load in a different color. Use this option to see the
uniform load variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color
key displays the uniform loads defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.
The uniform load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data. Click
Next >> and Previous << to move through the displacement or force vectors.
Uniform Loads has three vectors defined. The Node column represents the start node number
where the uniform loads vector was first defined. Because the data propagates throughout the
model until changed or disabled, the model is colored accordingly.
Wind/Wave
Updates the model to show each wind or wave load in a different color. Use this option to
see the variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key
displays the wind or wave loads defined in the model.
The wind and wave load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data.
Click Next >> and Previous << to move through the loads.
All the elements with wind defined display in red. All the elements with wave data defined
display in green. The legend grid shows the relevant data.
Compass
Turns the display of the orientation tee on or off.
Node Numbers
Turns the display of node numbers on or off. Alternatively, press N. You can display node
numbers for a specific element such as only restraints or only anchors.
Length
Turns the display of element lengths on or off. Alternatively, press L.
Tees
Turns the display of tees on or off.
Expansion Joints
Turns the display of expansion joints on or off.
Diameters
Updates the model to show each diameter in a different color. Use this option to see the
diameter variations throughout the system or to verify that diameter changes have been made.
Alternatively, press D. A color key displays the diameters defined in the model. You can change
the assigned colors to meet your needs.
Wall Thickness
Updates the model to show each wall thickness in a different color. Use this option to see the
wall thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Alternatively, press W. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can
change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
Corrosion
Updates the model to show each corrosion allowance in a different color. Use this option to
see the corrosion variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the corrosion allowances defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.
Piping Codes
Updates the model to show each piping code in a different color. Use this option to see the
piping code variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Material
Updates the model to show each material in a different color. Use this option to see the
material variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Alternatively, press M. A color key displays the materials defined in the model. You can change
the assigned colors to meet your needs.
Pipe Density
Updates the model to show each pipe density in a different color. Use this option to see the
pipe density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color
key displays the pipe densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.
Fluid Density
Updates the model to show each fluid density in a different color. Use this option to see the
fluid density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color
key displays the fluid densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.
Refractory Thickness
Updates the model to show each refractory thickness in a different color. Use this option to see
the refractory thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.
Refractory Density
Updates the model to show each refractory density in a different color. Use this option to see the
refractory density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the refractory densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.
Insulation Thickness
Updates the model to show each insulation thickness in a different color. Use this option to
see the insulation thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have
been made. Alternatively, press I. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model.
You can change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
Insulation Density
Updates the model to show each insulation density in a different color. Use this option to see
the insulation density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the insulation densities defined in the model. You can change the
assigned colors to meet your needs.
Cladding Thickness
Updates the model to show each cladding thickness in a different color. Use this option to see
the cladding thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.
Cladding Density
Updates the model to show each cladding density in a different color. Use this option to see the
cladding density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the cladding densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.
Temperatures
Displays the temperature parameters that you have defined.
Pressures
Displays the pressure parameters that you have defined.
Topics
Reset.............................................................................................. 611
Front View ...................................................................................... 611
Back View ...................................................................................... 611
Top View ........................................................................................ 611
Bottom View ................................................................................... 611
Left-side View ................................................................................ 611
Right-side View .............................................................................. 612
Southeast ISO View ....................................................................... 612
Southwest ISO View ...................................................................... 612
Northeast ISO View ....................................................................... 612
Northwest ISO View ....................................................................... 612
4 View ............................................................................................ 612
Reset
Resets the view to the default settings.
Front View
Displays the model from the front. Alternatively, press Z.
Back View
Displays the model from the back. Alternatively, press Shift + Z.
Top View
Displays the model from the top. Alternatively, press Y.
Bottom View
Displays the model from the bottom. Alternatively, press Shift + Y.
Left-side View
Displays the model from the left side. Alternatively, press X.
Right-side View
Displays the model from the right side. Alternatively, press Shift + R.
4 View
Displays the model in four windows.
This command automatically places the horizontal and vertical dividers, or splitter bars, and
changes the cursor to a four-way arrow. You can change the position of the splitter bars by
moving the mouse. Click to fix the position.
Drag the splitter bars to change the size of the windows. Drag the splitter bars out of the view to
remove those views. You can drag the splitter located at the top or left scroll bar to add views.
You can manipulate the image in any of these panes individually.
Change the load case within the Event Viewer dialog box to update the graphics view (if
applicable), and the Load Case Selection box on the toolbar.
Dynamic Analysis
Performs dynamic analysis on a piping model. This section introduces dynamic analysis
concepts and describes data input for each of the options available. The command is also
available from Analysis > Dynamics.
In This Section
Dynamic Loads in Piping Systems ................................................ 615
Model Modifications for Dynamic Analysis .................................... 621
Dynamic Analysis Workflow........................................................... 622
The Dynamic Analysis Window ..................................................... 623
Excitation Frequencies Tab ........................................................... 627
Harmonic Forces Tab .................................................................... 629
Harmonic Displacements Tab........................................................ 633
Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab ......................................... 636
Spectrum/Time History Load Cases Tab ....................................... 641
Static/Dynamic Combinations Tab ................................................ 657
Lumped Masses Tab ..................................................................... 662
Snubbers Tab ................................................................................ 664
Control Parameters Tab ................................................................ 665
Advanced Tab ................................................................................ 697
Directive Builder ............................................................................. 701
Enter/Edit Spectrum Data .............................................................. 702
DLF/Spectrum Generator .............................................................. 703
Relief Load Synthesis .................................................................... 713
Analysis Results ............................................................................ 725
equipment operating frequencies. As a general rule, higher natural frequencies usually cause
less trouble than low natural frequencies. CAESAR II provides calculation of modal natural
frequencies and animated plots of the associated mode shapes.
Harmonic analysis addresses dynamic loads that are cyclic in nature, such as fluid pulsation in
reciprocating pump lines or vibration due to rotating equipment. These loads are modeled as
concentrated forces or displacements at one or more points in the system. To provide the proper
phase relationship between multiple loads, a phase angle can also be used. Any number of
forcing frequencies can be analyzed for equipment start-up and operating modes. Harmonic
responses represent the maximum dynamic amplitude the piping system undergoes and have
the same form as a static analysis: node deflections and rotations, local forces and moments,
restraint loads, and stresses. For example, if the results show an X displacement of 5.8 cm at a
node, then the dynamic motion due to the cyclic excitation is from +5.8 cm. to -5.8 cm. at that
node. The stresses shown are one half of, or one amplitude of, the full cyclic stress range.
Response spectrum analysis allows an impulse-type transient event to be characterized by
response versus frequency spectra. Each mode of vibration of the piping system is related to
one response on the spectrum. These modal responses are summed together to produce the
total system response. The stresses for these analyses, summed with the sustained stresses,
are compared to the occasional stress allowables defined by the piping code. Spectral analysis
can be used in a wide variety of applications. For example, in uniform inertial loading, ground
motion associated with a seismic event is supplied as displacement, velocity, or acceleration
response spectra. The assumption is that all supports move with the defined ground motion and
the piping system catches up to the supports. It is this inertial effect which loads the system.
The shock spectra, which define the ground motion, can vary between the three global
directions and can even change for different groups of supports (such as independent or uniform
support motion). Another example is based on single point loading. CAESAR II uses this
technique to analyze a wide variety of impulse-type transient loads. Relief valve loads, water
hammer loads, slug flow loads, and rapid valve closure type loads all cause single impulse
dynamic loads at various points in the piping system. The response to these dynamic forces can
be predicted using the force spectrum method.
Time history analysis is one of the most accurate methods, because it uses numeric integration
of the dynamic equation of motion to simulate the system response throughout the load
duration. This method can solve any type of dynamic loading, but due to its exact solution,
requires more resources (such as computer memory, calculation speed and time) than other
methods. Time history analysis is not appropriate when, for example, the spectrum method
offers sufficient accuracy.
Force versus time profiles for piping are usually one of three types: Random (on page 617),
Harmonic (see Newsletter Index -
http://www.coade.com/Mechanical%20Engineering%20News%20Index.shtml), or Impulse (on
page 619). Each profile has a preferred solution method. These profiles and the load types
identified with them are described below.
Random
With this type of profile, the load unpredictably changes direction or magnitude with time. Even
with the unpredictability, some load characteristics can predominate. Loads with random
force/time profiles are best solved using a spectrum method or a static equivalent.
The major types of loads with random time profiles are wind and earthquake.
Wind
Wind velocity causes forces due to the decrease of wind momentum as the air strikes the pipe
creating an equivalent pressure on the pipe. Wind loadings, even though they can have
predominant directions and average velocities over a given time, are subject to gusting, such as
sudden changes in direction and velocity. As the time period lengthens, the number of wind
changes also increases in an unpredictable manner, eventually encompassing nearly all
directions and a wide range of velocities.
Earthquake
Seismic (earthquake) loadings are caused by the introduction of random ground motion, such as
accelerations, velocities, and displacements and corresponding inertia loads (the mass of the
system times the acceleration) into a structure through the structure-to-ground anchorage.
Random ground motion is the sum of an infinite number of individual harmonic (cyclic) ground
motions. Two earthquakes can be similar in terms of predominant direction (for example, along
a fault), predominant harmonic frequencies (if some underlying cyclic motions tend to dominate),
and maximum ground motion, but their exact behavior at any given time can be quite different
and unpredictable.
Harmonic
With this type of profile, the load changes direction and/or magnitude following a harmonic
profile, ranging from its minimum to its maximum over a fixed time period. For example, the load
can be described by a function of the form:
F(t) = A + B cos( t + )
Where:
F(t) = force magnitude as a function of time
A = mean force
B = variation of maximum and minimum force from mean
= angular frequency (radian/sec)
= phase angle (radians)
t = time (sec)
Loads with harmonic force/time profiles are best solved using a harmonic method. The major
types of loads with harmonic time profiles are equipment vibration, acoustic vibration, and
pulsation.
Equipment Vibration
If rotating equipment attached to a pipe is slightly out-of-tolerance (for example, when a drive
shaft is out-of-round), it can impose a small cyclic displacement onto the pipe at the point of
attachment. This is the location where the displacement cycle most likely corresponds to the
operating cycle of the equipment. The displacement at the pipe connection can be imperceptibly
small, but could cause significant dynamic-loading problems. Loading versus time is easily
predicted after the operating cycle and variation from tolerance is known.
Acoustic Vibration
If fluid flow characteristics are changed within a pipe (for example, when flow conditions change
from laminar to turbulent as the fluid passes through an orifice), slight lateral vibrations may be
set up within the pipe. These vibrations often fit harmonic patterns, with predominant
frequencies somewhat predictable based upon the flow conditions. For example, Strouhals
equation predicts that the developed frequency (Hz) of vibration caused by flow through an
orifice will be somewhere between 0.2 V/D and 0.3 V/D, where V is the fluid velocity (ft./sec) and
D is the diameter of the orifice (ft). Wind flow around a pipe sets up lateral displacements as well
(a phenomenon known as vortex shedding), with an exciting frequency of approximately 0.18
V/D, where V is the wind velocity and D is the outer diameter of the pipe.
Pulsation
During the operation of a reciprocating pump or a compressor, the fluid is compressed by
pistons driven by a rotating shaft. This causes a cyclic change over time in the fluid pressure at
any specified location in the system. Unequal fluid pressures at opposing elbow pairs or
closures create an unbalanced pressure load in the system. Because the pressure balance
changes with the cycle of the compressor, the unbalanced force also changes. The frequency of
the force cycle is likely to be some multiple of that of the equipment operating cycle, because
multiple pistons cause a corresponding number of force variations during each shaft rotation.
The pressure variations continue to move along through the fluid. In a steady state flow
condition, unbalanced forces may be present simultaneously at any number of elbow pairs in the
system. Load magnitudes can vary. Load cycles may or may not be in phase with each other,
depending upon the pulse velocity, the distance of each elbow pair from the compressor, and
the length of the piping legs between the elbow pairs.
For example, if the pressure at elbow a is Pa(t) and the pressure at elbow b is Pb(t), then the
unbalanced force acting along the pipe between the two elbows is:
F(t) = (Pa(t) - Pb(t)) A
Where:
A = internal area of the pipe
Assuming that the pressure peak hits the elbow "a" at time t = 0, Pa(t) is:
Pa(t) = Pavg + 0.5 (dP) cos t
Where:
Pavg = average pressure in the line
dP = alternating component of the pressure
= driving angular frequency of pulse
If the length of the pipe between the elbows is L, then the pressure pulse reaches elbow bts
after it has passed elbow a:
ts = L / c
Where:
c = speed of sound in the fluid
Therefore the expression for the pressure at elbow b is:
Pb(t) = Pavg + 0.5(dP) cos ( t - Q)
Where:
= ts
Combining these equations, the unbalanced pressure force acting on an elbow pair is:
F(t) = 0.5(dP)A * [ cos t - cos (t - L/c) ]
Under steady-state conditions, a similar situation exists at all elbow pairs throughout the piping
system.
Impulse
With this type of profile, the load magnitude ramps up from zero to some value, remains
relatively constant for a time, and then ramps down to zero again. For rapid ramping times, this
type of profile resembles a rectangle. Loads with impulse force/time profiles are best solved
using time history or force spectrum methods. Major types of loads with impulse time profiles are
relief valve, fluid hammer, and slug flow.
Relief Valve
When system pressure reaches a dangerous level, relief valves are set to open in order to vent
fluid and reduce the internal pressure. Venting through the valve causes a jet force to act on the
piping system. This force ramps up from zero to its full value over the opening time of the valve.
The relief valve remains open (and the jet force remains relatively constant) until sufficient fluid
is vented to relieve the over-pressure condition. The valve then closes, ramping down the jet
force over the closing time of the valve.
Fluid Hammer
When the flow of fluid through a system is suddenly halted through valve closure or a pump trip,
the fluid in the remainder of the system cannot be stopped instantaneously. As fluid continues to
flow into the area of stoppage (upstream of the valve or pump), the fluid compresses causing a
high pressure situation. On the other side of the restriction, the fluid moves away from the
stoppage point, creating a low pressure (vacuum) situation. Fluid at the next elbow or closure
along the pipeline is still at the original operating pressure, resulting in an unbalanced pressure
force acting on the valve seat or the elbow.
The fluid continues to flow, compressing (or decompressing) fluid further away from the point of
flow stoppage, causing the leading edge of the pressure pulse to move through the line. As the
pulse moves past the first elbow, the pressure is now equalized at each end of the pipe run,
leading to a balanced (that is, zero) pressure load on the first pipe leg. The unbalanced
pressure, by passing the elbow, has now shifted to the second leg. The unbalanced pressure
load continues to rise and fall in sequential legs as the pressure pulse travels back to the
source, or forward to the sink.
The ramp up time of the profile roughly coincides with the elapsed time from full flow to low flow,
such as the closing time of the valve or trip time of the pump. Because the leading edge of the
pressure pulse is not expected to change as the pulse travels through the system, the
ramp-down time is the same. The duration of the load from initiation through the beginning of the
down ramp is equal to the time required for the pressure pulse to travel the length of the pipe
leg.
Slug Flow
Most piping systems are designed to handle single-phase fluids (that is, fluids that are uniformly
liquid or gas). Under certain circumstances, the fluid may have multiple phases. For example,
slurry systems transport solid materials in liquids and gases may condense, creating pockets of
liquid in otherwise gaseous media. Systems carrying multi-phase fluids are susceptible to slug
flow.
In general, fluid changes direction in a piping system through the application of forces at elbows.
This force is equal to the change in momentum with respect to time, or
Fr = dp / dt = v2 A [2(1 - cos )]1/2
Where:
dp = change in momentum
dt = change in time
= fluid density
v = fluid velocity
A = internal area of pipe
= inclusion angle at elbow
With constant fluid density, this force is normally constant and is small enough that it can be
easily absorbed through tension in the pipe wall. The force is then passed on to adjacent elbows
with equal and opposite loads, zeroing the net load on the system. Therefore these types of
momentum loads are usually ignored in analysis. If the fluid velocity or density changes with
time, this momentum load will also change with time, leading to a dynamic load which may not
be canceled by the load at other elbows.
For example, consider a slug of liquid in a gas system. The steady state momentum load is
insignificant because the fluid density of a gas is effectively zero. The liquid suddenly slug hits
the elbow, increasing the momentum load by orders of magnitude. This load lasts only as long
as it takes for the slug to traverse the elbow, and then suddenly drops to near zero again with
the exact profile of the slug load depending upon the shape of the slug. The time duration of the
load depends upon the length of the slug divided by the velocity of the fluid.
Where:
F1 = v2 A(1 - cos )
Fr = v2 A [2(1 - cos )]
F2 = v2 A sin
friction, the friction stiffness is added in the X and Z directions. You define the stiffness of these
springs as a function of the friction load calculated in the static analysis. CAESAR II calculates
the friction stiffness by multiplying the resultant force on the restraint from the selected static
case results, the friction coefficient, and the Stiffness Factor for Friction defined on the
Control Parameters tab. For example, if a normal force on the restraint from the static analysis
is 1000 lb and the friction coefficient (mu) is 0.3, then the total friction load is 300 lb. If Stiffness
Factor for Friction is 500, then springs having a stiffness of SQRT(10002 +
3002)*0.3*500=156605 lb./in are inserted into the dynamic model in the two directions
perpendicular to the line of action of the friction restraint. Converting friction damping into
stiffness is not mathematically legitimate, but serves as a good engineering approximation for
dynamic friction in a wide variety of situations.
Toolbar Commands
Analysi Specifies the type of analysis. Select Modal, Harmonic, Earthquake (spectrum),
s Relief Loads (spectrum), Water Hammer/Slug Flow (spectrum), or Time History.
Type The window tabs change for each analysis.
Save Input and File > Save Input - Saves entered values to the CAESAR II file.
Check Input and File > Check Input - Opens the Dynamic Syntax Check dialog box
to check entered values for errors.
Run the Analysis and File > Run Analysis - Performs the error check and, if no
errors are found, performs the analysis the dynamic analysis for the selected Analysis
Type and the entered values. Analysis results are then available for review. For more
information, see Analysis Results (on page 725).
Add Entry and Edit > Add Entry - Adds a row to the table.
Delete Entry and Edit > Delete Entry - Deletes a row from the table.
Enter/Edit Spectrum Data and Tools > Spectrum Data Points - Specifies spectrum
data for manually-entered or ASCII-file-based spectrum definitions. For more
information, see Enter/Edit Spectrum Data (on page 702).
Relief Load Synthesis and Tools > Relief Load Synthesis - Calculates the
magnitudes of relieving thrust forces. For more information, see Relief Load Synthesis
(on page 713).
Cmt Changes the selected row in the table to a comment line. You can add comment lines
anywhere in the table.
Modal Analysis
Enter values on the following tabs when Modal is selected for Analysis Type in the Dynamic
Analysis window.
Lumped Masses Tab (on page 662)
Snubbers Tab (on page 664)
Control Parameters Tab (on page 665)
Advanced Tab (on page 697)
Modal analysis extracts natural frequencies and shapes for the modes of vibration of the pipe
system. No loads are specified.
Harmonic Analysis
Enter values on the following tabs when Harmonic is selected for Analysis Type in the
Dynamic Analysis window.
Excitation Frequencies Tab (on page 627)
Harmonic Forces Tab (on page 629)
Harmonic Displacements Tab (on page 633)
Lumped Masses Tab (on page 662)
Snubbers Tab (on page 664)
Control Parameters Tab (on page 665)
Relief Loads
This method solves relief valve loading on a piping system through force spectrum analysis. The
force-time profile is estimated using relief load synthesis and then converted to a force multiplier
(dynamic load factor, or DLF) spectrum. The force is then applied in conjunction with this
spectrum.
profile is estimated and then converted to a force multiplier spectrum. This is linked to force sets
in the load cases.
Force-time profile estimation methods are shown in the CAESAR II Applications Guide.
Steps proceed as described for relief loads.
Topics
Starting Frequency ........................................................................ 628
Ending Frequency .......................................................................... 628
Increment ....................................................................................... 628
Load Cycles ................................................................................... 629
Starting Frequency
Specifies the starting frequency for the analysis in Hertz (Hz). This is the frequency at which the
harmonic forces or displacements are applied.
Harmonic displacements and forces have the form:
A*cosine(t+ )
where A is the amplitude of the force or displacement, is the phase angle, and is the
frequency of the loading.
Real and imaginary solutions are developed for each frequency in the defined range, from which
any phased solution can be calculated. There must be a starting frequency for a frequency
range to be valid.
Ending Frequency
Specifies the ending frequency for a range of frequencies. Enter the frequency in Hertz (Hz).
The harmonic forces or displacements are applied at each frequency between the Starting
Frequency (on page 628) and Ending Frequency according to the value specified for
Increment (on page 628). This is an optional value.
Increment
Specifies the frequency increment used to step from Starting Frequency (on page 628) to
Ending Frequency (on page 628). The harmonic forces or displacements are applied at each
frequency along the specified increment. This is an optional value. If no value is entered, the
software uses a default increment of 1.0 Hz.
The frequencies for harmonic excitation are taken from each defined frequency range. Individual
frequencies for excitation are calculated using a "do loop" type of logic to determine the
frequencies in a specified frequency range:
X = STARTING FREQUENCY
5 CONTINUE
COMPUTE SOLUTION FOR FREQUENCY "X"
X = X + INCREMENT
IF( X .LT. ENDING FREQUENCY+0.001) GO TO 5
The sign of the frequency increment may be modified by the software to properly step from the
starting frequency to the ending frequency. The starting frequency, the ending frequency, or the
increment may be given as a fraction.
Example
Find harmonic solutions for the following group of turbine equipment speeds:
Warm up speed: 100 rpm
Speed increments to bring turbine online: 400, 800, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2400, 2800, 3200
rpm. Speeds are passed through very slowly while coming up to operating speed.
Operating speed: 3600 rpm
Convert rotations per minute to cycles per second (Hertz) by dividing by 60:
Warm up speed: 100/60
Speed increments: 400/60 to 3200/60 by increments of 400/60
Operating speed: 3600/60
A low frequency field vibration exists in the piping system at about 3 Hertz:
Approximate field-observed excitation frequency: 3 Hz
The response of the piping system when the dynamic load is applied at 3 Hz is almost zero. This
is true regardless of the magnitude of the dynamic load. The maxi\-mum varying pressure load
was applied, and there were still no appreciable dynamic displacements when the excitation
frequency was 3 Hz. Apply the dynamic load over a range of frequencies around 3 Hertz and
see if any dynamic response can be observed.
Group of field-observed frequencies: "Guessed"
Excitation frequency: 3 Hz
Defined by the input below are:
(2.5, 2.6, 2.7, ..., 3.3, 3.4, 3.5) Hz.
2.5 3.5 0.1
Load Cycles
Specifies the number of load cycles. If the harmonic load case is also subjected to fatigue
loading, enter the number of expected cycles. This is an optional value.
The load cycle value is the anticipated number of applications of the load on the system. This
value is used to determine the allowable stress from the fatigue curve for the material.
For static cases, the full range of calculated stresses is considered. For dynamic cases,
half the range (that is, the amplitude) of calculated stresses is considered.
Harmonic Phasing
Phasing is important if more than one force or displacement is included. The phase angle
(entered in degrees) relates the timing of one load or displacement to another. For example, if
two harmonic loads act along the same line but at different nodes, the loads can be directed
towards each other (that is, in opposite directions), producing no net dynamic imbalance on the
system. The loads can also act in the same direction (that is, to the right or to the left together),
producing a net dynamic imbalance in the system equal to the sum of the two forces. The phase
angle determines this relationship. For example, the follow load data is entered for in-phase
loading of 1500 lbf in the X direction with a 0 phase at nodes 10 and 105:
1500 X 0 10
1500 X 0 105
The follow load data is entered for out-of-phase loading of 1500 lbf in the X direction with the
phase in opposite directions at nodes 10 and 105, pulling the system apart:
1500 X 0 10
The two most common phased loadings are those due to rotating equipment and reciprocating
pumps.
Rotating equipment can have an eccentricity, a speed, and a mass. These items must be
converted into a harmonic load acting on the rotor at the theoretical mass centerline. The
magnitude of the harmonic load is calculated from:
Fn = (mass)(speed)2(eccentricity)
where speed is the angular velocity of the shaft in cycles per second. This load is applied along
both axes perpendicular to the shaft axis and at a 90 phase shift.
In the case of a reciprocating pump, the pump introduces a pressure wave into the line at some
regular interval that is related to the pump valving and speed. This pressure wave moves away
from the pump at the speed of sound in the fluid. These pressure waves cause loads at each
bend in the piping system. The load on each subsequent elbow in the system, starting from the
first elbow, is phase-shifted by an amount that is a function of the distance between the elbows,
from the first elbow to the current elbow. The amount of phase shift between elbow-elbow pairs
produces the net unbalanced dynamic load in the piping. The phase shift, in degrees from the
first elbow, is calculated from:
phase = [(frequency)(length) / (speed of sound)]360
where frequency is the frequency of wave introduction at the pump, and length is the distance
from the first elbow to the current elbow under study. The magnitude of the pressure load at
each elbow is:
Harmonic Force = 0.5 (Pressure variation) (Area)
With phasing considerations, all specified loads are considered to act together at each
applied frequency.
Topics
Force .............................................................................................. 631
Direction ......................................................................................... 631
Phase ............................................................................................. 631
Start Node ...................................................................................... 631
Stop Node ...................................................................................... 632
Increment ....................................................................................... 632
Force
Specifies the magnitude of the harmonic force to be applied.
The form of the harmonic forcing function is:
F(t) = A*cosine(t-)
where "F(t)" is the force as a function of time. "A" is the maximum amplitude of the dynamic
force. "" is the frequency of the excitation (in radians per second), and "" is the phase angle
(in radians).
Direction
Specifies the direction of the force. Valid entries are X, Y, Z, direction cosines, or direction
vectors. The format for direction cosines is (cx,cy, cz), such as (0.707,0.0,0.707). The format for
direction vectors is (vx, vy, vz), such as (1,0,1).
Phase
Specifies the phase angle of the force in degrees.
Harmonic loading can start with its maximum load at time equal to zero, or the harmonic load
can start with its maximum at any time between zero and 2*/ seconds. The phase angle f is
the method used to specify this time shift in the dynamic load waveform. The phase angle is
calculated from the time shift using the equation:
(degrees) = 180t/
where t is given in seconds and is given in radians per second.
The phase angle is usually entered as either zero or 90. Use the phase specification when
defining eccentric loads on rotating equipment.
A value for Phase is required. If the phase angle is zero, you must enter 0.
Start Node
Specifies the starting node number in the model at which the force is applied.
If entered without values for Stop Node and Increment, then the start node must exist in the
piping system. If entered with values for Stop Node and Increment, then the range of nodes
identified in the range must include at least one node in the piping system.
Stop Node
Specifies the ending node number in the model through which the force is applied. Used as a
part of a "range of nodes" force loading with Start Node and Increment. This value is optional.
Increment
Specifies the node number increment used to step from Start Node to Stop Node. Each node
that is incremented between the start and stop nodes is loaded with the value of Force. This
value is optional.
Example 1
A pressure pulse traveling in the line causes the line to shake at about 2 hertz. The magnitude
of the pressure loading is estimated to be about 460 lb. The pressure wave travels from 95 to
100. The harmonic force to model this load is shown as follows. The magnitude is divided by 2
because the total variation in the dynamic load is a function of the cosine, which varies from -1
to 1. To find the true response magnitudes from a positive-only harmonic load pulse, a static
solution with 460/2 lb. acting in the +X direction is superimposed on the static 460/2 lb. solution
to provide the constant shifting of the load axis. There is a negative load at node 95 due to the
negative sign on the cosine. The pressure pulse is always positive and a negative load never
exists. The superposition of the 460/2 static solution assures that the dynamic load (and
probably the resulting displacements) is always positive.
460 LB pressure load at 2 Hertz
460/2 X 0 95
Example 2
A pump is shaking in the X-Y plane. The pump axis is along the global Z axis. The magnitude of
the dynamic load is calculated to be 750 lb. from the manufacturer-provided masses and
eccentricities. Apply this rotating equipment load on the inline pump at node 350. The X and Y
loads are 90 degrees out of phase with one another. When the X load is at its maximum the Y
load is zero, and when the Y load is at its maximum the X load is zero.
Estimated eccentric load on inline pump DOH-V33203001
750 X 0 350
750 Y 90 350
Harmonic Phasing
Phasing is important if more than one force or displacement is included. The phase angle
(entered in degrees) relates the timing of one load or displacement to another. For example, if
two harmonic loads act along the same line but at different nodes, the loads can be directed
towards each other (that is, in opposite directions), producing no net dynamic imbalance on the
system. The loads can also act in the same direction (that is, to the right or to the left together),
producing a net dynamic imbalance in the system equal to the sum of the two forces. The phase
angle determines this relationship. For example, the follow load data is entered for in-phase
loading of 1500 lbf in the X direction with a 0 phase at nodes 10 and 105:
1500 X 0 10
1500 X 0 105
The follow load data is entered for out-of-phase loading of 1500 lbf in the X direction with the
phase in opposite directions at nodes 10 and 105, pulling the system apart:
1500 X 0 10
The two most common phased loadings are those due to rotating equipment and reciprocating
pumps.
Rotating equipment can have an eccentricity, a speed, and a mass. These items must be
converted into a harmonic load acting on the rotor at the theoretical mass centerline. The
magnitude of the harmonic load is calculated from:
Fn = (mass)(speed)2(eccentricity)
where speed is the angular velocity of the shaft in cycles per second. This load is applied along
both axes perpendicular to the shaft axis and at a 90 phase shift.
In the case of a reciprocating pump, the pump introduces a pressure wave into the line at some
regular interval that is related to the pump valving and speed. This pressure wave moves away
from the pump at the speed of sound in the fluid. These pressure waves cause loads at each
bend in the piping system. The load on each subsequent elbow in the system, starting from the
first elbow, is phase-shifted by an amount that is a function of the distance between the elbows,
from the first elbow to the current elbow. The amount of phase shift between elbow-elbow pairs
produces the net unbalanced dynamic load in the piping. The phase shift, in degrees from the
first elbow, is calculated from:
phase = [(frequency)(length) / (speed of sound)]360
where frequency is the frequency of wave introduction at the pump, and length is the distance
from the first elbow to the current elbow under study. The magnitude of the pressure load at
each elbow is:
Harmonic Force = 0.5 (Pressure variation) (Area)
With phasing considerations, all specified loads are considered to act together at each
applied frequency.
Topics
Displacement ................................................................................. 634
Direction ......................................................................................... 634
Phase ............................................................................................. 634
Start Node ...................................................................................... 635
Stop Node ...................................................................................... 635
Increment ....................................................................................... 635
Displacement
Specifies the magnitude of the displacement to be applied.
The form of the harmonic displacement function is:
D(t)=(A)*cosine(t-)
where "D(t)" is the displacement as a function of time, "A" is the maximum amplitude of the
dynamic displacement. "" is the frequency of the excitation (in radians per second), and "" is
the phase angle (in radians).
Direction
Specifies the direction of the displacement. Valid entries are X, Y, Z, direction cosines, or
direction vectors. The format for direction cosines is (cx,cy, cz), such as (0.707,0.0,0.707). The
format for direction vectors is (vx, vy, vz), such as (1,0,1).
Phase
Specifies the phase angle of the displacement in degrees.
Harmonic displacement can start with its maximum displacement at time equal to zero, or the
harmonic displacements can start with its maximum displacements at any time between zero
and t + 2 / seconds. The phase angle is the method used to specify this time shift in the
dynamic load waveform. The phase angle can be calculated from the time shift using the
equation:
(degrees) = 180t /
where t is given in seconds and is given in radians per second.
A value for Phase is required. If the phase angle is zero, you must enter 0.0.
Start Node
Specifies the number of the starting node in the model at which the displacement is applied.
If the node is a supported node, then the dynamic displacement is assumed to act at the support
point. If the node is not sup\-ported, then the dynamic displacement is assumed to describe the
exact motion of the pipe at that point. This differentiation only becomes important when the node
is supported by a flexible restraint. For example, node 55 is supported in the Y direction by a
restraint having a stiffness of 5,000 lb./in. A harmonic displacement is also specified at node 55
in the Y direction. In this case, the harmonic displacement does not describe the dis\-placement
that is attached to 55. Instead, the displacement creates a load in the Y direction at 55 equal to
the harmonic displacement times 5,000 lb./in.
If Start Node has a value but Stop Node and Increment do not, then the start node must exist
in the piping system. If all three have values, then the range of nodes identified in the range
must include at least one node in the piping system.
Stop Node
Specifies the number of the ending node in the model through which the displacement is
applied. Used as a part of a "range of nodes" displacement loading with Start Node and
Increment. This value is optional.
Increment
Specifies the node number increment used to step from Start Node to Stop Node. Each node
incremented between the start and stop nodes is displaced with the value of Displacement.
This value is optional.
Example 1
A large ethylene compressor shakes the node exiting the compressor flange a field-measured 8
mils in the Y direction, and 3 mils in the Z direction. The dynamic displacements are assumed to
be simultaneous with no phase shift. This is because the load causing the displacements is
believed to be from the compressor plunger moving in the X, or axial, direction. The
dis\-placements are skewed because the piping configuration entering the compressor is itself
skewed.
Harmonic Displacements at Compressor Flange
Example 2
Applying estimated eccentric forces to the pump described in the harmonic force example (see
"Increment" on page 632) did not produce the displacements witnessed in the field. Field
personnel have measured the dynamic displacements in the vertical (Y) and transverse (Z)
directions at the pump piping connections. The centerline of the pump, at the intersection of the
horizontal suction and vertical discharge is node 15. The magnitude of the Z displacement is
Spectrum Definitions
One analysis may have multiple spectrum types and definitions. Predefined spectra are included
in the spectrum definition list. Any combination of these predefined spectra can be used as is,
deleted, or used with any other defined spectra.
You can include the basic spectrum data definitions in the comments for each ASCII spectrum
file. Select Cmt to create a comment line. For more information, see Enter/Edit Spectrum Data
(on page 702) and Examples (on page 639).
When using a file created by DLF/Spectrum Generator , you must specify the type of data
which contained in the file, because the file only contains a table of data points. This data is
always frequency versus force-multiplier with linear interpolation. A typical definition is in this
format:
The data in this file may also be read in directly using Enter/Edit Spectrum Data . In
this case, omit the "#" from the spectrum declaration. For more information, see Enter/Edit
Spectrum Data (on page 702).
Time history profiles are defined in a way similar to the definition of response spectra. The
profile must be given a name, time versus force data definitions, and interpolation methods.
Response spectra data must also be defined directly or from a file. The profile data may be
entered with actual forces or normalized to 1.0, depending on how the force sets are defined.
One force-time profile should be defined for each independent point load on the piping system.
The load case consists of one or more force profiles. Multiple force profiles can create a
staggered loading on the system.
Topics
Name ............................................................................................. 637
Range Type ................................................................................... 638
Ordinate Type ................................................................................ 639
Range Interpol ............................................................................... 639
Ordinate Interpol ............................................................................ 639
Examples ....................................................................................... 639
Name
Specifies the name of the spectrum. Names should reflect the spectrum and its intended use.
This name is used when defining the load cases. The name can be any 24-character identifier
and is associated with a particular spectrum or load profile.
Do not include spaces in the name.
The following predefined spectra are delivered with the software. No additional definitions are
required when using these spectra.
El Centro
The El Centro California N-S component, taken from Biggs, "Introduction to Structural
Dynamics," applies to systems with 5-10 percent critical damping.
The spectrum name (or load profile) can be preceded by a (#) sign. The (#) sign instructs
CAESAR II to read the spectrum table from a file having the same name as the spectrum
with no extension. Several jobs in the current folder can then access this shock data.
If data is to be entered manually, click Enter/Edit Spectrum Data , then create new rows
and enter the appropriate Range Type and Ordinate Type values. For more information,
see Enter/Edit Spectrum Data (on page 702).
The complete definition of a shock includes its name, range type, ordinate type, range
interpolation method, ordinate interpolation method, and the shock data point table.
Everything but the shock data point table can be entered on the
Range Type
Specifies the type of values on the abscissa (horizontal) axis of the spectrum/DLF curve. Select
FREQUENCY or PERIOD.
If the value is PERIOD, then the spectrum table data is in seconds. If the value is FREQUENCY,
then the data is in Hertz (cycles per second).
For Time History analysis only, select TIME. The spectrum table data is in milliseconds (ms).
The values can be abbreviated by any part of the word, but only the first letter is required.
Ordinate Type
Specifies the type of values on the ordinate (vertical) axis of the spectrum/DLF curve. Select
FREQUENCY , VELOCITY, ACCELERATION, G-ACCELERATION, or FORCE-MULTIPLIER.
If the value is FREQUENCY, then the spectrum table data is in Hertz (cycles per second).If the
value is VELOCITY, then the data is in length per second. If the value is ACCELERATION, then
the data is in length per second squared. If the value is G-ACCELERATION, then the data are
in g's.
For Time History analysis only, select FORCE-MULTIPLIER.
The values can be abbreviated by any part of the word, but only the first letter is required.
Range Interpol
Specifies how the values on the abscissa (horizontal) axis are interpolated. Select LINEAR or
LOGARITHMIC.
See Examples (on page 639) for additional discussion.
The values can be abbreviated as LIN and LOG.
Ordinate Interpol
Specifies how the values on the ordinate (vertical) axis are interpolated. Select LINEAR or
LOGARITHMIC.
See Examples (on page 639) for additional discussion.
The values can be abbreviated as LIN and LOG.
Examples
Example 1
The analysis requires that the El Centro shock be applied in the X and Z directions using a
factor of 1.0, and in the Y direction using a factor of 0.667.
No spectrum definition is required for this shock. El Centro is a predefined spectrum. All of its
shock data resides in the CAESAR II shock database.
Example 2
The analysis requires the use of the Nuclear Regulatory Guide 1.60 shock loads. At a maximum
acceleration value of 0.25 gs, analysis is to be performed using 1.0 times the horizontal and
vertical components of the shock as specified in Reg. Guide 1.60.
There is no spectrum definition required for either of these two shock loads. The Reg. Guide
1.60 shock spectra are predefined. You must only specify the maximum acceleration (ZPA) of
0.25 gs on the Control Parameters Tab (on page 665), and must use the Reg. Guide spectra
corresponding to the anticipated system damping. Lower damping values mean more
conservative results.
Example 3
The analysis requires a shock spectrum that is given by the client and developed for the site. A
plot of the spectrum appears as follows. The horizontal axis is period and the vertical axis is
acceleration. Because of the variation of the numbers along each axis, a logarithmic
interpolation for each axis is used. Because the shock name is not preceded by a (#) sign, the
spectrum is not predefined, and you must manually enter the points for this spectrum. The
spectrum definition input for pointing to this file is:
Example 4
All analysis on a particular project requires the use of the spectrum table shown as follows. The
data points of the spectrum are entered into an ASCII file named BENCH1 in the current folder.
The file can be created using any standard editor. The spectrum definition input for pointing to
this file is:
Load cases consist of simultaneously applied spectra. Each spectrum in the case is assigned a
direction and factor.
A load case definition consists of one or more lines, as shown below. The direction specified on
this line does not need to be the direction of the load (which is specified in the force set). This
direction is used for labeling and designation of independent versus dependent loadings.
TESTFILE 1.0 Y 1
Complexity increases as the number of components in the load case goes beyond one,
and as the time history phenomena being modeled deviates from true impulse type loading. For
more information, see Examples (on page 652).
building spectra. The last values specified are the seismic support movements (that is the
Anchor Movement).
Stress Types can be assigned to the spectrum load cases. If FAT is selected, you must
also enter a value for Fatigue Cycles, the number of anticipated load cycles.
Topics
Spectrum/Time History Profile ....................................................... 643
Factor ............................................................................................. 643
Dir. ................................................................................................. 643
Start Node ...................................................................................... 644
Stop Node ...................................................................................... 646
Increment ....................................................................................... 646
Anchor Movement .......................................................................... 646
Force Set # .................................................................................... 646
Force Sets Tab .............................................................................. 647
Examples ....................................................................................... 652
Factor
Specifies a value for the spectrum shock table multiplier. This value is usually 1.0.
Dir.
Specifies the applied direction of the spectrum/DLF shock load. Select X, Y, or Z. You can also
enter direction cosines, such as (.707, 0, .707), or direction vectors, such as (1,0,1).
This value is used as follows, depending on the analysis type:
For earthquake analysis:
Direction specifies the loading direction.
Direction indicates the dependence or independence of the loads. When modal
combinations precede spatial combinations, loads with the same direction are summed at
the modal level before any spatial combination.
Direction acts as an output label for the maximum contributor, such as 3X(1), where the first
profile in direction X is reported as X(1). 3X(1) indicates that the largest contributor to the
total response is from the third mode of vibration and due to the first spectrum/shock defined
as X.
For force spectrum analysis, the force vector (direction) is already established:
Direction indicates the dependence or independence of the loads as discussed above.
Direction acts as an output label for the maximum contributor, as discussed above for
earthquake analysis.
For time history analysis, time history combinations are algebraic (in-phase):
Direction acts only as an output label for the maximum contributor, such as 3X(1).
To define an earthquake type of loading, CAESAR II must know what how the earthquake shock
acts from the shock spectrum table. CAESAR II must also know the direction of the shock. A
shock load case is typically comprised of three shock components in the X, Y, and Z directions.
The combination of each of these components shock loads defines the earthquakes dynamic
loading of the piping system.
Skewed directions can be entered by giving a direction cosine or direction vector. Skewed shock
contributions are entered when the piping or structural system appears particularly sensitive to a
shock along a skewed line. This most often occurs when a majority of the piping system does
not lay along the X and Z axes.
Any number of shock components can act in the same direction. For example, there can be two
X direction components. This usually occurs with independent support shock contributions
where one X direction component applies to one support group and another X direction
component applies to a different support group. There can also be two shock components in the
same direction without having independent support contributions, by defining two shock
contributions in the same direction without start, stop, or increment node entries.
In the simplest form of force spectrum loading, there is only a single shock component in the
load case. For that situation, there is only a single line of input on the Load Cases tab. When
there are multiple lines of input on the load case screen, such as in analyzing a traveling
pressure wave that impacts different elbow-elbow pairs, there can be many components to the
shock load case. The combination of responses from each of these shock loading components
can be established in one of two ways. If the value of Direction is the same for each load
component, then the directional combination method is used to combine the responses from
each load component. If the value of Direction is different for each load component, then the
spatial combination method is used to combine the responses from each load component.
Directional combinations are always made before modal combinations, while spatial
combinations can be made before or after modal combinations. The default is to perform the
modal combinations before spatial combinations. Either spatial or directional combinations can
be made using the ABS or SRSS method.
Start Node
Specifies the number of the starting node of a group of restraints at which the spectrum load is
applied for independent support motion analysis (ISM). The spectrum is applied to all restraint
nodes in the group between Start Node and Stop Node in steps of Increment. The range of
nodes must include at least one node in the piping system.
The component of an independent support shock applies only to a group of support points. For
example, different shock spectra are generated for rack level piping and for ground level piping.
The rack supports are subject to one shock excitation, influenced by the racks response to the
earthquake. The ground level supports are subject to a different shock excitation, not influenced
by the rack. One node range is used to define the rack support shock contributions and another
is used to define the ground support shock contributions.
This option is only available when Earthquake (spectrum) is selected for Analysis Type.
Stop Node
Specifies the number of the ending node of a group of restraints at which the spectrum load is
applied for independent support motion analysis (ISM). The spectrum is applied to all restraint
nodes in the group between Start Node and Stop Node in steps of Increment. The range of
nodes must include at least one node in the piping system. If no value is entered, the load is
applied at the start node.
This option is only available when Earthquake (spectrum) is selected for Analysis Type.
Increment
Specifies the node number increment used to step from Start Node to Stop Node for in a group
of restraints that is loaded by this spectrum for Independent Support Motion analysis (ISM). The
spectrum is applied to all restraint nodes in the group between Start Node and Stop Node in
steps of Increment. The range of nodes must include at least one node in the piping system. If
no value is entered, the load is applied at the start node.
This option is only available when Earthquake (spectrum) is selected for Analysis Type.
Anchor Movement
Specifies the absolute displacement of the restraints included in this spectrum shock case for
independent support motion analysis (ISM). This displacement is applied to all restrained nodes
in the node group, and is used to calculate the pseudostatic load components representing the
relative displacement of the individual restraint sets. If no value is entered, and if the defined
shock for this row does not encompass the entire system, this value is calculated by the
software. The value is taken from the lowest frequency entry of the response spectrum: the
specified displacement, velocity/frequency (for velocity spectra), or acceleration/frequency 2 (for
acceleration spectra). Frequency is angular frequency.
This option is only available when Earthquake (spectrum) is selected for Analysis Type.
Force Set #
Specifies the force set number corresponding to a set entered in the Force Sets tab if the
spectrum/load profile name describes a force-type spectrum (instead of displacement, velocity,
or acceleration). For more information, see Force Sets Tab (on page 647). If no value is entered,
Factor and Dir. must also have no values.
This option is not available when Earthquake (spectrum) is selected for Analysis Type.
Force spectrum analyses, such as a relief valve loading, differ from earthquake analyses
because there is no implicit definition of the load distribution. For example, the loading for
earthquakes is uniform over the entire structure and proportional to the pipe mass. For relief
valves and other point loadings, the load is not uniformly distributed and is not proportional to
the mass. A water hammer load is proportional to the speed of sound and the initial velocity of
the fluid. Its point of application is at subsequent elbow-elbow pairs. Force spectrum analyses
require more information than the more common earthquake simulations: the load magnitude,
direction, and location. Forces that occur together are grouped into like-numbered force sets
and are manipulated in the analysis together. For example, the following shows two different
loading levels of the same type of load:
-3400 Y 35 1
-1250 Y 35 2
For a skewed load, force components belong to the same force set, because the components
always occur together:
-2134 Y 104 1
-2134 X 104 1
standard shock table file. This step is not needed for a time history analysis. The data is
automatically added to the dynamic input and can be saved to a separate file.
3. On the Spectrum Definitions tab or Time History Definitions tab, define the DLF versus
frequency file just created as a force spectrum data file with linear interpolation along the
frequency axis and linear interpolation along the ordinate axis. Begin the shock name with a
#. The software then reads the shock table from the data file.
4. Determine the maximum force magnitude that acts on each node subject to the pulse load.
5. On the Force Sets tab, specify the maximum amplitude of the dynamic load, the direction,
and the nodes.
If the force-time profiles are normalized to 1.0, the maximum magnitudes of the loads
are entered here. If the profiles are entered using their actual values, the force set values
are entered as 1.0.
6. On the Spectrum Load Cases tab or Time History Load Cases tab, enter the force
spectrum name (defined in the Spectrum Definitions tab), the table multiplication factor
(usually 1.0), a direction, and the Force Set # (defined on the Force Sets tab). This step
defines the link between the force spectrum and the force loading pattern.
7. Set up any other parameters needed to run the spectrum analysis. Perform error checking,
and after there are no fatal errors, run the analysis.
You can include any number of user comment lines by clicking Cmt. There can be any
number of line entries in the Force spectrum data.
If there are multiple force spectrum components in a single dynamic load case, carefully
select the combination method. The same rules that cover earthquake shocks and
components apply to force spectrum shocks and components
Topics
Force...............................................................................................648
Direction..........................................................................................649
Node ...............................................................................................649
Force Set # .....................................................................................649
Examples ........................................................................................649
Force
Specifies the magnitude of the impulse force (dynamic load) at the node. The sign of this value
is according to the CAESAR II global coordinate system
The total applied force is the product of this value, the selected force value from the
spectrum or load profile, and the factor entered for the load case.
Direction
Specifies the direction of the impulse force (dynamic load). Valid entries are X, Y, Z, direction
cosines, or direction vectors. The format for direction cosines is (cx,cy, cz), such as
(0.707,0.0,0.707). The format for direction vectors is (vx, vy, vz), such as (1,0,1).
Node
Specifies the node at which the impulse force (dynamic load) is applied. The node must exist in
the model.
Force Set #
Specifies the numeric value associated with this row (force set). Force sets are used to
construct the dynamic load cases. Values are arbitrary, but usually start at 1 and increment by
one.
Each impulse can be assigned to a different force set, which provides the most capability when
constructing load cases. Multiple rows with the same value form a single force set.
Examples
Example 1
Nodes 5, 10, and 15 define a cantilever pipe leg that is part of an offshore production platform.
The dynamic load as a function of time is equal to a half sine wave. The waveform is the same
for all three nodes, but the maximum dynamic load on node 5 is 5030 lb., on node 10 is 10,370
lb., and on node 15 is 30,537 lb. Three force sets are built for this problem. One has the
dynamic loads acting in the X direction. The second has the dynamic loads acting in the Z
direction. The third has the dynamic loads acting simultaneously in the X an Z directions. The
force spectrum input data is:
X DIRECTION HALF SINE WAVE/CURRENT LOADING
5030 X 5 1
10370 X 10 1
30537 X 15 1
5030 Z 5 2
10370 Z 10 2
30537 Z 15 2
5030 X 5 3
5030 Z 5 3
10370 X 10 3
10370 Z 10 3
30537 X 15 3
30537 Z 15 3
Example 2
A relief valve at node 565 is being investigated for different reactor decompression conditions.
The maximum load for the first condition is 320 kips in the X direction. The maximum load for
the second decompression condition is 150 kips in the X direction. The third decompression
condition maximum load is 50 kips. Three different maximum force sets are defined:
REACTOR DECOMP CONDITION 1
320000 X 565 1
150000 X 565 2
50000 X 565 3
Example 3
A startup shock wave passes through a single elbow system. Nodes in the piping model are 5,
10, and 15 as shown:
As the wave starts off between 5 and 10 there is an initial dynamic axial load on the anchor at 5.
When the shock wave hits the elbow at 10, the axial load in the 5-10 elements balance the initial
imbalance at node 5, and there become an axial imbalance in the 10-15 element. This shock
load is modeled as two completely separate impacts on the piping system. The first is the
dynamic anchor load at 5. If 5 is a flexible anchor then this load may cause dynamic
displacements of the piping system and 5 will just be subject to the dynamic time history pulse
due to the shock. Assume the anchor at 5 is a flexible vessel nozzle. The second shock load is
the unbalanced dynamic pressure load in the 10-15 element that exists until the shock reaches
the node 15. Friction losses in the line reduce the shock magnitude as it travels down the line. In
the time the wave leaves the anchor at 5 until it encounters the bend at 10 there is a 50% drop
in the pulse strength as shown:
This pressure drop was calculated using a transient fluid simulator. Between nodes 10 and 15
the pulse strength drops even further as shown:
-5600 X 5 1
2800 Z 10 2
Examples
Example 1
Define a shock load case that excites the entire piping system with a vibration of one times the
El Centro earthquake in the X direction, one times the El Centro earthquake in the Z, and 0.667
times the El Centro earthquake in the Y direction.
ELCENTRO 1 X
ELCENTRO 1 Z
ELCENTRO 0.667 Y
Example 2
Define a shock load case that excites the piping system with the horizontal and vertical
components of the Reg. Guide 1.60 shock spectra for a 2 percent critically damped system. The
maximum ground acceleration is 0.22 gs.
The maximum ground acceleration is set on the Control Parameters tab and has no effect on
the shock load case definitions.
1.60H2 1 X
1.60V2 1 Y
1.60H2 1 Z
Example 3
Define a shock load case that is comprised of custom shocks BENCH1 and BENCH2. BENCH1
acts in the X and Z directions, and BENCH2 acts in the Y direction. The scale factor for all
shocks is 1.0.
BENCH1 1 X
BENCH2 1 Y
BENCH1 1 Z
One of the shock load cases excites the piping system along a line that is 45 degrees off of the
global axes in the horizontal plane. It is suspected that this direction of excitation yields the
worst possible results. Apply the custom shock BENCH1 in the horizontal direction and
BENCH2 in the vertical direction.
BENCH1 1 (1,0,1)
BENCH1 1 (-1,0,1
)
BENCH2 1 Y
Example 4
Define a shock load case that excites the piping system with a vibration of two times the El
Centro earthquake in the X, Y, and Z directions. There should be two shock load cases. The first
should use an independent summation and the second a simultaneous summation.
The load cases are defined as shown. Remember that independent summation means MODAL
then SPATIAL, and simultaneous means SPATIAL then MODAL.
There are several ways to accomplish the same objective using parameters on other
tabs, such as the Control Parameters tab. Only the method using the explicit definition of the
load case combination method is shown in this example.
LOAD CASE 1 SHOCK CONTRIBUTIONS
MODAL(GROUP), SPATIAL(SRSS), MODAL COMBINATIONS FIRST
ELCENTRO 2 X
ELCENTRO 2 Y
ELCENTRO 2 Z
ELCENTRO 2 X
ELCENTRO 2 Y
ELCENTRO 2 Z
Example 5
Define a shock case that has the custom spectrum 1DIR acting only in the Z direction. Set the
stress type for the case to be operating and use modal summations before spatial summations.
Modal or spatial summations are not shown below because modal summation is the CAESAR II
default and is controlled by Spatial or Modal Combination First (on page 688) on the Control
Parameters tab.
Stress Types: OPE
1DIR 1 Z
Example 6
The support nodes 5, 25, 35, 45, and 56 are pipe shoes sitting on concrete foundations. The
support nodes 140, 145, 157, 160, and 180 are second level rack sup\-ports, that is, pipe shoes
sitting on structural steel beams in the second level of the rack. The ground level shock
spectrum name is GROUND04, and the second level rack spectrum name is RACKLEVEL2-04.
Set up the shock load case to define these independent support excitations and omit any
relative support movement.
GROUND LEVEL EXCITATION
GROUND04 1 X 5 56 1 0
GROUND04 1 Y 5 56 1 0
GROUND04 1 Z 5 56 1 0
Next, set up a shock load case, and define all combinations options explicitly. Use the same
shock components as defined above, except assume that the pseudostatic component is added
using the SRSS combination method. Also change the modal summation method to SRSS. This
is the recommended method. When the modal summation method is SRSS it does not matter
whether modal or spatial combinations are performed first. The order is only a factor when
closely spaced modes are considered in the grouping, 10 percent, and DSRSS methods.
MODAL(SRSS),PSEUDOSTATIC(SRSS),SPATIAL(SRSS)
GROUND LEVEL EXCITATION
GROUND04 1 X 5 56 1
GROUND04 1 Y 5 56 1
GROUND04 1 Z 5 56 1
Example 7
The last elbow in the relief valve piping is at node 295. The spectrum name: BLAST contains the
DLF response spectrum for relief valve firing. SPECTRUM/TIME HISTORY FORCE SET #1
contains the load information and its point of application. Show the load case input that provides
the most conservative combination of modal results. Because there is only a single loading, no
consideration is given to spatial or directional combinations.
Shock Name, Factor, Direction, and Force Set #
ABSOLUTE MODAL SUMMATION, ONLY A SINGLE LOADING
COMPONENT AND SO NO CONSIDERATION GIVEN TO SPATIAL OR
DIRECTIONAL COMBINATIONS.
BLAST, 1, X, 1
MODAL (ABS)
Click Directives to open the Directive Builder dialog box and select these values. For
more information, see Directive Builder (on page 701).
Use the same example above and combine the modes using the grouping method. This will
produce the most realistic solution.
BLAST, 1, X, 1
MODAL (GROUP)
Additional Options
The following options are also available:
Editing Load Case - Select a load case to edit.
Stress Types - Select the stress type for the load case:
OPE - Stress from operating loads.
OCC - Stress from occasional short-term loads.
SUS - Stress from primary sustained loads.
EXP - Stress from secondary thermal expansion loads.
FAT - Stress from fatigue loads.
This option is not available for time history analysis.
Fatigue Cycles - Specifies the number of fatigue cycles. This option is only available when FAT
is selected for Stress Types and is s not available for time history analysis.
Directives - Opens the Directive Builder (on page 701) dialog box, where you can control the
combination method parameters, using methods such as ABS and SRSS (square root of the
sum of the squares).
Topics
Load Case...................................................................................... 658
Factor ............................................................................................. 658
Examples ....................................................................................... 658
Load Case
Specifies the static or dynamic load case to be included in the combination case. Select a load
case from the list. Static load cases start with S, and dynamic load cases are start with D. Each
is then followed by a load case number of a static or shock analysis defined on the Load Cases
tab. For more information, see Spectrum/Time History Load Cases Tab (on page 641).
The following examples are valid values: S1, STATIC1, S3, STATIC3, D1, DYNAMICS1, S#1,
and D#1. Use any length up to 24 characters. For static load case definitions, the static case
must exist and have already been run (also, the S cant refer to a spring hanger design case).
For dynamic load case definitions, the dynamic load case number refers to the shock load case.
Factor
Specifies a multiplication factor to be applied to the results of the load case. The resulting
product is then used in the combination case. The default is 1.0.
Examples
Example 1
The static load cases are:
1 = W+P1+D1+T1+H (OPE)
2 = W+P1+H (SUS)
3 = L1 - L2 (EXP)
The dynamic load cases are:
1 = Operating Basis Earthquake
2 = 1/2 the Operating Basis Earthquake
Combine the operating basis earthquake stresses with the sustained static stresses:
STATIC2 1.0
DYNAMIC1 1.0
or
S2 1
D1 1
Example 2
The static load cases are:
1 = W + P1 (For hanger design)
2 = W + P1 + D1 + T1 (For hanger design)
3 = W + P1 + D1 + T1 + H (OPE)
4 = W + P1 + H (SUS)
5 = L3 - L4 (EXP)
There is one dynamic load case. Create an occasional case that is the sum of the sustained and
the dynamic stresses using the SRSS combination method and the ABS combination method.
Additionally, combine the expansion static case and the dynamic case using the SRSS
combination method. This is a total of three combination load cases. The first two static hanger
design load cases cannot be used in a combination case.
* COMBINATION CASE 1:
* SRSS COMBINATION OF SUSTAINED AND DYNAMIC CASES
STRESSTYPE(OCC), COMBINATION(SRSS)
STATIC4 1
DYNAMIC1 1
* COMBINATION CASE 2:
* ABS COMBINATION OF SUSTAINED AND DYNAMIC CASES
STRESSTYPE(OCC), COMBINATION(ABS)
STATIC4 1
DYNAMIC1 1
* COMBINATION CASE 3:
* SRSSCOMBINATION OF EXPANSION AND DYNAMIC CASES
STRESSTYPE(OCC), COMBINATION(SRSS)
STATIC5 1
DYNAMIC1 1
Stress type and combination are defined on the Directive Builder dialog box. For more
information, see Directive Builder (on page 701).
Example 3
The static load cases are:
1 = W+T1+P+D1+H (OPE)
2 = W+P+H (SUS)
3 = U1 (OCC) Static seismic simulation
4 = L1-L2 (EXP)
5 = L2+L3 (OCC) (SCALAR)
Create an SRSS combination of the static seismic case and both the sustained and operating
static cases:
* COMBINATION CASE 1:
COMBINATION (SRSS), STRESSTYPE (OCC)
STATIC2 1
STATIC3 1
* COMBINATION CASES 2:
COMBINATION (SRSS), STRESSTYPE (OCC)
STATIC1 1
STATIC3 1
Example 4
The static load cases are:
1 = W+P1(Hanger design restrained weight case)
2 = W+T1+P1+D1 (Hanger design load case #1)
3 = W+T2+P1+D1 (Hanger design load case #2)
4 = WNC+P1(Hanger design actual cold loads)
5 = W+T1+H+P1+D1 (OPE)
6 = W+P1+H(SUS)
7 = L5-L6 (EXP)
Combine the static sustained stresses with 1/2 the shock case 1 results, 1/2 the shock case 2
results, and 1.333 times the shock case 3 results. The combination method is SRSS. For a
second combination case, combine the static sustained stresses with 1/2 the shock case 4
results, 1/2 the shock case 5 results, and 1.333 times the shock case 6 results.
* COMBINATION CASE 1:
COMBINATION (SRSS)
STATIC6 1
DYNAMIC1 1/2
DYNAMIC2 1/2
DYNAMIC3 1.333
or
COMBINATION (SRSS)
S6 1
D1 0.5
D2 0.5
D3 1.333
* COMBINATION CASE 2:
COMBINATION (SRSS)
STATIC6 1
DYNAMIC4 0.5
DYNAMIC5 0.5
DYNAMIC6 1.333
Topics
Mass .............................................................................................. 662
Direction ......................................................................................... 662
Start Node ...................................................................................... 663
Stop Node ...................................................................................... 663
Increments ..................................................................................... 663
Mass
Specifies the magnitude of the concentrated mass (in current units) to be applied to the
specified node. A positive value is added to the calculated mass assigned to the node, a
negative value is subtracted from the calculated mass, and a zero value eliminates the mass.
Direction
Specifies the direction in which the mass acts. The values for translated mass are X, Y, Z, and
ALL (where ALL represents X, Y, and Z). The values for rotated mass are RX, RY, RZ, and
RALL (where RALL represents RX, RY, and RZ).
Rotational masses only apply when the consistent mass model is used. For more
information, see Mass Model (LUMPED/CONSISTENT) (on page 696) on the Control
Parameters tab.
Start Node
Specifies the number of the starting node at which this mass is applied.
If entered without values for Stop Node and Increment, then the start node must exist in the
piping system. If entered with values for Stop Node and Increment, then the range of nodes
identified in the range must include at least one node in the piping system.
Stop Node
Specifies the number of the ending node in the model to which the mass is applied. Used as
part of a "range of nodes" lumped mass command with Start Node and Increment. This value
is optional.
Increments
Specifies the node number increment used to step from Start Node to Stop Node. Used as part
of a "range of nodes" lumped mass command. This value is optional and defaults to 1 if no value
is entered.
There can be any number of line entries on the Lumped Masses tab.
The zero mass capability is particularly useful when you are not interested in the modes for part
of the system. That part of the system is usually modeled only for its stiffness effect.
Example 1
450 is added to the assigned mass at node 40 in the X, Y, and Z directions.
450 ALL 40
Example 2
All nodes from 12 to 25 have all assigned mass removed in the X, Y, and Z directions. Some
nodes may not exist in this range but this is acceptable as long as at least one node in the range
exists in the system.
0.0 ALL 12 25 1
Example 3
375 is added in the X, Y, and Z directions for nodes 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, and 50, if they exist. All
assigned mass is removed for all nodes from 1 and 600 in the X and Y directions.
375 A 25 50 5
0.0 X 1 600 1
0.0 Y 1 600 1
Snubbers Tab
This tab is available for any selection of Analysis Type in the Dynamic Analysis window.
Add snubbers to the model. Snubbers are supports that only resist dynamic loading while
allowing static displacement, such as displacement from thermal growth. Snubbers must have
their stiffness defined. Snubbers are not rigid by default because they are typically not as stiff as
other types of restraints.
Snubbers may also be added in Input > Piping as part of the static model. In either the
static or dynamic analysis, a snubber is idealized as a stiffness rather than damping at a point.
Topics
Stiffness ......................................................................................... 664
Direction ......................................................................................... 664
Node .............................................................................................. 664
CNode ............................................................................................ 664
Stiffness
Specifies the stiffness of the snubber. The value must be positive. If the snubber is rigid enter a
value of 1.0E12.
Direction
Specifies the direction for the line of action of the snubber. Valid entries are X, Y, Z, direction
cosines, or direction vectors. The format for direction cosines is (cx,cy, cz), such as
(0.707,0.0,0.707). The format for direction vectors is (vx, vy, vz), such as (1,0,1).
Node
Specifies the node number where the snubber acts.
Connecting nodes for snubbers work in the same way as for restraints.
CNode
Specifies the second node number to which the other end of the snubber is connected. This
value is optional. If the snubber acts between the piping system and a fixed point in space, then
do not enter a value for CNode.
Connecting nodes for snubbers works in the same way as for restraints.
Example 1
Add a rigid snubber at node 150 in the Z direction.
1E12 Z 150
Example 2
Add rigid snubbers at nodes 160, 165, and 170 in the Z direction.
1E12 Z 160
1E12 Z 165
1E12 Z 170
Example 3
Add a rigid snubber between the structural steel node 1005 and the piping node 405 in the Z
direction.
1E12 Z 405 1005
Example 4
Add a 5,000 lb./in. snubber in the X and Y directions at the piping node 500. The X snubber
connects to the structural steel node 1050 and the Y snubber connects to the overhead line at
node 743.
* HORIZONTAL SNUBBER BETWEEN STEAM LINE AND STEEL
5000 X 500 1050.
* VERTICAL SNUBBER BETWEEN STEAM LINE AND OVER HEAD COOLING WATER
LINE
5000 Y 500 743
The type of analysis determines the parameters available on the Control Parameters tab. The
software displays the list of applicable parameters. The control parameters available for each
analysis are shown below:
Table Notes:
X Required.
3 Max. No. of Eigenvalues and Frequency Cutoff work as a pair in terminating the eigen extraction.
6 Used if USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.60 or Uniform Building Code seismic spectra are specified in the shock
definition.
7 Used if independent support movement (USM) loads are present or if defined shock does not include all
supports in the system.
10 Used if more than one spectrum load is applied in the same direction.
For modal analysis, set the number of modes of vibration to extract by specifying a
maximum number, a cutoff frequency, or both.
Topics
Analysis Type (Harmonic/Spectrum/Modes/Range/TimeHist) ...... 667
Static Load Case for Nonlinear Restraint Status ........................... 678
Max. No. of Eigenvalues Calculated .............................................. 679
Frequency Cutoff (HZ) ................................................................... 681
Closely Spaced Mode Criteria/Time History Time Step (ms) ........ 682
Load Duration (DSRSS) (sec) ....................................................... 683
Damping (DSRSS) (ratio of critical) ............................................... 683
ZPA (Reg. Guide 1.60/UBC - g's) <or> # Time History Output Cases
....................................................................................................... 684
Re-use Last Eigensolution (Frequencies and Mode Shapes) ....... 688
Spatial or Modal Combination First ............................................... 688
Spatial Combination Method (SRSS/ABS) .................................... 689
Modal Combination Method (Group/10%/DSRSS/ABS/SRSS) .... 689
Include Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Components (Y/N) ...... 692
Include Missing Mass Components ............................................... 693
Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Comb. Method (SRSS/ABS) ... 695
Missing Mass Combination Method (SRSS/ABS) ......................... 695
Directional Combination Method (SRSS/ABS) .............................. 695
Mass Model (LUMPED/CONSISTENT)......................................... 696
Sturm Sequence Check on Computed Eigenvalues ..................... 696
Harmonic Analysis
The response of a system to a dynamically applied load is generally expressed through the
dynamic equation of motion:
Where:
M = system mass matrix
= acceleration vector, as a function of time
C = system damping matrix
= velocity vector, as a function of time
K = system stiffness matrix
x(t) = displacement vector, as a function of time
F(t) = applied load vector, as a function of time
The harmonic solver is most commonly used to analyze low frequency field vibrations due to
fluid pulsation or out-of-round rotating equipment displacements. This differential equation
cannot be solved explicitly, except in a few specific cases. Harmonic analysis looks at one of
these casesthe set of dynamic problems where the forces or displacements (such as
pulsation or vibration) acting on the piping system take sinusoidal forms. When damping is zero
under harmonic loading, the dynamic equation of the system can be reduced to
M (t) + K x(t) = F0 cos (w t + Q)
Where:
F0 = harmonic load vector
w = angular forcing frequency of harmonic load (radian/sec)
t = time
Q = phase angle (radians)
This differential equation is solved directly for the nodal displacements at any time. From there
the system reactions, forces and moments, and stresses are calculated.
The equation has a solution of the form
x (t) = A cos (w t + Q)
Where:
A = vector of maximum harmonic displacements of system
Because acceleration is the second derivative of displacement with respect to time,
(t) = -A w2 cos w t
Inserting these equations for displacement and acceleration back into the basic harmonic
equation of motion yields,
-M A 2 cos ( t + Q) + K A cos ( t + Q) = Fo cos ( t + Q)
Dividing both sides of this equation by cos ( t + Q),
-M A 2 + K A = Fo
Reordering this equation,
(K - M 2) A = Fo
This is exactly the same form of the equation as is solved for all linear (static) piping problems.
The solution time for each excitation frequency takes only as long as a single static solution,
and, when there is no phase relationship to the loading, the results directly give the maximum
dynamic responses. Due to the speed of the analysis, and because the solutions are so directly
applicable, you should make as much use of this capability as possible. Keep two
considerations in mind:
When damping is not zero, the harmonic equation can only be solved if the damping matrix
is defined as the sum of multiples of the mass and stiffness matrix (Rayleigh damping), that
is
[C] = a [M] + b [K]
On a modal basis, the relationship between the ratio of critical damping Cc and the
constants a and b is
Where:
= Undamped natural frequency of mode (rad/sec)
For practical problems, a is extremely small, and can be ignored. The definition of b reduces
to
= 2 Cc/
CAESAR II uses this implementation of damping for its harmonic analysis, but two problems
exist. First, for multi-degree-of-freedom systems, there is not really a single b, but there
must be only a single b in order to get a solution of the harmonic equation. The second
problem is that the modal frequencies are not known prior to generation of the damping
matrix. Therefore the w used in the calculation of b is the forcing frequency of the load,
instead of the natural frequency of a mode. When the forcing frequency of the load is in the
vicinity of a modal frequency, this gives a good estimation of the true damping.
If multiple harmonic loads occur simultaneously and are not in phase, system response is
the sum of the responses due to the individual loads
x(t) = S Ai cos ( t + Qi)
Where:
Ai = displacement vector of system under load i
Qi = phase angle of load i
In this case, an absolute maximum solution cannot be found. Solutions for each load, and
the sum of these, must be found at various times in the load cycle. These combinations are
then reviewed in order to determine which one causes the worst load case. Alternatively,
CAESAR II can select the frequency/phase pairs which maximize the system displacement.
Damped harmonics always cause a phased response.
The biggest use by far of the harmonic solver is in analyzing low frequency field vibrations
resulting from either fluid pulsation or out-of-round rotating equipment displacements. The
approach typically used is described briefly below:
1. A potential dynamic problem is first identified in the field. Large cyclic vibrations or high
stresses (fatigue failure) are present in an existing piping system, raising questions of
whether this represents a dangerous situation. As many symptoms of the problem (such as
quantifiable displacements or overstress points) are identified as possible for future use in
refining the dynamic model.
2. A model of the piping system is built using CAESAR II. This should be done as accurately
as possible, because system and load characteristics affect the magnitude of the developed
response. In the area where the vibration occurs, you should accurately represent valve
operators, flange pairs, orifice plates, and other in-line equipment. You may also want to add
additional nodes in the area of the vibration.
3. Assume the cause of the load, and estimate the frequency, magnitude, point, and direction
of the load. This is difficult because dynamic loads can come from many sources. Dynamic
loads may be due to factors such as internal pressure pulses, external vibration, flow
shedding at intersections, and two-phase flow. In almost all cases, there is some frequency
content of the excitation that corresponds to (and therefore excites) a system mechanical
natural frequency. If the load is caused by equipment, then the forcing frequency is probably
some multiple of the operating frequency. If the load is due to acoustic flow problems, then
the forcing frequency can be estimated through the use of Strouhals equations (from fluid
dynamics). Use the best assumptions available to estimate the magnitudes and points of
application of the dynamic load.
4. Model the loading using harmonic forces or displacements, normally depending upon
whether the cause is assumed to be pulsation or vibration. Perform several harmonic
analyses, sweeping the frequencies through a range centered about the target frequency to
account for uncertainty. Examine the results of each of the analyses for signs of large
displacements, indicating harmonic resonance. If the resonance is present, compare the
results of the analysis to the known symptoms from the field. If they are not similar, or if
there is no resonance, this indicates that the dynamic model is not a good one. It must then
be improved, either in terms of a more accurate system (static) model, a better estimate of
the load, or a finer sweep through the frequency range. After the model has been refined,
repeat this step until the mathematical model behaves just like the actual piping system in
the field.
5. At this point, the model is a good representation of the piping system, the loads and the
relationship of the load characteristics to the system characteristics.
6. Evaluate the results of this run in order to determine whether they indicate a problem.
Because harmonic stresses are cyclic, they should be evaluated against the endurance limit
of the piping material. Displacements should be reviewed against interference limits or
esthetic guidelines.
7. If the situation is deemed to be a problem, its cause must be identified. The cause is
normally the excitation of a single mode of vibration. For example, the Dynamic Load Factor
for a single damped mode of vibration, with a harmonic load applied is
Where:
Spectrum Analysis
Spectrum analysis attempts to estimate the maximum response developed in a system during a
transient load. The results are a statistical summation of the maxi\-mum displacements, forces,
reactions, and stresses. The individual responses do not represent an actual physical loading
case because the maxima may all occur at different times. Spectrum analyses are especially
useful when the loading profile is random, or not exactly known, such as with seismic loads.
CAESAR II provides the ability to perform two types of spectrum analyses which may be
combined: seismic and force spectra. Seismic loadings may be evaluated either uniformly over
the entire system, or applied through individual support groups with corresponding anchor
movements. Force spectra analyses may be used to analyze impulse loadings, such as those
due to relief valve, fluid hammer, or slug flow.
Seismic response spectra resemble harmonic Dynamic Load Factor curves, because seismic
loads indicate strong harmonic tendencies. As the damping value increases, the system
response approaches ground motion. Seismic spectra also usually show strong evidence of
flexible, resonant, and rigid areas. Spectra may have multiple peaks due to filtering by the
building and/or piping system. Multiple peaks are usually enveloped in order to account for
uncertainties in the analysis. Seismic response spectra peaks are typically spread to account for
inaccuracies as well.
The idea behind the generation of the response spectra is that the modes of vibration of a
system respond to the load in the exact same manner as a single degree-of-freedom oscillator.
These spectra represent the normalized response spectra shapes for three soil types provided
in Figure 23-3 of the Uniform Building Code (1991 Edition). When used, they must be scaled by
the ZPA, which is the product of Z and I, where Z is the seismic zone coefficient and I is the
earthquake importance factor, from UBC Tables 23-I and 23-L. The ZPA can be specific using
the CAESAR II control parameter spreadsheet.
User defined spectra
User defined spectra may be entered with period or frequency as the range, and displacement,
velocity, or acceleration as the ordinate. These spectra may be read in from a text file or entered
directly into a spectrum table during dynamic input processing.
components. If omitted, the software defaults to the displacement derived from the response
spectrum entry corresponding to the lowest frequency.
The term on the right hand side is a dynamic force acting on the piping system, such as F = Ma,
so the analogous equation to be solved for the force spectrum problem is:
Where:
F = the dynamic load (water hammer or relief valve)
Instead of the displacement, velocity, or acceleration spectrum used for the seismic problem, a
Dynamic Load Factor spectrum is used for a force spectrum problem. A DLF spectrum gives the
ratio of the maximum dynamic displacement divided by the maximum static displacement. The
earthquake response spectrum analysis method starts with the time history of an earthquake
excitation. The force spectrum analysis method is done in exactly the same way, except that the
analysis starts with the force versus time profile. Just as for the earthquake, this time history
loading is applied to a shake table of single degree-of-freedom bodies. A response spectrum
(DLF versus natural frequency) is generated by dividing the maximum oscillator displacements
by the static displacements expected under the same load. An alternate means of generating a
response spectrum for an impulse load is to numerically integrate the dynamic equation of
motion for oscillators of various frequencies under the applied load. Use Tools > DLF Spectrum
Generator.
Process output from a spectrum analysis in two ways:
Use the output processor to review the natural frequencies, mode shapes, participation
factors, included mass/force, displacements, restraint loads, forces, or stresses in report
form. Dynamic results also show the largest modal contributor, along with the mode and
shock load responsible for that contribution.
Animate the individual mode shapes extracted for the spectrum analysis.
Time History
Time history analysis is a more accurate, more computationally intensive analytical method than
response spectrum analysis. It is best suited to impulse loadings or other transient loadings
where the profile is known. This method of analysis involves the actual solution of the dynamic
equation of motion throughout the duration of the applied load and subsequent system vibration,
providing a true simulation of the system response.
As noted in Harmonic Analysis (on page 668), the dynamic equation of motion for a system is
This differential equation cannot be solved explicitly, but may be integrated using numeric
techniques by slicing the duration of the load into many small time steps. Assuming that the
change in acceleration between time slices is linear, the system accelerations, velocities,
displacements, and corresponding reactions, internal forces, and stresses are calculated at
successive time steps.
Because the total response of a system is equivalent to the sum of the responses of its
individual modes of vibration, the above equation can be simplified assuming that the damping
matrix C is orthogonal. Use the transformation x = FX, to be expressed in modal coordinates:
Where:
The load profiles are linked with force sets (indicating magnitude, direction, and location of the
applied load) in the shock case. The magnitude of the applied load is determined by the product
of the profile force, the force set magnitude, and the scale in the shock case.
Only forces, not moments or restraint displacements, can be entered in the time history load
profile. Moments can be modeled using force couples, and restraint displacements can be
simulated by entering forces equal to the desired displacement times the restraint stiffness in the
direction of the displacement.
Process output from a Time History analysis in three ways:
Use the output processor to review the natural frequencies, mode shapes, participation
factors, included mass/force, displacements, and restraint loads, forces, or stresses in report
form. CAESAR IIs implementation of time history analysis provides two types of results.
One results case contains the maximum individual components (such as axial stress,
X-displacement, and MZ reaction) of the system response, along with the time at which it
occurred. Several results cases represent the actual system response at specific times.
Dynamic results also show the largest modal contributor, along with the mode and transient
load responsible for that contribution.
Animate the shock displacement for the transient load cases. During animation, the
displacements, forces, moments, stresses, and other data associated with individual
elements are displayed at every time step and for the dynamic load alone, or for any of the
static/dynamic combinations.
Animate the individual mode shapes included in the time history response.
This parameter is used, in combination with Frequency Cutoff (HZ), to limit the maximum
number of modes of vibration to be extracted during the dynamic analysis. If this parameter is
entered as 0, the number of modes extracted is limited only by the frequency cutoff and the
number of degrees-of-freedom in the system model.
Example
A system has the following natural frequencies:
1 0.6
2 3.0
3 6.1
4 10.7
5 20.3
6 29.0
7 35.4
8 40.7
9 55.6
The modes extracted for different values of Max. No. of Eigenvalues Calculated and
Frequency Cutoff are:
0 33 7
0 50 9
3 33 3
9 60 9
If you are more interested in providing an accurate representation of the system displacements,
request the extraction of a few modes, allowing a rapid calculation time. However, if an accurate
estimate of the forces and stresses in the system is the objective, calculation time grows as it
becomes necessary to extract far more modes. This is particularly true when solving a fluid
hammer problem in the presence of axial restraints. Often modes with natural frequencies of up
to 300 Hz are large contributors to the solution.
To determine how many modes are sufficient, extract a certain number of modes and review the
results. Repeat the analysis by extracting five to ten additional modes and comparing the new
results to the old. If there are significant changes between the results, repeat the analysis again,
adding five to ten more modes. This iterative process continues until the results taper off,
becoming asymptotic.
This procedure has two drawbacks. First is the time involved in making the multiple analyses
and the time involved in extracting the potentially large number of modes. The second
drawback, occurring with spectrum analysis, is less obvious. A degree of conservatism is
introduced when combining the contributions of the higher order modes. Possible spectral mode
summation methods include methods that combine modal results as same-sign (positive)
values: SRSS, ABSOLUTE, and GROUP. Theory states that the rigid modes act in phase with
each other, and should be combined algebraically, permitting the response of some rigid modes
to cancel the effect of other rigid modes. This is what occurs in a time history analysis. Because
of this conservatism, it is possible to get results which exceed twice the applied load, despite the
fact that the Dynamic Load Factor (DLF) of an impulse load cannot be greater than 2.0.
4. Conservative Cutoff (Too many rigid modes combined using non-conservative summation
methods)
When the analysis type is SPECTRUM, MODES, or TIMEHIST, either this parameter or Max.
No. of Eigenvalues Calculated (on page 679) must have a value.
Spectrum Analysis
For a spectrum analysis with the GROUP Modal Combination Method (as defined by USNRC
Regulatory Guide 1.92), this value specifies the frequency spacing defining each modal group,
that is, the percentage of the base frequency between the lowest and highest frequency of the
group. Regulatory Guide 1.92 specifies the group spacing criteria as 10%, or 0.1. This is the
default value in CAESAR II. For more information, see Modal Combination Method
(Group/10%/DSRSS/ABS/SRSS) (on page 689).
Spectrum Analysis
For a time history analysis, this parameter specifies the total length of time over which the
dynamic response is simulated. The load duration divided by the time step size from Closely
Spaced Mode Criteria/Time History Time Step (ms) (on page 682) gives the total number of
integration steps making up the solution. CAESAR II limits the number of time steps to 5000 or
as permitted by available memory and system size. The duration should be at least equal to the
maximum duration of the applied load plus the period of the first extracted mode. This allows
simulation of the system response throughout the imposition of the external load, plus one full
cycle of the resulting free vibration. After this point, the response dies out according to the
damping value used. For example, if the applied load is expected to last 150 milliseconds and
the lowest extracted frequency is 3 Hz, set the load duration to a minimum of 0.150 plus 1/3, or
0.483 seconds.
On a modal basis, the relationship between the ratio of critical damping C c and the constants
and are given as:
Where:
= undamped natural frequency of mode (radians/sec)
For many practical problems, is extremely small, and so may be ignored, reducing the
relationships to:
=0
= 2 Cc /
CAESAR II uses this implementation of damping for its harmonic analysis, with the exception
that a single is calculated for the multi-degree-of-freedom system, and the used is that of the
load forcing frequency. When the forcing frequency is in the vicinity of a modal frequency, this
gives an accurate estimate of the true damping value.
This is usually less of an issue for force spectrum combinations. Normally there are no separate
spatial components to combine because X- Y- and Z-shocks are not acting simultaneously.
When there is more than one potential force load, the spatial combination method may be used
to indicate the independence of the loadings. For example, select Modal if two independent
relief valves may or may not fire simultaneously and the two shocks are defined as being in
different directions (such as X and Y). If the two valves are dependent and will definitely open
simultaneously, select Spatial. Otherwise, the direction defined for a force spectrum loading has
no particular meaning.
Nuclear Regulatory Guide 1.92 (published in February, 1976) describes the requirements for
combining spatial components when performing seismic response spectra analysis for
nuclear power plants.
Because all time history combinations are done algebraically (in-phase), this option has no
effect on time history results.
Grouping Method
This method is defined in USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.92. The grouping method attempts to
eliminate the drawbacks of the Absolute and SRSS methods. It assumes that modes are
completely correlated with any modes with similar closely spaced frequencies, and are
completely uncorrelated with those modes with widely different frequencies. The total system
response is calculated as
Where:
R = total system response of the element
N = number of significant modes considered in the modal response combination
Rk = the peak value of the response of the element due to the kth mode
P = number of groups of closely-spaced modes (where modes are considered to be
closely-spaced if their frequencies are within 10% of the base mode in the group), excluding
individual separated modes. No mode can be in more than one group.
i = number of first mode in group q
j = number of last mode in group q
Rlq = response of mode l in group q
Rmq = response of mode m in group q
The responses of any modes which have frequencies within 10% of each other are added
together absolutely, and the results of each of these groups are combined with the remaining
individual modal results using the SRSS method.
The 10% value controlling the definition of closely spaced frequencies can be changed by
using the Closely Spaced Mode Criteria/Time History Time Step (ms) (on page 682) parameter.
Where:
Ri, Rj = the peak value of the response of the element due to the ith and jth mode,
respectively, where mode i and j are any frequencies within 10% of the each other,
The 10% value controlling the definition of closely spaced frequencies can be changed by
using the Closely Spaced Mode Criteria/Time History Time Step (ms) (on page 682) parameter.
Where:
Rs = the peak value of the response of the element due to mode s
eks = intermodal correlation coefficient = [ 1 + {( k' - s') /(k' k + s' s)}2 ]-1
k' = k [ 1 - k2 ]1/2
s' = s [ 1 - s2 ]1/2
k' = k + 2 / ( td k )
s' = s + 2 / ( td s )
k = frequency of mode k, rad/sec
s = frequency of mode s, rad/sec
k = ratio of damping to critical damping of mode k, dimensionless
s = ratio of damping to critical damping of mode s, dimensionless
td = duration of earthquake, sec
The load duration (td) and the damping ratio () can be specified by using the Load
Duration (DSRSS) (sec) (on page 683) and Damping (DSRSS) (ratio of critical) (on page 683)
parameters.
This method is based upon the statistical assumption that all modal responses are completely
independent, with the maxima following a relatively uniform distribution throughout the duration
of the applied load. This is usually non-conservative, especially if there are any modes with very
close frequencies, because those modes will usually experience their maximum DLF at
approximately the same time during the load profile.
Because all time history combinations are done algebraically (in-phase), this modal
combination method has no effect on time history results.
Absolute Method
This method defines the total system response as the sum of the absolute values of the
individual modal responses. This is effectively the same as using the double sum method with
all correlation coefficients equal to 1.0, or the grouping method, with all modes being closely
spaced. The total system response is calculated as:
This method gives the most conservative result, because it assumes that the all maximum
modal responses occur at exactly the same time during the course of the applied load. This is
usually overly-conservative, because modes with different natural frequencies will probably
experience their maximum DLF at different times during the load profile.
% Active Massx
% Active MassY
% Active Massz
Where:
Me = vector (by degree-of-freedom) of sum (over all extracted modes) of effective modal
masses
M = vector corresponding to main diagonal of system mass matrix
The maximum possible percentage of active mass that is theoretically possible is 100%, with
90-95% usually indicating that a sufficient number of modes have been extracted to provide a
good dynamic model.
The percentage of active force is calculated by the following factors:
Separately summing the components of the effective force acting along each of the three
directional degrees-of-freedom
Combining them algebraically
Doing the same for the applied load
Taking the ratio of the effective load divided by the applied load
Examples
Summed over i = 1 to n, by 6 (X - Direction degrees of freedom):
Fex = Fe[i]
Fx = F[i]
Summed over i = 2 to n, by 6 (Y - Direction degrees of freedom):
Fey = Fe[i]
Fy = F[i]
Summed over i = 3 to n, by 6 (Z - Direction degrees of freedom):
Fez = Fe[i]
Fz = F[i]
Where:
FeX,FeY,FeZ = effective force (allocated to extracted modes) acting along the global X-, Y-,
and Z-axes, respectively
Fr = vector of effective forces (allocated to extracted modes)
FX,FY,FZ = total system forces acting along the global X-, Y-, and Z-axes, respectively
F = vector of total system forces
The maximum possible percentage which is theoretically possible for this value is also 100%. In
practice it may be higher, indicating an uneven distribution of the load and mass in the system
model. There is nothing inherently wrong with an analysis where the included force exceeds
100%. If the missing mass correction is included, the modal loadings are adjusted to
automatically conform to the applied loading. The percentage of included force can often be
brought under 100% by extracting a few more modes. At other times, the situation can be
remedied by improving the dynamic model through a finer element mesh, or, more importantly,
equalizing the mass point spacing in the vicinity of the load.
The Sturm sequence check fails where there are two identical frequencies at the last frequency
extracted. For example, consider a system with the following natural frequencies:
If you only ask for the first four natural frequencies, a Sturm sequence failure occurs because
there are five frequencies that exist in the range between 0.0 and 4.5667 + p (where p is
0.0041). To correct this problem, you can:
Increase the frequency cutoff by the number of frequencies not found. (This number is
reported by the Sturm sequence check.)
Increase the value of Frequency Cutoff (HZ) (on page 681) by some small amount, if the
frequency cutoff terminated the eigensolution. This usually allows the lost modes to fall into
the solution frequency range.
Fix the subspace size at 10 and rerun the job. Increasing the number of approximation
vectors improves the possibility that at least one of them contains some component of the
missing modes, allowing the vector to properly converge.
Advanced Tab
This tab is available when Modal, Earthquake (spectrum), Relief Loads (spectrum), Water
Hammer/Slug Flow (spectrum), and Time History are selected for Analysis Type in the
Dynamic Analysis window.
The values on this tab rarely need to be changed.
Topics
Estimated Number of Significant Figures in Eigenvalues .............. 697
Jacobi Sweep Tolerance ............................................................... 698
Decomposition Singularity Tolerance ............................................ 698
Subspace Size (0-Not Used) ......................................................... 698
No. to Converge Before Shift Allowed (0 - Not Used) ................... 699
No. of Iterations Per Shift (0 - Pgm computed).............................. 699
% of Iterations Per Shift Before Orthogonalization ........................ 700
Force Orthogonalization After Convergence (Y/N) ........................ 700
Use Out-of-Core Eigensolver (Y/N) ............................................... 700
Frequency Array Spaces ............................................................... 700
Directive Builder
Click Directives on the Spectrum Load Cases or Static/Dynamic Combinations tabs to open
the Directive Builder dialog box and select parameters for the current load case. These
parameters are load-case-specific changes to the global parameters set for all dynamic analysis
load cases. For more information, see Spectrum/Time History Load Cases Tab (on page 641)
and Static/Dynamic Combinations Tab (on page 657).
For most analyses, the global parameters apply and you do not need to specify the
parameters on this dialog box.
Directional Combination Method - Select SRSS or ABS. For more information, see Missing
Mass Combination Method (SRSS/ABS) (on page 695).
Modal Combination Method - Select GROUP, 10%, DSRSS, SRSS, or ABS. For more
information, see Modal Combination Method (Group/10%/DSRSS/ABS/SRSS) (on page 689).
Spatial Combination Method - Select SRSS or ABS. For more information, see Spatial
Combination Method (SRSS/ABS) (on page 689).
Spatial or Modal Combination First - Select SPATIAL or MODAL. For more information, see
Re-use Last Eigensolution (Frequencies and Mode Shapes) (on page 688).
Pseudostatic Combination Method - Select SRSS or ABS. For more information, see
Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Comb. Method (SRSS/ABS) (on page 695).
Missing Mass Combination Method - Select SRSS or ABS. For more information, see Missing
Mass Combination Method (SRSS/ABS) (on page 695).
Static/Dynamic Combination Method - Select SRSS or ABS to define how the load case is
combined. The ABS method takes the absolute value of all displacement, force, and stress data
for each load case and adds them. The SRSS method sums the square of all displacement,
force, and stress data for each load case and then takes the square root of the result. This is the
only parameter available on the Static/Dynamic Combinations tab.
Range
Specifies a spectrum range value. The range/ordinate pairs define the spectrum/DLF curve.
Ordinate
Specifies a spectrum ordinate value. The range/ordinate pairs define the spectrum/DLF curve.
Valid formats are:
Exponents, such as 0.3003E+03, 0.3423E-03, or 0.3003E3.
Explicit multiplication or division, such as 4032.3/386, or 1.0323*12.
DLF/Spectrum Generator
DLF/Spectrum Generator and Tools > DLF Spectrum Generator converts spectrum time
waveform excitation data into a frequency domain dynamic load factor (DLF) curve. DLF data is
automatically referenced in the Spectrum Definitions tab. For more information, see
Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab (on page 636).
The DLF curve can also be saved to a file and later referenced by CAESAR II as a FORCE
response spectrum curve.
Spectrum Name
Displays the name of the selected value of Spectrum Type. You can type a different name.
For UBC, ASCE7, IBC, and CFE Diseno por Sismo:
This is the group name for the pair of seismic shock spectra that is generated here. A suffix
of H and V is added to indicate the horizontal and vertical spectrum, respectively. After it has
been properly entered, these names are listed in the Spectrum Definitions tab and can be
used to build load cases on the Spectrum Load Cases tab.
For B31.1 Relief & User Defined Time History Waveform:
This is the name given to the Force Response Spectrum created from the time history load
defined here. After it has been properly entered, this name is listed in the Spectrum
Definitions tab and can be used to build load cases on the Spectrum Load Cases tab.
Spectrum Type
Specifies the name of the spectrum. The data from this spectrum is used to generate the DLF
curve.
UBC
Select to create earthquake spectra (horizontal and vertical) according to the 1997 Uniform
Building Code.
The horizontal design response spectrum is based on UBC Figure 16-3 shown below.
The vertical spectrum is to 50% of ICa across the entire period range.
Importance Factor
Specifies the seismic importance factor, I, as defined in Table 16-K. The calculated spectrum
accelerations are multiplied by this value to generate the horizontal shock spectrum. Values
range from 1.0 to 1.25 based on the function of the structure.
For this code, the vertical shock spectrum is also multiplied by the importance factor.
Seismic Coefficient Ca
Specifies the zero period acceleration, Ca, for the site as defined in Table 16-Q. The value is
based on soil profile type and seismic zone factor, and ranges from 0.06 to 0.66.
Seismic Coefficient Cv
Specifies the ground acceleration at higher periods (lower frequencies), Cv, for the site as
defined in Table 16-R. The value is based on soil profile type and seismic zone factor, and
ranges from 0.06 to 1.92.
ASCE7
Select to create earthquake spectra (horizontal and vertical) according to the ASCE #7-02
standard.
The horizontal design response spectrum is based on ASCE 7, Figure 9.4.1.2.6 shown below.
Ts=SD1/SDS & T0=Ts/5.
Above a period of four seconds, the horizontal spectrum acceleration changes.
The vertical spectrum is set to 20% of SDS (from 9.5.2.7.1) across the entire period range.
Neither I nor R affects the vertical spectrum.
Importance Factor
Specifies the occupancy importance factor, based on the function of the structure. The
calculated spectrum accelerations are multiplied by this value to generate the horizontal shock
spectrum.
ASCE 7 - The occupancy importance factor is I, as defined in Table 11.5. Values range from
1.0 to 1.5 and applied according to paragraph 12.9.2.
IBC - The occupancy importance factor is IE, as defined in Section 1616.2 and shown in
Table 1604.5. Values range from 1.0 to 1.5.
Site Coefficient Fa
Specifies the acceleration-based site coefficient Fa. This value adjusts the mapped short period
acceleration and is based on site class (soil profile) and the mapped short period maximum
considered earthquake acceleration (Ss). Values range from 0.8 to 2.5.
ASCE 7 - Fa is listed in Table 11.4-1.
IBC - Fa is listed in Table 16.15.1.2(1).
Site Coefficient Fv
Specifies the velocity-based site coefficient Fv. This value adjusts the mapped one-second
period acceleration and is based on site class (soil profile) and the mapped one-second period
maximum considered earthquake acceleration (S1). Values range from 0.8 to 3.5.
ASCE 7 - Fv is listed in Table 11.4-2.
IBC - Fv is listed in Table 1615.1.2(2).
Response Modification R
Specifies the response modification coefficient, R. This coefficient reflects system ductility. The
calculated spectrum accelerations are divided by this value to generate the horizontal shock
spectrum. Values range from 3.0 to 8.0 for most plant structures. A value of 3.5 for piping is
common.
ASCE 7 - R is defined in Table 12.2-1 and applied according to paragraph 12.9.2.
IBC - R is defined in Table 1617.6 and used according to equation 16-53.
IBC
Select to create earthquake spectra (horizontal and vertical) according to the International
Building Code, 2000.
The horizontal design response spectrum is based on IBC 2000, Fig. 1615.1.4 shown below.
Ts=SD1/SDS & T0=Ts/5
The vertical spectrum is set to 20% of SDS (from 1617.1.2) across the entire period range.
IBC generally uses the same spectrum data parameters as ASCE7 (on page 706).
Using the input data and calculated earthquake weights and natural frequency, CAESAR II
determines the values from table 3.1 of the Mexican Seismic Code.
The values are:
For group A structures, the values of the spectral ordinates a o and c are multiplied by 1.5.
Seismic Zone
Specifies the seismic zone. Select A, B, C, or D. The zones are described in Manual de Diseno
por Sismo for Mexico. The map on page 1.3.29 shows the seismic zones.
Soil Type
Specifies the soil type.
I - Hard Soil - Ground deposits formed exclusively by layers with propagation velocity b 0 =
700 m/s or modulus of rigidity 85000.
II - Medium Soil - Ground deposits with fundamental period of vibration and effective
velocity of propagation which meets the condition Bc Ts + Bs Tc > Bc Tc.
III - Soft Soil - Ground deposits with fundamental period of vibration and effective velocity of
propagation which meets the condition Bc Ts + Bs Tc < Bc Tc.
Structural Group
Specifies the structural group based on the degree of safety. Select A - High Safety, B -
Intermediate Safety, or C - Low Safety.
Towers and tanks are examples of group A structures requiring a high degree of safety in
their design
Increase Factor
Specifies a value for the increased factor of safety, as required by some facilities. The default
value is 1.0. This value directly multiplies the spectrum values. This value is traditionally 1.118
and should always be greater than or equal to 1.0.
Opening Time
Specifies the opening time of the relief value in milliseconds.
Number of Points
Specifies the number of points to be generated for the spectrum table. Fifteen to twenty points
are usually sufficient. These points are distributed in a cubic relationship starting at zero hertz.
Time
Specifies time waveform values in milliseconds for the points to be modeled.
Force
Specifies forces corresponding to the points on the force/time curve.
The absolute magnitude of the force is not important, but the form of the time history
loading is important. The actual maximum value of the dynamic load is taken from the force
pattern defined on the Force Sets Tab (on page 647). There can be any number of line entries in
the excitation frequency data.
Generate Spectrum
Displays the Spectrum Table Values dialog box with the force spectrum values based on
entered spectrum data.
This command is available for all values of Spectrum Type except User Defined Time History
Waveform.
Save To File - Saves the force spectrum values to an ASCII file. For seismic spectra, two files
are saved: horizontal (with H appended to the file name) and vertical (with V appended to the file
name). Use this command if you want to reuse the spectrum values in other analyses. Click OK
if you only want to use the values in the current analysis.
OK - Loads the spectrum data into the current analysis.
Cancel - Closes the window without loading the spectrum data into the current analysis.
Line Temperature
Specifies the stagnation condition temperature of the gas to be relieved. This is typically the gas
temperature upstream of the relief valve.
Pressure (abs)
Specifies the stagnation pressure of the gas to be relieved. This is typically the gas pressure
upstream of the relief valve. This value is the absolute pressure.
Stagnation properties can vary considerably from line properties if the gas flow velocity in
the line is high.
Methane 1.226
Propane 1.127
ID Manifold Piping
Specifies the insider diameter of the manifold if the relief exit piping runs into a manifold. Do not
enter a value if there is not a manifold.
ID Supply Header
Specifies the inside diameter of the supply header.
Topics
Computed Mass Flowrate (Vent Gas) ........................................... 720
Thrust at Valve Pipe/Vent Pipe Interface ....................................... 720
Thrust at the Vent Pipe Exit ........................................................... 720
Transient Pressure Rise on Valve Opening .................................. 721
Transient Pressure Rise on Valve Closing .................................... 721
Thermodynamic Entropy Limit/Subsonic Vent Exit Limit ............... 721
Valve Orifice Gas Conditions/Vent Pipe Exit Gas Conditions/Subsonic
Velocity Gas Conditions ................................................................. 722
Thrust load acts directly on valve opening. Only the valve pipe/vent stack
interface thrust acts in this
configuration.
The entire formulation for the thrust gas properties is based on an ideal gas equation of state. If
the pressures and temperatures displayed above for the gas being vented are outside of the
range where the ideal gas laws apply, then some alternate source should be sought for the
calculation of the thrust loads of the system. In addition, all three of these points should be
sufficiently clear of the gas saturation line. When the exit gas conditions become saturated, the
magnitude of the thrust load can be reduced significantly. In this case, consult the manufacturer.
If the L dimensions are significant (by several feet), then unbalanced thrust loads acting
between the elbow-elbow pairs are very similar to a water hammer load. Water hammer pulses
travel at the speed of sound in the fluid, while the fluid/atmosphere interface pulses travel at the
velocity of the flowing fluid. These unbalanced loads can cause significant piping displacements
in much shorter pipe runs. The magnitude of these loads is equivalent to the calculated thrust
and the duration may be found from the calculated fluid velocity and distance between each
elbow-elbow pair.
Analysis Results
Each type of dynamic analysis has its own procedure for producing results, but all start in the
same way:
1. Save and check the dynamic input.
2. Run the analysis.
3. The account number is requested (if accounting is active).
4. The ESL is accessed (limited run ESLs are decremented).
5. The element and system stiffness matrices are assembled.
6. Load vectors are created where appropriate.
7. The system mass matrix is generated.
From this point the processing progresses according to the type of analysis selected.
After calculations are complete, control is passed to the Dynamic Output Processor. For more
information, see Dynamic Output Processing (on page 729).
Topics
Modal ............................................................................................. 726
Harmonic........................................................................................ 727
Spectrum........................................................................................ 727
Time History ................................................................................... 728
Modal
After dynamic initialization and basic equation assembly are completed, CAESAR II opens the
Dynamic Eigensolver, which calculates natural frequencies and modes of vibration.
Each natural frequency appears as it is calculated, along with the lapsed time of the analysis.
The processor searches for the natural frequencies, starting with the lowest, and continues until
the frequency cutoff is exceeded or the mode count reaches its limit. Both the frequency cutoff
and mode cutoff are dynamic analysis control parameters. The amount of time to calculate or
find these frequencies is a function of the system size, the grouping of the frequencies and the
cutoff settings.
Eigensolution may be canceled at any time, with the analysis continuing using the mode shapes
calculated up to that point. After the last frequency is calculated, the software uses the Sturm
Sequence Check to confirm that no modes were skipped. If the check fails, you can return to the
dynamic input or continue with the spectral analysis. Sturm Sequence Check failures are usually
satisfied if the frequency cutoff is set to a value greater than the last frequency calculated.
After calculations are complete, control is passed to the Dynamic Output Processor. You can
review natural frequencies and mode shapes in text format. You can also display the node
shapes in and animated format.
Harmonic
For each forcing frequency listed in the dynamic input, CAESAR II performs a separate analysis.
These analyses are similar to static analyses and take the same amount of time to complete. At
the completion of each solution, the forcing frequency, its largest calculated deflection, and the
phase angle associated with it are listed. The root results for each frequency, and the system
deflections, are saved for further processing. Only twenty frequencies may be carried beyond
this point and into the output processor. When all frequencies are analyzed, the software
presents the frequencies. You can then select the frequencies and phase angles needed for
further analysis. This choice can be made after checking deflections at pertinent nodes for those
frequencies.
Spectrum
The spectrum analysis procedure can be broken down into:
Calculating the systems natural frequencies, mode shapes, and mass participation factors
Pulling the corresponding response amplitudes from the spectrum table and calculating the
system response for each mode of vibration
Combining the modal responses and directional components of the shock.
The first part of the analysis proceeds exactly as in modal analysis.
After natural frequencies are calculated, system displacements, forces, moments, and stresses
are calculated and combined on the modal level. After all the results are collected, the Dynamic
Output Processor appears. You can review spectral results, natural frequencies, and animated
mode shapes.
Time History
Modal time history analysis follows steps similar to a spectrum analysis. The modes of vibration
of the system are calculated. The dynamic equation of motion is solved through numeric
integration techniques for each mode at a number of successive time steps. The modal results
are then summed, yielding system responses at each time step.
The Dynamic Output Processor displays one load case (and optionally, one load combination)
with the maximum loads developed throughout the load application. You can also request
snap-shot cases at different load levels.
Window Commands
Open - Opens a different job for output review. You are prompted for
the file; Modal/Spectrum results are stored in *._s files, while Time
History results are stored in *._t files.
Print - Prints the selected reports. To print a hard copy of the reports
click File > Print. To send reports to a file rather than the printer, click
File > Save, and then type in or select the name of the file. To change
the file name for a new report, select File > Save As.
Open a Job
Opens a different job for output review.
To review an output from a different job, click Open and browse for the output file.
Modal and Spectrum results are stored in *._s files. Time History results are stored in
*._t files.
Click Edit 2-line Report Title and the following dialog box appears.
These two lines will be added to the top of each report page. Enter the report title, and click OK.
Now click Edit Load Case Labels and the following dialog box appears.
Here you can change the names of the load cases as they appear in the reports. Click OK to
close, and then click Done.
Here you can scroll through the various load cases. Click OK to close.
View Reports
Each report selected is presented, one at a time, for inspection. Scroll through the reports where
necessary. See Report Types (on page 733) for a list of available reports.
Report Types
Two types of reports are available from the Dynamic Output window: reports that are
associated with specific load cases (the Report Options shown in the center column), and
reports that are not associated with specific load cases (the General Results in the right
column).
For modal analysis, there are no load cases, so the center column is blank.
Reports associated with load cases are those associated with the spectral or time history
displacement solution. The report options are displacements, reactions, forces, moments, and
stresses.
Displacements
Provides the magnitude of the displacement for each load case. The summing methodology for
Spectral analysis results in all positive displacements. For time history analysis, the results
include the appllicable sign.
The displacement report gives the maximum displacement that is anticipated because the
application of the dynamic shock. For spectral analysis, note that all of the displacement values
are positive. The direction of the displacement is indeterminate. For example, there is a
tendency for the system to oscillate because of the potential energy stored after undergoing
some maximum dynamic movement. The displacements printed are relative to the movement of
the earth.
Restraints
Provides the magnitude of the reactions for each load case. A typical entry is shown below.
NODE FX
5 716
649
2X(1)
The first line for each node contains the maximum load that occurred at some time during the
dynamic event. The second line for each node contains the maximum modal contribution to the
load. The third line for each node tells the mode and loading that was responsible for the
maximum. This form of the report permits easy identification of the culprit modes.
The mode identification line is broken down as follows:
2 X (1)
For example, at node 5 the resultant dynamic load due to the shock was 716. The largest modal
component (of the 716) was 649, due to mode 2, and produced by the first X direction
component (either the first support motion set for displacement response spectrum analysis, or
the first force set for force response spectrum analysis). This form of dynamic output report
enables you to know if there is a problem. If there is a problem, it enables you to identify which
mode of vibration and load component is the major contributor to the problem.
If the component shows up as a (P), then it was the pseudo-static (seismic anchor movement)
contribution of the loading that resulted in the major component of the response. If the
component shows up as an (M), it indicates a missing mass contribution. A typical restraint
report is shown below.
Local Forces
Provides elemental forces and moments in the element local a-b-c coordinate system. The a-b-c
coordinate system is defined below.
For straight pipe not connected to an intersection:
a is along the element axis (for example, perpendicular to the pipe cross-section)
b is a XY, unless a is vertical and then b is along the X axis
c is a Xb.
For bends and elbows, and for each segment end:
a is along the element axis (perpendicular to the pipe cross-section)
b is to the plane of the bend
c is a Xb.
For intersections, and for each segment framing into the intersection:
a is along the element axis (perpendicular to the pipe cross-section)
b is to the plane of the intersection
c is a Xb.
The X indicates the vector cross product.
Force, moment, and stress reports are similar to restraint reports in that each has the maximum
response, followed by:
1. Modal maximum
2. Modal maximum load identifier.
All force/moment reports are set up to represent the forces and moments that act on the end of
the element to keep the element in equilibrium.
Global Forces
Contains information identical to information provided for Local Forces (on page 735), except
that it is oriented along the global X, Y, and Z axes. A typical report is shown below.
Stresses
Contains axial, bending, maximum octahedral, and code stresses, as well as in-plane and
out-of-plane stress intensification factors. These reports contain mode and modal maximum
data. A typical report is shown below.
Forces/Stresses
Summarizes the forces and code stresses for a particular load case. This report contains
maximum responses, the calculated stress, and the calculated stress allowable.
Cumulative Usage
Shows on an element-by-element basis the impact of each load case on the total fatigue
allowable and the cumulative impact of all simultaneously-selected load cases. This report is
available only for one or more fatigue stress types. Only one report is generated, regardless of
the number of selected fatigue load cases. If the total usage factor exceeds 1.0; it implies fatigue
failure under that loading condition.
Natural Frequencies
Calculated modal natural frequencies are reported in Hertz and radians per second. The period
is reported in seconds.
Unity normalized means that the largest displacement component in the mode is set to
1.0, and all other displacement values are scaled accordingly.
Dynamic Input
Lists the input for the piping model or for the dynamic input.
Mass Model
Shows how CAESAR II lumped masses for the dynamic runs. The mass lumping report should
show a fairly uniform distribution of masses. Large or irregular variations in the values must be
investigated. Usually these large values can be reduced by breaking down exceedingly long,
straight runs of pipe.
The mass lumping report, shown below is very uniform in distribution, and should produce a
good dynamic solution. CAESAR II ignores rotational terms.
toolbar buttons. You can interactively rotate, zoom, or pan the model. Zoom to Window and
Zoom to Selection options are also available.
Perspective or orthographic projections can also be set. Node numbers can be displayed by
clicking Nodes. The desired load case or mode shape can be selected from the corresponding
drop down list. The frequency of the load case associated with the animation is shown at the top
of the view plot whenever the Action > Titles option is selected.
The Animated Plot menu displays several plot selections. Motion and Volume Motion activate
the animation. The Motion command uses the centerline representation while Volume Motion
produces the volume graphics image. Each of the motion options causes the graphics processor
to animate the current plot. If Node Numbers is clicked, the node number text is moved
together with the corresponding node. When the plot is animated in the window, it may be sped
up, slowed down, or stopped using appropriate the toolbar command. After selecting a different
load case or mode shape from the drop down list, the motion automatically stops. Select one of
the motion commands again to activate the model movement.
The File > Print Motion command prints all of the vibration positions of the current mode. It is
not available for time history animation. For clarity purposes, we recommend you use the single
line (Motion) option to generate the printouts.
You can click View Animation to view graphic animation of the displacement
solution.
Static animation graphics has all the standard model projection and motion toolbar commands.
The load case can be selected from the drop-down list. The title consists of the load case name
followed by the file name, and can be toggled on and off from the Action menu.
The Static Animation processor allows viewing of the single line and volume motion, controls
the speed of the movement, and the animation can be saved to a file as described above.
We recommend you use the Deflected Shape command button on the 3D/HOOPS
Graphics view of the Static Output Processor toolbar. For more information refer to
3D/HOOPS Graphics Tutorial for Static Output Processor, Deflected Shape.
window by clicking View Animation . The system displays in its default isometric state.
The animation screen displays the same toolbar options described earlier that allow single line
and volume motion as well as speed up and slow down options. Occasional cases
corresponding to the excitation frequencies may be selected from the drop down list. The title
shows the currently selected frequency, file name, and the date. The title may be disabled from
the Action menu.
Animated graphics for each analyzed load case can be saved to an HTML file for later
presentation.
step. Clicking Next >> or Previous << changes the information to correspond to the next or
previous element in the system for the same time step.
When you click Motion to start the animation, the current time step is displayed in the title
line, and the task bar at the bottom of the window shows the progress.
There are several ways to move the model:
You can increase , decrease , or stop the animation speed.
Click Next >> or Previous << while the Element Info dialog box is active to update the
information for the current element for the next or previous time step. If the animation is
stopped, this advances or moves back the animation one step. Click View Animation again
after you stop the animation to continue the time history motion from the location (the time
step) where the animation was stopped.
Click Plot the First Time Step or Plot the Last Time Step to bring the animation to the
beginning or the end, correspondingly.
Drag the time slider to the appropriate time step. The position of the bar adjusts
automatically as the animation progresses. You can click on the slider and then drag it along
the time-line to find the time step you want, or to see the displaced shape of the model.
If the Element Info dialog box is active, the highlighted element information is updated to
correspond to the current time step.
You can enable the node numbers; however, we recommend node numbering be disabled
when using animation. As the animated elements move, the node numbers are redrawn for
every position in the system. This creates a blinking effect that makes it hard to follow the
animation.
In This Section
Add input feature information......................................................... 750
Add output feature information ...................................................... 752
Add custom annotations for nodal features ................................... 753
Add custom annotations for elemental features ............................ 755
Set Project Information .................................................................. 757
Configure annotation preferences ................................................. 758
Configure isometric drawing split points ........................................ 760
Create a drawing using the default style ....................................... 762
Create a drawing using an existing style ....................................... 763
Create a drawing using a new style ............................................... 764
Create and save an annotation template ....................................... 766
Apply a Template ........................................................................... 766
Stress Isometric Tutorials .............................................................. 767
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
3. Select StressIso > Annotations to open the Stress Isometric Annotations pane.
The Input tab is active by default.
4. Click the Feature list to select an input feature.
The nodes associated to the feature or the model parameters are displayed under the
Feature list.
5. Select the check boxes in the Select column to view the feature information on the
associated node in the display area. Select the check box again to clear the selection.
6. Similarly, you can select other input features in the Feature list to view nodes or elements
associated to the selected features.
7. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save annotations for the selected input information.
The nodes and model parameters are available for selection only if the input feature is used
to analyze the model.
Model parameters such as Diameter, Insulation thickness, and Wall Thickness are indicated
in the drawing only when there is a change in these parameters.
To select all the nodes in the list, select first check box, press SHIFT, and then select the
last check box in the list.
To remove a node or an element from a selection set, click the annotation tag in the display,
area and then press DELETE.
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
3. Select StressIso > Annotations to open the Stress Isometric Annotations pane.
The Input tab is active by default.
4. Select the Output tab to view the load cases used to analyze the model.
5. Click Load Cases to select a load case.
The results generated for the load case are listed in the Results box.
6. Select the result type you want, and then select the nodes to include the information for
annotation.
7. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save annotations for the selected output
information.
The Node number, Node Name, and Description columns display information entered in
CAESAR II and cannot be edited.
The output features are available for selection only if the piping model is analyzed.
The Load Cases list displays load cases created for static analysis only.
To remove a node or an element from a selection set, click the annotation tag in the display
area, and then press DELETE.
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
3. Select StressIso > Annotations.
4. Select the Nodal Annotations tab to view a list of all the nodes in the model.
5. To add a note for a node, click the associated cell in the User Annotation column and then
type your note.
6. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save custom annotations.
The comments you add in the User Annotations column can be viewed only in the
drawing, tags for user annotations are not visible in the display area.
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
3. Select StressIso > Annotations.
4. Select the Elemental Annotations tab to view a list of model elements.
5. To add a comment for an element, click the associated cell in the User Annotations
column, and then type your comment.
6. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save custom annotations.
The comments you add in the User Annotations column can be viewed only in the
drawing, tags for user annotations are not visible in the display area.
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
3. Select StressIso > Annotations.
4. Select the Project Attributes tab.
5. Type values for each attribute in the Attribute Value column.
6. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save the values.
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
3. Select StressIso > Annotations.
4. Select the Settings tab to view the list of features.
5. Click TextBox Shape list associated to a feature, and then select a text box shape for the
feature.
6. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save annotation preferences.
The text box shapes you select for different features are visible only in the drawing.
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
3. Select StressIso > Annotations.
4. Select the Split tab.
5. In the Split column, select the nodes at which to start new isometric drawings.
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
3. Select StressIso > Create Drawing to open the Isometric Drawing Generation dialog
box.
4. Select Use Default Style, and then click OK to create drawings.
The Drawings dialog box displays a list of drawings created for the piping model.
1A drawing style is a set a parameters that you define to represent your piping system drawing.
These parameters typically include drawing format, drawing size, drawing frame, units, and
options to display other information like materials list, weld list, and so on.
5. Select the drawings to view, and then click View to open the drawings in your default
viewer.
The drawings created using the default style are saved in the same folder as the piping
model.
The unit system used in creating the pipe model is used in the drawing, by default.
You cannot make any changes to the default drawing style.
The drawing status message displays the number of files and drawings created for the
model, and reports the errors generated during creation of the drawing.
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
3. Select StressIso > Create Drawing to open the Isometric Drawing Generation dialog
box.
4. Select Use Existing Style, and then click OK to open the Select Existing Style dialog box.
5. To select an isometric directory 2for your project, click Browse, and then select the root
directory.
6. To select a project3, click Browse, and then select a project.
7. To select an isometric style, click Browse, and then select the style you want to apply.
8. Click Create Drawing to open the Drawings dialog box.
9. Select the drawings to view, and then click View to open the drawings in your default
viewer.
You must follow the standard folder structure to save the project file and the styles.
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
3. Select StressIso > Create Drawing to open the Isometric Drawing Generation dialog
box.
4. Select Create New Style, and then click OK to open the Isometric Style Configuration
dialog box.
2 An isometric directory is the root directory for files associated to a style. An isometric directory
can contain many projects.
3 Projects are create in an isometric directory and contain different drawing styles.
5. To the right of Create New Isometric Directory, click Browse to select an empty folder, or
create a new folder.
6. Under Create New Isometric Directory, click Create to generate the required folder
structure and files.
7. To select a drawing frame4, click Browse and select a drawing frame in the Open Drawing
Frame Template dialog box.
8. Similarly, to specify a folder to save your drawings in Drawing Path, click Browse and
select a folder.
9. Select Units to select a unit system for your drawing.
10. Select Drawing Size to select a size for the drawing.
11. Click Create Drawing to save the style you created and generate drawing files.
12. On the Drawings dialog box, select the files you want to view, and then click View to open
the drawings in your default viewer.
4 Drawing frames are the backing sheets used to create your drawing. By default, different types
of drawing frames are generated when you create a new style.
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
3. Select StressIso > Annotations to open the Stress Isometric Annotations pane.
4. Select the Input tab.
5. From the Feature list, select an input feature that you want to include in your template.
6. To select all the nodes or elements, press SHIFT and then select the first and the last check
box of the list.
7. Similarly, select all the nodes and elements of other input features that you want to include
in your template.
8. To define annotation preferences for your template, click the Settings tab and select text
box shapes for the input features.
9. Select StressIso > Save Template to open the Save Annotation Template dialog box.
10. On the Save Annotation Template dialog box, type a file name and then click Save to save
the template.
Only input features can be selected and saved as a template.
Apply a Template
You can apply an existing template to a new piping model. All the selections made while
creating a template are applied to the new model along with the annotation preferences. You
can apply a template to a piping model only if a stress Iso file associated to the model does not
already exist. To apply an annotation template to a new model.
1. Select File > Open to open a model.
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
3. Select StressIso > Apply Template to open the Open Annotation Template dialog box.
4. Select the template file to use, and then click Open to apply the template.
5. To clear all annotations, select StressIso > Reset Annotation.
6. To save the applied annotations, select StressIso > Save Annotation.
Topics
Tutorial A - Creating a stress isometric drawing using the default drawing
style ................................................................................................ 767
Tutorial B - Adding annotations for Input and Output features ...... 770
Tutorial C - Adding custom annotations and configure annotations
preferences .................................................................................... 772
Tutorial D - Creating and applying a stress iso template ............... 776
Topics
Opening an existing CAESAR II file .............................................. 768
Creating a drawing using the default style ..................................... 769
5. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
Topics
Adding annotations for input features ............................................ 770
Adding annotations for output features .......................................... 771
4. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
5. Select StressIso > Annotations to open the Stress Isometric Annotations pane. By
default, the pane opens the Input tab.
6. The Feature list displays all the input features available in CAESAR II. Depending on the
feature you select a list of nodes associated to the feature is displayed.
Click the check boxes in the Select column if you want to include the information associated
to the node or element in your drawing. For example, select Node Numbers in the Feature
list, and then select nodes 110 and 115. Annotations for the selected node numbers are
added to the model and are visible in the display area.
2. The Load Cases list displays a list of load cases used in the analysis, the results generated
for each load case are listed in the Results box. You can view a list of nodes or elements
for each result set and then select nodes and elements you want to annotate. Let us
consider Load Case 3 and then select elements 75-80 and 110-115 for Stress. You can now
view the annotations for the selected elements in the display area.
Topics
Adding custom annotations ........................................................... 772
Configuring annotation preferences .............................................. 774
Select Nodal Annotations tab to view the list of nodes defined in the model. You can now add
your remarks in the User Annotations cell associated to each node. For example, click the cell
associated to node 80 and type This is a user annotation for node 80.
1. Similarly, select Elemental Annotations tab to view the list of elements in the model and
add your remarks in the User Annotation cell associated to the element you want to
annotate. Here we add a note for element 75-80.
2. Click the User Annotations cell associated to element 75-80 and type This is a custom
annotation for element 75-80.
The custom annotations you add are not shown in the display area and can be viewed only
in the drawing.
2. Let us select Circle for Node Numbers, No Box for Output Stress Data, and Filleted
Rectangle for Nodal Annotations and Elemental Annotations.
You cannot view these changes in the display area, the changes you made are updated
when you create a drawing.
Topics
Creating a template ....................................................................... 776
Applying a template ....................................................................... 778
Creating a template
In this tutorial we learn to create and save a stress iso annotation template. For this tutorial,
open Relief.c2 from the CAESAR II example folders.
To create a template:
1. Select StressIso > Annotation to open the Stress Isometric Annotations pane. You can
only include the input features in a template. To include an input feature in a template you
must select all the nodes listed for that feature.
2. Click the Feature list, select a feature, and then select all the nodes listed for the feature.
For example let us select all the nodes listed for the Restraint/hanger Types feature.
3. Similarly, select all the nodes or elements of other input features that you want to include.
4. Select Settings tab to specify a text box shape for the input feature you selected in the
earlier part of this tutorial. Let us select Filleted Rectangle for the Restraint/hanger types
feature.
5. Select StressIso > Save Template to save your selections as a template. A template file
with .ist extension is saved in the model folder.
Applying a template
After you create and save a template, you can apply this template to your piping models. When
you select all the nodes of a feature to create a template, that input feature gets selected when
you apply the template to a new piping model. You can clear the selections if you do not want to
display all the nodes or elements of the input feature included in a template.
This part of the tutorial directs you on how to apply a saved template to a piping model. You can
apply a template to a piping model only if the model is not already annotated and the stress iso
file (.iso) associated to the model does not exist.
To apply a template to a new model:
1. Select Start > Intergraph CAS > CAESAR II > CAESAR II.
2. Select File > Open.
3. On the Open dialog box, click the Examples button on the right side.
This opens the Examples folder.
4. Select Jacket.c2 from the file list, and then click Open.
5. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics to open the model in the C2Isogen
module.
6. Select StressIso > Apply Annotation, and then select a template file.
7. Select StressIso > Annotation to view the selections you made while creating the template
in the display area.
It can be seen in the above figure that all the nodes listed under Restraint/hanger types are
selected in the new model.
HEI Standard - Evaluates piping loads on feedwater heaters. For more information, see Heat
Exchange Institute (on page 875).
API 560 - Evaluates piping loads on fired heaters. For more information, see API 560 (Fired
Heaters for General Refinery Services) (on page 878).
In This Section
Intersection Stress Intensification Factors ..................................... 782
Bend Stress Intensification Factors ............................................... 788
WRC 107/297 Vessel/Nozzle Stresses ......................................... 796
Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations ............................................. 802
Pipeline Remaining Strength Calculations (B31G) ........................ 822
Expansion Joint Rating .................................................................. 827
Structural Steel Checks - AISC...................................................... 832
NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines) ..................................................... 840
API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps) ......................................................... 848
API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors) ............................................... 860
API 661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers) ......................................... 869
Heat Exchange Institute ................................................................. 875
API 560 (Fired Heaters for General Refinery Services) ................ 878
Enter the necessary problem-specific data in the input fields, and then click Run Analysis to
run the analysis. After processing is complete, stress intensification factors are reported for a
range of different configuration values on the Output tab, as shown below.
Topics
Intersection Type ........................................................................... 785
Piping Code ID ............................................................................... 785
Header Pipe Outside Diameter ...................................................... 786
Header Pipe Wall Thickness.......................................................... 786
Branch Pipe Outside Diameter ...................................................... 786
Branch Pipe Wall Thickness .......................................................... 787
Branch Largest Diameter at Intersection ....................................... 787
Pad Thickness ............................................................................... 787
Intersection Crotch Radius ............................................................ 787
Intersection Crotch Thickness ....................................................... 788
Extrusion Crotch Radius ................................................................ 788
Weld Type ...................................................................................... 788
Ferritic Material .............................................................................. 788
Design Temperature ...................................................................... 788
Intersection Type
Specifies the intersection type to be reviewed. After you click Run Analysis , the software
generates tables that show the relationship between the SIFs for the entered piping code, WRC
329, ASME III (NC and ND), and Schneider recommendations. You can choose from the
following:
Reinforced Fabricated Tee
Unreinforced Fabricated Tee
Welding Tee
Sweepolet
Weldolet
Extruded Welding Tee
Bonney Forge Sweepolet
Bonney Forge Latrolet
Bonney Forge Insert Weldolet
Piping Code ID
Specifies the piping code ID. The following piping codes are allowed:
1 - B31.1
3 - B31.3
4 - B31.4
5 - B31.5
8 -B31.8 & B31.8, Chapter VIII
10 - B31.9
11 - B31.11
12 - ASME Sect.III, Class 2
13 - ASME Sect.III, Class 3
14 - Navy 505 (1984)
15 - CAN/CSA Z662
16 - CAN/CSA Z662, Chapter 11
17 - BS 806 (1993) (Issue 1, September 1993)
18 - Swedish Method 1, 2nd Edition Stockholm (1979)
19 - Swedish Method 2, 2nd Edition Stockholm (1979)
20 - B31.1 (1967)
21 - Stoomwezen
22 - RCC-M C
23 - RCC-M D
24 - CODETI
25 - Norwegian TBK 5-6
26 - FDBR
27 - BS 7159
28 - UKOOA
29 - IGE/TD/12
30 - Det Norske Veritas (DNV) (1996)
31 - B31.4, Chapter IX (Offshore)
32 - EN-13480
33 - GPTC/Z380
34 - PD-8010, Part 1
35 - PD-8010, Part 2
36 - ISO-14692
37 - HPGSL
38 - JPI
For a complete list of current publication dates for piping codes, see the CAESAR II Quick
Reference Guide.
Pad Thickness
Specifies the thickness of the pad on the reinforced fabricated tee.
In most piping codes, the beneficial effect of the thickness of a pad is limited to a thickness less
than 1.5 times the nominal thickness of the fitting. This factor does not apply in BS806 or Z6662,
and is 2.5 in the Swedish piping code.
This option displays only for reinforced fabricated tees.
Weld Type
Specifies the weld type.
As Welded - This is an unfinished weld.
Finished/Ground Flush - The weld is ground flush on the inside and out and the SIF is 1.0.
Ferritic Material
Indicates that the material for this tee is ferrous, which enables the Y value to be computed on
the highest temperature value specified. This option is available for when you select ASME NC
and ASME ND in the Piping Code ID list.
Design Temperature
Specifies the system highest temperature. This value is required for piping codes ASME NC
and ASME ND to calculate material properties.
To begin, specify a new job name in the New Job Name Specification dialog box or click
Browse to navigate to an existing job file.
All CAESAR II analyses require a job name for identification purposes. After you have
created, or opened, a job, you can enter input data on the Global Input and Local Member
tabs and Output menus to define, analyze, and review your data.
The Bend Stress Intensification Factors window consists of two input tabs--the Bend tab (on
page 790) and the Trunnion tab (on page 794).
In most cases data that does not apply is left blank. For example, to review the SIFs for a
bend that does not have a trunnion, do not enter values for the trunnion-related input fields on
the Trunnion tab.
Bend Tab
Topics
Piping Code ID ............................................................................... 790
Pipe Outside Diameter ................................................................... 791
Wall Thickness of Attached Pipe ................................................... 791
Wall Thickness of Bend ................................................................. 792
Bend Radius .................................................................................. 792
Bend Angle (Degrees) ................................................................... 792
Number of Flanges (Laminate Type for BS7159 & UKOOA) ........ 792
Number of Cuts .............................................................................. 793
Seam Welded ................................................................................ 793
Pressure (Design Strain for BS 7159 & UKOOA) .......................... 793
Elastic Modulus .............................................................................. 793
Pressure Stiffening ........................................................................ 793
Piping Code ID
Identifies the piping code. The following piping codes are allowed:
1 - B31.1
3 - B31.3
4 - B31.4
5 - B31.5
8 -B31.8 & B31.8, Chapter VIII
10 - B31.9
11 - B31.11
12 - ASME Sect.III, Class 2
13 - ASME Sect.III, Class 3
14 - Navy 505 (1984)
15 - CAN/CSA Z662
16 - CAN/CSA Z662, Chapter 11
17 - BS 806 (1993) (Issue 1, September 1993)
18 - Swedish Method 1, 2nd Edition Stockholm (1979)
19 - Swedish Method 2, 2nd Edition Stockholm (1979)
20 - B31.1 (1967)
21 - Stoomwezen
22 - RCC-M C
23 - RCC-M D
24 - CODETI
h = (Tn)(R) / (ry)
Bend Radius
Specify the radius of the bend. The distance from the arc center to the centerline of the bend
curvature.
Number of Cuts
Specifies the number of cuts in the miter bend.
If only a single cut is entered, then the bend is always considered to be a widely spaced mitered
bend. For multi-cut miters, CASEAR II uses the radius and the number of cuts to determine if
the miter is closely or widely spaced.
Seam Welded
Indicates when straight pipes are seam welded and affects the SIF calculations for that pipe
section due to seam welded fabrication. This option is only available when IGE/TD/12 is active.
Elastic Modulus
Identifies the cold modulus of elasticity. Used with the pressure stiffening calculation. This is an
optional entry.
Pressure Stiffening
Controls the pressure stiffening effects on elbows. Pressure stiffening has its most significant
effect in larger diameter bends adjacent to sensitive equipment (compressors). Including
pressure stiffening where it is not included by default draws more of the system moment to the
nozzle adjacent to the bend.
This option is controlled using the CAESAR II setup file but is most commonly left to the default
condition. The default is different for each piping code because some codes mention pressure
stiffening explicitly, while others do not. Available options are:
Yes - Include pressure stiffening.
No - Remove pressure stiffening.
Default - Follow the piping code default.
Trunnion Tab
There are limits that must be satisfied before SIFs can be calculated on trunnions. These limits
come directly from the paper by Hankinson, Budlong and Albano.
t/T 0.2 and t/T 2.0
D/T 20 and D/T 60
d/D 0.3 and d/D 0.8
Where:
t = Wall thickness of the trunnion
T = Wall thickness of the bend
d = Outside diameter of the trunnion
D = Outside diameter of the bend
To review the SIFs for a bend that does not have a trunnion, do not enter values for
the trunnion-related input fields on the Trunnion tab.
Topics
Outside Diameter ........................................................................... 794
Wall Thickness ............................................................................... 794
Stress Concentration Factor .......................................................... 795
Stress Concentrations and Intensification ..................................... 795
Outside Diameter
Specifies the staunchion outside diameter. This is an optional entry, used only if there is a
staunchion or dummy leg attached to the bend. If you define Staunchion OD, you must also
define Wall Thickness.
The stress intensification factors for dummy legs is from the paper: "Stress Indices for Piping
Elbows with Trunnion attachments for Moment and Axial Loads.", PVP Vol. 129, 1987.
The equation (1.7)i = (C2)(K2)is used to get from the calculated (C2) coefficients to the stress
intensification factor (i). If you do not define a value for the stress concentration factor, it defaults
to 2.0.
Wall Thickness
Designates the staunchion wall thickness. This is an optional entry, used only if there is a
staunchion or dummy leg attached to the bend.
The stress intensification factors for dummy legs are from the paper: "Stress Indices for Piping
Elbows with Trunnion attachments for Moment and Axial Loads.", PVP Vol. 129, 1987.
The equation (1.7)i = (C2)(K2) is used to get from the calculated (C2) coefficients to the stress
intensification factor (i). If you do not define a value for the stress concentration factor, it defaults
to 2.0.
The module allows multiple analyses to be saved inside the same file. The Job Explorer--the
left pane of the WRC 107/297 window--lists each analysis contained in the job, sorted by
analysis type: WRC-107 or WRC-297. The items in the list are created by combining the item
description and the item number, which can be subsequently changed in the data input window.
The Loads pane, which contains a data input grid, displays the selected analysis type.
The following commands are available on the WRC 107/297 toolbar.
Starts the analysis and displays the results in the WRC 197/207 window.
Performs the initial WRC 107 calculation and summation and sends the result to
Microsoft Word.
To add a new analysis to the job, click the corresponding analysis type, 107 or 297,on the
toolbar. You can remove an analysis from the job by selecting it in the Job Explorer, and then
clicking Erase on the toolbar. To display an analysis in the Loads pane, select it from the
list in the Job Explorer.
The analysis results and the graphical representation display on the Analysis and Drawing tabs
on the right side of the Loads pane. The data that displays on both of these tabs automatically
updates after each change in the Loads pane, even if they are hidden.
The following example shows a sample analysis report.
Nozzle curves in the WRC Bulletin 107 cover typical applications of nozzles in vessels or
piping. If any of the interpolation parameters fall outside the limits of the available curves,
CAESAR II uses the last curve value in the appropriate WRC table.
Topics
WRC Bulletin 107(537) .................................................................. 798
WRC Bulletin 297 .......................................................................... 802
WRC 107 is commonly used to conservatively estimate vessel shell stress state at the edge of a
reinforcing pad. The stress state in the vessel wall when the nozzle has a reinforcing pad can be
estimated by considering a solid plug with an outside diameter equal to the O.D. of the
reinforcing pad, subjected to the same nozzle loading.
Before attempting to use WRC 107 to evaluate the stress state of any nozzle-vessel
junction, always verify that the geometric restrictions limiting the application of WRC 107 are not
exceeded. These vary according to the attachment and vessel types. Refer to the WRC 107
bulletin directory for this information.
Using WRC 107 is not recommended when the nozzle is very light or when the parameters in
the WRC 107 data curves are unreasonably exceeded. Output from WRC 107 includes the
figure numbers for the curves accessed, the curve abscissa, and the values retrieved. Check
these outputs against the actual curve in WRC 107 to become familiar with the accuracy of the
stresses calculated. For example, if parameters for a particular problem are always near or past
the end of the figures curve data, then the calculated stresses may not be reliable.
Section VIII, Division 2 Mandatory Design Based on Stress Analysis does provide a detailed
approach for dealing with these local stresses. The analysis procedure outlined in the
aforementioned code is used in CAESAR II to perform the stress evaluation. In order to evaluate
the stresses through an elastic analysis, three stress combinations (summations) must be made:
Pm
Pm + Pl + Pb
Pm + Pl + Pb + Q
P is the design pressure of the system. Pm is the general membrane stress due to internal
pressure removed from discontinuities and can be estimated for the vessel wall from the
expression (PD) / (4t) for the longitudinal component and (PD) / (2t) for the hoop component.
The allowable for Pm is kSmh, where Smh is the allowable stress intensity. The value of k can
be taken from Table AD-150.1 of the code, which ranges from 1.0 for sustained loads to 1.2 for
sustained plus wind loads or sustained plus earthquake loads. Pl is the local membrane stress
at the junction due to the sustained piping loads. Pb is the local bending stress (and is zero at
the nozzle to vessel connections according to Section VIII, Division 2 of ASME Code). Q is the
secondary stress due to thermal expansion piping loads or the bending stress due to internal
pressure thrust and sustained piping loads. The allowable stress intensity for the second stress
combination is 1.5kSmh, as defined by the Figure 4-130.1 of the Code. Smh is the hot stress
intensity allowable at the given design temperature. Both Pl and Q are calculated by WRC 107.
The third combination defines the range of the stress intensity, and its allowable is limited to
1.5(Smc+Smh).
A summation is provided automatically following the WRC 107 analysis and displays on the
Drawing window within the main WRC 107/297 window. The calculation provides a comparison
of the stress intensities to the entered allowables, along with a corresponding Pass/Fail ruling.
Failed items display in red.
Input for the flange stress and leakage calculations is divided into four input tabs:
Flange (see "Flange Tab" on page 804) - Describes flange geometry.
Bolts and Gasket (see "Bolts and Gasket Tab" on page 807) - Defines data for the bolts and
gasket.
Material Data (see "Material Data Tab" on page 816) - Defines material and stress-related
data.
Loads (see "Loads Tab" on page 819) - Describes the imposed loads.
Flange Tab
The following options are used to describe flange geometry.
Topics
Flange Type ................................................................................... 804
Flange Class .................................................................................. 804
Flange Grade ................................................................................. 805
Flange Outside Diameter (A) ......................................................... 805
Flange Inside Diameter (B) ............................................................ 805
Flange Thickness (t) ...................................................................... 806
Flange Face OD or Lapjt Cnt ......................................................... 806
Flange Face ID or Lapjt Cnt ID ...................................................... 806
Small End Hub Thickness.............................................................. 807
Large End Hub Thickness ............................................................. 807
Hub Length .................................................................................... 807
Flange Type
Specifies the flange type. Selecting a flange type is required only if an ASME stress calculation
for the flange is needed. If you are performing only a leakage check, you can omit this entry.
Flange Class
Identifies the ANSI B16.5 or API 605 flange rating, (class).
B16.5 valid classes are 150, 300, 400, 600, 900, 1500, 2500
API 605 valid classes are 75, 150, 300, 400, 600, 900
B16.5 specifications govern up to, and including 24-inch pipe; API 605 specifications govern
nominal pipe sizes 26- though 60-inch.
The flange rating entry is used to access the B16.5 or API pressure/temperature rating table.
Minimum and maximum allowed ratings for all different materials available in the tables are
stored. Minimum and maximum computed allowed equivalent pressures, and safety factors are
found from this data. API 605 does not have minimum and maximum data. The minimum and
maximum data is the same when the nominal English pipe size is greater than 24-inches.
Flange Grade
Specifies the grade of the attached flange. The grade of the attached flange is a value such as
1.1, 1.2, or 2.1. It can be found in the ANSI Standard B16.5 code for flanges and fittings. The
flange grade is used in conjunction with the flange class and design temperature to look up the
allowable pressure rating for the ANSI flange.
If the grade is 1.10, then type 1.101. If you are designing a custom flange and do not want the
printout for the allowable pressure, then type 0.
Hub Length
Defines the hub length. This value is referred to as h in the ASME code. For flange geometries
without hubs, this length can be entered as zero, or left blank.
This value is required only for ASME stress calculations. It is available in the flange ANSI
B16.5/API dimensional database. You can access the flange database properties by pressing
Ctrl+F from any data input field in the Flange tab.
When analyzing an optional type flange that is welded at the hub end, enter the hub length as
the leg of the weld, and include the thickness of the weld in the large end.
When analyzing a flange with no hub, such as a ring flange or a lap joint flange, enter a zero or
leave the field blank for the Hub Length, Small End Hub Thickness, and Large End Hub
Thickness. When designing a loose, ring-type flange that has a fillet weld at the back, enter the
size of a leg of the fillet weld as the large end of the hub.
Topics
Number of Bolts ............................................................................. 808
Bolt Diameter ................................................................................. 808
Bolt Initial Tightening Stress .......................................................... 808
Gasket Outer Diameter .................................................................. 809
Gasket Inner Diameter................................................................... 809
Uncompressed Gasket Thickness ................................................. 809
Effective Gasket Modulus .............................................................. 809
Leak Pressure Ratio ...................................................................... 810
Gasket Seating Stress ................................................................... 812
Nubbin Width or Ring ..................................................................... 814
Facing Sketch ................................................................................ 814
Facing Column ............................................................................... 814
Number of Bolts
Specifies the number of bolts.
The number of bolts in standard ANSI B16.5 and API 605 flanges is contained in the
flange database and is accessed by the software whenever you press Ctrl+F.
Bolt Diameter
Specifies the nominal diameter of the bolts. Standard bolt diameters for ANSI B16.5 and API
605 flanges are contained in the flange database and are accessed by the software whenever
press Ctrl+F.
Where 45,000 psi is a constant and d is the nominal diameter of the bolt.
This is a rule of thumb tightening stress that will typically be applied by field personnel tightening
the bolts. This computed value is printed in the output from the Flanges output. Compare this
value to the bolt stress printed in the ASME stress report (also in the output). The
rule-of-thumb tightening stress is frequently larger than the ASME required stress. When the
ASME required stress is entered into the Bolt Initial Tightening Stress field, a comparison of
the leakage safety factors can be made and the sensitivity of the joint to the tightening torque
can be determined. You are strongly encouraged to adjust these numbers to get a feel for the
relationship between all of the factors involved.
Corrugated Metal:
soft aluminum 2.75 3700.
soft copper or brass 3.00 4500.
iron or soft steel 3.25 5500.
Monel or 4%-6% chrome 3.50 6500.
Stainless steels and nickel 3.75 7600.
alloys
Grooved Metal
soft aluminum 3.25 5500.
soft copper or brass 3.50 6500.
iron or soft steel 3.75 7600.
Monel or 4%-6% chrome 3.75 9000.
Stainless steels and nickel 4.25 10100.
alloys
Corrugated Metal:
soft aluminum 2.75 3700.
soft copper or brass 3.00 4500.
iron or soft steel 3.25 5500.
Monel or 4%-6% chrome 3.50 6500.
Stainless steels and nickel 3.75 7600.
alloys
Grooved Metal
soft aluminum 3.25 5500.
soft copper or brass 3.50 6500.
iron or soft steel 3.75 7600.
Monel or 4%-6% chrome 3.75 9000.
Stainless steels and nickel 4.25 10100.
alloys
Facing Sketch
Specifies the facing sketch number according to the following correlations, according to Table
2-5-2 of the ASME code.
This value is required for calculating the contact gasket width and the effective gasket diameter,
G.
Facing Column
Specifies the facing column number according to the following correlations:
Vegetable fiber 2
Corrugated Metal:
soft aluminum 2
soft copper or brass 2
iron or soft steel 2
Monel or 4%-6% chrome 2
Stainless steels and nickel alloys 2
Grooved Metal
soft aluminum 2
soft copper or brass 2
iron or soft steel 2
Monel or 4%-6% chrome 2
Stainless steels and nickel alloys 2
Topics
Flange Material .............................................................................. 816
Bolt Material ................................................................................... 816
Design Temperature ...................................................................... 816
Flange Allowable @ Design Temperature ..................................... 817
Flange Allowable @ Ambient Temperature ................................... 817
Flange Modulus of Elasticity @ Design ......................................... 817
Flange Modulus of Elasticity @ Ambient ....................................... 817
Bolt Allowable @ Design Temperature.......................................... 818
Bolt Allowable @ Ambient Temperature ........................................ 818
Flange Allowable @ Stress Multiplier ............................................ 818
Bolt Allowable Stress Multiplier...................................................... 819
Flange Material
Displays the material database for flanges, taken from ASME Section VIII, Division 1.
Bolt Material
Displays the material database for bolting, taken from ASME Section VIII, Division 1.
Design Temperature
Specifies the flange design temperature. This value is required for ASME stress calculations,
and for ANSI B16.5/API rating table look-ups.
The design temperature is not used in the flexibility model of the flange.
Loads Tab
The following options are used to describe the imposed loads.
Topics
Design Pressure ............................................................................ 819
Axial Force ..................................................................................... 819
Bending Moment ............................................................................ 819
Disable Leakage Calculations ....................................................... 819
Disable Stress Calculations ........................................................... 820
Disable ANSI B16.5 Check ............................................................ 820
Design Pressure
Indicates the internal line pressure (lbs./sq.in.) in gage. This pressure is used in the flexibility
model of the flange in the ASME stress calculations and is the B16.5/API rating.
Axial Force
Defines the externally applied axial force applied to the flange joint by the attached piping. The
software does not include the effect of shear forces in the flexibility model.
Bending Moment
Specifies the external moment applied to the flange joint by the attached piping. If you have two
bending moments, SRSS them and enter the result here.
Flange Rating
This is an optional input. It has been a common practice in the industry to use the ANSI B16.5
and API 605 temperature/pressure rating tables as a gauge for leakage. Because these rating
tables are based on allowable stresses and are not intended for leakage prediction, the leakage
predictions that resulted are a function of the allowable stress for the flange material, not the
flexibility, or modulus of elasticity, of the flange. To give you a comparison to the old practice,
the minimum and maximum rating table values from ANSI and API are stored and are used to
print minimum and maximum leakage safety factors that are predicted from this method. An
example of the output that you get upon entering the flange rating is shown below:
EQUIVALENT PRESSURE MODEL -
Equivalent Pressure (lb./sq.in.) 1639.85
ANSI/API Min Equivalent Pressure Allowed 1080.00
ANSI/API Max Equivalent Pressure Allowed 1815.00
According to the older method, this shows that leakage occurred if a carbon steel flange is used,
and leakage does not occur if an alloy flange is used. Both flanges have essentially the same
flexibility tendency to leak.
The following input parameters are used only for the ASME Section VIII Division 1 stress
calculations:
Flange Type
Flange Outside Diameter
Design Temperature
Small End Hub Thickness
Large End Hub Thickness
Hub Length
Flange Allowables
Bolt Allowables
Gasket Seating Stress
Optional Allowable Multipliers
Flange Face & Gasket Dimensions
Specify the Flange Type (on page 804) on the Flange (see "Flange Tab" on page 804) tab. To
acquire material allowables from the Section VIII, Division 1 material library, use the Flange
Material (on page 816) list on the Material Data (see "Material Data Tab" on page 816) tab.
An input listing for a typical flange analysis is shown below:
CA E S A R I I MISCELLANEOUS REPORT ECHO
Flange Inside Diameter [B](in.) 30.560
Flange Thickness [t](in.) 4.060
Flange Rating (Optional) 300.000
Bolt Circle Diameter (in.) 38.500
Number of Bolts 32.000
Bolt Diameter (in.) 1.500
Bolt Initial Tightening Stress(lb./sq.in.)
Effective Gasket Diameter [G] (in.) 33.888
Uncompressed Gasket Thickness (in.) 0.063
Basic Gasket Width [b0] (in.) 0.375
Leak Pressure Ratio [m] 2.750
Effective Gasket Modulus(b./sq.in.) 300,000.000
Externally Applied Moment (optional)(in.lb.) 24,000.000
Externally Applied Force (optional)(lb.) 1,000.000
Pressure [P](lb./sq.in.) 400.000
The following inputs are required only if you wish to perform stress calcs
as per Sect VIII Div. 1
Flange Type (1-8, see ?-Help or Alt-P to plot) 1.000
Flange Outside Diameter [A](in.) 41.500
Design TemperatureF 650.000
Small End Hub Thickness [g0](in.) 1.690
Large End Hub Thickness [g1](in.) 3.440
Hub Length [h](in.) 6.620
Flange Allowable @Design Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 17,500.000
Flange Allowable @Ambient Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 17,500.000
Flange Modulus of Elasticity @Design(lb./sq.in.) 0.279E+08
Flange Modulus of Elasticity @Ambient(lb./sq.in.) 0.279E+08
Bolt Allowable @Design Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 25,000.000
Bolt Allowable @Ambient Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 25,000.000
Gasket Seating Stress [y](lb./sq.in.) 3,700.000
Flange Allowable Stress Multiplier 1.000
Bolt Allowable Stress Multiplier (VIII Div 2 4-1411.000
Disable Leakage Calculations (Y/N) N
Flange Face OD or Lapjt Cnt OD(in.) 34.500
Flange Face ID or Lapjt Cnt ID(in.) 33.000
Gasket Outer Diameter (in.) 36.000
Gasket Inner Diameter (in.) 33.000
Nubbin Width (in.)
Facing Sketch 1.000
Facing Column 2.000
Disable Leakage Calculations (Y/N) N
The software opens the Pipeline Remaining Strength Calculations (B31G) window. The
window consists of two input tabs--Data (see "Data Tab" on page 824) and Measurements (see
"Measurements Tab" on page 826).
After the data is entered, click Run Analysis to begin the computations. A typical output
report is shown below:
Data Tab
Most of the data required by this processor is acquired through actual field
measurements.
Topics
Pipe Nominal Diameter .................................................................. 825
Pipe Wall Thickness ...................................................................... 825
Design Pressure ............................................................................ 825
Material Yield Strength .................................................................. 825
Material Specified Minimum Yield ................................................. 825
Flaw Length ................................................................................... 825
Measurement Increment ................................................................ 826
Factor of Safety (FS) ..................................................................... 826
Design Factor (S) ........................................................................... 826
Design Pressure
Specifies the design pressure. This value is the maximum pressure reported in the output
section, although the maximum allowed pressure may be less than the input design pressure.
Flaw Length
Indicates the length of flaw or anomaly. This value is a measured quantity, usually taken in a
straight line.
Measurement Increment
Specify the measurement increment in this cell. This value defines how often along the flaw
length depth or thickness measurements are made.
The number of measurements should be calculated by ( flaw length / measurement increment )
+1
Measurements Tab
You can enter a maximum of twenty pit measurements on the Measurements input screen.
First, you must define the measurements. Select Pits if the measurements are in pit depths.
Select Thicknesses if the measurements are remaining wall thicknesses.
Pit depths are required for the computations. If remaining thicknesses are specified, the
pit depths are computed from wall thickness - remaining thickness.
In the individual cells, enter the measurement obtained along the flaw length. The values are
based on the selection of Pits or Thicknesses.
ex + ey + eq < erated
The software opens the EJMA Expansion Joint window. The window consists of three input
screens--Geometry (on page 831), Displacements and Rotations (on page 832), and Allowables
(on page 832).
After the necessary data is entered, click Run Analysis to begin the computations. After
processing completes, a report displaying both the input echo and the output calculations are
shown on a new tab called Output.
The units used for the coordinate and displacement values are the length units defined in
the active units file. Rotations are in units of degrees.
Geometry
Topics
Node Number for "From" End ........................................................ 831
Node Number for "To" End ............................................................ 831
Number of Convolutions ................................................................ 831
Flexible Joint Length ...................................................................... 831
Effective Diameter ......................................................................... 831
Z Axis Up ....................................................................................... 832
Coordinates.................................................................................... 832
Number of Convolutions
Defines the number of convolutions in the expansion joint.
Effective Diameter
Specifies the diameter of the circle whose area is equal to the effective area of the expansion
joint. The effective ID can be estimated using the following equation:
1.13 * sqrt (Effective Area)
You can find the effective area of the joint in the manufacturer's catalog.
Z Axis Up
Indicates that the z-axis is upward in your CAESAR II input file.
Coordinates
Defines the spatial coordinate at the appropriate end of the expansion joint
Allowables
Specifies the allowed expansion joint movement (translation or rotation) on a per convolution
basis and for the entire bellows. Enter values using the following units of measure:
Axial inches
Lateral inches
The other differences between these two code revisions deal with members in compression.
Several constants for Qs have been altered, and a new factor k c has been added. kc is a
compression element restraint coefficient defined in the 1989 edition of the code.
Because of these code differences, CAESAR II stores the name of the active database in the
input file for the AISC module when the data file is first created. Attempting to switch databases
or compute unity checks on angles using the 1977 code generates error messages and
processing terminates. You are urged to consult the applicable AISC Manuals when using this
command.
To begin the unity check calculations, specify a new job name in the New Job Name
Specification dialog box or click Browse to navigate to an existing job file.
All CAESAR II analyses require a job name for identification purposes. After you have
created, or opened, a job, you can enter input data on the Global Input and Local Member
tabs and Output menus to define, analyze, and review your data.
The software displays the AISC window, which consists of two input screens:Global Input (on
page 835) and Local Member Data (see "Local Member Data Tab" on page 837).
Output Reports
You can direct the output reports to the screen or to a printer. The output report begins with a
one page summary describing the current global data and units, as shown below.
The remaining pages in the output report show the data for the individual members. The last
column of the report contains the most important data (namely the unity check value) and the
governing AISC equation. A sample member output reports are shown below. The report is
applicable to jobs where sidesway is allowed.
Global Input
The following options are used to enter data that applies to all members being evaluated.
Topics
Structural Code .............................................................................. 835
Allowable Stress Increase Factor .................................................. 835
Stress Reduction Factors Cmy and Cmz ...................................... 835
Youngs Modulus ........................................................................... 836
Material Yield Strength .................................................................. 836
Bending Coefficient ........................................................................ 836
Form Factor Qa ............................................................................. 836
Allow Sidesway .............................................................................. 836
Resize Members Whose Unity Check Value Is . . . ....................... 836
Minimum Desired Unity Check ...................................................... 837
Maximum Desired Unity Check ..................................................... 837
Structural Code
Identifies the code and year, typically matching the database in use. Slight variations in the
computations depend on which code year is selected. Single angles can only be checked if
AISC 1989 is selected.
1.0 for members whose ends are unrestrained against rotation in the plane of bending.
Youngs Modulus
Specifies the slope of the linear portion of the stress-strain diagram. For structural steel this
value is usually 29,000,000 psi.
Bending Coefficient
Specifies the bending coefficient (Cb). Use 1.0 in computing the value of Fby and Fbz for use in
Formula 1.6-1a or when the bending moment at any point in an unbraced length is larger than
the moment at either end of the same length. Otherwise, Cb shall be:
Cb = 1.75 + 1.05(M1/M2) + 0.3(M1/M2)2
but not more than 2.3, where (M1/M2) is the ratio of the smaller to larger moments at the ends.
Form Factor Qa
Defines the allowable axial stress reduction factor equal to the effective area divided by the
actual area.
Consult the latest edition of the AISC code for the current computation methods for the
effective area.
Allow Sidesway
Controls the ability of a frame or structure to experience sidesway (joint translation). This affects
the computation of several of the coefficients used in the unity check equations. Additionally, for
frames braced against sidesway, moments at each end of the member are required. Sidesway
is allowed.
Topics
Member Start Node ....................................................................... 838
Member End Node ......................................................................... 838
Member Type ................................................................................. 838
In-And Out-Of-Plane Fixity Coefficients Ky And Kz ....................... 838
Unsupported Axial Length ............................................................. 839
Unsupported Length (In-Plane Bending) ....................................... 839
Unsupported Length (Out-Of-Plane Bending) ............................... 839
Double Angle Spacing ................................................................... 839
Young's Modulus ........................................................................... 839
Material Yield Strength .................................................................. 839
Axial Member Force ....................................................................... 839
In-Plane Bending Moment ............................................................. 840
Out-of-Plane Bending Moment ...................................................... 840
In-Plane Small Bending Moment ................................................. 840
In-Plane Large Bending Moment ................................................ 840
Out-of-Plane Small Bending Moment .......................................... 840
Out-of-Plane Large Bending Moment ......................................... 840
Member Type
Specifies the AISC shape label found in the AISC manual. The shape label is used to acquire
the member geometric properties from the database. For properties to be obtained, the label
you enter must match exactly the label in the database.
Because many of the angle labels can be found in the single angles, the double angles (long
legs back to back), and the double angles (short legs back to back), require an angle type to tell
them apart. Enter a D double angles with equal legs, and double angles with long legs back to
back. Enter a B for double angles with short legs back to back.
Young's Modulus
Specifies the slope of the linear portion of the stress-strain diagram. For structural steel this
value is usually 29,000,000 psi. This value of Youngs modulus overrides the Young's Modulus
(see "Youngs Modulus" on page 836) value specified on the Global Input tab.
For cumulative equipment allowables, NEMA SM23 states that "the combined resultants of the
forces and moments of the inlet, extraction, and exhaust connections resolved at the centerline
of the exhaust connection", be within a certain multiple of Dc, where Dc is the diameter of an
opening whose area is equal to the sum of the areas of all of the individual equipment
connections. A typical turbine cumulative (summation) equipment calculation is shown below:
SFX, SFY, and SFZ are the respective components of the forces from all connections resolved
at the discharge nozzle. FC(RSLT) is the result of these forces. SMX, SMY and SMZ are the
respective components of the moments from all connections resolved at the discharge nozzle.
Dc is the diameter of the equivalent opening as discussed above.
The software opens the NEMA SM23 window. Aside from the description, there is only one input
tab for the NEMA turbine. The Nema Input tab enables iterative addiction of an arbitrary number
of nozzles to the model. To add a nozzle, click Add Nozzle.
NODE FX FY FZ MX MY MZ
To find the forces acting on the turbine at points 35 and 50, reverse the sign of the forces that
act on the piping:
LOADS ON TURBINE @ 35 -108 -67 -93 -162 47 481
LOADS ON TURBINE @ 50 192 -7 11 -369 522 -39
Output Reports
The first page of the output is the input echo. The second page, as well as some of the
remaining pages, display the individual nozzle calculations. The last page displays the
summation calculations. The example below shows a sample input echo report.
The actual number of output pages varies and depends on the number of nozzles defined
in the input.
The NEMA output report for the above turbine example shows that the turbine passed. The
highest summation load is only 56% of the allowable. If the turbine had failed, **FAILED** would
have displayed, in red, under the STATUS column opposite to the load combination that was
excessive. The following two examples show sample NEMA output nozzle calculations and
NEMA output summation calculations, respectively.
Topics
Z-Axis Vertical ................................................................................ 845
Cos X & Y ...................................................................................... 845
Nozzle Number .............................................................................. 845
Nozzle Type ................................................................................... 846
Nozzle Diameter ............................................................................ 846
DX .................................................................................................. 846
DY .................................................................................................. 846
DZ .................................................................................................. 847
Global Force FX ............................................................................. 847
Global Force FY ............................................................................. 847
Global Force FZ ............................................................................. 847
Global Moment MX ........................................................................ 847
Global Moment MY ........................................................................ 847
Global Moment MZ ........................................................................ 847
Select Load Jobs and Load Case .................................................. 848
Z-Axis Vertical
Controls the plane in which the Z-axis lies. By default, CAESAR II assumes the Y-axis is vertical
with the X- and Z-axes in the horizontal plane. If you select this option, the software places the
Z-axis in the vertical plane, and the X- and Y-axes are in the horizontal plane.
Cos X & Y
Specifies the direction cosines (X, Z) for the equipment shaft centerline. For example, if shaft CL
is along the Z-axis, the direction cosines are as follows:
cosine X = 0.0
cosine Z = 1.0
Nozzle Number
Identifies the node number that describes the nozzle flange connection. Enter a positive number
only.
Nozzle Type
Identifies the nozzle type. This is used only for informational purposes in the output report.
Nozzle Diameter
Specifies the nozzle pipe nominal diameter.
DX
Specifies the X-distance from the force/moment resolution point to the nozzle.
NEMA SM 23 is ambiguous about the point of resolution of the combined forces and moments.
The resolution points are interpreted to be the following two points:
1. The face of the flange at the exhaust nozzle connection.
2. The intersection point of the exhaust nozzle centerline and the equipment shaft centerline.
In order to resolve the forces and moments at the current nozzle connection, enter the
X-distance from the current nozzle to each connection. Distance from the exhaust to the exhaust
nozzle is 0.0. In order to resolve the forces and moments at the intersection point of the exhaust
nozzle and the shaft centerlines, enter the X-distance from the intersection point to each
connection.
DY
Specifies the Y-distance from the force/moment resolution point to the nozzle.
NEMA SM 23 is ambiguous about the point of resolution of the combined forces and moments.
The resolution points are interpreted to be the following two points:
1. The face of the flange at the exhaust nozzle connection.
2. The intersection point of the exhaust nozzle centerline and the equipment shaft centerline.
In order to resolve the forces and moments at the current nozzle connection, enter the
Y-distance from the current nozzle to each connection. Distance from the exhaust to the exhaust
nozzle is 0.0. In order to resolve the forces and moments at the intersection point of the exhaust
nozzle and the shaft centerlines, enter the Y-distance from the intersection point to each
connection.
DZ
Specifies the Z-distance from the force/moment resolution point to the nozzle.
NEMA SM 23 is ambiguous about the point of resolution of the combined forces and moments.
The resolution points are interpreted to be the following two points:
1. The face of the flange at the exhaust nozzle connection.
2. The intersection point of the exhaust nozzle centerline and the equipment shaft centerline.
In order to resolve the forces and moments at the current nozzle connection, enter the
Z-distance from the current nozzle to each connection. Distance from the exhaust to the exhaust
nozzle is 0.0. In order to resolve the forces and moments at the intersection point of the exhaust
nozzle and the shaft centerlines, enter the Z-distance from the intersection point to each
connection.
Global Force FX
Specifies the X-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the nozzle.
Global Force FY
Specifies the Y-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the nozzle.
Global Force FZ
Specifies the Z-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the nozzle.
Global Moment MX
Specifies the X-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the nozzle.
Global Moment MY
Specifies the Y-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the nozzle.
Global Moment MZ
Specifies the Z-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the nozzle.
To begin an analysis of piping loads on centrifugal pumps, specify a new job name in the New
Job Name Specification dialog box or click Browse to navigate to an existing job file. .
All CAESAR II analyses require a job name for identification purposes. After you have
created, or opened, a job, you can enter input data on the Global Input and Local Member
tabs and Output menus to define, analyze, and review your data.
The software displays the API 610 window, which consists of three data input tabs: Input Data
(see "Input Data Tab" on page 854), Suction Nozzle (see "Suction Nozzle Tab" on page 857),
and Discharge Nozzle (see "Discharge Nozzle Tab" on page 858).
The following example is taken from the API 610 code and shows the review of an overhung
end-suction process pump in English units. The three CAESAR II input tabs are shown.
Topics
Vertical In-Line Pumps................................................................... 855
Centerline Direction Cosine X........................................................ 855
Centerline Direction Cosine Z ........................................................ 855
Basepoint Node Number ............................................................... 856
Suction Nozzle Node Number ....................................................... 856
Suction Nozzle Nominal Diameter ................................................. 856
Suction Nozzle Type ...................................................................... 856
Discharge ....................................................................................... 856
Discharge Nozzle Nominal Diameter ............................................. 856
Discharge Nozzle Type .................................................................. 856
Factor for Table 4 Allowables ........................................................ 857
Discharge
Identifies the node number that describes the discharge nozzle flange connection. Enter only a
positive number.
Topics
DX .................................................................................................. 857
DY .................................................................................................. 857
DZ .................................................................................................. 858
Forces on Nozzle ........................................................................... 858
Moments on Nozzle ....................................................................... 858
DX
Specifies the distance between the suction nozzle and base point along the X-axis. Enter a
positive value if the suction nozzle X-coordinate is greater than that of the base point, that is, if
the suction nozzle is farther out on the positive X-axis.
When analyzing vertical in-line pumps, the X-, Y-, and Z-distances (DX, DY, and DZ) are not
used.
The API 610 10th Edition defines the base point as the center of the pump. The center of
the pump is defined as the intersection of the pump shaft centerline and a vertical plane
passing through the center of the two pedestals.
DY
Specifies the distance between the suction nozzle and base point along the Y-axis. Enter a
positive value if the suction nozzle Y-coordinate is greater than that of the base point, that is, if
the suction nozzle is farther out on the positive Y-axis.
When analyzing vertical in-line pumps, the X, Y, and Z distances (DX, DY, and DZ) are not
used.
The API 610 10th Edition defines the base point as the center of the pump. The center of
the pump is defined as the intersection of the pump shaft centerline and a vertical plane
passing through the center of the two pedestals.
DZ
Specifies the distance between the suction nozzle and base point along the Z-axis. Enter a
positive value if the suction nozzle Z-coordinate is greater than that of the base point, that is, if
the suction nozzle is farther out on the positive Z-axis.
When analyzing vertical in-line pumps, the X, Y, and Z distances (DX, DY, and DZ) are not
used.
The API 610 10th Edition defines the base point as the center of the pump. The center of
the pump is defined as the intersection of the pump shaft centerline and a vertical plane
passing through the center of the two pedestals.
Forces on Nozzle
Identifies the X-, Y-, or Z-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the suction
nozzle.
Enter the forces in their global orientation. For vertical in-line pumps, the orientation of the
nozzle centerline is used to determine if the nozzle is in tension or compression. Positive
direction is from discharge to suction nozzle.
Moments on Nozzle
Identifies the X-, Y-, or Z-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the suction
nozzle.
Topics
DX .................................................................................................. 859
DY .................................................................................................. 859
DZ .................................................................................................. 859
Forces on Nozzle ........................................................................... 860
Moments on Nozzle ....................................................................... 860
DX
Specifies the distance between the discharge nozzle and base point along the X-axis. Enter a
positive value if the discharge nozzle X-coordinate is greater than that of the base point, that is,
if the discharge nozzle is farther out on the positive X-axis.
When analyzing vertical in-line pumps, the X-, Y-, and Z- distances (DX, DY, and DZ) are
not used.
The API 610 10th Edition defines the base point as the center of the pump. The center of
the pump is defined as the intersection of the pump shaft centerline and a vertical plane
passing through the center of the two pedestals.
DY
Specifies the distance between the discharge nozzle and base point along the Y-axis. Enter a
positive value if the discharge nozzle Y-coordinate is greater than that of the base point, that is,
if the discharge nozzle is farther out on the positive Y-axis.
When analyzing vertical in-line pumps, the X-, Y-, and Z-distances (DX, DY, and DZ) are not
used.
The API 610 10th Edition defines the base point as the center of the pump. The center of
the pump is defined as the intersection of the pump shaft centerline and a vertical plane
passing through the center of the two pedestals.
DZ
Specifies the distance between the discharge nozzle and base point along the Z-axis. Enter a
positive value if the discharge nozzle Z-coordinate is greater than that of the base point, that is,
if the discharge nozzle is farther out on the positive Z-axis.
When analyzing vertical in-line pumps, the X-, Y-, and Z-distances (DX, DY, and DZ) are not
used.
The API 610 10th Edition defines the base point as the center of the pump. The center of
the pump is defined as the intersection of the pump shaft centerline and a vertical plane
passing through the center of the two pedestals.
Forces on Nozzle
Identifies the X-, Y-, or Z-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the discharge
nozzle.
Enter the forces in their global orientation. For vertical in-line pumps, the orientation of the
nozzle centerline is used to determine if the nozzle is in tension or compression. Positive
direction is from discharge to suction nozzle.
Moments on Nozzle
Identifies the X-, Y-, or Z-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the
discharge nozzle.
Node Number
Indicates the node number that describes the suction nozzle flange connection. Enter a positive
number.
Nominal Diameter
Specifies the suction nozzle pipe nominal diameter.
Node Number
Indicates the node number that describes the extraction nozzle #1 flange connection. Enter a
positive number.
Nominal Diameter
Specifies the extraction nozzle #1 pipe nominal diameter.
Node Number
Indicates the node number that describes the discharge nozzle flange connection. Enter a
positive number.
Nominal Diameter
Specifies the discharge nozzle pipe nominal diameter.
Node Number
Indicates the node number that describes the extraction nozzle #2 flange connection. Enter a
positive number.
Nominal Diameter
Specifies the extraction nozzle #2 pipe nominal diameter.
Equipment Centerline
Indicates the direction cosines (X,Z) for the equipment shaft centerline. For example, if shaft CL
is along the Z-axis, the direction cosines are:
cosine X = 0.0
cosine Z = 1.0
Topics
X Distance to Suction .................................................................... 863
Y Distance to Suction .................................................................... 863
Z Distance to Suction ..................................................................... 863
X Force Acting on Suction Nozzle ................................................. 863
Y Force Acting on Suction Nozzle ................................................. 864
Z Force Acting on Suction Nozzle ................................................. 864
X Moment Acting on Suction Nozzle ............................................. 864
Y Moment Acting on suction Nozzle .............................................. 864
Z Moment Acting on Suction Nozzle ............................................. 864
X Distance to Suction
Specifies the X-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the suction nozzle.
Y Distance to Suction
Specifies the Y-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the suction nozzle.
Z Distance to Suction
Specifies the Z-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the suction nozzle.
Topics
X Distance to Discharge ................................................................ 864
Y Distance to Discharge ................................................................ 865
Z Distance to Discharge ................................................................ 865
X Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle ............................................. 865
Y Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle ............................................. 865
Z Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle ............................................. 865
X Moment Acting on Discharge Nozzle ......................................... 865
Y Moment Acting on Discharge Nozzle ......................................... 865
Z Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle ............................................. 865
X Distance to Discharge
Specifies the X-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the discharge nozzle.
Y Distance to Discharge
Specifies the Y-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the discharge nozzle.
Z Distance to Discharge
Specifies the Z-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the discharge nozzle.
Topics
X Distance to Extraction Nozzle #1 ............................................... 866
Y Distance to Extraction Nozzle #1 ............................................... 866
Z Distance to Extraction Nozzle #1 ............................................... 866
X Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ....................................... 866
Y Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ....................................... 866
Z Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ....................................... 866
X Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ................................... 866
Y Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ................................... 866
Z Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ................................... 867
Topics
X Distance to Extraction Nozzle #2 ............................................... 867
Y Distance to Extraction Nozzle #2 ............................................... 867
Z Distance to Extraction Nozzle #2 ............................................... 867
X Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ....................................... 867
Y Moment Acting on Extraction Nozzle ......................................... 868
Z Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ....................................... 868
X Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ................................... 868
Y Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ................................... 868
Z Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ................................... 868
The software opens the API 661 window, which consists of the following three screens for input
of project-specific data: Input Data (see "Input Data Tab" on page 871), Inlet Nozzle (see "Inlet
Nozzle Tab" on page 873), and Outlet Nozzle (see "Outlet Nozzle Tab" on page 874).
Topics
Inlet Nozzle Node Number............................................................. 872
Inlet Nozzle Nominal Diameter ...................................................... 872
Outlet Nozzle Node Number .......................................................... 872
Outlet Nozzle Nominal Diameter ................................................... 872
Table 4 Force and Moment Multiplier ............................................ 872
Resultant Force and Moment Multiplier ......................................... 872
Tube Bundle Direction ................................................................... 873
Topics
Y Distance from Nozzle Face to Header Center ........................... 873
X Force Applied to Inlet Nozzle ..................................................... 873
Y Force Applied to Inlet Nozzle ..................................................... 873
Z Force Applied to Inlet Nozzle...................................................... 873
X Moment Applied to Inlet Nozzle ................................................. 874
Y Moment Applied to Inlet Nozzle ................................................. 874
Z Moment Applied to Inlet Nozzle .................................................. 874
Topics
Y Distance From Header Center to Nozzle Face .......................... 874
X Force Applied to Outlet Nozzle .................................................. 874
Y Force Applied to Outlet Nozzle .................................................. 874
Z Force Applied to Outlet Nozzle ................................................... 875
X Moment Applied to Outlet Nozzle ............................................... 875
Y Moment Applied to Outlet Nozzle ............................................... 875
Z Moment Applied to Suction Nozzle ............................................ 875
The software opens the HEI STD window, in which you can enter the necessary input data. The
following example shows sample input for the HEI module:
Because the pressure is greater than zero, a pressure thrust force is computed and
combined with the radial force.
Section 3.14 of the HEI bulletin discusses the computational methods used to compute these
allowable loads. The method employed by HEI is a simplification of the WRC 107 method,
where the allowable loads have been linearized to show the relationship between the maximum
permitted radial force and the maximum permitted moment vector. If this relationship is plotted
(using the moments as the abscissa and the forces as the ordinate), a straight line can be drawn
between the maximum permitted force and the maximum permitted moment vector, forming a
triangle with the axes. For any set of applied forces and moments, the nozzle passes if the
location of these loads falls inside the triangle. Conversely, the nozzle fails if the location of the
loads falls outside the triangle.
Because the pressure is greater than zero, a pressure thrust force is computed and
combined with the radial force modified to include both the plot of the allowables and the
location of the current load set on this plot. The HEI bulletin states that the effect of internal
pressure has been included in the combined stresses; however, the effect of the pressure on the
nozzle thrust has not. This requires combination with the other radial loads. CAESAR II
automatically computes the pressure thrust and adds it to the radial force if Add Pressure
Thrust is selected on the HEI Nozzle (on page 877) tab.
HEI Nozzle
The following options are used to enter input data for shell type heat exchanger nozzles.
Topics
Design Pressure ............................................................................ 877
Nozzle Outside Diameter ............................................................... 877
Shell Outside Diameter .................................................................. 877
Shell Thickness .............................................................................. 877
Material Yield Strength .................................................................. 877
Material Allowable Stress .............................................................. 878
Maximum Radial Force .................................................................. 878
Maximum Longitudinal Moment ..................................................... 878
Add Pressure Thrust Force............................................................ 878
Design Pressure
Sets the design pressure under which the vessel is operating. Enter a non-negative value.
Shell Thickness
Defines the shell wall thickness. This software does not take any corrosion allowance into
consideration.
The software opens the API 560 window. The window consists of one input tab on which you
can enter data for the tube nominal diameter and the forces and moments acting on the tube.
When you run the analysis, CAESAR II compares the input forces and moments to the
allowables as published in API 560. An example of the equipment report output is shown below.
Topics
Tube Node Number ....................................................................... 880
Tube Nominal Diameter ................................................................. 880
Tube Axial Force ............................................................................ 880
Tube Horizontal Shear Force......................................................... 880
Tube Vertical Shear Force ............................................................. 880
Tube Torsional Moment ................................................................. 881
Tube Horizontal Moment ............................................................... 881
Tube Vertical Moment .................................................................... 881
Technical Discussions
In This Section
Rigid Element Application .............................................................. 883
In-Line Flange Evaluation .............................................................. 885
Cold Spring .................................................................................... 886
Expansion Joints ............................................................................ 888
Hanger Sizing Algorithm ................................................................ 890
Class 1 Branch Flexibilities ............................................................ 895
Modeling Friction Effects ............................................................... 897
Nonlinear Code Compliance .......................................................... 898
Sustained Stresses and Nonlinear Restraints ............................... 899
Static Seismic Inertial Loads.......................................................... 902
Wind Loads .................................................................................... 903
Hydrodynamic (Wave and Current) Loading ................................. 905
Evaluating Vessel Stresses ........................................................... 918
Inclusion of Missing Mass Correction ............................................ 922
Fatigue Analysis Using CAESAR II ............................................... 927
Pipe Stress Analysis of FRP Piping ............................................... 940
Code Compliance Considerations ................................................. 961
Local Coordinates .......................................................................... 1001
Rigid Weight
Specifies a value for the weight of the rigid element. The rigid material weight is the weight of
the rigid excluding insulation, refractory, cladding, or fluid. If left blank, then the weight of the
rigid defaults to 0. A rigid element with zero weight is often used as a construction element, used
to move a centerline load to the shell wall, or used to model the effective stiffness and thermal
growth of a piece of equipment.
If left blank or 0, then the software does not add the additional weight due either to
insulation, refractory, cladding, or fluid.
developed during an Occasional Load Case to be Mfd, effectively the doubling flange
capacity for Occasional loadings.
Sy = Yield strength of flange material at design temperature. CAESAR II allows evaluation
to be done using as many as 10 different temperatures; Sy/36,000; where Sy, is given in psi,
cannot be greater than 36,000 psi
C = Bolt circle diameter
Ab = Total cross sectional area of bolts
PD = Design pressure
CAESAR II calculates an Equivalent Stress S in the flange and compares it to Sy (or 2*Sy for
occasional load cases), in the following manner:
S = 36,000* Mfs / (CAb * 3125) Min(Sy, 36000) (non-Occ)
S = 36,000 * Mfd / (CAb * 3125) 2.0 * Min(Sy, 36000) (Occ)
For systems of units that do not express stress in psi, the software converts the 36,000 values in
the above equations to the appropriate set of units.
You can do flange evaluations in Static Analysis only.
Cold Spring
Cold spring is a method where you introduce pipe strain in the installed state to modify the
resulting strain in the operating state. Adding this preload is commonly used to adjust (reduce)
equipment load in the operating state. A cut short describes an intentional gap in the pipe
assembly requiring an initial tensile load to close the final joint. A cut long describes an
intentional overlap in the pipe assembly requiring an initial compressive load to close the final
joint. This initial gap or overlap is modeled as a cut short material or a cut long material,
respectively. CAESAR II reduces the cut short to zero length and doubles the cut long in any
load case that includes the CS load in the load case definition.
This initial cold pull is difficult to implement with any accuracy and, being used in systems that
operate in the creep range, their long term effect is difficult to control or even predict. Due to the
difficulty of properly installing a cold spring system, most piping codes recommend that you only
use two-thirds of the specified cold spring for equipment load calculations. You can calculate the
cold spring element length (ignoring equipment growth) by using the following equation:
Ci = xLi dT
Where:
Ci = length of cold spring in direction i; where i is X, Y, or Z (inches)
Li = total length of pipe subject to expansion in direction i (inches)
= mean thermal expansion coefficient of material between ambient and operating temperature
(in/in/F)
dT = change in temperature (F)
x = percent cold spring
When x = 0%, there is no cold spring and there will be no reduction in the thermal strain found in
the operating load. When x = 100%, the operating load will have no thermal strain as all the
expected pipe strain will be realized in the installed state of the piping system. If x = 50%, the
pipe strain will be shared equally by both the installed load and operating load. This percent cold
spring (x) is not the same term as the two-thirds allowance mentioned above.
No credit can be taken for cold spring in the stress calculations, because the expansion
stress provisions of the piping codes require the evaluation of the stress range, which is
unaffected by cold spring, except perhaps in the presence of non-linear boundary conditions, as
discussed below. The cold spring adjusts installed and operating loads and the stress mean, but
not the stress range used in most expansion stress calculations.
Load Case 1 (OPE) W+T1+P1+CS includes all of the design cold spring
Load Case 3 (SUS) W+P1 standard sustained case for code stress check
Load Case4 (EXP) L1-L2 expansion case for code stress check.
Both the sustained loads and the operating loads must fall within the manufacturers
allowables for a specific piece of equipment.
5. Verify that using cold spring in the ambient state does not overload a piece of rotating
equipment as the unit starts.
Material numbers 18 and 19 are used to signal CAESAR II that the element in the
spreadsheet represents a length of pipe that is to be cut short or long during fabrication.
Expansion Joints
Checking the expansion joint box on the element enables definition of an expansion joint for that
element. Expansion joints can be modeled as a single element across the flexible length of the
joint or as a zero length element at the midpoint of the expansion joint. Expansion joints
elements have a zero length if the Delta fields on the Pipe Element spreadsheet are left blank or
zero.
When an expansion joint has a defined length, CAESAR II builds the expansion joint as a beam
element using the element length with the entered expansion joint stiffnesses.
Four stiffness values define the expansion joint:
Axial
Transverse
Torsion
Bending
Where
= 3.14159
Re = Expansion joint effective radius
t = Bellows thickness
E = Elastic Modulus
= Poissons Ratio
L = Flexible bellows length
When the expansion joint has a zero length, none of the expansion joint stiffnesses are
related. You must be sure that you enter a value in all of the Stiffness fields.
Effective ID
The pressure area used to set the pressure thrust force on an expansion joint is provided by the
expansion joint manufacturer either as an effective area or effective inside diameter (ID). If the
pressure thrust load is to be included in the analysis, the Effective ID must be provided in the
expansion joint model definition. Any load case that includes a pressure term (for example,
+P1) will include a thrust force on either end of the expansion joint based on this effective
ID.
Operating case #9
Installed Weight (if requested)
unloaded. More flexible intersections typically carry less load and thus have lower stresses. This
causes higher stresses in other parts of the system that have "picked up" the extra load.
The branch flexibility rules used in CAESAR II are taken from ASME III, Subsection NB, (Class
1), 1992 Edition, Issued December 31, 1992, from Code Sections NB-3686.4 and NB-3686.5.
When the reduced branch rules apply, use the following equations for the local stiffnesses:
TRANSLATIONAL:
AXIAL = RIGID
CIRCUMFERENTIAL = RIGID
LONGITUDINAL = RIGID
ROTATIONAL:
AXIAL = RIGID
CIRCUMFERENTIAL = (kx)d/EI
LONGITUDINAL = (kz)d/EI
Where:
RIGID = 1.0E12 lb./in. or 1.0E12 in.lb./deg.
d = Branch Diameter
E = Youngs Modulus
I = Cross Section Moment of Inertia
D = Header Diameter
T = Header Thickness
Tb = Branch Fitting Thickness
kx = 0.1(D/T)1.5[(T/t)(d/D)]0.5(Tb/T)
kz = 0.2(D/T)[(T/t)(d/D)]0.5(Tb/T)
For more information, see WRC 329 Section 4.9 Flexibility Factors. A brief quote from this
section follows:
"The significance of "k" depends upon the specifics of the piping system. Qualitatively, if "k" is
small compared to the length of the piping system, including the effect of elbows and their
k-factors, then the inclusion of "k" for branch connections will have only minor effects on the
calculated moments. Conversely, if "k" is large compared to the piping system length, then the
inclusion of "k" for branch connections will have major effects. The largest effect will be to
greatly reduce the magnitude of the calculated moments acting on the branch connection. To
illustrate the potential significance of "ks" for branch connections, we use the equation [above]
to calculate "k" for a branch connection with D=30 in., d=12.75 in., and T=t=0.375 in.:
k = 0.1(80)1.5(0.425)0.5 * (1.0) = 46.6
This compares to the more typical rigid-joint interpretation that k=1, rather than k=46.6 !"
Further discussion in section 4.9 illustrates additional problems that can arise by overestimating
the stiffness at branch connections. Problems arise by believing "mistakenly" that the stress at
the intersection is too high. Further reference should be made to this section in WRC 329.
Branch automatic flexibility generation can be used where the user has only defined the branch
element in the model, that is has left the header piping out of the analysis. In this case there will
be no "offset" equal to one-half of the header diameter applied to the branch end. A "partial
intersection" is one where either the header pipe is not modeled, is modeled with a single
element, or is part of a geometric intersection where the header pipes are not colinear. In the
case where there is no header pipe going to the intersection, there will be no modification to the
model for the class 1 branch flexibilities. When at least a single header pipe is recognized, the
local flexibility directions are defined by the branch alone and in accordance with the CAESAR II
defaults for circumferential and longitudinal directions for the branch and header. You must build
full intersection models at all times, not only when employing the class 1 branch flexibility. In
most cases, building full intersection models eliminates problems caused by the assumptions
necessary when a partial intersection is described.
In the equations in NB-3686.5 for tn, the thickness of the branch pipe is used in all cases.
When branches are skewed with respect to the header pipe, and where the two header pipes
are colinear, the local Class 1 flexibilities are still taken to be the longitudinal and circumferential
directions that are tangent to the header surface at its intersection with the branch.
Class 1 branch flexibilities can be formed at both ends of a single pipe element.
The offsets necessary to form the class 1 intersections are automatically generated by
CAESAR II. There is no extra input required by you to have CAESAR II build these
intersections.
If there are already user-defined offsets at an intersection end, the computed offset to get from
the header centerline to its surface along the centerline of the branch is added to the already
entered user offset.
Automatic offsets are generated providing that the distance from the header centerline to the
header surface along the branch centerline is less than or equal to 98% of the total pipe straight
length.
When an element with a bend designation is part of an intersection model, the offset and
flexibility calculations are not performed.
1. The default friction stiffness is 1,000,000 lb./in. To solve convergence problems, consider
decreasing this value.
2. Until the calculated load at the node equals (Mu * Normal force), the restraint load is the
product of the displacement multiplied by the friction stiffness.
3. Should the calculated load exceed the maximum value of the friction force, the friction force
stops increasing because a constant effort force opposite the sliding direction is inserted in
the model in place of the friction stiffness.
If you increase the friction stiffness in the setup file, the displacements at the node may
decrease slightly. Usually, this causes a re-distribution of the loads throughout the system that
could have an adverse effect on the solution convergence.
If problems arise during the solution of a job with friction at supports, reducing the friction
stiffness typically improves convergence. You must do several runs with varying values of the
friction stiffness to ensure the behavior of the system is consistent.
For more information on this subject, see "Inclusion of a Support Friction into a Computerized
Solution of a Self-Compensating Pipeline" by J. Sobieszczanski, published in the Transactions
of the ASME, Journal of Engineering for Industry, August 1972. A summary of the major points
of this paper is below.
sustained, and expansion stress calculations. This recommendation is useful when performing
spring hanger analysis of a multiple operating case system.
reference. If an engineer first sees a system in its cold condition, and watches it expand to its
operating condition, it appears that the first case (because weight and pressure primary loads
are present) is the sustained case, and the changes he viewed are thermal effects (due to
heat up) secondary loads due to displacements. If a second engineer first sees the same
system in the operating case and watches it cool down to the cold case, he may believe that the
first case he saw (the operating case) is the sustained case, and changes experienced from hot
to cold are the thermal expansion effects (the thermal stress ranges are the same in both
cases). Consider the further implications of cryogenic systems where changes from installed to
operating are the same as those experienced by hot systems when going from operating to
installed. After elastic shakedown has occurred, the question becomes clouded even further due
to the presence of thermally induced pre-stresses in the pipe during both the cold and hot
conditions. We feel either the operating or installed case (or some other one in-between) could
justifiably be selected for analysis as the sustained case, as long as the program is consistent.
We have selected the installed case (less the effect of cold spring) as our reference sustained
case, because thermal effects can be completely omitted from the solution (as intended by the
code). This best represents the support configuration when the sustained loads are initially
applied. If the pipe lifts off of a support when going from installed to operating, we view this as a
thermal effect which is consistent with the piping codes view of thermal effects as the
variation of stress distribution as the piping system goes from cold to hot, and is explicitly
corroborated by one code, an earlier edition of the French petrochemical code, which states that
weight stress distributions due to thermal growth of the pipe should be considered as expansion
stresses). For example, we feel that a change in a rigid support load from 2,000 lbs to zero
should be treated no differently than would be a variable spring load changing from 6,000 lbs to
4,000 lbs (or another rigid support load going 2,000 lbs to 1 lb). In the former case, if the pipe
became "overstressed", it would yield, and sag back to the support, relieving the stress. This
process is identical to the way that all other expansion stresses are relieved in a piping system.
We are confident that our interpretation is correct. However, we understand that our users may
not always agree with us that is why CAESAR II provides the greatest ability to custom tailor
the analysis to your individual specifications. If you want, you can analyze a "hot sustained"
case by adding two load cases to those normally recommended by CAESAR II. This is done by
assuming that the pipe expands first, and then the sustained loads are applied (this is of course
an idealized concept, but the stresses can only be segregated by segregating the applied loads,
so the sustained loads can only be applied either before, or after, the expansion loads).
Following are the default load cases, as well as those required for a "hot sustained."
Default New
L4: L1-L2(EXP)
L5: L1-L3(SUS)
In the new load case list, the second case still represents the cold sustained, while the fourth
case represents the expansion case (note that L1-L2, or W+P1+T1-W-P1, equals T1, with
non-linear effects taken into account). The third case represents the thermal growth of the
"weightless," non-pressurized pipe, against the non-linear restraints.
The fifth case (L1-L3, or W+P1+T1-T1, equals W+P1) represents the application of weight and
pressure to that expanded case, or the "hot sustained" case. Note that when the piping system
is analyzed as above, the actual effects of the non-linear restraints are considered (they are not
arbitrarily removed from the model), and the laws of superposition still hold.
An alternative school of thought believes that a "hot sustained" is only valid if: (1) the sustained,
primary loads are applied, (2) all springs are showing their Hot Load settings, and (3) any
supports that lift off (or otherwise become non-active) have been removed from the model. An
analysis such as this is achievable by setting the "Keep/Discard" status of the Restrained
Weight case (the first hanger design load case) to "Keep", thus permitting the results of that
case to be viewable as for any other load case. The Restrained Weight case automatically
removes restraints that become non-active during the designated operating case, and apply the
Hot Load at each of the hanger locations.
CASE #
CASE #
Case 5 computes the isolated wind effect on the piping system in the operating condition. Case
6 adds the stresses from Case 5 to the sustained stresses from Case 2.
aH 0.3 SDS Ip
Where:
ap = Component amplification factor, from Table 13.6-1
= 2.5 for "Piping"
SDS = Design elastic response acceleration at short period (0.2 sec), from Section 11.4.4
Rp = Component response modification factor, from Table 13.6-1
= 12.0 for "Piping in accordance with ASME B31... with joints made by welding or
brazing"; values range as low as 3.0 for other joints and for less ductile materials.
Ip = Component importance factor, from Section 13.1.3
= 1.5 for life-safety components, components containing hazardous material, or
components that are required for continuous operation; 1.0 for all others
z = Height in structure at point of attachment
h = Average roof height of structure
Wind Loads
You can define your own wind pressure profile or wind speed profile, or you can access wind
load data from the following wind codes:
EN 1991-1-4:2005
If you enter velocity versus elevation table data, then the program converts the velocity to a
dynamic pressure using the following equation:
P = 1/2 V2
Where V is the wind velocity and is the air density.
Enter the Wind Shape Factor on the piping spreadsheet. For cylindrical elements, a value
between 0.5 and 0.7 is used. A value of 0.65 is typical. The wind shape factor as entered is
distributive. This means that the shape factor entered on a spreadsheet is carried forward and
applies for all following elements until zeroed or changed.
There is no need to enter the same shape factor on each piping spreadsheet. Zero or
disable the wind shape factor if the piping system runs inside of a building or similarly protective
structure.
Enter wind load parameters on the Wind Loads (see "Wind Loads Tab (Static Analysis Dialog
Box)" on page 545) tab of the Static Load Case Builder. You can enter up to four different wind
loads per analysis. These typically might be setup to model wind loads in the +X, -X, +Z, and -Z
directions.
Elevation
It is important to set the proper elevation of the piping system (height above ground) when
running a wind analysis. When a wind shape factor is specified in the input, CAESAR II prompts
you for the elevation (and horizontal coordinates) of this first node. By default, CAESAR II
assigns the "From" node of the first element an elevation of 0.0. You can also use the procedure
below to set the reference wind elevation of the piping system.
The figure below shows a typical wave and associated hydrodynamic parameters.
The most suitable wave theory is dependent on the wave height, the wave period, and the water
depth. Based on these parameters, the applicable wave theory can be determined from the
figure below (from API-RP2A, American Petroleum Institute - Recommended Practice 2A).
2. Perform a standard finite element solution on the system of equations to finalize [K] and {f}.
3. Use the resulting displacement vector {x} to compute element forces.
4. Use the computed element forces to compute the element stresses.
Except for the buoyancy force, all other hydrodynamic forces acting on the element are a
function of the particle velocities and accelerations.
Ocean Currents
In addition to the forces imposed by ocean waves, piping elements can also be subjected to
forces imposed by ocean currents. There are three different ocean current models in
CAESAR II: linear current, piece-wise, and power law profile.
The linear current profile assumes that the current velocity through the water column varies
linearly from the specified surface velocity (at the surface) to zero (at the bottom).
The piece-wise linear profile employs linear interpolation between specific user-defined
depth/velocity points.
The power law profile decays the surface velocity to the 1/7 power.
While waves produce unsteady flow where the particle velocities and accelerations at a point
constantly change, currents produce a steady, non-varying flow.
After you calculate K and Re use the charts to obtain Cd, Cm, and Cl. For more information, see
Mechanics of Wave Forces on Offshore Structures by T. Sarpkaya. Figures 3.21, 3.22, and 3.25
are example charts, which display below.
In order to determine these coefficients, the fluid particle velocity (at the location of interest)
must be determined. The appropriate wave theory is solved, and these particle velocities are
readily obtained.
Of the wave theories discussed, the modified Airy and Stokes 5th theories include a modification
of the depth-decay function. The standard theories use a depth-decay function equal to cosh(kz)
/ sinh(kd),
Where:
k - is the wave number, 2 /L
L - is the wave length
d - is the water depth
z - is the elevation in the water column where the data is to be determined
The modified theories include an additional term in the numerator of this depth-decay function.
The modified depth-decay function is equal to cosh(d) / sinh(kd),
Where:
- is equal to z / (d + h)
The term d represents the effective height of the point at which the particle velocity and
acceleration are to be computed. The use of this term keeps the effective height below the still
water level. This means that the velocity and acceleration computed are convergent for actual
heights above the still water level.
As previously stated, the drag, inertia, and lift coefficients are a function of the fluid velocity and
the diameter of the element in question. Note that the fluid particle velocities vary with both
depth and position in the wave train (as determined by the applied wave theory). Therefore,
these coefficients are in fact not constants. However, from a practical engineering point of view,
varying these coefficients as a function of location in the Fluid field is usually not implemented.
This practice can be justified when one considers the inaccuracies involved in specifying the
instantaneous wave height and period. According to Sarpkaya, these values are insufficient to
accurately predict wave forces, a consideration of the previous fluid particle history is necessary.
In light of these uncertainties, constant values for Cd, Cm, and Cl are recommended by API and
many other references.
The effects of marine growth must also be considered. Marine growth has the following effects
on the system loading: the increased pipe diameters increase the hydrodynamic loading; the
increased roughness causes an increase in Cd, and therefore the hydrodynamic loading; the
increase in mass and added mass cause reduced natural frequencies and increase the dynamic
amplification factor; it causes an increase in the structural weight; and possibly causes
hydrodynamic instabilities, such as vortex shedding.
Finally, Morrisons force equation is based the "small body" assumption. The term "small" refers
to the "diameter to wave length" ratio. If this ratio exceeds 0.2, the inertial force is no longer in
phase with the acceleration of the fluid particles and diffraction effects must be considered. In
such cases, the fluid loading as typically implemented by CAESAR II is no longer applicable.
Additional discussions on hydrodynamic loads and wave theories can be found in the references
at the end of this article.
Current Data
Profile Type Defines the interpolation method you want CAESAR II to use to determine the
current velocity as a function of depth. Available options for this entry are:
Power Law Profile Determines the current velocity at depth D according to the equation:
Vd = Vs * [di / D]p
Where:
Vd - is the velocity at depth di
Vs - is the specified velocity at the surface
D - is the water depth
p - is the power, set to 1/7
Piece-wise Linear Profile Performs a linear interpolation of a velocity verse depth table
that you must provide, to determine the current velocity at depth d i. The table should start at
the surface (a depth of zero) and progress in increasing depth to the sea bed.
Linear Profile Performs a linear interpolation to determine the current velocity at depth
di. However, this method assumes the current velocity varies linearly from the specified
surface velocity to zero at the sea bed.
Current Speed Defines the current speed at the surface. The units for this entry are
(length/time) as defined by the active units file at the time of input. This value should always
be a positive entry.
Current Direction Cosines Defines the direction of fluid transport due to the current.
These fields are unit-less and follow the standard software global axis convention.
Wave Data
Wave Theory Indicator Specifies which wave theory to use to compute the water particle
velocities and accelerations. The wave theories available are:
Standard Airy Wave This is also known as linear wave theory. Discussion of this theory can
be found in the previously mentioned references.
Modified Airy Wave This is a modification of the standard Airy theory which includes the free
surface effects due to the wave. The modification consists of determining a depth scaling factor
equal to the depth divided by the depth plus the surface elevation. Note that this scale factor
varies as a function of the location in the wave train.
Standard Stokes 5th Wave This is a 5th order wave theory, also discussed in the
previously mentioned references.
Modified Stokes 5th Wave This is a modification of the standard Stokes 5th theory. The
modification is the same as applied to the Airy theory.
Stream Function Wave This is Deans Stream Function theory, also discussed in the
previously mentioned references.
Modified Stream Function Wave This is Deans Stream Function theory, modified to
directly consider current in the wave solution.
Stream Function Order When the Stream Function theory is activated, the solution order
must be defined. Typical values for the stream function order range from 3 to 13, and must be
an odd value (see API-RP2A figure).
Water Depth Defines the vertical distance (in units of length) from the still water level the
surface to the sea bed.
Wave Height Defines the height of the incident wave. The height is the vertical distance in
units of length from the wave crest to the wave trough.
Wave Period Defines the time span (in seconds) for two successive wave crests to pass a
fixed point.
Wave Kinematic Factor Because the two dimensional wave theories do not account for
spreading, a reduction factor is often used for the horizontal particle velocity and acceleration.
Wave kinematic measurements support values in the range of 0.85 to 0.95. Refer to the
applicable offshore codes before using this item.
Wave Direction Cosines Define the direction of wave travel. These fields are unit-less and
follow the standard software global axis convention.
Wave Phase Angle Defines the position of the wave relative to the starting node of the
piping system. The phase angle is a measure (in degrees) of position in the wave train, where 0
is the wave crest, 180 is the wave trough, and 360 is the following crest. Because the wave
propagates over the piping structure, each point in the structure experiences all possible wave
phase angles. One analysis technique specifies the wave phase at the system origin, and then
the phase at each node point in the model is deter\-mined. From these exact phase locations,
the water particle data is computed from the wave theory.
Alternatively, a conservative engineering approach is to use the same phase angle usually zero
for all points in the model. This technique produces higher loads; however, the extra
conservatism is warranted when given the unknowns in specifying environmental data.
Seawater Data
Free Surface Elevation Defines the height of the free surface from the global system origin.
If the system origin is at the free surface, this entry should be specified as zero. If the system
origin is at the sea bottom, this entry is equal to the water depth. By default, the first node in a
CAESAR II model is at an elevation of zero. You can change the elevation by pressing [Alt-+G].
Kinematic Viscosity Defines the kinematic viscosity of water. This value is used to
determine the Reynolds number, which is subsequently used to determine the hydrodynamic
coefficients Cd, Cm, and Cl. Typical values of kinematic viscosity for sea water display below.
Fluid Weight Density - Defines the weight density of the fluid. For sea water, this value is
approximately .037037 pounds per cubic inch (.001025 kg/cm3, 1.0256SG).
References
1. Mechanics of Wave Forces On Offshore Structures, Turgut Sarpkaya and Michael Isaacson,
Van Nostrand Reinhold Co., 1982, ISBN 0-442-25402-4.
2. Handbook of Ocean and Underwater Engineering, Myers, Holm, and McAllister,
McGraw-Hill Book Co., 1969, ISBN 07-044245 -2.
3. Fifth Order Gravity Wave Theory, Lars Skjelbreia and James Hendrickson, National
Engineering Science Co., Pasadena, California, 1960.
4. Planning and Design of Fixed Offshore Platforms, McClelland and Reifel, Van Nostrand
Reinhold Co., 1986, ISBN 0-442-25223-4.
5. Intercomparison of Near-Bottom Kinematics by Several Wave Theories and Field and
Laboratory Data, R. G. Dean and M. Perlin, Coastal Engineering, #9 (1986), p399-437.
6. A Finite Amplitude Wave on a Linear Shear Current, R. A. Dalrymple, Journal of
Geophysical Research, Vol 79, No 30, 1974.
7. Application of Stream Function Wave Theory to Offshore Design Problems, R. G. Dean,
OTC #1613, 1972.
8. Stream Function Representation of Nonlinear Ocean Waves, R. G. Dean, Journal of
Geophysical Research, Vol 70, No 18, 1965.
9. American Petroleum Institute - Recommended Practice 2A (API-RP2A), American
Petroleum Institute, July 1993.
10. Improved Algorithm for Stream Function Wave Theory, Min-Chih Huang, Journal of
Waterway, Port, Coastal, and Ocean Engineering, January 1989.
11. Stream Function Wave Theory with Profile Constraints, Min-Chih Huang, Journal of
Waterway, Port, Coastal, and Ocean Engineering, January/February 1993.
Pm < kSmh
Pm + Pl + Pb< 1.5kSmh
Pm + Pl + Pb + Q < 3Smavg
Where Pm, Pl, Pb, and Q are the general primary membrane stress, the local primary membrane
stress, the local primary bending stress, and the total secondary stresses (membrane plus
bending), respectively; and k, Smh, and Smavg are the occasional stress factor, the hot material
allowable stress intensity, and the average material stress intensity (S mh + Smc) / 2.
The stress classification defined by the Section VIII Division 2 code in the vicinity of nozzles,
classifies the bending stress terms caused by any external load moments or internal pressure in
the vessel wall near a nozzle or other opening, as secondary stress Q, regardless of whether
they were caused by sustained or expansion loads. This definition causes P b to disappear and
leads to a more detailed classification:
Pm - General primary membrane stress (primarily due to internal pressure)
Pl - Local primary membrane stress, which may include the following:
Membrane stress due to internal pressure
Local membrane stress due to applied sustained forces and moments
Q - Secondary stresses, which may include the following:
Bending stress due to internal pressure
Bending stress due to applied sustained loads
Membrane stress due to applied expansion loads
Bending stress due to applied expansion loads
Each of the stress terms defined in the above classifications contains three parts: two stress
components in normal directions and one shear stress component. To combine these stresses,
the following rules apply:
1. Compute the normal and shear components for each of the three stress types, that is, P m,
Pl, and Q.
2. Compute the stress intensity due to the Pm and compare it against kSmh.
3. Add the individual normal and shear stress components due to Pm and Pl; compute the
resultant stress intensity and compare its value against 1.5kSmh.
4. Add the individual normal and shear stress components due to Pm, Pl, and Q, compute the
resultant stress intensity, and compare its value to against 3Smavg.
5. Determine if there is an occasional load as well as a sustained load, these types can be
repeated using a value of 1.2 for k.
These criteria can be readily found from Figure 4-130.1 of Appendix 4 of ASME Section VIII,
Division 2 2004 and the surrounding text. Note that the primary bending stress term, Pb, is not
applicable to the shell stress evaluation, and therefore disappears from the Section VIII, Division
2 requirements. Using the same analogy, write the peak stress limit as:
Pl + Pb + Q + F < Sa
The preceding equation need not be satisfied, provided the elastic limit criteria of AD-160 is met
based on the statement explicitly given in Section 5-100, which is cited below:
"If the specified operation of the vessel meets all of the conditions of AD-160, no analysis for
cyclic operation is required and it can be assumed that the peak stress limit discussed in 4-135
has been satisfied by compliance with the applicable requirements for materials, design,
fabrication, testing and inspection of this division."
CAESAR II provides two options for combining the missing mass correction with modal dynamic
results SRSS and Absolute. The Absolute Combination method provides the more
conservative result and is based upon the assumption that dynamic amplification is going to
occur simultaneously with the maximum ground acceleration or force load. Literature
(References 1, 2) states that the modal and the rigid portions of the response to typical dynamic
loads are actually statistically independent, so that the SRSS Combination method is a more
accurate representation of reality. Because the SRSS Combination method is most closely
aligned to reality, CAESAR II defaults to this missing mass combination method.
References
1. A. K. Gupta, Response Spectrum Method in Seismic Analysis and Design of Structures,
CRC Press, 1990
2. K. M. Vashi, "Computation of Seismic Response from Higher Frequency Modes," ASME
80-C2/PVP-50, 1980
3. O. E. Hansteen and K. Bell, "On the Accuracy of Mode Superposition Analysis in Structural
Dynamics," Earthquake Engineering and Structural Dynamics, Volume 7, John Wiley &
Sons, Ltd., 1979
Fatigue Basics
Piping and vessels have been known to suffer from sudden failure following years of successful
service. Research done during the 1940s and 1950s, primarily advanced by A. R. C. Markls
"Piping Flexibility Analysis," published in 1955, provided an explanation for this phenomenon, as
well as design criteria aimed at avoiding failures of this type. The explanation was that materials
were failing due to fatigue, a process leading to the propagation of cracks, and subsequent
fracture, following repeated cyclic loading.
Steels and other metals are made up of organized patterns of molecules, known as crystal
structures. However, these patterns are not maintained throughout the steel producing an ideal
homogeneous material, but are found in microscopic isolated island-like areas called grains.
Inside each grain a pattern of molecules is preserved. From one grain boundary to the next the
molecular pattern is the same, but the orientations differ. As a result, grain boundaries are high
energy borders. Plastic deformation begins within a grain that is subject to both a high stress
and oriented such that the stress causes a slippage between adjacent layers in the same
pattern. The incremental slippages, called dislocations, cause local cold-working. On the first
application of the stress, dislocations can move through many of the grains that are in the local
area of high stress. As the stress is repeated, more dislocations move through their respective
grains. Dislocation movement is impeded by the grain boundaries. After multiple stress
applications, the dislocations tend to accumulate at grain boundaries. Eventually they become
so dense that the grains "lock up" causing a loss of ductility and thus preventing further
dislocation movement. Subsequent applications of the stress cause the grain to tear, forming
cracks. Repeated stress applications cause the cracks to grow. Unless abated, the cracks
propagate with additional stress applications until sufficient cross sectional strength is lost to
cause a catastrophic failure of the material.
You can estimate the fatigue capacity of a material through the application of cyclic
tensile/compressive displacement loads with a uniaxial test machine. A plot of the cyclic stress
capacity of a material is called a fatigue or endurance curve. These curves are generated
through multiple cyclic tests at different stress levels. The number of cycles to failure usually
increases as the applied cyclic stress decreases, often until a threshold stress, known as the
endurance limit, is reached below which no fatigue failure occurs, regardless of the number of
applied cycles. An endurance curve for carbon and low alloy steels, taken from the ASME
Section VIII Division 2 Pressure Vessel Code displays below:
2. From either the Static or Dynamic Load Case Builders you must define, for every fatigue
load case, the number of anticipated cycles.
Also we have added a new FAT stress type.
3. Unless explicitly defined in the applicable code, CAESAR II calculates the fatigue stress the
same way it calculates the stress intensity.
IGE/TD/12 is the only piping code supported by CAESAR II that has explicit
instructions for calculating fatigue stresses. For more information on IGE/TD/12, refer to
IGE/TD/12 (on page 997).
4. Allowable fatigue stresses are interpolated logarithmically from the fatigue curve based upon
the number of cycles designated for the load case. For static load cases, the calculated
stress is assumed to be a peak-to-peak cyclic value (for example, thermal expansion,
settlement, pressure, and so forth), so the allowable stress is extracted directly from the
fatigue curve. For harmonic and dynamic load cases, the calculated stress is assumed to be
a zero-to-peak cyclic value (for example, vibration, earth\-quake, and so forth), so the
extracted allowable is divided by two prior to use in the comparison.
5. The flip side of calculating the allowable fatigue stress for the designated number of cycles
is the calculation of the allowable number of cycles for the calculated stress level. You can
do this by logarithmically interpolating the "Cycles" axis of the fatigue curve based upon the
calculated stress value. Because static stresses are assumed to be peak-to-peak cyclic
values, the allowable number of cycles is interpolated directly from the fatigue curve.
Because harmonic and dynamic stresses are assumed to be zero-to-peak cyclic values, the
allow\-able number of cycles is interpolated using twice the calculated stress value.
6. CAESAR II provides two reports for viewing the results of load cases for the FAT stress
type. The first of these is the standard Stress report that shows the calculated fatigue stress
and fatigue allowable at each node.
You can generate individual stress reports for each load case to show whether any of the
individual load cases in isolation fail the system
However, in those instances where there is more than one cyclic load case potentially
contributing to a fatigue failure, the Cumulative Usage report is appropriate. To generate this
report select all the FAT load cases that contribute to the overall system degradation. The
Cumulative Usage report lists for each node point the usage ratio actual cycle divided by
allowable cycles, and then sums these to obtain the total cumulative usage. A total greater than
1.0 indicates a potential fatigue failure.
experiences. Each horizontal line represents an operating range. At the each end of each
horizontal line, the temperatures and pressures defining the range are noted. At the center of
each horizontal line, the number of cycles for each range is defined.
Using this sketch of the operating ranges, the four fatigue load cases can be determined. Case
1: Cover the absolute extreme, from -20F and 0 psi to 500F and 1830 psi. This occurs 200
times. As a result of this case, the cycles for the ranges defined must be reduced by 200. The
first range (-20, 0 to 70, 0) is reduced to zero, and has no contribution to additional load cases.
The second range (70, 0 to 500, 1800) is reduced to 11,800 cycles. The third and fourth ranges
are similarly reduced to 199,800 cycles.
These same steps can be used to arrive at cases 2 through 4, reducing the number of
considered cycles at each step. This procedure is summarized in the table below.
Segment -20, 0 to 70, 0 70, 0 to 500, 1800 500, 1700 to 500, 500, 1800 to 500, 1830
1800
Case
After 3 0 0 12,000 0
After 4 0 0 0 0
This table is then used to set the load cases as cycles between the following load values:
Between -20F, 0 psig and 500F, 1830 psig (200 cycles)
Between 70F, 0 psig and 500F, 1830 psig (11,800 cycles)
Between 500F, 1770 psig and 500F, 1830 psig (188,000 cycles)
Between 500F, 1770 psig and 500F, 1800 psig (12,000 cycles)
Next enter the fatigue curve data for the material. This is done by clicking Fatigue Curves to
activate the Material Fatigue Curve dialog box. This dialog box can be used to enter the fatigue
curve for the materials.
For IGE/ TD/12, you only need to enter five sets of fatigue curves for fatigue
classes D, E, F, G, and W.
1. Enter up to eight Cycle versus Stress data points to define the curve. Interpolations are
made logarithmically.
2. Enter Cycle/Stress pairs in ascending cycle order.
3. Enter stress values as the allowable stress range, rather than the allowable Stress
Amplitude.
You can enter fatigue curve data from a text file, by clicking Read from file. This displays a
list of all \CAESAR\SYSTEM\*.FAT files.
The following fatigue curve files are delivered with CAESAR II. You can also construct additional
fatigue curve files. For more information on fatigue curve files, see Appendix A below:
5-110-1A.FAT ASME Section VIII Division 2 Figure 5-110.1, UTS < 80 ksi
5-110-1B.FAT ASME Section VIII Division 2 Figure 5-110.1, UTS = 115-130 ksi
5-110-2A.FAT ASME Section VIII Division 2 Figure 5-110.2, Curve A
5-110-2B.FAT ASME Section VIII Division 2 Figure 5-110.2, Curve B
5-110-2C.FAT ASME Section VIII Division 2 Figure 5-110.2, Curve C
In this case for A106B low carbon steel operating at 500F, 5-110-1A.FAT is the appropriate
selection. This populates the fatigue curve data boxes in the dialog box:
The last four load cases represent the load set pairs defined earlier.
After you run the job the presence of a FAT stress type adds the Cumulative Usage
report to the list of available reports.
You can check the fatigue stress range against the fatigue curve allowable for each load case
by selecting it along with the Stresses report. A review of each load case confirms that all stress
levels passed.
However, this is not a true evaluation of the situation because it is not a case of either-or. The
piping system is subjected to all of these load cases throughout its expected design life, not just
one of them. Therefore, we must also review the Cumulative Usage (see "Cumulative Usage
Report" on page 583) report, which shows the total effect of all fatigue load cases, or any
user-selected combination, on the design life of the system. This report lists for each load case
the expected number of cycles, the allowable number of cycles (based upon the calculated
stress), and the Usage Ratio (actual cycles divided by allowable cycles). The Usage Ratios are
then summed for all selected load cases. If this sum exceeds 1.0, the system has exceeded its
fatigue capabilities. In this case, it is apparent that with the maximum cumulative usage ratio of
0.87 at node 115, this system is not predicted to fail due to fatigue:
This produces the same types of reports as are available for the static analysis. They can be
processed as discussed earlier.
The only difference between the harmonic and static fatigue analyses is that for harmonic jobs
the calculated stresses are assumed to be zero-to-peak calculations so that they are compared
to only half of the stress value extracted from the fatigue curve. Likewise, when creating the
Cumulative Usage report, the number of allowable cycles is based upon twice the calculated
stress.
For other dynamic applications (response spectrum and time history), the stress type can be
identified as fatigue by selecting the stress type from the drop list for the Load Case or
Static/Dynamic Combination, and by entering the number of expected cycles in the provided
field.
Note that as with the harmonic analyses, the calculated stresses are assumed to be
zero-to-peak calculations so that they are compared to only half of the stress value extracted
from the fatigue curve. Likewise, when creating the Cumulative Usage report, the number of
allowable cycles is based upon twice the calculated stress.
100000 20000.0
500000 13500.0
1000000 12500.0
0 0.0
*
You can create this text file by using any text editor. Lines beginning with an * are treated as
comment lines. It is good practice to use comment lines so that the data can be tied to a specific
material curve.
The first data line in the file the stress multiplier. This value is used to adjust the data values
from "zero to peak" to "peak to peak" or to convert the stress levels to psi. The entered values
are divided by this number. For example, if the stress values in the file represent the stress
amplitude, in psi, rather than a range, this "stress multiplier" should be 0.5. Following the stress
multiplier is the Fatigue Curve Data table. This table consists of eight lines, of two columns.
The first column is the Cycle column, and the second is the Stress column. For each value in
the cycle column, a corresponding stress value from the material fatigue curve is listed in the
stress column.
Fatigue curves intended for use with IGE/TD/12 are built slightly different. The first data line
contains three values: the stress multiplier, a modulus of elasticity correction, and a modulus of
elasticity multiplier (the correction factor is divided by this to convert to psi). After the files are
read in, the modulus of elasticity correction is inserted into the appropriate field on the Fatigue
Curve dialog. IGE/TD/12 fatigue files also include five sequential fatigue curves, Fatigue Class
D, E, F, G, and W, rather than one. You can use optional comment lines to separate the tables.
The comments help with the readability of the data file. You can best determine the format of the
IGE/TD/12 fatigue files by reviewing the contents of the TD12ST.FAT file.
In all tables, the number of cycles increases as you work down the table. If you do not have
enough data to use all eight lines, fill the unused lines with zeroes.
Where:
Sh = Hoop stress
Sa = Axial stress
Sq = Shear stress
"This should be used for establishing the range of stress, due regard being paid to the direction
and sign." For all other piping codes in CAESAR II, the fatigue stress is computed as the stress
intensity, as follows:
3D Maximum Shear Stress Intensity (Default)
SI = Maximum of:
S1OT - S3OT
S1OB - S3OB
Max(S1IT,RPS) - Min(S3IT,RPS)
Max(S1IB,RPS) - Min(S3IB,RPS)
Where:
S1OT=Maximum Principal Stress, Outside Top
= (SLOT+HPSO)/2.0+(((SLOT-HPSO)/2.0)2+TSO2)1/2
Micro-Level Analysis
Stress analysis on the "Micro" level refers to the detailed evaluation of the individual materials
and boundary mechanisms comprising the composite material. In general, FRP pipe is
manufactured from laminates, which are constructed from elongated fibers of a commercial
grade of glass, E-glass, which are coated with a coupling agent or sizing prior to being
embedded in a thermosetting plastic material, typically epoxy or polyester resin.
This means, on the micro scale, that an analytical model must be created which simulates the
interface between these elements. Because the number and orientation of fibers is unknown at
any given location in a FRP sample, the simplest representation of the micro-model is that of a
single fiber, extending the length of the sample, embedded in a square profile of matrix.
Micro Level GRP Sample -- Single Fiber Embedded in Square Profile of Matrix
Plastic
2.75 x 103 .07 x 103 7.0 x 10-6
Matrix
The following failure modes of the composite must be similarly evaluated to:
failure of the fiber
failure of the coupling agent layer
failure of the matrix
You can evaluate stresses in the individual components through finite element analysis of the
strain continuity and equilibrium equations, based upon the assumption that there is a good
bond between the fiber and matrix, resulting in compatible strains between the two. For normal
stresses applied parallel to the glass fiber:
f = m = af / Ef = am / Em
af = am Ef / Em
Where:
f = Strain in the Fiber
= Strain in the Matrix
af = Normal Stress Parallel to Fiber, in the Fiber
Ef = Modulus of Elasticity of the Fiber
am = Axial Normal Stress Parallel to Fiber, in the Matrix
Em = Modulus of Elasticity of the Matrix
Due to the large ratio of the modulus of elasticity of the fiber to that of the matrix, it is apparent
that nearly all of the axial normal stress in the fiber-matrix composite is carried by the fiber.
Exact values are (Reference 6):
af = L / [ + (1-)Em/Ef]
am = L / [Ef/Em + (1-)]
Where:
L = nominal longitudinal stress across composite
= glass content by volume
The continuity equations for the glass-matrix composite seem less complex for normal stresses
perpendicular to the fibers, because the weak point of the material seems to be limited by the
glass-free cross-section, shown below:
For this reason, it would appear that the strength of the composite would be equal to that of the
matrix for stresses in this direction. In fact, its strength is less than that of the matrix due to
stress intensification in the matrix caused by the irregular stress distribution in the vicinity of the
stiffer glass. Because the elongation over distance D1 must be equal to that over the longer
distance D2, the strain, and thus the stress at location D1 must exceed that at D2 by the ratio
D2/D1. Maximum intensified transverse normal stresses in the composite are:
Where:
b = intensified normal stress transverse to the fiber, in the composite
= nominal transverse normal stress across composite
m = Poisson's ratio of the matrix
Because of the Poisson effect, this stress produces an additional 'am equal to the
following:
'am = Vmb
Shear stress can be allocated to the individual components again through the use of continuity
equations. It would appear that the stiffer glass would resist the bulk of the shear stresses.
However, unless the fibers are infinitely long, all shears must eventually pass through the matrix
in order to get from fiber to fiber. Shear stress between fiber and matrix can be estimated as
Where:
ab = intensified shear stress in composite
T = nominal shear stress across composite
Gm = shear modulus of elasticity in matrix
Gf = shear modulus of elasticity in fiber
Determination of the stresses in the fiber-matrix interface is more complex. The bonding agent
has an inappreciable thickness, and thus has an indeterminate stiffness for consideration in the
continuity equations. Also, the interface behaves significantly differently in shear, tension, and
compression, showing virtually no effects from the latter. The state of the stress in the interface
is best solved by omitting its contribution from the continuity equations, and simply considering
that it carries all stresses that must be transferred from fiber to matrix.
After the stresses have been apportioned, they must be evaluated against appropriate failure
criteria. The behavior of homogeneous, isotropic materials such as glass and plastic resin,
under a state of multiple stresses is better understood. Failure criterion for isotropic material
reduces the combined normal and shear stresses (a, b, c, ab, ac, bc) to a single stress, an
equivalent stress, that can be compared to the tensile stress present at failure in a material
under uniaxial loading, that is, the ultimate tensile stress, S ult.
Different theories, and different equivalent stress functions f(a, b, c, ab, ac, bc) have been
proposed, with possibly the most widely accepted being the Huber-von Mises-Hencky criterion,
which states that failure will occur when the equivalent stress reaches a critical value the
ultimate strength of the material:
eq = {1/2 [(a - b)2 + (b - c)2+ (c - a)2 + 6(ab2+ ac2+ bc2)} Sult
This theory does not fully cover all failure modes of the fiber in that it omits reference to direction
of stress, that is, tensile versus compressive. The fibers, being relatively long and thin,
predominantly demonstrate buckling as their failure mode when loaded in compression.
The equivalent stress failure criterion has been corroborated, with slightly non-conservative
results, by testing. Little is known about the failure mode of the adhesive interface, although
empirical evidence points to a failure criterion which is more of a linear relationship between the
normal and the square of the shear stresses. Failure testing of a composite material loaded only
in transverse normal and shear stresses are shown in the following figure. The kink in the curve
shows the transition from the matrix to the interface as the failure point.
Mini-Level Analysis
distributions are the square and the hexagonal, with the latter generally considered as being a
better representation of randomly distributed fibers.
The stress-strain relationships, for those sections evaluated as continua, can be written as:
aa = aa/EL - (VL/EL)bb - (VL/EL)cc
bb = -(VL/EL)aa + bb/ET - (VT/ET)cc
cc = -(VL/EL)aa - (VT/ET)bb + cc/ET
ab = ab / 2 GL
bc = bc / 2 GT
ac = ac / 2 GL
Where:
ij = strain along direction i on face j
ij, ab = stress (normal, shear) along direction i on face j
EL = modulus of elasticity of laminate layer in longitudinal direction
VL = Poissons ratio of laminate layer in longitudinal direction
ET = modulus of elasticity of laminate layer in transverse direction
VT = Poissons ratio of laminate layer in transverse direction
GL = shear modulus of elasticity of laminate layer in longitudinal direction
GT = shear modulus of elasticity of laminate layer in transverse direction
These relationships require that four modules of elasticity, EL, ET, GL, and GT, and two Poissons
ratios, VL and V, be evaluated for the continuum. Extensive research (References 4 - 10) has
been done to estimate these parameters. There is general consensus that the longitudinal terms
can be explicitly calculated; for cases where the fibers are significantly stiffer than the matrix,
they are:
EL = EF + EM(1 - )
GL = GM +/ [ 1 / (GF - GM) + (1 -) / (2GM)]
VL = VF + VM(1 - )
You cannot calculate parameters in the transverse direction. You can only calculate the upper
and lower bounds. Correlations with empirical results have yielded approximations (Reference 5
and 6):
ET = [EM(1+0.85f2) / {(1-VM2)[(1-f)1.25 + f(EM/EF)/(1-VM2)]}
GT = GM (1 + 0.6) / [(1 - )1.25 + (GM/GF)]
VT = VL (EL / ET)
Use of these parameters permits the development of the homogeneous material models that
facilitate the calculation of longitudinal and transverse stresses acting on a laminate layer. The
resulting stresses can be allocated to the individual fibers and matrix using relationships
developed during the micro analysis.
Macro-Level Analysis
Where:
ExLAM = Longitudinal modulus of elasticity of laminate
tLAM = thickness of laminate
Ek = Longitudinal modulus of elasticity of laminate layer k
Cik = transformation matrix orienting axes of layer k to longitudinal laminate axis
Cjk = transformation matrix orienting axes of layer k to transverse laminate axis
tk = thickness of laminate layer k
After composite properties are determined, the component stiffness parameters can be
determined as though it were made of homogeneous material that is, based on component
cross-sectional and composite material properties.
Normal and shear stresses can be determined from 1) forces and moments acting on the
cross-sections, and 2) the cross-sectional properties themselves. These relationships can be
written as:
aa = Faa / Aaa Mba / Sba Mca / Sca
bb = Fbb / Abb Mab / Sab Mcb / Scb
cc = Fcc / Acc Mac / Sac Mbc / Sbc
ab = Fab / Aab Mbb / Rab
BS 7159
BS 7159 uses methods and formulas familiar to the world of steel piping stress analysis in order
to calculate stresses on the cross-section, with the assumption that FRP components have
material parameters based on continuum evaluation or test. All coincident loads, such as
thermal, weight, pressure, and axial extension due to pressure need be evaluated
simultaneously. Failure is based on the equivalent stress calculation method. Because one
normal stress (radial stress) is traditionally considered to be negligible in typical piping
configurations, this calculation reduces to the greater of (except when axial stresses are
compressive):
in each direction. In other words, the allowable stresses for the two equivalent stresses above
would be (ed ELAMX) and (ed ELAMH) respectively. In lieu of test data, system design strain is
selected from Tables 4.3 and 4.4 of the Code, based on expected chemical and temperature
conditions.
Actual stress equations as enumerated by BS 7159 display below:
1. Combined stress straights and bends:
C = (f 2+ 4S2)0.5 d ELAM
or
C = (X2 + 4S2)0.5 d ELAM
Where:
ELAM = modulus of elasticity of the laminate; in CAESAR II, the first equation uses the
modulus for the hoop direction and in the second equation, the modulus for the longitudinal
direction is used.
C = combined stress
= circumferential stress
= P + B
S = torsional stress
= MS(Di + 2td) / 4I
X = longitudinal stress
= XP + XB
P = circumferential pressure stress
= mP(Di + td) / 2 td
B = circumferential bending stress
= [(Di + 2td) / 2I] [(Mi SIFi)2 + Mo SIFo)2] 0.5 for bends, = 0 for straights
MS = torsional moment on cross-section
Di = internal pipe diameter
td = design thickness of reference laminate
I = moment of inertia of pipe
m = pressure stress multiplier of component
P = internal pressure
Mi = in-plane bending moment on cross-section
SIFi= circumferential stress intensification factor for in-plane moment
M = out-plane bending moment on cross-section
SIFo = circumferential stress intensification factor for out-plane moment
XP = longitudinal pressure stress
= P(Di+ td) / 4 td
BS 7159 also dictates the means of calculating flexibility and stress intensification (k- and i-)
factors for bend and tee components, for use during the flexibility analysis.
BS 7159 imposes a number of limitations on its use, the most notable being: the limitation of a
system to a design pressure of 10 bar, the restriction to the use of designated design laminates,
and the limited applicability of the k- and i- factor calculations to pipe bends (that is, mean wall
thickness around the intrados must be 1.75 times the nominal thickness or less).
This code appears to be more sophisticated, yet easy to use. We recommend that its calculation
techniques be applied even to FRP systems outside its explicit scope, with the following
recommendations:
Pressure stiffening of bends should be based on actual design pressure, rather than
allowable design strain.
Design strain should be based on manufacturers test and experience data wherever
possible (with consideration for expected operating conditions).
Fitting k- and i- factors should be based on manufacturers test or analytic data, if available.
UKOOA
The UKOOA Specification is similar in many respects to the BS 7159 Code, except that it
simplifies the calculation requirements in exchange for imposing more limitations and more
conservatism on the piping operating conditions.
Rather than explicitly calculating a combined stress, the specification defines an idealized
envelope of combinations of axial and hoop stresses that cause the equivalent stress to reach
failure. This curve represents the plot of:
(x / x-all)2 + (hoop / hoop-all)2 - [x hoop / (x-all hoop-all)] 1.0
Where:
x-all = allowable stress, axial
hoop-all = allowable stress, hoop
The specification conservatively limits you to that part of the curve falling under the line between
x-all (also known as sa(0:1)) and the intersection point on the curve where hoop is twice sx-(a
natural condition for a pipe loaded only with pressure), as shown in the following figure.
An implicit modification to this requirement is the fact that pressure stresses are given a factor of
safety (typically equal to 2/3) while other loads are not. This gives an explicit requirement of:
Pdes f1 f2 f3 LTHP
Where:
Pdes = allowable design pressure
f1 = factor of safety for 97.5% lower confidence limit, usually 0.85
f2 = system factor of safety, usually 0.67
f3 = ratio of residual allowable, after mechanical loads
= 1 - (2 ab) / (r f1 LTHS)
ab = axial bending stress due to mechanical loads
r = a(0:1)/a(2:1)
a(0:1) = long term axial tensile strength in absence of pressure load
a(2:1) = long term axial tensile strength under only pressure loading
LTHS = long term hydrostatic strength (hoop stress allowable)
LTHP = long term hydrostatic pressure allowable
This has been implemented in the CAESAR II pipe stress analysis software as:
Where:
P = design pressure
D = pipe mean diameter
t = pipe wall thickness
K and i-factors for bends are to be taken from the BS 7159 Code, while no such factors are to
be used for tees.
The UKOOA Specification is limited in that shear stresses are ignored in the evaluation process;
no consideration is given to conditions where axial stresses are compressive; and most required
calculations are not explicitly detailed.
Selecting material 20 Plastic (FRP) activates CAESAR IIs orthotropic material model and
brings in the appropriate material parameters from the pre-selected materials. The orthotropic
material model is indicated by the changing of two fields from their previous isotropic values:
Elastic Modulus (C) changes to Elastic Modulus/axial and Poisson's Ratio changes to
Ea/Eh*Vh/a. These changes are necessary because orthotropic models require more material
parameters than do isotropic. For example, there is no longer a single modulus of elasticity for
the material, but now two: axial and hoop. There is no longer a single Poissons ratio, but again
two: Vh/a (Poissons ratio relating strain in the axial direction due to stress-induced strain in the
hoop direction) and Va/h (Poissons ratio relating strain in the hoop direction due to
stress-induced strain in the axial direction). Also, unlike isotropic materials, the shear modulus
does not follow the relationship G = 1 / E (1-V), so that value must be explicitly input.
To minimize input, a few of these parameters can be combined due to their use in the program.
Generally, the only time that the modulus of elasticity in the hoop direction or the Poissons
ratios is used during flexibility analysis is when calculating piping elongation due to pressure
(note that the modulus of elasticity in the hoop direction is used when determining certain stress
allowables for the BS 7159 code):
dx = (x / Ea - Va/h * hoop / Eh) L
Where:
Va/h = Poissons ratio relating strain in the axial direction due to stress-induced
strain in the hoop direction
This equation can be rearranged, to require only a single new parameter, as:
dx = (x - Va/h hoop * (Ea / Eh )) * L / Ea
In theory, that single parameter, Vh/a is identical to (Ea / Eh * Va/h) giving: dx = (x -
Vh/ahoop) * L / Ea
The shear modulus of the material is required in ordered to develop the stiffness matrix. In
CAESAR II, this value, expressed as a ratio of the axial modulus of elasticity, is brought in from
the pre-selected material, or can be changed on a problem-wise basis using the Special
Execution Parameter (see "Special Execution Parameters" on page 285) dialog box
accessed by the Environment menu from the piping spreadsheet (see figure). This dialog box
also shows the coefficient of thermal expansion (extracted from the vendor file or user entered)
for the material, as well as the default laminate type, as defined by the BS 7159 Code:
Type 1 All chopped strand mat (CSM) construction with an internal and an external
surface tissue reinforced layer.
Type 2 Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction with an internal
and an external surface tissue reinforced layer.
Type 3 Chopped strand mat (CSM) and multi-filament roving construction with an internal
and an external surface tissue reinforced layer.
The latter is used during the calculation of flexibility and stress intensification factors for piping
bends.
You can enter bend and tee information by using the auxiliary spreadsheets.
You can also change bend radius and laminate type data on a bend by bend basis, as
shown in the corresponding figure.
Specify BS 7159 fabricated and molded tee types by defining CAESAR II tee types 1 and 3
respectively at intersection points. CAESAR II automatically calculates the appropriate flexibility
and stress intensification factors for these fittings as per code requirements.
Enter the required code data on the Allowables auxiliary spreadsheet. The program provides
fields for both codes, number 27 BS 7159 and number 28 UKOOA. After selecting BS 7159,
CAESAR II provides fields for entry of the following code parameters:
SH1 through SH9 = Longitudinal Design Stress = d ELAMX
Kn1 through Kn9 = Cyclic Reduction Factor (as per BS 7159 paragraph 4.3.4)
Eh/Ea = Ratio of Hoop Modulus of Elasticity to Axial Modulus of Elasticity
K = Temperature Differential Multiplier (as per BS 7159 paragraph 7.2.1)
After selecting UKOOA, CAESAR II provides fields for entry of the following code parameters:
SH1 through SH9 = hoop design stress = f 1 * LTHS
R1 through R9 = ratio r = (a(0:1) / a(2:1))
f2 = system factor of safety (defaults to 0.67 if omitted)
K = temperature differential multiplier (same as BS 7159)
These parameters need only be entered a single time, unless they change at some point in the
system.
Performing the analysis is simpler than the system modeling. <Product> evaluates the operating
parameters and automatically builds the appropriate load cases. In this case, three are built:
Operating includes pipe and fluid weight, temperature, equipment displacements, and
pressure. This case is used to determine maximum code stress/strain, operational
equipment nozzle and restraint loads, hot displacements, and so forth.
Cold (same as above, except excluding temperature and equipment movements). This case
is used to determine cold equipment nozzle and restraint loads.
Expansion (cyclic stress range between the cold and hot case). This case may be used to
evaluate fatigue criteria as per paragraph 4.3.4 of the BS 7159 Code.
After analyzing the response of the system under these loads, CAESAR II displays a menu of
possible output reports. Reports may be designated by selecting a combination of load case and
results type (displacements, restraint loads, element forces and moments, and stresses). From
the stress report, you can determine at a glance whether the system passed or failed the stress
criteria.
For UKOOA, the piping is considered to be within allowable limits when the operating stress falls
within the idealized stress envelope this is illustrated by the shaded area in the following figure.
Conclusion
A pipe stress analysis program with worldwide acceptance is now available for evaluation of
FRP piping systems as per the requirements of the most sophisticated FRP piping codes. This
means that access to the same analytical methods and tools enjoyed by engineers using steel
pipe is available to users of FRP piping design.
References
1. Cross, Wilbur, An Authorized History of the ASME Boiler an Pressure Vessel Code, ASME,
1990
2. Olson, J. and Cramer, R., "Pipe Flexibility Analysis Using IBM 705 Computer Pro\-gram
MEC 21, Mare Island Report 277-59," 1959
3. Fiberglass Pipe Handbook, Composites Institute of the Society of the Plastics Indus\-try,
1989
4. Hashin, Z., "Analysis of Composite Materials a Survey," Journal of Applied Mechanics, Sept.
1983
5. Greaves, G., "Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Pipe Design," Ciba-Geigy Pipe Systems
6. Puck, A. and Schneider, W., "On Failure Mechanisms and Failure Criteria of
Filament-Wound Glass-Fibre/Resin Composites," Plastics and Polymers, Feb. 1969
7. Hashin, Z., "The Elastic Moduli of Heterogeneous Materials," Journal of Applied Mechanics,
March 1962
8. Hashin, Z. and Rosen, B. Walter, "The Elastic Moduli of Fibre Reinforced Materials," Journal
of Applied Mechanics, June 1964
9. Whitney, J. M. and Riley, M. B., "Elastic Properties of Fiber Reinforced Composite
Materials," AIAA Journal, Sept. 1966
10. Walpole, L. J., "Elastic Behavior of Composite Materials: Theoretical Foundations,"
Advances in Applied Mechanics, Volume 21, Academic Press, 1989
11. BS 7159: 1989 British Standard Code of Practice for Design and Construction of Glass
Reinforced Plastics GRP Piping Systems for Individual Plants or Sites.
12. UK Offshore Operators Association Specification and Recommended Practice for the Use of
GRP Piping Offshore., 1994
WRC 329
The only piping codes that cannot take advantage of the WRC 329 options, or the option to use
the ASME NC and ND rules for reduced intersections, are BS806 and the Swedish Power
Method 1. These codes do not use the effective section modulus, and any extrapolation of the
ASME methods into these codes is unwarranted.
There is a small difference between Use WRC329 and Reduced Intersection = WRC329. Use
Use WRC329 for all full and reduced intersections that are not welding tees or reinforced tees.
Use Reduced Intersection =WRC329 for reduced fittings that are not welding tees or
reinforced fabricated tees. A fitting is reduced when d/D is less than 0.975.
WRC 329 impact on use with B31.3, B31.4, B31.11, or B31.1 (1967) codes
1. Include torsional stresses in all stress calculations (sustained and occasional).
2. Use a torsional SIF of (r/R) io.
3. Compute i(ib) use 0.6(R/T)2/3 [1+0.5(r/R)3](r/rp).
4. For i(ob) use 1.5(R/T)2/3 (r/R)1/2 (r/rp) and i(ob)(t/T)>1.5
when (r/R) < 0.9 use 0.9(R/T)2/3 (r/rp) and i(ob)(t/T)>1.0
when (r/R) = 1.0 and use interpolation when 1.0 > (r/R) > 0.9
5. For ir use 0.8 (R/T)2/3 (r/R), and ir > 2.1
6. If the radius at the junction provided is greater than the larger of t/2 or T/2, then divide the
calculated SIFs by 2.0, but with ib>1.5 and ir>1.5.
WRC 329 impact on use with B31.1, B31.8, ASME III NC, ASME III ND, Navy 505, Z183, Z184,
or Swedish Method 2 codes
1. For ib use 1.5(R/T)2/3 (r/R)1/2 (r/rp), and ib(t/T)>1.5
when (r/R) < 0.9
use 0.9(R/T)2/3 (r/rp), and ib(t/T)>1.0
when (r/R) = 1.0 and
use interpolation when 1.0 > (r/R) > 0.9
2. For ir use 0.8 (R/T)2/3 (r/R), and ir > 2.1
3. If a radius at the provided junction is greater than the larger of t/2 or T/2, then divide the
calculated SIFs by 2.0, but with ib>1.5 and ir>1.5.
Bonney Forge Sweepolets tend to be a little more conservative because they are used for
fittings in the nuclear industry. Bonney Forge Sweepolet equations can generate SIFs less than
one because they are stronger than the girth butt weld used as the unity basis for the code fitting
SIFs. CAESAR II does not permit SIFs of less than 1.0. If you generate a Bonney Forge
Sweepolet SIF that is less than 1.0, the default value 1.0 is used.
The Bonney Forge SIF Data came from the technical flyer: "Bonney Forge Stress Intensification
Factors" Bulletin 789/Sl-1, Copyright 1976.
Although CAESAR II allows the specification of two element intersections, you cannot specify
two SIFs at a single node and get an increased SIF. For example, you cannot specify a socket
weld SIF and an intersection SIF at the same point.
Corrosion
Calculate the corroded effective section modulus by using (r2)te
Where:
r is the average cross sectional radius of the non-corroded pipe
(te) is the corroded thickness.
Select the thickness (te) based on the non-corroded thicknesses of the branch and header,
in other words, the lesser of Th and iTb. The resulting value has the corrosion subtracted from it
before the effective section modulus calculation is made.
Always use the corroded wall thickness to calculate the Maximum Shear Stress regardless of
the setting of the All Stress Cases Corroded option located in the setup file.
soil restraint and telling the setup file to include F/A components in the stress calculations. Be
aware that for any type of problem, if large axial loads are developed because of the design, the
piping code might not be adequately considering it.
B31.4 Z662
B31.11 GPTC/Z380
These codes tell you to add the longitudinal stresses due to weight, pressure, and other
sustained loadings so torsion is not added. Torsional shear stresses are not longitudinal
stresses. You can request that torsion is added into the sustained and occasional stress
equations by including the Add Torsion in SL Stress option in the setup file. The torsion stress
is still not intensified as it is in the power piping codes. This lack of intensification is considered
an oversight and is corrected in WRC 329. You can include this fix by running any of the above
codes and including the Use WRC330 option in the setup file.
Pressure Stiffening
If you request pressure stiffening for those codes that do not normally provide it, CAESAR II
applies pressure stiffening for all bends and for both miter types.
GPTC/Z380: Occasional cases are not specifically defined. If you enter an OCC load case
the allowable defaults to 1.0 times the sustained allowable stress in other words OCC=1.0.
HPGSL: The occasional load factor is 1.33.
JPI: The occasional load factor is 1.33.
You can change the occasional load factor from the program defaults by using the setup file.
Enter the value as a percent. To get an occasional load factor of 1.5, you must type 50.0.
Code-Specific Notes
B31.1
Calculate pressure stiffening using B31.1
Pressure stiffening is defined by default in the code. You can exclude pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by including the Use Pressure Stiffening=No option in the setup file.
welded tees by including the No Reduced SIF for RFT and WLT option in the setup file. This
produces less conservative results, but can in some cases be justified.
B31.1 102.3.2 (c) says to divide the allowable stresses coming from the stress tables in
Appendix A by the applicable weld joint factors listed in Paragraph 102.4.3.
B31.3
Flanged end modifications using B31.3
Modifications resulting from flanged ends are permitted in the code providing the bend is not a
widely spaced miter.
B31.4
Calculate pressure stiffening using B31.4
Pressure stiffening is defined by default in the code. You can exclude pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by including the Use Pressure Stiffening on Bends in the setup file.
for determining the allowable stress for occasional load sets, is not used in B31.4, as the default
allowable stress is 0.8 times the minimum yield stress.
CAESAR II assumes that 419.6.4(b) establishes a requirement for the allowable operating
stress at 90% of Sy; when the net axial stress is compressive (for example, when longitudinal
pressure stresses can be ignored in underground pipes). The last sentence in the paragraph
establishes that: "Beam bending stresses shall be included in the longitudinal stress for those
portions of the restrained line which are supported above ground." You have two options for
including the axial stress in your analyses:
1. Include axial friction restraints and include the ADD_F/A parameter into the setup file. Set
Fac to 0.001 to indicate that the line is buried, so longitudinal pressure stresses are not
present, so the hoop stress component must be considered.
2. Use the Fac value to have CAESAR II compute the "axially-restrained" stress and include it
during stress calculations. If you enter a nonzero Fac value, then multiply the pressure plus
axial loads in the pipe by (1-Fac). This gives a more realistic estimation of the axial stress in
the pipe when you include both of the effects above.
Paragraph 419.6.4(b) requires 1) the reduction of the axial expansion stress by the
product of Poisson's ratio and the pressure hoop stress, and 2) the addiction of the hoop stress
to the axial stress. The latter represents the calculation of stress intensity when the axial stress
is compressive, implying that there is no longitudinal pressure stress in buried pipe (the pressure
loads are transmitted directly to the soil). CAESAR II handles this case in the Operating Load
Case, where the hoop stress is added in and the allowable stress is set to 0.9 Sy whenever the
axial stress is compressive. If Fac is 0.001, the piping element is considered buried, so the
longitudinal pressure stress is replaced by the product of Poissons ratio and the hoop stress, in
keeping with the spirit of paragraph 419.6.4(b). "Fac" is automatically set to 0.001 when B31.4
pipe is sent through the Buried Pipe Modeler. The stress due to axial force is also included for
these elements.
The Fac variable should probably not be set to 1.0 with B31.4 and thermal expansion cases
where you are going from one thermal state to another state. In other words, where the case is
of the form: L1-L2, and both L1 and L2 contain temperatures. In this case, the thermal
expansion used in the restrained pipe calculation comes from the last thermal specified in the
load case definition. In the example above the thermal expansion associated with the L2 load
case.
The Base Hoop Stress On OD flag in the setup file is used by B31.4 when the hoop stress is
calculated for the restrained pipe longitudinal stress calculation. The default is to base the hoop
stress calculation on the average diameter, and the equation PD/2t. In the mechanical stress
calculations the hoop stress is based on the inside diameter.
This is the hoop stress that is printed in the extended CAESAR II Stress report.
B31.4 Chapter IX
Chapter IX presents the offshore requirements of the B31.4 (on page 969).
Calculate Stress Intensification Factors (SIFs), flexibility factors, and section moduli
Calculate all SIFs, flexibility factors, and section moduli exactly as stated in the standard B31.4
code.
B31.5
B31.5 reducer default values
The default SIF value is 1.0. The default flexibility factor value is 1.0.
B31.8
Restrained Pipe (as defined in Section 833.1):
For Straight Pipe:
Both SL and SC < 0.9ST (OPE)
Both SL, and SC < 0.9ST (SUS)
SL < 0.9ST and Sc < ST (OCC)
and
* The Stress Report displays the calculation causing the highest percent of allowable along
with its specific allowable.
For All Other Components
SL < 0.9ST (OPE, SUS, OCC)
restrained, as per Code Section 833.1. In general, restrained piping is piping in which the soil or
supports prevent axial displacement of flexure at bends. Conversely, unrestrained piping is
piping that is free to displace axially or flex at bends. For more information, see Section 833.1.
Processing a B31.8 model through the Buried Pipe Modeler designates the buried sections as
restrained.
For restrained pipe, B31.8 specifies that the operating case stresses should include the thermal
axial stress component, a constant stress due to linear thermal expansion, but exclude thermal
bending stresses from the SB component. Because CAESAR II cannot go back and segregate
internal thermal forces and moments from those of other loads, the thermal axial stresses are
calculated and included as part of SX (as opposed to added as a constant), and thermal bending
stresses are conservatively included in SB.
Bending stress SB is defined differently for straight pipe or "large-radius" bends than it is for
other components. CAESAR II resolves the ambiguity of exactly what constitutes a
"large-radius" bend by considering any bend having an SIF of 1.0 as being a "large-radius"
bend.
Modifications to the flexibility factor and Stress Intensification Factor (SIF) using B31.8
Modifications to the flexibility factor and SIF of bends resulting from flanged ends are permitted
by the code.
Calculate the Stress Intensification Factors (SIFs), flexibility factors, and section moduli
using B31.8 Chapter VIII
Calculate all SIFs, flexibility factors, and section moduli exactly as in the standard B31.8 Code.
Make all stress calculations using the non-corroded wall thickness for the hoop and longitudinal
stresses. Use the corroded thickness for the combined stress.
Calculate the operating, sustained, or occasional load cases using B31.8 Chapter VIII
Operating, sustained, or occasional load cases are treated identically. For these load cases, you
must perform three stress calculations, each with specific allowable limits. The stress calculation
causing the highest percent of allowable displays in the stress report along with its specific
allowable. The stress checks are:
Hoop Stress: Sh F1ST
Longitudinal Stress: |SL| 0.8S
Equivalent Stress: Se 0.9S
Where:
Sh = (Pi Pe) D / 2t
Pi = Internal Pressure
Pe = External Pressure
D = Outer Diameter
t = Wall Thickness
F1 = Hoop Stress Design Factor 0.50 or 0.72 see Table A842.22 of B31.8
S = Specified Minimum Yield Strength
T = Temperature Derating Factor see Table 841.116A of B31.8
The product of S and T, the yield stress at operating temperature, is required in
the SH field of the CAESAR II Input:
SL = Maximum Longitudinal Stress Positive Tensile and Negative Compressive
Se = 2[((SL - Sh)/2)2 + Ss2]1/2
Ss = Torsional Stress
B31.9 Notes
Paragraph 919.4.1.b states that for analysis methods follow B31.1. For more information, refer
to B31.1.
B31.11
Calculate pressure stiffening using B31.11
Pressure stiffening is included by default in the code. You can exclude pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by setting the Use Pressure Stiffening switch in the setup file.
CAESAR II assumes that 1119.6.4(b) establishes a requirement for the allowable operating
stress at 90% of Sy when the net axial stress is compressive (when longitudinal pressure
stresses can be ignored in underground pipes). The last sentence in the paragraph establishes
that: "Beam bending stresses shall be included in the longitudinal stress for those portions of the
restrained line which are supported above ground." You have two options for including this axial
stress in your analyses:
1. Include axial friction restraints and include the Add F/A option in the setup file. Set Fac to
0.001 to indicate that the line is buried, so longitudinal pressure stresses are not present,
and so the hoop stress component is considered.
2. Use Fac to tell CAESAR II to compute the axially-restrained stress and include it during
stress calculations. If you enter a nonzero Fac, the pressure plus axial loads in the pipe are
multiplied by (1-Fac). This gives a more realistic estimation of the axial stress in the pipe
when you have included both of the effects above.
Paragraph 1119.6.4(b) requires 1) the reduction of the axial expansion stress by the
product of Poissons ratio and the pressure hoop stress, and 2) the addition of the hoop stress to
the axial stress. The latter represents the calculation of stress intensity when the axial stress is
compressive, implying that there is no longitudinal pressure stress in buried pipe (the pressure
loads are transmitted directly to the soil). CAESAR II handles this case in the operating load
case, where the hoop stress is added in and the allowable stress is set to 0.9 Sy whenever the
axial stress is compressive. If Fac is 0.001, the piping element is considered buried, so the
longitudinal pressure stress is replaced by the product of Poissons ratio and the hoop stress, in
keeping with the spirit of paragraph 1119.6.4(b). Fac is automatically set to 0.001 when B31.11
pipe is sent through the buried pipe modeler (on page 485). The stress due to axial force is also
included for these elements.
Do not set Fac to 1.0 when using B31.11with thermal expansion cases where you are going
from one thermal state to another state. In other words where the case is of the form: L1-L2, and
both L1 and L2 contain temperatures. In this case the thermal expansion used in the restrained
pipe calculation comes from the last thermal specified in the load case definition. In the example
above the thermal expansion associated with the L2 load case.
When calculating the hoop stress for the restrained pipe longitudinal stress calculation use the
Base Hoop Stress On option in the setup file. The default is to base the hoop stress calculation
on D = average diameter in the equation PD/2t. In mechanical stress calculations the hoop
stress is based on the inside diameter. This is the hoop stress that displays in the extended
CAESAR II Stress report.
Minimum SIF for reinforced and unreinforced fabricated tees using NC and ND
The minimum SIF for reinforced and unreinforced fabricated tees is 2.1.
Where:
f = Cyclic Reduction Factor
Sc = Cold Allowable
Sh = Hot Allowable
Sl = Sustained Stress from PD/4t+0.75iMb
Sy = Material Yield Stress
OCC = Occasional Factor from the CAESAR II configuration file
CANADIAN Z662
Calculate pressure stiffening using Z662
Pressure stiffening is not defined by default in the code. You can include pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by including the Use Pressure Stiffening=Yes option in the setup file.
CAESAR II assumes that Section 4.6.2 of the Z662 code establishes a requirement for the
allowable operating stress of 0.9 x S x T whenever the net axial stress is compressive in the
absence of bending stress, and an allowable operating stress of S x T when the net axial stress
is compressive in the presence of bending stress.
Section 4.6.2 requires the following:
1. The reduction of the axial expansion stress by the product of Poissons Ratio and the
pressure hoop stress.
2. The addition of the hoop stress to the axial stress.
The latter represents the calculation of stress intensity when the axial stress is compressive,
implying that there is no longitudinal pressure stress in buried pipe (the longitudinal pressure
thrust loads are transmitted directly to the soil). CAESAR II handles these requirements, in the
operating load case, in the following manner:
1. If FAC is 1.0, the piping system is fully restrained in the axial direction as described in
Section 4.6.2.1, and the operating stress is calculated as:
Sh + E a (T2 - T1) - v Sh < 0.9 S x T
2. If FAC is 0.001, the piping system is buried, but the soil supports are modeled (rather than
just assumed to be fully rigid). This setting removes the longitudinal pressure stress from the
equation (as described above), and takes bending stresses into consideration, as required
by Section 4.6.2.2.1. In this case, the operating stress is calculated as:
Sh +Fax/A + Sb - v Sh < S x T
3. If FAC is 0.0, the piping system is either not restrained, or is a freely spanning or above
ground portion of a restrained line, as described in Section 4.6.2.2.1. In this case, the
longitudinal pressure stress is restored, so this formula only comes into effect if the net axial
stress including pressure is compressive, in which case the operating stress is calculated
as:
Sh +Slp + Fax/A + Sb < S x T
4. CAESAR II does not do an operating code stress check for those elements for which the net
axial stress is longitudinal.
5. CAESAR II does not check for buckling, as required by Section 4.6.2.2.2.
NAVY 505
Calculate pressure stiffening using Navy 505
Pressure stiffening is not defined by default in the Code. You can include pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by including the parameter Use Pressure Stiffening in the setup file.
Calculate stress intensification factors (SIF)s for intersections using Navy 505
In-plane and out-plane SIFs for intersections are the same.
BS806
For BS806, the maximum hot stress case is considered to be the operating load case. Operating
load case allowables are only given as per BS806 when the creep rupture strength governs the
stress range allowable. See BS806 sect 4.11.2.
moment at each of the intersection ends 1, 2 and 3 respectively. The m factor is computed as
required with a value of n=1, in other words, for non-interacting intersections. BS806 does not
address reducers for SIF calculations.
The CAESAR II equation modeling of the BS806 SIF curves for bends displays in the following
plots.
WRC329 recommendations
Swedish Method 1 cannot take advantage of the WRC 329 recommendations. WRC 329, if
requested, is ignored.
Calculate stress intensification factors (SIFs) for intersections using Swedish codes
Inplane and outplane SIFs for intersections are the same.
Swedish Code item 9 is dealt with as a US tapered transition. Also, items 10 and 11 in the
Swedish table 9:2 correspond to items 8 and 9 in the CAESAR II nomenclature.
B31.1 (1967)
Calculate full-sized intersections for both the header and the branch using B31.1 (1967)
B31.1 (1967) uses ii = io for full-sized intersections for both the header and the branch, and for
reduced intersections uses ii = 0.75io + 0.25 for both the header and the branch.
Stoomwezen
Sc = The yield stress at room temperature is referred to as Re in the code.
Fac = A constant whose value is either 0.44 or 0.5. For more information, refer
to Stoomwezen Section 5.2.
Sustained Allowable = Sh
Where:
CODETI
Modifications resulting from flanged ends using CODETI
Modifications resulting from flanged ends are permitted in the code for all bends, including
widely spaced miters.
You can enable pressure stiffening for stress intensification factors (SIF)s as well by including
the Use Pressure Stiffening option.
Sr = Minimum of 1.25F1 + 0.25F2; Fr * Rs - F2; or Fr (1.25 R1 + 0.25 R2) The latter for higher
temperatures; above 425C for austenitic stainless steel, or above 370C for other
materials.
OCC Occasional Load Factor from the configuration file (defaults to 1.2)
RS = Permissible Extent of Stress for 7000 Cycles (from Code Table 10.2)
FDBR
FDBR is similar to B31.1 in most requirements. For more information, see B31.1.
BS 7159
BS 7159 for Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe requires that you evaluate the operating
load case only. You must verify the following operating load case combined stress requirements
are met:
If Sx is tensile:
(OPE)
and
(OPE)
or
if Sx is compressive:
(OPE)
and
(OPE)
Circumferential Stress
for bends
for tees
BS 7159 requires that you consider the thermal strain of the pipe material as being from 80% -
85% below the true material strain due to insulation effects of the pipe wall. Enter this reduction
factor K in the allowable stress FAC field. If left blank, this value defaults to 1.0.
Calculate the stress intensity and flexibility factors of bends using BS 7159
The stress intensity and flexibility factors of bends vary based on laminate type:
All chopped strand mat (CSM) construction with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.
CSM and woven roving (WR) construction with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.
CSM and multi-filament roving construction with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.
You can enter the laminate type in the Bend Type field, or set the type default on the
Special Execution Parameter dialog box.
UKOOA
The United Kingdom Offshore Operators Association (UKOOA) Specification and
Recommended Practice for the Use of GRP Piping Offshore is similar in many respects to the
BS 7159, except that it simplifies the calculation requirements in exchange for imposing more
conservatism on the piping operating conditions. Rather than explicitly calculating a combined
stress, the specification defines an idealized envelope of combinations of axial and hoop
stresses which cause the equivalent stress to reach failure. This curve represents the plot of:
(x / -all)2 + hoop / hoop-all)2 - [x hoop / (x-all hoop-all)] 1.0
Where:
x-all = Allowable Stress Axial
hoop-all = Allowable Stress Hoop
The specification conservatively limits you to that part of the curve falling under the line between
x-all also known as a(0:1) and the intersection point on the curve where hoop is twice x a
natural condition for a pipe loaded only with pressure. An implicit modification to this
requirement is the fact that pressure stresses are given a factor of safety typically equal to 2/3
while other stresses are not. This gives an explicit requirement of:
Pdes f1 f2 f3 LTHP
Where:
Pdes = Allowable Design Pressure
f1 = Factor of Safety for 97.5% Lower Confidence Limit Usually 0.85
f2 = System Factor of Safety Usually 0.67
f3 = Ratio of Residual Allowable After Mechanical Loads
= 1 - (2 sab) / (r f1 LTHS)
Where:
P = Design Pressure
Dm = Pipe Mean Diameter
t = Pipe Wall Thickness
On the Allowable auxiliary dialog box, the product of f1 and LTHS is entered in the SH1, SH2,
SH3 fields; r is entered in the F1, F2, F3 fields; f2 is entered in the Eff field; and the temperature
reduction factor K (described for BS 7159 above) is entered in the Fac field if omitted, it defaults
to 1.0. K- and i-factors for bends and tees, and bending and pressure stresses are calculated
as described for the BS 7159.
IGE/TD/12
CAESAR II performs calculations as per the IGE/TD/12 Edition 2 code requirements. The
complexity of these requirements far exceeds what can be described here. We recommend that
you acquire a copy of this code from the International Institution of Gas Engineers & Managers.
Calculate the Stress Intensification Factors (SIFs), flexibility factors, or section moduli
using DNV
DNV does not provide any guidance on calculating SIFs, flexibility factors, or section moduli. An
informal poll of DNV experts and users was taken and the decision was made to use the B31.1
Power Code. Make all stress calculations using the corroded wall thickness.
Where:
Sh = (Pi Pe) (D t) / 2t
Pi = Internal Pressure
Pe = External Pressure
D = Outer Diameter
t = Wall Thickness
ns = Hoop Stress Yielding Usage Factor; see Tables C1 and C2 of the DNV Code
SMYS = Specified Minimum Yield Strength at Operating Temperature
nu = Hoop Stress Bursting Usage Factor; see Tables C1 and C2 of the DNV Code
SMTS = Specified Minimum Tensile Strength at Operating Temperature
SL = Maximum Longitudinal Stress
n = Equivalent Stress Usage Factor; see Table C4 of the DNV Code
Se = [Sh2 + SL2 - ShSL + 3t2]1/2
t = Torsional Stress
EN-13480
Flexibility calculations using EN-13480
EN-13480 uses the hot modulus of elasticity in the flexibility calculations (Sect 12.1.7.2). The
expansion allowable stress is subsequently modified by the ratio of Eh/Ec.
GPTC/Z380
The recommendations of this code apply only to above ground steel piping through 450F.
GPTC/Z380 and B31.8, prior to 2004, recommendations are similar in many ways. The
differences between GPTC/Z380 and B31.8 display below:
The longitudinal joint factors vary slightly between B31.8 Table 841.115a and GPTC/Z380
Table 192.113.
The design factor in B31.8 Table 841.114b provides more detail than GPTC/Z380 Table
192.11.
The allowable for the combined stress calculation in GPTC/Z380 Section 192.159-1.5e
includes a "0.75" factor, while B31.8 Section 833.4 does not.
GPTC/Z380 uses a single stress intensification factor (SIF) for both in-plane and
out-of-plane loads, while B31.8 distinguishes between in-plane and out-of-plane SIFs.
ISO-14692
ISO-14692 addresses the analysis of Fiber Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe. Qualification is based
on the comparison of actual stresses, hoop and axial, to a failure envelope. See BS 7159 (on
page 994) for the CAESAR II approach for FRP pipe analysis.
HPGSL
Calculate stress intensification factors (SIFs) for intersections using HPGSL
HPGSL provides two separate equations to calculate the in-plane and out-plane stress
intensification factors (SIFs) for intersections.
Where:
f = Cyclic Reduction Factor
Eff = Weld Joint Efficiency Minimum Wall Thickness Only
Sc = Cold Allowable Stress
Sh = Hot Allowable Stress
SI = Sustained Stress
Occ = Occasional Load Factor Default is 1.33
When specifying a corrosion allowance, do not use a corrosion value in the sustained
and occasional stress calculations.
JPI
Calculate stress intensification factors (SIFs) for intersections using JPI
JPI provides two separate equations to calculate the in-plane and out-plane SIFs for
intersections.
The program adds the F/A longitudinal stress component, by default, to the code stress
component for all other stress categories.
Where:
f = Cyclic Reduction Factor
Eff = Weld Joint Efficiency minimum wall thickness only
Sc = Cold Allowable Stress
Sh = Hot Allowable Stress
SI = Sustained Stress
Occ = Occasional Load Factor Default - 1.33
When specifying a corrosion allowance, do not use a corrosion value in the sustained
and occasional stress calculations.
Local Coordinates
Many analytical models in engineering are based upon being able to define a real physical
object mathematically. This is accomplished by mapping the dimensions of the physical object
into a similar mathematical space. Mathematical space is usually assumed to be either
two-dimensional or three-dimensional. For piping analysis, the three dimensional space is
necessary, because almost all piping systems are three dimensional in nature.
Two typical three-dimensional mathematical systems are shown below in Figure 1. Both of these
systems are "Cartesian Coordinate Systems". Each axis in these systems is perpendicular to all
other axes.
Physically, using your right hand, what do the above equations mean? This question is best
answered by Figure 3.
The first method is to modify the configuration file in the current data directory. This can be
accomplished from the Main Menu, by selecting Tools>Configure Setup. After the
configuration dialog appears, select the Geometry tab, as shown in Figure 5. On this tab, click
the Z-axis Vertical check box, as shown in the figure below.
The second method to obtain a global coordinate system with the Z-axis vertical is to switch
coordinate systems from within the input for the specific job at hand. This can be accomplished
from the Special Execution Parameters dialog box of the piping input processor. This dialog
box is shown below in Figure 6.
Defining a Model
Using the CAESAR II default coordinate system (Y axis vertical), and assuming the system
shown below in Figure 7, the corresponding element definitions are given in Figure 8.
CAESAR II determines the appropriate components in the global directions, based on the
current direction cosines, which default to those of the preceding element.
Rotating the model: by using the List processor or by clicking List Input . The List
processor presents the model in a spreadsheet, format, as shown in Figure 8. Options in this
processor allow you to rotate the model about any of the three global axes, or a specified
amount. For example, if the model shown in Figures 7 and 8 is rotated a negative -90
degrees about the global Y-axis, the result is as shown in Figure 10.
Restraint loads and displacements are checked in the global coordinate system. This is
necessary because restraint loads and displacements are nodal quantities. Element loads and
stresses are most often evaluated in their local coordinate system. A good example illustrating
the use of a local (element) coordinate system is the free body diagram, of forces and moments.
The forces and moments in this free body diagram remain the same, regardless of the position
of the element in the global coordinate system. Note however, that each element has its own
local coordinate system. Furthermore, the local coordinate system of one element may be
different from the local coordinate system of a different element.
While the global coordinate system is typically referred to using the capital letters X, Y, and Z,
local coordinate systems use a variety of nomenclature. In almost all cases, local coordinate
systems use lower case letters. Typical local coordinate system axes are: xyz, abc, and uvw.
CAESAR II uses xyz to denote the local element coordinate system.
The local coordinate system for an element is related to the global coordinate system through a
rule. There may be a number of such rules, depending on the type of element. In CAESAR II,
the following rules are used to define the local coordinate systems of the piping elements in a
model.
An exception to this rule is the case of a vertical element. In this case, the local X-axis is still
aligned in the From - To direction. However, you cannot cross a vertical element into global Y,
so the local Y-axis was arbitrarily assigned to align with the global X-axis.
The straight elements of the model in Figure 7 are reproduced below in Figure 11, along with
their local coordinate systems. Notice that each of these straight elements has its own local
coordinate system, and that in this model, they are all aligned differently.
As an additional example, the local element coordinate systems for the rotated system of Figure
10 are shown below in Figure 12.
other words, the local Y-axis is perpendicular to the plane of the three tee elements. The
positive direction of the local Y-axis is found by vectorally crossing the local X-axis of the header
element with the local X-axis of the branch, and then reversing the sign direction. In those cases
where the two header elements have opposite local x axes, CAESAR II chooses the first one
that it finds. The local Z-axis can then be determined using the right-hand rule.
The local Z-axis coincides with the out-of-plane axis of the tee, for each element. Examples of
local coordinates for elements framing into tees are depicted below in Figure 14.
After verifying the input, confirming the load cases, and analyzing the model, output review
commences.
Output review involves checking various output reports to ensure the system responds within
certain limits. These checks include:
Checking that operating displacements make sense and are within any operational limits to
avoid ponding. Displacements, being nodal quantities, are reviewed in the global coordinate
system. There is no local coordinate system associated with nodes. For the model defined in
Figures 7 and 8, the operating displacements are shown in Figure 15 below.
Checking that the restraint loads for the structural load cases are reasonable. This includes
ensuring that the restraints can be designed to carry the computed load. Restraints being
nodal quantities are reviewed in the global coordinate system. There is no local coordinate
system associated with restraints. For the model defined in Figures 7 and 8, the operating /
sustained restraint summary is shown in Figure 16 below.
Checking the code cases for codes stress compliance. Typically the code stress is
compared to the allowable stress for each node on each element. Occasionally, when there
is an overstress condition, a review of axial, bending, and torsion stresses are necessary.
These stresses axial, bending, and torsion are local coordinate system terms, and therefore
relate to the elements local coordinate system. For the model defined in Figures 7 and 8, a
portion of the sustained stress report is shown in Figure 17 below.
When the equipment coordinate system aligns with the global coordinate system of the piping
model, the nozzle loads from the restraint report (node 50 in Figure 14) can be used in the
nozzle evaluation. However, when the equipment nozzle is skewed as it is in the case of node
50 in Figure 14, the application of the loads is more difficult. In this case, it is best to use the
loads from the elements force/moment report, in local coordinates. The only thing to remember
here is to flip the signs on all of the forces and moments, because the element force/moment
report shows the loads on the pipe element, not on the nozzle. For the element FROM node 40
to node 50, the local element force/moment report is shown in Figure 18 below.
Notice that the loads shown in Figure 19 are in the CAESAR II global coordinate system. This
can be easily verified by comparing these values to those in the restraint summary for the
operating load case as shown previously in Figure 16.
FX = 323 MX = -953
FY = 4 MY = -9
FZ = -271 MZ = -548
Using this data as input to GlbtoLocal, the utility yields the forces on the restraint in the
elements local coordinate system. This is shown in Figure 21 below.
Compare the set of values labeled Rotated Displacements / Load Vector with the Local
Element Force / Moment report, as shown above. A change in sign is necessary because the
Restraint report shows loads acting on the restraint, while the Element report shows loads
acting on the element.
In general, you do not. Displacements are a nodal property. Nodes do not have local coordinate
systems, elements do. For more information, see Restraint Data in Local Element Coordinates.
What do you do with local coordinates?
In most instances nothing. The local coordinates are only useful in CAESAR II is when dealing
with a skewed nozzle. This coordinate system is used in the Local Restraint Report.
Miscellaneous Processors
This section discusses the processors that are available in CAESAR II.
In This Section
Accounting ..................................................................................... 1023
Batch Stream Processing .............................................................. 1028
CAESAR II Fatal Error Processing ................................................ 1028
Units File Operations ..................................................................... 1029
Material Database .......................................................................... 1033
Accounting
The CAESAR II accounting system possesses the following characteristics:
It is an optional function. If you have no need to keep accounting records of your runs, then
you never need to use it.
Allows you to conveniently control all pricing factors. The total price of any job is computed
from:
IF (C4 > 0.0) THEN
cost = C1*cputime + (C2*nodes + C3*elements) * C4 * numcases + C5
ELSE
cost = C1*cputime + (C2*nodes + C3*elements) + C5
ENDIF
You can enter C1, C2, C3, C4, and C5 one time, and change them only when necessary.
Any of the constants may be zero, but at least one constant must be greater than zero.
Accounting reports are generated on a per run basis and are summarized on a per account
basis.
You can generate reports for any requested combination of account numbers.
Account numbers are user-defined and may contain up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Account and program access can be controlled using the optional password protection
feature.
Account numbers can be identified for each job using either of the following two methods:
Select the account number from a table of allowed account numbers; otherwise, the
system defaults to the last valid account number input. The account number table is set
up and maintained by the account manager.
Enter an account number, which can be any non-blank string, in a text box. There is no
default, but your entry must match one of the allowed account numbers previously input
by the account manager.
MMINUTE INTEGER*2 Minutes of the hour when the job was run
MSECOND INTEGER*2 Seconds of the minute when the job was run
The first record contains only a single integer value (ILAST), giving the last valid record number
in the accounting file. The number of job entries is equal to (ILAST-1). This first record may be
read:
READ(1,REC=1) ILAST
For information about the options available on a specific dialog box tab, see:
Activate Accounting Tab (on page 1026)
Pricing Factors Tab (on page 1026)
Account Numbers Tab (on page 1027)
Reports Tab (on page 1027)
Status Tab (on page 1028)
After the accounting system is initialized, the pricing factors are set, and account numbers
entered, you can initiate jobs with account tracking. The prompt for the account number appears
during analysis immediately after you initiate the accounting process.
Reports Tab
Accounts - Controls for which accounts a report is generated. Select Entire Data File to
generate a report that includes all accounts. To generate a report for a specific account or set of
accounts, select Specific Accounts, click Select Accounts,select the accounts from the list
that displays.
Date Range - Controls the range of dates for which a report is generated. Select Entire Data
File to generate a report that includes all dates. Select Specific Date Range to specify a range
of dates for which to generate a report.
Report - Controls the length of the report. Select Detailed to generate a full report; select
Summary to generate a shorter report. The example below shows a sample detailed report.
Status Tab
Summarizes the number of accounts and pricing factors that are in the current accounting
system. A total count of the number of accounting records (analysis runs) is also included.
First, each error trap/condition is assigned a unique number. When an abort condition occurs,
this error number and a short description of the fatal error are displayed in a Help Facility
window similar to the one shown below.
When you click OK, the software closes the Help Facility window and opens the Additional
Error Information dialog box. You can use this dialog box to reference another error number,
which can be useful when one error definition references another. Clicking OK on the
Additional Error Information dialog box returns the software to the main CAESAR II window.
At any time, you can review fatal error information by clicking Diagnostics > Error
Review, entering the appropriate error number, and then clicking OK. The Help Facility window
opens and displays the corresponding fatal error description.
Create/Review Units
Creates a custom units file. Click Tools > Create/Review Units to display the CAESAR II -
Units Maintenance dialog box, which you can use to create a new units file or to review data in
an existing units file.
If the user-defined units for a given item exist in the list, then it is not necessary to specify
a conversion factor, as it is updated automatically. If a new set of units is required, such as, for
example, feet (instead of inches) in the Length category, either select the new unit name (ft.) in
the User Units list and select the new conversion factor in the Constant list or type a new factor
in the text box.
View/Edit File
Displays one of the following windows, depending on whether you are reviewing an existing
units file or creating a new one.
User File Review - Displays only when you click View/Edit File in conjunction with
reviewing an existing units file (see "Review Existing Units File" on page 1030). The contents
of this window are read-only.
User File Maintenance - Displays only when you click View/Edit File in conjunction with
creating a new units file (see "Create a New Units File" on page 1031). The contents of this
window are editable.
Material Database
CAESAR II delivers a material database that defines the physical properties and
code-dependent allowable stresses for more than 300 materials. You can edit and manage the
delivered materials data, as well as create new materials, using the Material Database Editor.
To open the editor, click Tools > Materials or click Materials on the toolbar.
Print - Prints the materials data for every material in the entire material database.
Cut - Removes the selected data from its current location and places a copy on the Clipboard.
Copy - Creates a copy of the selected data and places it on the Clipboard.
Clear Screen to Add - Saves the current editor window contents, and then clears the screen so you can
add a new material. For more information, see Add a new material to the database (on page 1039).
Edit a Material - Allows you to edit a material item in the database. For more information, see Edit a
material in the database (on page 1040).
Delete a Material - Deletes the material from the database. For more information, see Delete a material
from the database (on page 1040).
Save Material - Saves the changes made to the current material item.
Print the Current Material - Prints only the materials data for the current material item.
It is your responsibility to check material allowables and other physical property data for the
particular code being used. While Intergraph CAS makes every attempt to keep the material
database up-to-date, the codes are subject to change frequently, and the accuracy of the
database is not guaranteed.
The Material Database Editor does not modify the data in the material database delivered
with CAESAR II. Any changes that you make are saved to a secondary database, which, by
default, is named umat1.umd and is located in the \System directory. You can specify a
different secondary database using User Material Database File Name (on page 57) in the
Configuration Editor. This setup permits multiple user-supplied database files to be used
on a single system.
Material Number
Enter a number for the material in the CAESAR II Material Database Editor. The Piping Input
module uses this number to reference the material. The number must be between 101 and 1000
inclusive and must not have been used for another material previously.
Material Name
Enter the material name as listed in the applicable code.
JPI
Material Density
Enter the density of the material.
Eff, Cf, z
Enter the appropriate factor. This factor is required by the following piping codes:
Stoomwezen - Enter the cyclic reduction factor. This is referred to in the code as Cf.
Norwegian TBK-6 - Enter the circumferential weld strength factor. This is referred to in the
code as z.
BS 7159 - Enter the ratio of the design stress (d) in the circumferential (hoop) direction to
the design stress in the longitudinal direction. Because design stress is defined in Sec. 4.3 of
the code as:
and design strain should be the same for both directions, this entry is also the ratio of the
moduli of elasticity:
For Norwegian TBK-6 and BS 7159 piping codes, if the Eff, Cf, z field is left blank, the
software uses a default value of 1.0.
Poisson's Ratio
Enter the value to be used for Poissons ratio. This input is only required for metals.
FAC
Enter the applicable factor as determined by the following piping codes.
Stoomwezen - Enter 0.44 or 0.5. This value is used to compute the equilibrium stresses as
discussed in Section 5.2 of the code. You can use 0.5 for steel if the design and fabrication
are such that stress peaks are avoided.
Norwegian - Enter the material ultimate tensile strength at room temperature Rm. If you do
not define a value, this factor is not considered to control the expansion stress allowable.
Laminate Type
Enter the laminate type (as defined in the BS 7159 code) of the fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe
used. Valid laminate types are:
CSM and Woven Roving - Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR)
construction with internal and external surface tissue reinforced layer.
CSM and Multi-filament - Chopped strand mat and multi-filament roving construction with
internal and external surface tissue reinforced layer.
CSM - All chopped strand mat construction with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.
Eh / Ea
Displays the ratio of the hoop modulus to the axial modulus of elasticity. If omitted, the software
uses a default value of 2.0.
Temperature
Enter the temperature that corresponds to the database values you will add in the remaining
cells.
In the database delivered with the software, all temperatures are in 100F increments.
Some codes list physical property values in 50F increments; therefore, small
discrepancies may occur between CAESAR II and a given code because of the interpolation of
data.
Exp. Coeff.
Enter the coefficient of thermal expansion at the reference Temperature in the indicated units.
This value must be multiplied by 106 F prior to being entered. For example, for carbon steel at
400-deg F, B 31.3 Table C-3 gives an expansion coefficient of 6.82 in/in/F. Thus, you would
enter 6.82 in the database.
Allowable Stress
Enter the code allowable stress corresponding to the reference Temperature. These values
generally correspond to the SC and SH values on the allowable auxiliary screens.
Elastic Modulus
Enter the modulus of elasticity to the reference Temperature. If no entry is given for ambient
(70 F), the software uses the value defined for Cold Elastic Modulus (on page 1036).
Yield Stress
Enter the yield stress that corresponds to the reference Temperature.
CAESAR II displays the new material as an option in the Material list on the Classic Piping
Input dialog box.
3. Edit the material item as needed, and then click Save Material to save your changes to
the material database.
The Piping Code ID list corresponds to the piping code ID on the Piping Input dialog box.
To exit the dialog box without selecting a material press Esc or click Cancel.
External Interfaces
External Interfaces allow data transfer between CAESAR II and other software applications. To
view a list of those software applications, click Tools > External Interfaces in the Main menu.
In most cases, data transfer is from a drawing or analysis package to CAESAR II. However, the
CAESAR II Neutral File transfers both to and from CAESAR II.
Intergraph CADWorx Plant provides a seamless, bi-directional interface between
CADWorx and CAESAR II without a translation procedure.
Most of the interfaces are CAD interfaces. The exceptions are LIQT, AFT IMPULSE,
PIPENET, Pipeplus, FlowMaster, the CAESAR II Data Matrix, and the CAESAR II
Neutral File.
CAD interfaces (CADPIPE, Intergraph Smart 3D PCF, Intergraph PDS, and PCF) are
intended to transfer piping geometry into CAESAR II. The resulting CAESAR II input must be
thoroughly checked, with loads, restraints, and other specifics added.
The CAESAR II Neutral File and the Intergraph CADWorx Plant interfaces are capable of
transferring 100% of the data that comprises the _A (input) file.
LIQT, AFT IMPULSE, PIPENET, PipePlus, and FlowMaster are transient analysis packages
for liquids in piping networks that calculate pressure imbalances as a function of time. The
CAESAR II interface converts this LIQT output from these packages to create force
response spectra for CAESAR II dynamic input.
The interfaces typically prompt you for a file name, transfer the data, and then prompt for
another file name. This cycle continues either until a blank file name is encountered or you
cancel the process.
Before beginning an interface to CAESAR II, follow the requirements of the CAESAR II
Neutral File interface. This enables all of the spreadsheet data to be transferred.
Intergraph CADWorx Plant is the Intergraph CAS piping design and drafting software for the
AutoCAD environment. Data may be completely and seamlessly transferred between CAESAR
II and Intergraph CADWorx Plant, without creating any neutral files or going through any
intermediate steps.
N1Base memory allocation quantity used to set array sizes. For example, if N1=2,000,
your neutral file can handle up to 2,000 elements.
N21/2 N1
N31/3 N1
N41/4 N1
N51/5 N1
N6N1/13.33
Control Information
#$ CONTROL - Provides the section division header. The #$ and space are required, and the
word CONTROL is in all uppercase.
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13) to write the values of the following variables on the next
line of the neutral file:
NUMELT - Defines the number of piping elements (spreadsheets) in the input file.
NUMNOZ - Defines the number of nozzles in the input file.
NOHGRS - Defines the number of spring hangers in the input file.
NONAM - Defines the number of Node Name data blocks in the input file.
NORED - Defines the number of reducers in the input file.
NUMFLG - Defines the number of flanges in the input file.
Write 13 items that contain the number of auxiliary data types used in the input file followed by
the vertical axis indicator. Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13). These 13 values are:
The number of bend auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of rigid-element auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of expansion-joint auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of restraint auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
Each set of auxiliary data is separated by a sub-section header. If a particular value in IAUXAU
is zero, then only the subsection header is written to the neutral file.
The data storage for these arrays is allocated at runtime based on the available free system
memory. These arrays are allocated proportionally as a percentage of the n-number of elements
allowed. Four proportions are used: 1/2, 1/3, 1/4, and 1/5. These proportions correspond to the
variables: N2, N3, N4, and N5. Maintain these proportions to ensure that the neutral file reader
can accept the file.
#$ NODENAME - Defines the Node Name data. To maintain downward compatibility, this
section is optional. The data for each element set of node names in the input file is listed here.
A two-member array (NAM) defines each set of node names. The NAM array is dimensioned
(N6, 2). Use the FORTRAN format (2X, A10, 16X, A10) to read the character name of the
FROM node and then that of the TO node.
#$ BEND - Defines the bend data. The data for each bend in the input file is listed here.
A 15-member array (BND) defines each bend. The BND array is dimensioned (N3,15).
Only 13 items are currently used. Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of
the following 13 items on the next three lines of the neutral file.
1. Bend radius
2. Type: 1 - single flange; 2 - double flange; 0 or blank - welded
3. Angle to node position #1
4. Node number at position #1
5. Angle to node position #2
6. Node number at position #2
7. Angle to node position #3
8. Node number at position #3
9. Number of miter cuts
10. Fitting thickness of bend if different from the pipe
11. Seam Weld (1=Yes, 0=No)
12. Bend flexibility (K) factor
13. Weld strength reduction factor WL
#$ RIGID - Defines the rigid data. The data for each rigid in the input file is listed here.
A single-element array (RIG) is used for each rigid. The RIG array is dimensioned (N3,1). The
single element of the array represents the rigid weight.
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the value.
#$ EXPJT - Defines the expansion joint data. The data for each expansion joint in the input file
is listed here. The EXP array is dimensioned (N5,5).
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following five items on the next
line of the neutral file.
1. Axial stiffness
2. Transverse stiffness
3. Bending stiffness
4. Torsional stiffness
5. Effective inside bellows diameter
#$ RESTRANT - Defines the restraint data.
The data for each restraint auxiliary data block in the input file is listed here. The RES array is
dimensioned (N2,36).
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following nine items on the
next two lines of the neutral file. These nine items are repeated four times for the four possible
restraints defined in the auxiliary data block.
This requires two lines in the neutral file for each restraint specification. This means eight lines
total for each restraint auxiliary.
1. Restraint node number
2. Restraint type (see additional notes to follow)
3. Restraint stiffness
4. Restraint gap
5. Restraint friction coefficient
6. Restraint connecting node
7. X direction cosine
8. Y direction cosine
9. Z direction cosine
The restraint type is an integer value whose valid range is from 1 to 62. The 62 possible restraint
types include:
#$ DISPLMNT - Defines the displacement data. The data for each displacement auxiliary data
block in the input file is listed here.
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 55 items on the next
lines of the neutral file. The DIS array is dimensioned (N3,110).
This requires 10 lines in the neutral file for each displacement specification. This means 20 lines
total for each displacement auxiliary.
These 55 items are repeated twice for the two possible displacements defined on the auxiliary.
Unspecified displacement values (free-displacement degrees of freedom, for example)
are designated by using a value of 9999.99.
#$ FORCMNT - Defines the start of the force/moment data. The data for each force/moment
auxiliary data block in the input file is listed here.
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 55 items on the next
ten lines of the neutral file. The FOR array is dimensioned (N3,38).
This requires ten lines in the neutral file for each force/moment specification. This means 20
lines total for each force/moment auxiliary data block.
#$ UNIFORM - Defines the start of the uniform load data. The data for each uniform load in the
input file is listed here.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 12 items on the next two
lines of the neutral file. The UNI array is dimensioned (N5,36). Currently three vectors of four
values each (three directions and a G-load flag) are used.
This requires two lines in the neutral file for each uniform load auxiliary data block.
G-flag is 1 for the input values in G's and 0 for input values in force-per-length notation.
#$ WIND - Defines the start of the wind/wave data. The data for each wind/wave specification in
the input file is listed here. The WIND array is dimensioned (N5,6).
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the set of values on the next line of the neutral
file. This requires a single line in the neutral file for each wind auxiliary.
The data items on each line are as follows:
1. Entry type (0.0 for Wind, 1.0 for Wave, 2.0 for Off)
2. Wind shape factor or wave drag coefficient
3. Wave added mass coefficient
4. Wave lift coefficient
5. Wave marine growth
6. Marine growth density
#$ OFFSETS - Defines the start of the element offset data. The data for each offset pipe in the
input file is listed here.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following six items on the next line
of the neutral file. The OFF array is dimensioned (N5,6).
This requires a single line in the neutral file for each offset auxiliary.
1. Element FROM node offset in X direction
2. Element FROM node offset in Y direction
3. Element FROM node offset in Z direction
4. Element TO node offset in X direction
5. Element TO node offset in Y direction
6. Element TO node offset in Z direction
#$ ALLOWBLS - Defines the start of the allowable stress data. The data for each allowable
spec in the input file is listed here.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 153 items on the next 26
lines of the neutral file. The ALL array is dimensioned (N5,153).
1. Cold allowable stress
2. Hot allowable for thermal case #1
3. Hot allowable for thermal case #2
4. Hot allowable for thermal case #3
5. Code cyclic reduction factor for thermal case #1
6. Code cyclic reduction factor for thermal case #2
7. Code cyclic reduction factor for thermal case #3
8. Eff.
9. Sy
10. Fac
11. Pmax
12. Piping code id
13. Hot allowable for thermal case #4
14. Hot allowable for thermal case #5
15. Hot allowable for thermal case #6
16. Hot allowable for thermal case #7
17. Hot allowable for thermal case #8
18. Hot allowable for thermal case #9
19. Code cyclic reduction factor for thermal case #4
20. Code cyclic reduction factor for thermal case #5
21. Code cyclic reduction factor for thermal case #6
Some of these items (notably 8-24) may have various meanings based on the active piping
code.
Piping code ISO-14692 has special mapping for the first 24 items.
#$ SIF&TEES - Defines the start of the SIF/TEE data. The data for each SIF/TEE specification
in the input file is listed here.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 30 items, for each of the
two tees that can be specified on the dialog box. The SIF array is dimensioned (N4,60).
The software requires five lines in the neutral file for each SIF/TEE specified. This means you
must specify 10 lines total for each auxiliary element.
The information in parenthesis below gives information about each input value.
1. Node (the intersection node number)
2. Type (the intersection type code, if not specified this auxiliary this is only used to specify
SIFs)
3. In-Plane SIF (ii)*
4. Out-Plane SIF (io)*
5. Weld (d) (circumferential weld mismatch, used for butt welds and tapered transitions
Hangers - Describes the spring hangers in the input file. Some of the hanger data listed below
represents uninitialized data. In the instances where this uninitialized data represent infinite
values (such as maximum travel limit and available space), it is reported here as 9999.99.
The next line contains values for the following parameters in FORTRAN format (2X, I13,
5G13.6):
IDFTABLE is the default hanger table.
DEFVAR is the default for allowed load variation.
DEFRIG is the default for rigid support displacement criteria.
DEFMXTRAVEL is the default for maximum allowed travel.
DEFSHTSPR is the default for allowing short range springs (0=no 1=yes).
DEFMUL is the default multi-load case design option.
The next line contains values for the following parameters in the FORTRAN format (2X, 5I13):
IDFOPER is the default number of hanger design operating cases (always 1).
IACTCLD is the default cold load calculation switch (0=no, 1=yes).
IHGRLDS is the number of hanger operating loads (0 -3).
IACTUAL is the load case defining actual cold loads.
IMULTIOPTS is the multi-load case design option (1-7).
An array of hanger node numbers (IHGRNODE) is read and written for each hanger in the input
file and is dimensioned (N5). There are seven lines in the neutral file for this data if all N5
hangers are specified. Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13).
A 10-element array (HGRDAT) is read and written for each hanger in the input file. The
HGRDAT array is dimensioned (10,N5). Each hanger in the model requires two lines in the
neutral file. Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6).
1. Hanger stiffness
2. Allowable load variation
3. Rigid support displacement criteria
4. Allowed space for hanger
5. Cold load #1 (theoretical)
6. Hot load #1 (initialize to 0.0)
7. User defined operating load f/ variable springs (init to 0.0)
8. Maximum allowed travel limit
9. Multiple load case design option
10. Hanger hardware weight
A four-element array (IHGRFREE) is read/written for each hanger in the input file. The
IHGRFREE array is dimensioned ( 4,N5). Each hanger in the file requires one line in the neutral
file.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13).
1. Anchor node to be freed (#1)
5. Select Export Output Data Also if you want to include any output results (if available) in the
exported data set.
6. Select Use System Units to convert the output data to the set of units currently defined in
the CAESAR II Configure/Setup.
7. Do one of the following:
a. Click Quick XML Export to transfer the input data to the "filename_ INPUT.xml" file and
output data to the "filename_OUTPUT.xml" file (where filename is the name of the file
you selected to export).
CAESAR II prompts you and asks if you want to open the newly exported file. Click OK to
open the file or Cancel to exit the wizard.
You must have the appropriate application installed to open the file format or the
exported file does not open.
b. Complete steps 8 through 15.
8. Click Browse in the Select the Data Export Output File box and navigate to the location of
the output data. CAESAR II defaults the output filename to the name of the file you have
open currently.
9. Select the Save as type list to specify the required data output. You can export files in the
following formats: .mdb (Microsoft Office 2001/2002/Access Database, .accdb (Microsoft
Office 2007/2010/Access Database), .txt (Microsoft Excel compatible text), or .xml
(Extensible Markup Language).
10. Click Save.
11. Click Next.
CAESAR II displays the CAESAR II Input Export Options dialog box.
12. Select the input options you want to export and then click Next.
13. Select the static load cases for your results and the output report options that you want to
export.
Several built-in reports, queries, and other helpful options are provided in the default
Access file format, or you can develop custom reports and queries.
14. Click Finish.
CAESAR II prompts you and asks if you want to open the newly exported file.
15. Do one of the following:
a. Click OK to open the exported file.
b. Click Cancel to close the wizard.
See Auxiliary Data Pointers for a list of database pointers to auxiliary data, which
also appear in this input options output table.
WL Factor WI_FACTOR
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.BEND_PTR = INPUT_BENDS.BEND_PTR
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.RIGID_PTR = INPUT_BENDS.RIGID_NUM.
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.EXPJT_PTR = INPUT_EXPJT.EXPJT_PTR.
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.REST_PTR = INPUT_RESTRAINTS.REST_PTR.
Restraint Codes
There are 62 different restraints available in CAESAR II. When the restraint information is
exported to a format such as Microsoft Access, a restraint type code is exported. The following
is the key for those restraint codes.
1 ANC Anchor
13 +X Translational Directional
14 +Y Translational Directional
15 +Z Translational Directional
16 -X Translational Directional
17 -Y Translational Directional
18 -Z Translational Directional
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.FORCMNT_PTR = INPUT_FORCMNT.FORCMNT_PTR
X axis load UX UX
Y axis load UY UY
Z axis load UZ UZ
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.ULOAD_PTR = INPUT_UNIFORM.ULOAD_PTR
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.WLOAD_PTR = INPUT_WIND.WIND_PTR
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.OFFSETS_PTR = INPUT_OFFSETS.OFFSETS_PTR
Sy (yield stress) SY SY
Hot Sy HOT_SY
Hot SU HOT_SU
* These tags are child tags of CASE_NUM (can range from 1 through 9)
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.ALLOW_PTR = INPUT_ALLOWBLS.ALLOW_PTR
B1 B1 B1
B2 B2 B2
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.INT_PTR = INPUT_SIFTEES.SIF_PTR
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.NOZ_PTR = INPUT_NOZZLES_WRC297.NOZ_PTR
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.NOZ_PTR = INPUT_NOZZLES_API650.NOZ_PTR
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.NOZ_PTR = INPUT_NOZZLES_BS5500.NOZ_PTR
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.HGR_PTR = INPUT_HANGERS.HGR_PTR
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.RED_PTR = INPUT_REDUCERS.RED_PTR
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.FLG_PTR = INPUT_FLANGES.FLG_PTR
NODE1 NODE1
FX1 FX1
FY1 FY1
FZ1 FZ1
MX1 MX1
MY1 MY1
MZ1 MZ1
COSX1 COSX1
COSY1 COSY1
COSZ1 COSZ1
RATING1 RATING1
METHOD1 METHOD1
NODE2 NODE2
FX2 FX2
FY2 FY2
FZ2 FZ2
MX2 MX2
MY2 MY2
MZ2 MZ2
COSX2 COSX2
COSY2 COSY2
COSZ2 COSZ2
RATING2 RATING2
METHOD2 METHOD2
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.EQP_PTR = INPUT_EQUIPMENT.EQP_PTR
Translation X DX DX
Translation Y DY DY
Translation Z DZ DZ
Rotation X RX RX
Rotation Y RY RY
Rotation Z RZ RZ
Force X FX FX
Force Y FY FY
Force Z FZ FZ
Moment X MX MX
Moment Y MY MY
Moment Z MZ MZ
LCASE_NUM LCASE_NUM
CASE CASE
NODE NODE
METHOD METHOD
FX_LIMIT FX_LIMIT
FY_LIMIT FY_LIMIT
FZ_LIMIT FZ_LIMIT
MX_LIMIT MX_LIMIT
MY_LIMIT MY_LIMIT
MZ_LIMIT MZ_LIMIT
FRES_LIMIT FRES_LIMIT
MRES_LIMIT MRES_LIMIT
PASSFAIL PASSFAIL
FX FX
FY FY
FZ FZ
MX MX
MY MY
MZ MZ
FRES FRES
MRES MRES
FX_PER FX_PER
FY_PER FY_PER
FZ_PER FZ_PER
MX_PER MX_PER
MY_PER MY_PER
MZ_PER MZ_PER
FRES_PER FRES_PER
MRES_PER MRES_PER
FUNITS FUNITS
MUNITS MUNITS
AFT IMPULSE
Generates CAESAR II dynamic input data files containing response spectra.
Response spectra input files contain dynamic pipe forces. These time history loads are
determined from pressure transient loading by the AFT Impulse software. CAESAR II reads the
output file generated by AFT Impulse, extracts the information needed, and generates the
response spectra. The generated response spectrum files can then be used for the dynamic
analysis in CAESAR II.
PIPENET
Generates CAESAR II dynamic input data files containing response spectra.
Response spectra input files contain dynamic pipe forces. These time history loads are
determined from pressure transient loading by the Sunrise System's PIPENET package. The
PIPENET interface reads the output file generated by PIPENET, extracts the information
needed, and generates the response spectra. The generated response spectrum files can then
be used for the dynamic analysis in CAESAR II.
LIQT
Reads the output file generated by LIQT, extracts the information needed, and generates the
response spectra. The LIQT interface generates CAESAR II dynamic input data files containing
response spectra for input files. The spectra input files contain the dynamic pipe forces. These
time history loads are determined by the Stoner Associates, Inc. (SAI) LIQT package from
pressure transient loading. Then, the generated response spectrum files can be used for the
dynamic analysis in CAESAR II.
The dynamic load factor is non-dimensional and independent of the magnitude of load. The
following examples illustrate the characteristics of the DLF curve in terms of the magnitude and
the duration of the load.
Example 1
Find the DLF response spectrum of the trapezoidal pulse loads shown in the following figure.
Solution: The response spectra generated from all four pulse loads are identical, as displayed
below.
The result shows that the DLF curve is independent of the magnitude of the pulse load.
Example 2
Find the response spectrum of the following trapezoidal pulse loads.
Solution: The plotted results displayed below shows that the longer the duration of the force,
the higher the DLF. The triangular pulse, which has a duration of zero, generates the lowest
DLF curve.
Pipeplus
Reads a Pipeplus neutral file (.pnf suffix), and translates it into a CAESAR II model.
The log file name is the name of the neutral file with .LOG suffix. This file contains general
information about the translation process, including:
The number of lines in the neutral file
The number of CAESAR II elements that were created
Any warning or error messages
Node Association table that relates the Pipeplus node names to the corresponding
CAESAR II node numbers.
8. Compare the CAESAR II input model with the Pipeplus model.
a. View the CAESAR II model in the Classic Piping Input dialog box or in the 3D Graphics
pane.
b. View the Pipeplus view of this same model in the Pipeplus software.
FlowMaster
Generates CAESAR II dynamic input data files containing response spectra.
Response spectra input files contain dynamic pipe forces. These time history loads are
determined from pressure transient loading by the FlowMaster package. The FlowMaster
interface reads the output file generated by FlowMaster, extracts the information needed, and
generates the response spectra. The generated response spectrum files can then be used for
the dynamic analysis in CAESAR II.
Intergraph PDS
Transfers piping system geometry from an Intergraph neutral file to a standard CAESAR II _A
binary input file. The geometry data consists of pipe lengths, diameters, thicknesses,
connectivities, and node numbers. All nodal specific quantities, such as loads, displacements,
and so forth, must be manually added to the CAESAR II input file.
There are three basic steps necessary to generate a CAESAR II input file from an Intergraph
neutral file:
1. Click Tools > External Interfaces > Intergraph PDS to create an Intergraph neutral file.
File Name
Specifies the full path and filename of the neutral file. When you open the software, this field
displays the current data path. You can manually add a file name to the end of this string, or
click Browse to search for a neutral file.
Browse
Opens a standard file selection dialog box from which you can search for the appropriate neutral
file. You can use the options at the bottom of the dialog box to switch between the neutral file
suffix types, such as .N or .NEU.
Start Node
Indicates the starting node number in the resulting CAESAR II model. By default, the entire
model is renumbered using this value as the starting point. To disable renumbering, you must
set this option and Increment (on page 318) to zero.
Increment
Defines the value used as a node number increment. This value is used during the renumbering
of the model. To disable renumbering, you must set this option and Start Node (on page 318) to
zero.
Remove HA Elements
Controls whether HA elements are removed. Typically, HA (hanger-support direction) elements
should be removed. The support is placed on the pipe where the HA element joins it. Clear this
check box to keep HA elements in the stress model.
Model Rotation
The rotation of the +X-axis of the CAESAR II model should be rotated about the vertical axis
away from the PCF's East compass point. The default setting is zero, which imposes no rotation.
Select +90 to rotate the model a positive 90-degrees. Select -90 to rotate the model a negative
90-degrees.
Z can also be vertical based on special execution setting.
Alternatively, you can rotate the model after importing it to CAESAR II. Use the Rotate
command on the Block Operations toolbar.
PDS_MAT.MAP, and place it beneath the application's \SYSTEM subfolder. This mapping file
contains two fields of data per line. Field 1 is 5 characters wide, and contains the CAESAR II
material number that corresponds to the PDS material name. Field 2 is held in columns 7
through 21 and contains the PDS material name as it appears in the neutral file. Neither of these
values should contain a decimal point.
The .LOG file produced by the CAESAR II translator is shown below, followed
by a plot of the job from the CAESAR II input module.
(End nodes replaced with center point, and TEE/CROSS element removed. Modifications also
performed on 3 & 4 way valves.)
(Far Weld Line Nodal coordinates changed to Tangent Intersection Point coordinates)
DATA FOR PROPERTY ARRAY WITH # ENTRIES = 5
LOCATIONS 1-11
LOCATIONS 1, 12-20
*** CAESAR II INTERPRETED GEOMETRY DATA ***
*** CAESAR II INTERPRETED PROPERTY DATA *** Part 1
*** CAESAR II INTERPRETED PROPERTY DATA *** Part 2
CADPIPE
Provides a one-way transfer of the geometry data from CADPIPE to CAESAR II. The geometry
data consists of pipe lengths, diameters, thicknesses, connectivities, and node numbers. All
nodal specific quantities, such as restraints, loads, and displacements, must be manually added
to the CAESAR II input file.
The CADPIPE external interface is set up so that several models can be transferred in a single
session. During data transfer, the interface first prompts you for the name of the CADPIPE
connectivity (.UDE ) neutral file. After you specify the file name, the data transfer process
begins. When that transfer is complete, the interface prompts you for another neutral file name.
This cycle continues until you cancel the data transfer process.
The neutral file read by the interface must be generated by the CADPIPE software. For
more information, refer to the CADPIPE product documentation.
The CADPIPE neutral file must be transferred to the current CAESAR II folder so that it is
available to the external interface.
The interface reads the CADPIPE neutral file, and generates the CAESAR II input file and a log
file of the data transfer process. Check the data in both the CAESAR II input file and the log file
for consistency and any assumptions made by the interface.
The following paragraphs describe the layout of the data extracted from the CADPIPE neutral
file and how it is arranged for storage in the interface. The data storage is maintained in two
arrays. The first array contains geometry data for each pipe element; the second array contains
additional load and specification data.
In the first array, an entry is required for each piece of pipe in the system. "Pipe" refers to an
entity between two nodes, which can be a pipe or a rigid element. There are 12 values per entry,
and all values must be specified.
Field 1- ELMT Enter the pipe element number, which can correspond to an entry in the
second array. This is also the pipe or element number in the model.
Values must be sequential from 1.
Field 2 - N1 Enter the From node number, which is the starting node for the element.
Values must be greater than zero and less than 32000.
Field 3 - N2 Enter the To node number, which is the ending node for the element.
Values must be greater than zero and less than 32000.
Field 4 - DX Enter the delta X dimension for the element. This is the distance
between N1 and N2 in the X direction.
Field 5 - DY Enter the delta Y dimension for the element. This is the distance
between N1 and N2 in the Y direction. In CAESAR II, Y is vertical.
Field 6 - DZ Enter the delta Z dimension for the element. This is the distance
between N1 and N2 in the Z direction.
Field 9 - ANCH Specify the location of the restraint (support). If there is a restraint on
N1, ANCH is 1. If there is a restraint on N2, then ANCH is 2. The type of
restraint can be obtained from the second array.
Field 10 - BND Specify whether there is a bend at the N2 end of the element. If BND is
1, there is a bend at N2. If BND is 0, this is a straight pipe.
Field 11 - BRAD Specify the bend radius if the bend is not a long radius bend. This value
is the required bend radius.
Records in the second array are only necessary when additional data is required. This means
there is always a record in the first array for pipe element #1, which could be the only entry in
the array. Any additional entries contain some type of change to data normally duplicated
forward by CAESAR II.
Field 1 - ELMT Enter the pipe element number, which corresponds to an entry in the first
array. This is also a pipe or element number in the model. Values are
sequential from 1.
Field 2 - TEMP1 Enter the operating temperature for load case 1. You can find this value
by scanning the CADPIPE data for the maximum temperature.
Field 3 - PRESS1 Enter the operating pressure for load case 1. You can find this value by
scanning the CADPIPE data for the maximum pressure.
Field 4 - RGDWGT Enter the weight of rigid elements. This entry is only required if you set
the RIGID flag in the first array.
Field 6 - RESTYP Specify the restraint (support) type indicator. Acceptable values are:
0 - anchor
1 - double acting X
2 - double acting Y
3 - double acting Z
4 - double acting RX
5 - double acting RY
6 - double acting RZ
Field 9 - RINFO3 Enter the restraint friction coefficient for the support.
Field 17 - TEENOD Enter the element node number where there is a tee.
ENTITY_NUMBER 5
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR AAA1 C-0O2HATLATLATL
INSERTION 3.00000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 3.05625000e+002 3.36000083e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 2.94375000e+002 3.35999917e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 3.00000083e+002 3.30375000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 6
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR AAA1 C-0O1BATLATL
INSERTION 4.02000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 3.93000000e+002 3.35999934e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 4.01999934e+002 3.45000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 7
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR AAA1 C-0OPPATLATL 90.00
INSERTION 4.02000017e+002 3.90000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 4.01999934e+002 3.45000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 4.02000099e+002 4.35000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 8
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR AAA1 C-3O1BATLATL
INSERTION 4.02000000e+002 4.44000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 4.02000099e+002 4.35000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 4.02000033e+002 4.44000000e+002 1.33800000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 9
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR AAA1 C-2OBB1dLATL
INSERTION 4.02000000e+002 4.44000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
END 4.02000000e+002 4.44000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
END 4.02000000e+002 4.43999961e+002 1.20350000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 10
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR AAA1 C-2OPPATLATL 134.50
INSERTION 4.02000017e+002 4.43999981e+002 1.27075000e+003
END 4.02000000e+002 4.43999961e+002 1.20350000e+003
END 4.02000033e+002 4.44000000e+002 1.33800000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 11
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR AAA1 C-0O1BATLATL
INSERTION 3.00000000e+002 2.16000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 2.99999967e+002 2.25000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 3.09000000e+002 2.16000033e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 12
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR AAA1 C-0OPPATLATL 105.38
INSERTION 3.00000025e+002 2.77687500e+002 1.34700000e+003
General Notes
This file contains the status of the data conversion from the CADPIPE ISO system to the
CAESAR II stress analysis package. The data contained in this file is grouped into three
sections:
1. Entity information
2. Segment connectivity information
the coordinate system is rotated to conform to the standard pipe stress coordinate system (Y
vertical).
Section 2 - Details the interpretation and model building process.
Section 3 - Lists the final transformed data which the interface system wrote as the
CAESAR II input file.
The following is a sample log file:
Section 1-Entity Information
---------------------------------------------------------
Element types are: 1 - Pipe 2 - Bend 3 - Intersection 4 - Rigid
Interpreted Entity information for: 14 Entities.
If the resulting CAESAR II geometry is inconsistent with the CADPIPE drawing, use the log file
to identify the problem:
1. Identify the problem area and locate the relevant elements in Section 3 of the log file.
2. Find the appropriate segment in Section 2 of the log file and verify that it contains the same
entities as shown in the CADPIPE connectivity file.
3. Verify that the information in Section 1 of the log file matches the interpreted data in Section
3.
Anomalies with the resulting CAESAR II geometry can usually be attributed to one of the
following causes:
An unexpected geometry condition was handed to the CAESAR II interface. The solution is
to update the interface for the current condition. Forward the .UDE file to Intergraph CAS
Support for analysis and subsequent interface modification.
An unknown item code was encountered during the data transfer, indicating that the
CADPIPE software has been updated and new item codes added. Because the interface
does not recognize the new items, it must be modified. Contact Intergraph CAS Support for
assistance.
OLET entities in the CADPIPE connectivity file do not contain a reference to the piping
element they intersect. As a result, the interface attempts to determine the associated pipe
using coordinate computation and 3D intersection calculations. Potentially, the procedure
can pass over the intersection point, and the branch containing the OLET plots at the origin
of the CAESAR II model. You can correct this in the CAESAR II input by breaking the
intersected pipe and assigning the OLET node number to the break point.
Some CADPIPE connectivity files that have been submitted to Intergraph CAS for analysis
have been found to contain errors consisting of either pipe doubling back on itself or piping
elements indicated as bends where there was no change in direction. Errors such as these
can be detected by the CAESAR II error checker when it is run prior to attempting the data
transfer.
Import PCF
Processes a single Piping Component File (PCF) or multiple PCFs, and then generates a
CAESAR II piping input model file from the conversion information.
The goal of the conversion process is:
To create a CAESAR II model that is complete, ready to run, and contains no errors.
To provide a method for stress engineers to quickly and accurately collect data.
After the PCF is created from external software, it can be converted to a CAESAR II piping input
model file.
The Intergraph Smart3D PCF and the PCF menu options in the External Interfaces
menu operate the same.
The PCF file format is a standard drawing exchange format developed by Alias Ltd. The PCF is
a flat text file containing detailed information about the piping system components. The
information is extracted from a CAD system. Details on the format of the PCF and its capabilities
can be obtained from Alias.
A valid PCF has a .pcf file extension name.
The units associated with the values of these attributes are defined by including a descriptive
unit label after the value. For example, the pressure attribute, COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1, can
be specified as COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 15.3 barg. If the unit label chosen (barg) is not
one of the labels recognized by CAESAR II as defined through Tools > Create/Review Units
on the CAESAR II Main menu, then you must include that label in the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT
file in the CAESAR II System folder.
The only PCF SUPPORT attribute that is not ignored is the SUPPORT-DIRECTION
attribute. It must have a value of UP, DOWN, EAST, WEST, NORTH, or SOUTH.
One note on the Material Number setting is that the selected material is applied to a piping
element as the default only if the PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 for that element is not
specified or recognized.
You can achieve the best results by preparing customized mapping files before beginning the
conversion process.
You may use default mapping files if the values fit our model. There are a number of mapping
files that define various values. Locate these files in the CAESAR II System folder.
Conversion from CAESAR II -> PCF Displays the conversion factor used to convert the
user-supplied unit to a CAESAR II internal unit
Comments can be added at the end of each line separated from the last column value by
spaces and preceded by the "*" character.
All PCF component attributes can be specified inside the PCF with their associated units. Any
unit specified by the PCF component attributes which is not a standard internal CAESAR II unit
as defined by the Tools > Create/Review Units dialog box on the CAESAR II Main menu needs
to be mapped inside the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file.
CAESAR II divides the user-supplied value by this constant to calculate the value for the
attribute that is displayed by the software according to the units specified in the configuration
options (except that temperature from C to F will also add the 32 ).
2. Modify any of the units definitions or add another unit definition as needed.
3. Save, and close the file.
The example below shows a typical PCF SUPPORT component, highlighting the support NAME
value which should be used to define CAESAR II support mapping.
VERT, EW, NS These create translational restraints corresponding to the compass points
of the global axes (Y, X, Z respectively for the Y-up setting, and Z, X, Y respectively for the
Z-up setting). See the figure below. One-way restraints may be created by prefixing with "+"
or "-".
<MU=> Optional keyword followed by a value for adding a friction coefficient to the restraint (not
valid with ANC, VHGR, CHGR).
<GAP=> Optional keyword followed by a value and set of units for adding a gap to the restraint
(not valid with ANC, VHGR, CHGR).
The software also processes equipment nozzles designated by the
END-CONNECTION-EQUIPMENT keyword as imposed thermal displacements in all degrees of
freedom, all with values of 0.0. This creates an initial behavior of an anchor, but allows you to
easily impose actual thermal displacements when known.
Examples
The examples below illustrate typical restraint configurations, along with suggested mapping
entries.
Variable Spring Hanger
These represent variable spring hangers, and are mapped onto a single CAESAR II support (=
VHGR). This is interpreted as a program-designed spring hanger in CAESAR II.
These hanger rod assemblies only resist downward (weight) loads, and allow upward
movement. In CAESAR II, they are typically modeled as +Y (or +Z, depending on how the
vertical axis is set).
These sliding supports only resist downward (weight) loads, and allow upward movement. They
are represented as a single +VERT support. However, since they slide against a base, most
stress analysts prefer to add a friction coefficient (MU=x.xx).
YRIGID 1
VERT MU=0.3
or
YRIGID 1
B MU=0.3
These restraints resist load/movement in both directions (so the "+" of the previous two supports
is eliminated). If the restraint is always installed vertically, then use the first definition (VERT). If
the restraint is installed in any direction (for example, vertically or horizontally), use the second
definition B, indicating that it acts along the installed support direction. This assumes that the
installed direction of the restraint is always defined as the direction from the main steel towards
the pipe. Because sliding is involved, a friction coefficient is included as well.
UGUIDE 1
GUI MU=0.3
or
UGUIDE 1
C MU=0.3
If this restraint is always installed vertically on horizontal lines (as shown in the figure above),
then the support function can always be modeled as a Guide (with sliding friction). If the restraint
may be installed in any direction at all (with restraint direction corresponding to the direction of
the attachment point toward the pipe), then use the second definition (C) as it represents the
direction lateral to the pipe and the restraint.
TEESUPPORT 2
+VERT MU=0.3
GUI MU=0.3
This restraint maps to two functions:
+VERTical
GUIde
Because sliding is involved in both functions, friction coefficients are provided for both.
VERTLATERAL 2
VERT MU=0.3
GUI MU=0.3
or
VERTLATERAL 2
B MU=0.3
C MU=0.3
This restraint maps to two functions:
up/down restraint
side-to-side restraint
If it is always installed vertically, then it is defined as a VERTical and a GUIde. If it is possible
that the restraint may be rotated about the pipe to be installed in any direction, then use the
second definition, which represents restraint along the direction of the support as well as lateral
to the support and pipe.
VERTAXIAL 2
+VERT MU=0.3
LIM MU=0.3
or
VERTAXIAL 2
+VERT MU=0.3
A MU=0.3
This restraint maps to two functions:
+VERT support
An axial restraint. The axial restraint can be defined equally as LIM or A (as A corresponds
to restraint along the direction of the pipe centerline).
SWAYSTRUT 1
B
These represent sway struts, which may be installed in any direction, and provide restraint along
the line of action of the sway strut. Assuming that the restraint direction corresponds to the
direction of the sway strut, then the best way to define these restraints is B (restraint along the
support direction).
ANCHOR 1
ANC
These restraints all restrict movement of the pipe in all six degrees-of-freedom, so they can be
defined as Anchors ("ANC").
PENETRATION 4
+C GAP=aMM
-C GAP=bMM
-VERT GAP=cMM
+VERT GAP=dMM
In the example above, the pipe (and the local A-axis) is running into the page. With B up, +C is
to the right.
Some of these can get quite complex, especially if restraints have different gaps in different
directions. It may require trial and error to determine exactly how the +/- restraint directions
correspond to the support direction passed in the PCF. In some cases, you may want to model
the restraint behavior in CAESAR II rather than in the mapping file.
CAESAR II SIF TYPE Should be set to the SIF type number used by CAESAR II as
shown in the CAESAR II SIF TYPE figure below.
PAD=X.X UNITS (optional) Should be set to the SIF pad thickness, including the
applicable unit (for example, PAD=10 MM)
Applying the above example values to set the TERF SKEY to the associated reinforced type
requires the following mapping entry to be specified inside the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file:
TERF 1 PAD=10 MM Ii=1.23 Io=2.34
Each PCF component defines an SKEY. For an example, see the SUPPORT component
identifier listed in the figure in PCF Restraint Mapping (on page 303) (SKEY 01HG). In this case,
these are typically four-character words indicating tee type (CROSS, OLET) and end type. The
PCF menu command matches the SKEYS to the entries in this mapping file. If an SKEY is not
found in this file, you should add it.
4. Click Convert selected PCF files into CAESAR II to initiate the conversion process.
During the conversion process, status messages display in the Message Area, which is
located in the lower right of the PCF Interface dialog box.
These messages are also written to a LOG file with the name XXXX.LOG, where XXXX
represents the name (less the extension) of the combined CAESAR II file. The log file is
placed in the selected CAESAR II output file folder.
For example, this CAESAR II model was created from the sample file 1001-P.PCF:
Condense Rigids
Instructs the software to combine rigids that connect to each other into a single element.
This indicates whether these items should be condensed/merged into adjacent elements. For
example, a valve with adjacent gaskets and flanges would be combined into a single rigid
element.
If activated, then elements are condensed/merged unless there is a valid reason not to (change
of cross section, change of operating conditions, restraint at the location, and so forth).
The default value is TRUE.
Condense Tees
When set to TRUE, this directive instructs the software NOT to treat tees as three elements but
instead condense them to a single node. The SIF is applied at the tee node. The use of the
three elements allows pipe properties of the tee to differ from the attached piping.
The default value is TRUE.
Condense Elbows
Controls whether the software treats elbows as two designated elements. When set to TRUE,
this directive instructs the software NOT to treat elbows as two designated elements. Rather, it
is condensed into its adjacent elements for each direction in which the elbow travels.
The default value is TRUE.
Model Rotation
The rotation of the +X-axis of the CAESAR II model should be rotated about the vertical axis
away from the PCF's East compass point. The default setting is zero, which imposes no rotation.
Select +90 to rotate the model a positive 90-degrees. Select -90 to rotate the model a negative
90-degrees.
Z can also be vertical based on special execution setting.
Alternatively, you can rotate the model after importing it to CAESAR II. Use the Rotate
command on the Block Operations toolbar.
Diameter Limit
Use this to exclude the processing of small pipes, such as vents and drains, by specifying the
size (nominal diameter) below which pipes will be ignored. Enter a diameter limit of -1.000 to
include all pipe sizes that you want to import into CAESAR II.
Material Number
Select the CAESAR II material to be assigned to components which do not have the material
attribute explicitly set otherwise.
The default is low carbon steel (material number 1).
DSN Setup
To use the CAESAR II data export facility, you need to set up two Data Source Names (DSNs)
on the system. DSNs contain information regarding where the database resides on the
computer and how to communicate with (what driver to use, for example). CAESAR II has
capabilities to export data to either an Access database or an Excel spreadsheet. Therefore, you
need two DSNs set up to allow use of this feature. The names of these two DSNs are fixed
(read-only) by ICAS.
The CAESAR II installation program is designed to set up these DSNs automatically. However,
in the event that the DSNs are not set up, follow the procedure below.
Follow steps 4 through 7 for Microsoft Access DSN Setup ONLY. Skip to step 9
for Microsoft Excel DSN Setup. [no info for Excel DSN setup - missing]
4. Select the Microsoft Access Driver (*.mdb), and click Finish.
The system displays a dialog box similar to the one below. You are prompted to select your
database.
The system returns you to the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box.
7. Click OK.
The C2_OUT_ACCESS has been added to list of available user DSNs.
File Sets
This chapter discusses two sets of files: the files that CAESAR II delivers to your computer
during installation, and the files that CAESAR II creates for a particular job.
In This Section
CAESAR II File Guide .................................................................... 1175
Required Program Files ................................................................. 1176
Required Error Data Files .............................................................. 1178
Required Data Sets ....................................................................... 1178
Required Printer/Listing Files......................................................... 1182
Dynamics Files .............................................................................. 1184
Auxiliary Sets ................................................................................. 1185
Structural Data Files ...................................................................... 1186
Example Files ................................................................................ 1186
External Interface Files .................................................................. 1188
CAESAR II Operational (Job) Data ............................................... 1189
\caesar\setupesl
\caesar\ssidrv
As the hard drive reaches its storage capacity, disk access can slow considerably.
Intergraph CAS recommends that you periodically use the File > Clean Up Files command to
perform general hard disk housekeeping tasks such as deleting scratch files and old job files.
Required Program
Description
Filename
MAT_FRP.INP
SIF&TD12.INP
Dynamics Files
Dynamics Filename Description
Auxiliary Sets
Auxillary Set Filename Description
Example Files
Example Filename Description
In the following list, an asterisk (*) after the file extension indicates that it should be saved to
archive input data. A double asterisk (**) indicates the file should be saved to archive output
data.
Not every file listed may be present for a given job. The presence of a file is dependent upon
what analysis has been run.
Scratch Files
._B - Nodal boundary condition file created by the piping error checker and used by the
analysis modules.
._C Element properties file created by the piping error checker and used by the analysis
modules.
._N Nodal coordinate file created by the piping error checker and used by the analysis
modules.
._R Job control information created by the piping error checker and used by the analysis
modules.
._E Element connectivity file created by the piping error checker and used by the analysis
modules.
Listing Files
.MSG Secondary output file with intermediate computation data.
Output Files
._M ** Intermediate output file that contains data generated by the piping error checker and
load case setup modules.
Update History
The lists on the following pages detail the functional updates made to CAESAR II by version
number. These lists correspond to the major releases of the software and do not reflect items
such as minor releases (1.0P, 2.1D); re-publication of the User Guide, or additional new
modules released to aid customers between updates.
In This Appendix
CAESAR II Initial Capabilities (12/84) ........................................... 1194
CAESAR II Version 1.1S Features (2/86) ...................................... 1194
CAESAR II Version 2.0A Features (10/86) .................................... 1195
CAESAR II Version 2.1C Features (6/87) ..................................... 1196
CAESAR II Version 2.2B Features (9/88) ...................................... 1196
CAESAR II Version 3.0 Features (4/90) ........................................ 1197
CAESAR II Version 3.1 Features (11/90) ...................................... 1198
CAESAR II Version 3.15 Features (9/91) ...................................... 1198
CAESAR II Version 3.16 Features (12/91) .................................... 1200
CAESAR II Version 3.17 Features (3/92) ...................................... 1200
CAESAR II Version 3.18 Features (9/92) ...................................... 1201
CAESAR II Version 3.19 Features (3/93) ...................................... 1202
CAESAR II Version 3.20 Features (10/93) .................................... 1203
CAESAR II Version 3.21 Changes and Enhancements (7/94)...... 1204
CAESAR II Version 3.22 Changes & Enhancements (4/95) ......... 1206
CAESAR II Version 3.23 Changes (3/96) ...................................... 1207
CAESAR II Version 3.24 Changes & Enhancements (3/97) ......... 1208
CAESAR II Version 4.00 Changes and Enhancements (1/98)...... 1210
CAESAR II Version 4.10 Changes and Enhancements (1/99)...... 1210
CAESAR II Version 4.20 Changes and Enhancements (2/00)...... 1211
CAESAR II Version 4.30 Changes and Enhancements (3/01)...... 1211
CAESAR II Version 4.40 Changes and Enhancements (5/02)...... 1212
CAESAR II Version 4.50 Changes and Enhancements (11/03).... 1213
CAESAR II Version 5.00 Changes and Enhancements (11/05).... 1214
CAESAR II Version 5.10 Changes and Enhancements ( 9/07)..... 1214
CAESAR II Version 5.20 Changes and Enhancements (4/09)...... 1215
CAESAR II Version 5.30 Changes and Enhancements (11/10).... 1216
CAESAR II Version 5.31 Changes and Enhancements (5/12)...... 1217
CAESAR II Version 6.10 Changes and Enhancments (10/13) ...... 1217
AutoCAD DXF interface is provided, and two thirds of the part vendors have completed
interfaces from their AutoCAD ISO packages to CAESAR II.
ASCII Editor - Due to an overwhelming need and subsequent lack of easy to use system
editors, a stand alone ASCII editor is provided. This editor easily modifies files such as
AUTOEXE.BAT, CONFIG.SYS, and SETUP.CII.
2D XY Engineering Plotting Program - Stand alone plotting software that allows you to plot
engineering data such as CAESAR II spectrum files. This software plots any real data
arranged in columns.
Valve & Flange Database - The addition of a valve and flange database enables you to
define or select the specific rigid element to insert into the piping system. The database is
constructed to allow you to add or modify entries.
Dynamic Restart - The most time consuming part of a dynamic analysis is the Eigensolution.
This feature allows a job to be restarted and use a previous Eigensolution.
WRC Updates - The latest edition (1979) of the WRC107 bulletin has been incorporated.
Input Title Page - An optional title page has been added to the input module. You can now
define a title page of up to 19 lines which is stored with the input.
Expansion Joint Rating Program - This stand alone software allows you to compute the
compression of each expansion joint corrugation and the compression of the joint as a
whole. These values can then be compared to manufacturers recommendations for joint
acceptance.
Additional restraint types including bottomed-out spring hangers and bi-linear soil springs.
Miscellaneous Modifications
Screen data presentation changes.
Direct control jumping between executables.
Increased number of allowed software designed hangers.
Additional spring hanger design options.
Database updates include additional spring hanger tables.
Soil Modeler for Buried Pipe.
Miscellaneous
A pen plotting program (PENPLT) plots up to 2500 element models (LARGE Includes) on
the screen or on an HPGL compatible hardware device.
The static output processor has been updated to support VGA graphics and to provide
screen dumps to HP Laser Jet Series II compatible printers.
Updated SYSCHK program now checks that SHARE is loaded when necessary. Missing
coprocessor is also immediately reported.
Updated PLTS now allow you to save labels, scaling information, and file names during
plotting sessions.
Updated ROT (rotating equipment program) provides additional code interpretations for the
HEI bulletin.
The BIGPRT (large job printing program) has been expanded to handle even larger jobs and
to provide a local element report.
As of Version 3.15, CAESAR II uses ESL devices to authorize access to the software. The
ESLs are more stable than the previously used keydisk and provide additional client
information to the software. Additional information on the ESLs can be found in the update
pages for the User Manual.
The first access of Version 3.15 will cause the ESL activation code to prompt for the
keydisks (both unlimited and limited). Both keydisks must be available to properly activate
the ESL.
A printer setup program (PRSET) is provided to adjust the number of lines per logical page
for dot matrix printers, useful for page lengths longer than 11 inches.
The Static and Dynamic Output menus have been modified to allow you to return directly to
the input, or in the case of the dynamics output, to invoke the animation module directly.
Graphics for flange selection and output have been added to the ASME Flange modules.
Input and output file sequencing are checked to aid in Quality Assurance, insuring that the
current input file produced the current output file. Input Echo reports are also possible from
the static output processor.
Interfaces Added
A new neutral file interface is provided which allows a two way transfer of data between the
CAESAR II input file and an ASCII text file.
An interface is provided between Stoners LIQT program and the dynamic modules of
CAESAR II. This interface enables dynamic pipe forces from a time domain analysis to be
used in the generation of a force spectrum.
Miscellaneous Changes
The static stress summary report has been modified so that the maximum code stress
percent is reported, not the maximum code stress.
A miscellaneous option has been added to the configuration program. This option allows
various options, including the specification of the ANSI, JIS, or DIN piping specifications.
Other options available from the Miscellaneous menu are:
Intro/Exit Screens (On/Off) - This option can be used to disable the display of the initial entry
screen and the final exit screen.
Yes/No Prompts (On/Off) - This option can be used to disable the yes/no/are_you_sure
prompts.
Output Reports by Load Case (Yes/No) - By default, CAESAR II produces static output
reports by load case. This option can be used to generate the same reports by subject.
Displacement Report Node Sort (Yes/No) - This option can be used to disable the nodal
sorting of the static displacement report.
The file handler has been modified to enable directory and disk drive selection and logging.
You also have control of the initial display of the file names. This allows you to set the sort
order as well as the single/multi-column display presentation.
A file verification routine has been added to check the installation of CAESAR II. This aids in
detecting software corruption due to hard disk defects and viruses.
A new report has been added to the static output menu. This enables you to obtain a local
force/moment report for the elements in the system.
A 32 bit version of the dynamic summation module is provided for large dynamic analysis.
This module requires at least a 386 processor.
The animation module has been modified to provide hard copy output of the mode shapes.
Expansion Joint Rating - The expansion joint rating module, ERATE, has been moved into
the Miscellaneous Module, facilitating input through the standard spreadsheets.
Refractory Lining - The computation modules of CAESAR II have been modified to accept a
negative value of insulation thickness. If a negative thickness is encountered, the software
assumes the insulation is refractory lining (inside the pipe).
Minimum Required Thickness - The piping error checker now makes the minimum required
thickness computation according to B31.1, 104.1. This information is reported for each pipe
in the listing of intermediate data (See item 3 above).
Spring Hanger Tables - The E. Myatt & Co. spring hanger table has been added.
ESL Updates - All of the code used to access the ESLs has been updated to allow access to
the 50 and 66 Mhz CPUs.
Missing Mass - The dynamics modules can consider missing mass effects in the spectrum
solutions.
Seismic Anchor Movements - The dynamics modules allows the specification of seismic
anchor movements for independent support motion analysis.
RCC-M - The French piping code RCC-M, Section C has been incorporated.
Languages - The input and dynamic output supports English, French, and Spanish language
headings. Language dependent files can be activated with the appropriate command line
switch on the INSTALL directive. For example, INSTALL /S installs any Spanish specific
files.
PCX Files - All of the graphics modules have been modified to allow the images to be saved
to disk files in PCX format. This enables these images to be brought into word processing
and desktop publishing systems.
The Included Mass Report has been clarified and modified to include the active mass in
each of the global directions. The percent of the force included/added is now based on a
vector sum rather than an absolute sum.
The ZPA used in the missing force correction can now be controlled via the configuration
file. You can specify that the ZPA be based on the last extracted mode or the last spectrum
value.
The static load case array space has been increased by a factor of 5, allowing more
flexibility in static load case setup.
API 650 nozzle flexibilities, according to the ninth edition, July 1993.
Checks for allowable loads on Fired Heater Tubes according to API-560 have been added.
As an option, you can consider the effects of pressure stiffening on straight pipes.
Three additional spring hanger tables: Sinopec (China), BHEL (India), and Flexider (Italy).
The Australian structural steel shape database has been added.
The ASME material database has been updated to reflect the 1992 Code addendum.
The printer testing routines have been completely rewritten. Additionally, output can be
directed to any LPT port.
The ability to configure the printer, either dot matrix or laser jet. This is implemented through
a text file containing the printer formatting codes which you can modify.
Password protection for input data files, to prevent modification of completed projects.
All of the screens in the piping preprocessor (except for the main spreadsheet) are now
supported in Spanish and French.
Input/Output file time/date sequencing checks have been added to the dynamics modules.
The Break command in the piping input processor has been modified to accept input in
feet-inch units instead of only feet. This should allow compound entries in any units system.
The software now supports an ESL from a new vendor. This provides CAESAR II with full
networking abilities. The software first checks for a local ESL (from either vendor), then for a
network ESL.
Toward the support for network operations, the data files which are not job specific are now
assumed to be located in a SYSTEM subdirectory underneath the CAESAR II installation
directory. These data files include: the input listing formatting files (*.INP), the accounting data
files, the printer formatting file, the file handler template file, and the various header files.
The common factor among all of these files is that they are specific to a company installation,
not a particular data directory. Up until Version 3.21, these data files were manipulated by the
software (or sometimes directly by you) in the installation directory. However, many network
installations write protect their installation directories, making modifications to these files
impossible. These files are placed in a SYSTEM subdirectory to which you should be given
complete access.
CAESAR II Version 3.21 is capable of running on a local machine (with either vendors
local ESL) or on a network (with the network ESL). The changes made to the software enable
the same version to be run under these various configurations.
Added additional spring hanger manufacturer has been added, Carpenter & Paterson, UK.
The UBC (Uniform Building Code) earthquake spectra have been added.
The B31.5 piping code has been added.
The piping code addenda have been reviewed and any necessary changes made to the
software. The addenda include revisions for: ASCE #7, B31.1, B31.8, ASME NC, and ASME
ND.
The SIF scratch-pad from the Miscellaneous processor (Option C of the Main Menu) has
been incorporated into the piping preprocessor. This processor includes all of the supported
piping codes (not just B31.1 and B31.3 as before) and all of the fittings. Additionally, any
changes made to the scratch-pad data can optionally be transferred directly to the main
CAESAR II data spreadsheets.
Additional changes to the input piping preprocessor include the following:
problem size is now dependent on the amount of free extended memory - the old limit of 400
elements is now upwards of 8,000 elements
graphics menus automatically turned off for hard copies
optional node number display for supports, anchors, hangers, and nozzles
function key map shown on main spreadsheet
auxiliary input spreadsheets support help
The accounting system has been completely rewritten. This provides a more streamlined
interface. Additionally, accounting statistics are now recorded from the stress computation
modules (previous versions only recorded the actual matrix decomposition times).
The API-617 and NEMA-SM23 reports have been overhauled so that the code compliance
when using non-English units systems is consistent.
The new Flange Rigidity factor from ASME Section VIII has been added.
A new loader (C2.EXE) has replaced the original one (C2.COM). This new loader performs
initial startup checks, with diagnostic reporting if necessary, and enables error processing
from the Main Menu.
The configuration program has been modified to track changes. If you attempt to [Esc] out
after making changes, you are warned that the changes will not be saved.
A graphics viewer has been added to the file manager. This enables rapid model plotting
directly from the file manager of the Main Menu.
Additional directives are available to disable the generation of the Table of Contents page,
and disable the display of the spreadsheet function key mapping.
The Intergraph Interface has been improved. The interface now transfers the
temperature/pressure pairs. Additionally, if a material mapping file is present, material data
can be set correctly by CAESAR II.
The CADPIPE Interface has been updated in accordance with CADPIPE Version 4.0.
The Restraint Summary in the static output processor has been modified to include the
translational displacements of the restrained nodes.
The output processors (static and dynamic) have been modified to allow you to change the
name of the disk output file if necessary. Additionally, modifications have been made so that
only a single output device can be enabled.
All language files have been translated into German. Use INSTALL /G to acquire the
German files.
A new control F8 at the output menu level allows switching jobs without returning to the
Main menu.
You can now set default values for FRP (material 20) parameters through the
configuration/setup. These default parameters can be read automatically from
manufacturers data files by toggling through the list of available files, and then pressing
[ALT-U] (for Update) on the selected vendor file. Vendor files are recognized by their .FRP
extensions; because these are text files, you can create them easily yourself, or vendors
may distribute them to their customers.
The UKOOA (United Kingdom Offshore Operators Association) piping code for FRP piping
has been added.
The Z183 and Z184 piping codes have been replaced with the Z662 code, which has been
expanded to consider calculation of stresses in restrained piping.
The ASCE #7 wind code has been updated to the 1995 edition.
The API-610 code in the equipment module has been updated to the 8th edition.
ASME Section VIII Division 2 stress indices and WRC-107 SIF (kn, kb) values have been
incorporated into the WRC-107 module.
The Relief Load Synthesis dynamics module now supports metric (or custom) units.
A number of configuration file default values have been revised in order to improve
calculational results or software performance:
Changed From To
BEND_AXIAL_SHAPE = NO YES
FRICT_NORM_FORCE_VAR = 25 15
FRICT_ANGLE_VAR = 30 15
._A files as CAESAR II input files under Windows 95 and subsequent double clicking on the
file name in a Windows/95 explorer window to start the input processor on the picked job file.
This also allows CAESAR II to be spawned from other programs, right into a job.
Modifications to CAD interfaces: Intergraph and CADPIPE.
All necessary routines have been checked and modified where appropriate to address the
Year 2000 issue.
A Korean structural steel shape library has been added.
A new spring hanger table has been added (SARAFTHI).
PD-5500 nozzle flexibilities have been incorporated to complement the WRC-297 and API
650 nozzle connections.
Updated piping codes: B31.1, B31.3, B31.4, ASME NC, and ASME ND.
User control over the auto-save feature implemented.
Improvements to the 3D graphics (job specific configuration, additional data display).
Added graphics to the WRC 107 Module to show loads and orientation.
Added a new Code Compliance report to the static output processor.
Spring hanger design expanded from 3 to 9 operating cases.
Enhanced and improved the Smart 3D to CAESAR II interface (PCF). (This is also available
in Version 5.31.)
Introduced a faster, interactive, on-demand and flexible PCF interface, called Advanced
PCF (APCF) Import, into the Piping Input processor. From the APCF Import dialog box,
you can quickly import the model from design software, such as Intergraph's SmartPlant 3D,
saving time while reducing errors. (APCF Import is also available in Version 5.31.)
Updated the CAESAR II Data Export Wizard to support ODBC Microsoft Access format,
which facilitates round-trip results to S3D and SPR.
Added an option to store a revision number and line numbers.
Added a new Restraint Summary output report.
Included new functionality so you can send a user Load Case name, if specified.
Implemented other enhancements to simplify the process for generating the database.
Added new element order commands for block operations: invert and change sequence.
Invert _ reverses the order of one or more elements in a selected group, as well as the
node numbering.
Change Sequence _ moves (or rearranges) the sequence of one or more blocks of
elements to another location in the CAESAR II model.
Updated and enhanced documentation to include more context-sensitive (F1) help and
additional task-oriented information.
Updated the CAESAR II main menu to use the Office 2010 ribbon interface.
Rewrote the methodology used by the Piping Error checker (PIERCK.EXE) in determining
duplicated allowable stress data for the elements. (Distributed in CAESAR II 2011 R1
Version 5.30.02, 110830 build.)
Corrected the calculation of the bending stress at the From end of elements for PD 8010-2
(to use the SIF for the From end instead of the To end). (Distributed in CAESAR II 2011 R1
Version 5.30.02, 110830 build.)
Corrected the usage of the in-plane/out-of-plane SIF configuration setting for CODETI
bends. (Distributed in CAESAR II 2011 R1 Version 5.30.04, 120525 build.)
Corrected the PD 8010-2 equivalent stress calculation to consider both positive and
negative bending effects. (Distributed in CAESAR II 2011 R1 Version 5.30.04, 120525
build.)
Implemented additional changes to how the software duplicates the Wc and Sy material
values to succeeding elements.
Corrected the calculation of the NC/ND branch stress index for reduced intersections of
reinforced tees.
Corrected the calculation of the (dynamic) mass matrix for elements with refractory lining.
Added corrosion consideration in the SIF computation for the CODETI piping code.
Implemented the piping code updates for B31.8 2010 Edition, including the hoops stress
change for Chapter VIII.
Implemented the piping code updates for B31.3 2010 Edition, including the following
revisions:
Modified the calculation of longitudinal stress for Sustained loads (SUS). This previously
optional calculation was referred to as ASME Code Case 178.
Added input values for two new stress indexes (It, Ia). The software uses the index
values in the new computation of Sustained and Occasional stresses.
Added the ability to calculate the allowable stress for Sustained and Occasional cases
at the temperature of the corresponding operating case. The software defaults the value
to the minimum Sh value; however, you can select a corresponding Sh.
Revised the allowable that CAESAR II uses for Appendix P Operating range cases to
include a new reduction option based on the ratio of yield versus tensile strength
(Sy/St).
Updated the material properties in accordance with Appendix A.
Updated the SIF determination of Fillet or Socket welds.
Modified how the software determines the Sc value to use with range load cases.
Enter the Name of the Output File Expansion Joint Modeler - Tie Bar Plane
(Optional) 1033 246
Enter the Name of the Units File to Use Expansion Joint Modeler Notes 247
1033 Expansion Joint Rating 827
Enter/Edit Spectrum Data 702 Expansion Joint Styles 249
Environment Menu 279 Expansion Joints 56, 69, 120, 330, 608,
Equipment Centerline 862 888
Equipment Component and Compliance Expansion Joints Input Export Option
781 1072
Equipment Input Export Options 1088 Export Custom Report 601
Equipment Reports Output Report Option Export Output Data Also 1066
1096 Exporting Displacements to a File 355
Error Check 225 External Interface Files 1188
Error Checking 513 External Interfaces 1043
Error Code Statements 1141 Extraction Nozzle #1 Tab 865
ESL Menu 43 Extraction Nozzle #2 Tab 867
Estimated Number of Significant Figures in Extrusion Crotch Radius 788
Eigenvalues 697
Evaluating Vessel Stresses 918 F
Event Viewer Dialog Box 612
Example 427, 431, 434, 437, 440 F - COATING FACTOR 502
Example 1 1102 F1, F2, ... F9 198
Example 2 1104 Fac 204
Example Files 1186 FAC 1036
Example Neutral File from PDS 1116 Facing Column 814
Example Output - Gas Relief Load Facing Sketch 814
Synthesis 719 Factor 643, 658
Example Output - Liquid Relief Load Factor for Allowables 863
Synthesis 723 Factor for Table 4 Allowables 857
Example Problem Factor of Safety (FS) 826
Multiple Load - Case Spring - Hanger Fatal Error Message 514
Design 164 Fatigue Analysis of Piping Systems 928
Examples 443, 444, 446, 447, 454, 456, Fatigue Analysis Using CAESAR II 927
459, 461, 639, 649, 652, 658 Fatigue Basics 927
Excitation Frequencies Tab 627 Fatigue Capabilities in Dynamic Analysis
Exclude F2 from UKOOA Bending Stress 936
62 Fatigue Class 149
Execution of Static Analysis 528 Fatigue Curves 208
Existing File to Start From 1031 FDBR 993
Exit 227 Ferritic Material 788
Exp. Coeff. 1037 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) 217
Expansion Joint 243 File Menu 37, 223
Expansion Joint Design Notes 247 File Name 1113
Expansion Joint Modeler - Expansion Joint File Sets 1175
Database 246 FILLET 133
Expansion Joint Modeler - From / To Nodes Filter Out Elements Whose Diameter is
246 Less Than 1114
Expansion Joint Modeler - Hinge/Pin Axis Filter Reports 569
246 Find 229
Expansion Joint Modeler - Modeler Results Finite Length Expansion Joints 121
247 First Element 234
Expansion Joint Modeler - Overall Length First Mode Period (CFE) 263
246 Fitting Thickness 117
Material Number 320, 1034, 1169 Model an underground piping system 505
Material Properties 60, 217 Model Error Checking 34
Material Specified Minimum Yield 825 Model Menu 235
Material Yield Strength 825, 836, 839, 877 Model Modifications for Dynamic Analysis
Materials 192, 252 621
matId 432, 433, 436, 449 Model Rotation 319, 1114, 1168
matID 439 Model TEES as 3 Elements 1114
MatId 448 Modeling Friction Effects 897
Max. Mapped Res. Acc. Ss (ASCE) 260 Modes Mass Normalized 741
Max. No. of Eigenvalues Calculated 679 Modes Unity Normalized 741
Max. Stress 274 Moments on Nozzle 858, 860
Maximum Allowable Bend Angle 64 Movement Capability 251
Maximum Allowed Travel Limit 162, 256 Moving Elements 375
Maximum Anchor Node 1113 Mu 156
Maximum Desired Unity Check 837 Multiple Load Case Design Option 163
Maximum Longitudinal Moment 878 Multiple Load Case Design Options 258
Maximum Radial Force 878 mx, my, mz 446
Maximum Stress Versus Extracted Loads
926 N
Maximum Table Frequency 711
Measurement Increment 826 name 451
Measurements Tab 826 Name 102, 637
Member End Node 838 Natural Frequencies 741
Member Start Node 838 Navigating the Classic Piping Input Dialog
Member Type 838 Box using the Function Keys 101
Memory Allocated (Mb) 84 Navigation Tools Toolbar 341
Mexico 1993 Options 551 NAVY 505 981
Micro-Level Analysis 941 NBC Example 266
-Mill Tol % 109 NBC Importance Factor 549
Mini-Level Analysis 945 NBC Static Seismic Wizard 264
Minimum Allowable Bend Angle 64 NEMA Input Data Tab 845
Minimum Anchor Node 1113 NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines) 840
Minimum Angle to Adjacent Bend 64 NEMA Turbine Example 842
Minimum Desired Unity Check 837 Neutral File Insulation Units 1115
Minimum Temperature Curve (A-D) 1035 Neutral File Weight Units 1115
Minimum Wall Mill Tolerance (%) 50 New 38, 223
Mini-windows 351 New Custom Report Template 599
Minor Direction 277 New Job Ambient Temperature 51
Minor Direction Available Space 278 New Job Bourdon Pressure 51
Miscellaneous 51, 1199 New Job Liberal Expansion Stress
Miscellaneous Data 587 Allowable 92
Miscellaneous Data Group #1 1057 New Job Z-Axis Vertical 66
Miscellaneous Options 71, 79 New Password 96
Miscellaneous Processors 1023 New Units File Name 1032
Missing Mass Combination Method Next Element 234
(SRSS/ABS) 695 NFill 425
Missing Mass ZPA 52 NGen 426
Miter Points 117 No RTF/WLT in Reduced Fitting SIFs 88
Modal 726 No. Hangers at Location 162
Modal Analysis 624 No. of Hanger - Design Operating Load
Modal Combination Method Cases 254
(Group/10%/DSRSS/ABS/SRSS) 689 No. of Iterations Per Shift (0 - Pgm
mode 455, 458, 460 computed) 699
WR297 Nozzle Input Export Option 1082 Y Distance to Extraction Nozzle #2 867
WRC 107 Stress Summations 799 Y Distance to Suction 863
WRC 107/297 Vessel/Nozzle Stresses Y Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle 865
796 Y Force Acting on Suction Nozzle 864
WRC 297 169 Y Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle
WRC 297 Local Stress Calculations 1199 866
WRC Bulletin 107(537) 798 Y Force Applied to Inlet Nozzle 873
WRC Bulletin 297 802 Y Force Applied to Outlet Nozzle 874
WRC-107 Interpolation Method 53 Y Moment Acting on Discharge Nozzle
WRC-107(537) Version 53 865
Wt/Sch 107 Y Moment Acting on Extraction Nozzle
868
X Y Moment Acting on suction Nozzle 864
Y Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle
x 429 866, 868
X (cosx, cosy, cosz) or X (vecx, vecy, vecz) Y Moment Applied to Inlet Nozzle 874
152 Y Moment Applied to Outlet Nozzle 875
X Distance to Discharge 864 y stiffness 430
X Distance to Extraction Nozzle #1 866 YIELD DISPLACEMENT FACTOR 505
X Distance to Extraction Nozzle #2 867 Yield Stress 1038
X Distance to Suction 863 Yield Stress Criterion 92
X Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle 865 ym 449
X Force Acting on Suction Nozzle 863 Youngs Modulus 836
X Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle Young's Modulus 839
866, 867 ys 450
X Force Applied to Inlet Nozzle 873
X Force Applied to Outlet Nozzle 874
X Moment Acting on Discharge Nozzle Z
865 z 430
X Moment Acting on Suction Nozzle 864 Z Axis Up 832
X Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle Z Distance to Discharge 865
866, 868 Z Distance to Extraction Nozzle #1 866
X Moment Applied to Inlet Nozzle 874 Z Distance to Extraction Nozzle #2 867
X Moment Applied to Outlet Nozzle 875 Z Distance to Suction 863
x stiffness 429 Z Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle 865
X, Y, or Z 152 Z Force Acting on Suction Nozzle 864
x, y, z 425 Z Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle
X2, Y2, Z2 153 866, 868
XROD (COSX, COSY, COSZ) or XROD Z Force Applied to Inlet Nozzle 873
(VECX, VECY, VECZ) 153 Z Force Applied to Outlet Nozzle 875
XROD, YROD, ZROD 153 Z Moment Acting on Suction Nozzle 864
XSNB, YSNB, ZSNB 154 Z Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle
XSPR, YSPR, ZSPR 153 867, 868
Z Moment Applied to Inlet Nozzle 874
Y Z Moment Applied to Suction Nozzle 875
z stiffness 430
y 429 Z-Axis Vertical 290, 845
Y Distance From Header Center to Nozzle Zero Length Expansion Joints 121
Face 874 ZPA (Reg. Guide 1.60/UBC - g's) <or> #
Y Distance from Nozzle Face to Header Time History Output Cases 684
Center 873
Y Distance to Discharge 865
Y Distance to Extraction Nozzle #1 866